ML20117K701
| ML20117K701 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Limerick  |
| Issue date: | 01/11/1985 |
| From: | PECO ENERGY CO., (FORMERLY PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC |
| To: | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML20117K696 | List: |
| References | |
| PROC-850111, NUDOCS 8505150550 | |
| Download: ML20117K701 (623) | |
Text
{{#Wiki_filter::, 1 - -- 3843117210 Paga 1 of 5 Revision 20 12/13/84 LI!!ERICK GENERATING STATION Q EMERGE!!CY PLAT! PROCEDURE INDEX ,y.
]- PROCEDURE 13U!!BER REV.
NO. TITLE DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST t BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEW EP-101 3 Classification of Emergencies 12/12/84 EP-102 6 Unusual Event Response 12/12/84 EP-103 Alert Response 12/12/84 ] 6 EP-104 6 Site Emergency Response 12/12/84 EP-105 6 Gene ral Emergency Response 12/12/84 f EP-106 2 Mritten Summary tiot i fica tion 12/12/84 1; EP-110 4 Personnel Assembly and 1 Accountability 12/12/84 li i EP-120 2 Site Emergency Coordinator 12/12/84
- EP-201 2 Technical Suppor t Center (TSC) Activation 12/12/84 EP-202 3 Operations Support Center 12/12/84 j EP-203 3 (OSC) Activation Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation
- j 12/13/84
!i Lt EP-208 4 Security Team 12/12/84 - 1 ] EP-210 3 Dose Assessment Team 12/12/84 - ^l
- EP-211 0 Field Survey Group 12/12/84
" EP-220 CANCELLED EP-221 CANCELLED m t ('.r ('WO A e. V, *.. ..f p' h EP-222 CANCELLED A N V" C A" EP-230 4 Chemistry Sampling and g, N. t, tg6'3 , Analysis Team e(Tt/12/84b EP-231 5 Operation of Post-
- yV1 9 Accident Sampling Systems
*.E
- d4 h b 4Sk,fj p$
.A gD
- l -
1 (PASS) 2/12/ - o.w.J y
- e. , , y EP-232 cat 7 CELLED
. . 'l Y h
k 8505150550 850111 1 PDR ADOCK 05000352
, F PDR y
i . - _ : . ., - ,... ._.. - . _ . . _ .. . , _ _ . . . , . - _ . ,
"j - Page 2 of 5 Revision 20 12/13/84 LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE IPDEX 1
PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST
'! tUMBER MO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVICt!
]I EP-233 4 Retrieving and Changing j Sample Filters and
. Cartridges from the ,
l Containment Leak Detector 1 During Emergencies 12/12/84 l EP-23 4 4 Obtaining Containment I Gas Samples from the Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies 12/12/84 EP-235 4 Obtaining Reactor Water Samples from Sample I Sinks Following l Accident Conditions 12/12/84 j EP-236 4 Obtaining Cooling Tower
+
Blowdown Line Water l Samples Following i Radioactive Liquid lI Release af ter Accident l . Conditions 12/12/84 i EP-237 4 Obtaining the Iodine / j Particulate and/or Gas Samples from the Nor th Vent Wide Range Gas Monitor (ITRGM) 12/12/84 EP-238 4 Obtaining Liquid Radwaste - Samples from Radwaste Sample Sink Following Accident Conditions 12/12/84 I EP-240 - CANCELLED f EP-241 5 Sample Preparation and l Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples 12/12/84 l EP-242 4 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly o Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine l Cartridges 12/12/84 EP-243 5 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly { Radioactive Gas Samples 12/12/84 ij EP-244 1 offsite Analysis of j High Activity Samples 12/12/84 a
- i '
F p . . l Page 3 of 5 : Revision 20 12/13/84
- j. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION 1 4 e 3
E!!ERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE INDEX PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST NUMBER NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEM l EP-250 2 Personnel Safety Team 12/12/84 EP-251 2 Plant Survey Group 12/12/84 , EP-2 5 2 - -3 Search and Rescue /First
) Aid Group 12/12/84
[ EP-253 0 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and . J Respiratory Protection 12/12/84 Group EP-254 2 Vehicle and Evacuee f Control Group 12/12/84 l
; EP-255 2 Vehicle Decontamination 12/12/84 EP-260 2 Fire and Damage j
Control Team 12/12/84 1 EP-261 2 Damace Repair Group 12/12/84 EP-272 3 Philadelphia Electric
- Company Officials
, Phone List 12/12/84 ! EP-273 3 Limerick Station ! Supervision call List 12/12/84 V [ EP-275 CANCELLED
- t. EP-276 4 Fire and Damage
[ Team Phone List 12/12/84 ! EP-277 5 Personnel Safety Team Phone List 12/12/84 _ i- EP-278 3 Security Team Phone
- k. List 12/12/84~
l ' EP-279 3 Emergency Operations [ Facility (EOF) Group p Phone List 12/12/84
- EP-280 4 Technical Support s Center Phone List 12/12/84 EP-202 3 Government and Emergency Management Agencies Phone List 12/12/84 l EP-284 3 Company Consultants 1 and Contractors l Phone List 12/12/04 EP-287 2 Nearby Public and *
, . Industrial Users of l Downstream Water 12/12/84 ,f - 1 I b s.--.~,----- --. -- . :-. .. . .-- , . .
~~~- -
Paga 4 of 5 Revision 20 12/13/84 LIMERICK GENERATII!G STATION EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE INDEX PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST HUMBER NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEU EP-291 4 Staffing Augmentation 12/12/84 EP-2 92 5 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Phone List 12/12/84 EP-294 4 Dose Assessment Team Phone List 12/12/84. ' EP- 301 1 Operating the Evacuation Alarm and River Warning System 12/12/84
. EP-303 3 Local Evacuation 12/12/84
- j. EP-304 3 Partial Plant Evacuation 12/12/84 I
i EP-305 3 Site Evacuation 12/12/84 EP-300 1 Evacuation of the Information Center 12/12/84 EP-307 2 Reception and Orientation ,; of Suroort Personnel 12/12/84 i EP-312 1 Radioactive Liquid l Release 12/12/84 EP-313 2 Distribution of Thyroid } Blocking Tablets 12/12/84 * ).' EP-314 0 Emergency Radiation j Exposure Guidelines and Controls 12/06/84 EP-315 2 Calculation of Offsite Doses During a Radiological Emergency Using RMMS in the Manual Mode 12/12/84 i EP-316 2 Cumulative Population 1 and Near Real-Time l Emergency Dose l Calculations for i Airborne Releases ,! Manual !!ethod 12/13/84 i EP-317 2 Determination of l ' Protective Action Recommendations 12/12/84 EP-310 1 Liquid Release Dose *
. Calculations Method for J Drinking Water 12/12/84
- i
)
' we y ee:Os +N ts W O*
- PW P - -- _ h o p pem .e s omrv.- 'so. , e e 4
(- Page 5 of 5 Revision 20 12/13/84 LI!!ERICK GENERATING STATION E!!ERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE INDEX PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST NUf!EER NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEt? EP-319 1 Fish Ingestion Pathway Dose Calculation 12/12/84 I EP-325 2 Use of Containment Dose Rates to Estimate Release Source Term 12/12/84 EP-330 3 Emergency Response Facility Habitability 12/12/84 1 EP-401 2 Entry for Emergency Repair and Operations 12/12/84 EP-410 2 Recovery Phase 1 Implementation 12/12/84 j EP-500 2 Review and Revision
- of Emergency Plan 12/12/84 -
3 D
~
i i l l l l l i i i i *
~
] :i -' 3gr4 j j g g {' l EP-I0l, Rev. 3 Page 1 of 20 VAW ! G/mla PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC CO!!PANY / / [ LI!!ERICK GENERATING STATION E!!ERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-101 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 1.0 PARTICIPANTS l 1.1 Shif t Superintendent, or designated alternate shall assume the role of Emergency Director and implement this procedure, until relieved. l 1.2 Station Superintendent or designated alternate shall relieve the Emergency Director, assume the role of Emergency Director, and continue implementing this procedure, if necessary. 2.0 ACTIONS-I!GIEDIATE l CAUTION: l IMPLE!!ENTATION OF THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT . CONSTITUTE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE EMERGENCY l l PLAN l l
. .- u CAUTION: N . '
.sN$..
THE JUDGEliENT OF THE E!!ERGENCY DIRECTOR IS' } VITAL Iti PROPER CONTROL OF Ap*1MERGENCY' AND TAKES E!!ERGENCY PRECEDENCE PLAN PROCEDURfy,y, - g-OVER ',GUIDAhCE. IN ,'THIS -(' n. , ( M < , s. ;. ,
. y,., .,
, , \t ,. I' ,
v a
- 0. ,g\
ef ~y q
$3 .
y - ]. ' ~ 3843116530 1 f l EP-101, Rev. 3 Page 2 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla l 2.1 Emergency Director shall: 2.1.1.1 Select categories related to station events or conditions. Face Number Hazards to Station Operation 6 Environmental 7 o Loss of Power 8
, Personnel Injury 9 i Fire 10 Radioactive Release 11 Evacuation of Control Room 12 Damage of Fuel 13
,I Instrument Failure 14 Scram Failure 15 ., Boundary Degradation /LOCA 16 1 Unusual Shutdown 18 j Loss of Hot or Cold Shutdown 19 i Capacity j Security 20 4 t 2.1.2 Beginning at the indicated page in Appendix EP-101, 1 review the Emergency Action Levels (EALS) for i categories selected. l l 2.1.3 Classify the event based on the selected category
; and EALS.
I
! 2.1.4 If the most severe events or conditions are j classified as an Unusual Event, implement EP-102,
- i " Unusual Event Response."
2.1.5 If the most severe events or conditions are classified as an Alert, implement EP-103, " Alert Response."
! 2.1.6 If the most severe events or conditions are
; classified as a Site Emergency, implement EP-104,
" Site Emergency Response."
2.1.7 If the most severe events or conditions are'
! classified as a General Emergencv, implement EP-105,
" General Emergency Response."
i l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP 3.1 If event is classified as Alert, Site Emergency, or General Emergency, the Emergency Director shall . t l i A A
3843116530
; l EP-101, Rav. 3
( Page 3 of 20
) VAW/ MPG /mla i
s 3.1.1 Periodically evaluate the event classification as listed on attached Appendix EP-101. Based upon L results of corrective action taken to recover from the emergency situation, escalate or de-escalate the emergency classification. (It is preferable, but not mandatory, to obtain concurrance from the Site Emergency Coordinator and Corporate Headquarters prior to classification reduction). The NRC and appropriate off-site authorities shall be informed of the decision to move from one l emergency class to the next. As appropriate, agencies or personnel listed in checkoff lists of f EPs 102, 103, 104, and 105 shall be notified within 15 minutes once the emergency level is declared. L i 3.1.2 Have a written summary sent to the NRC within eight j c hours of closeout or reductin of the emergency clasification in accordance with EP-106, Written Summary Notification. t' 3.1.3 When the emergency has been controlled and the power plant and auxiliaries have been placed in a safe ( shutdown condition, only then will a decision be t made as to whether a recovery phase is justified.
. Enter the recovery phase after the emergency or accident situation is considered no longer in effect, obtain the concurrence of the Site Emergency Coordinator, the Emergency Support officer at
{' Corporate Headquarters, and Federal and State Government Liaison is required per EP-410, Recovery Phase Implementation. The recovery phase is a departure from an emergency situation. The Site , Emergency coordinator and yourself should evaluate L plant operating conditions as well as the in-plant and out-of-plant radiological conditions when making N this decision. Notifications to the various individuals and agencies that the recovery phase has been implemented is the responsibility of the Site Emergency Coordinator. 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-101-1 Hazards to Station Operation 4.2 EP-101-2 Environmental h 4.3 EP-101-3 Loss of Power [ . 4.4 EP-101-4 Personnel Injury
1 - 3843116530 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Page 4 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla 4.5 EP-101-5 Fire 4.6 EP-101-6 Radioactive Release 4.7 EP-101-7 Evacuation of Control Room j 4.8 EP-101-8 Damage of Fuel j 4.9 EP-101-9 Instrument Failure 4.10 EP-101-10 Scram Failure 4.11 EP-101-11 Boundary Degradation /LOCA
! 4.12 EP-101-12 Unusual Shutdown 4.13 EP-101-13 Loss of Hot or Cold Shutdown Capacity i 4.14 EP-101-14 Security -
l 5.0 SUPPORTING IITFORMATION
.I t
1 5.1 Purpose i The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for classifying an event or condition into one of four emergency classifications as
.j- described in the Emergency Plan. Additionally this ,
1 procedure details the method to change from one
; emergency action level to another and to enter the recovery phase, if applicable. .i 5.2 Criteria For Use ii 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented whenever the Shift Superintendent becomes aware of conditions which meet or exceed the Emergency Action Levels in EP-101, Classification Tables.
- j 5.3 Special Equipment 2
None e Ii
,k
- y- - ,,e w -ee-= ,y--%-.. - - sr - e- + a---- - - - ---r--ev- g-m e 7 +-
$E43116530 l EP-101, Rav. 3 rj Page 5 of 20 'l VAW/ MPG /mla 5.4 References 5.4.1 Limerick Generating St'ation Emergency Plan
- 5.4.2 NUREG 0654 Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants 5.4.3 EP-102 Unusual Event Response 5.4.4 EP-103 Alert Response 5.4.5 EP-104 Site Emergency Response 5.4.6 EP-105 General Emergency Response f
5.4.7 EP-410 Recovery Phase Implementation e e l t I I c e 1
. . - _ . . . . - . _ . . . . g.,.,, __
a.
~j . . .
r.q $,-- 0043i.C300
]1 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-1 Page 6 of 20 <
.; VAW/ MPG /mla I
.i HAZARDS TO STATION OPERATION
, UNUSUAL EVEN"' ALERT i WHEN BOTH UNITS ARE IN COLD SHUTDOWN
- 1. Aircraft crash in or unusual 1. Aircraft crash or missile impact aircraft activity over the' on the Reactor Enclosure, Control site. Enclosure, Turbine Enclosure, Diesel Generator Enclosure or
- 2. Train derailment within the Spray Pond Pump House.
site boundary. 1
- 2. Known explosion damage affecting
} 3. Explosion within or near the plant operation.
?
site boundary. { 3. Toxic, flammable gases or chlorine
- 4. Toxic or flammable gas release detected in the Control Room 1' ~
within.or near the site as indicated by 'High boundary. Toxic Chemical Concentration' Alarm or ' Control Room Chlorine Isolation Initiated' Alarm on 00C881. t i i 4 i
.t SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY l NEEN EITHER UNIT IS NOT IN COLD -
SHUTDOWN -
-l 1. Aircraft crash or missile impact i on the Reactor Enclosure, Control i Enclosure, Turbine Enclosure, 'j Diesel Generator Enclosure or i
Spray Pond Pump House.
- 2. Known explosion damage affecting
., plant operation. .l 3. Toxic, flammable gases or
- . chlorine detected in the l
- Control Room as indicated by
- I . 'High Toxic Chemical Concentration' Alarm or ' Control Room Chlorine Isolation Initiated' Alarm on 00C881. -
i
- f y . ,.
. _ . _ _ _ , . _ . . . _ . . _ . _ , . ..._.m .., _ . . _ -.__ .._._ -. __. _ - _ . , , _ . . , _ _ _ _ + , . _ . _ _ _ , , , _ , , . _ _ _ . , . _ _ . _ . . , _
30431115535 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-2 Page 7 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla ENVIRONMENT 4 - UNUSUAL EVEN" ALERT
- 1. An actual earthquake detected 1. An actual earthquake detected by the Seismic Monitoring by the Seismic Monitoring System (00C693) at or below System (00C693) beyond the operating basis earthquake operating basis earthquake
(.075g). (.075g).
- 2. Tornado strikes the Reactor
- 2. A tornado is observed within or Enclosure, Turbine Enclosure, near site boundary. Spray Pond Pump House, Control Enclosure or Diesel Generator
- 3. A hurricane is expected to Enclosure.
be in the vicinity of the site. 3. Sustained high winds greater than 70 mph as indicated on OBC 699. 1 i t
! SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY I 1. Sustained high winds greater 1. Earthquake beyond the safe I than 90 mph as indicated on shutdown earthquake (.159) -
0BC699 if either unit is not or other natural disaster which in Cold shutdown. causes massive damage leading to other General Emergencies.
- 2. An actual earthquake detected by the seismic Monitoring System (00C693) beyond the safe shutdown earthquake (.15 9) if either unit is not in Cold Shutdown.
a l' if ' I n it g . . -- .- ._ f . . . -, . - , , . . . . .
nr- ,. O C 4 3 } ,! v# D O u l l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-3 ' Page 8 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla LOSS OF POWER , L. UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Loss of all off-site power or N/A loss of all on-site AC power for greater than 60 seconds.
i' r SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Loss of all on-site AC power N/A and loss of off-site power
- 2. Loss of all safety-related DC power as indicated by:
a) 250VDC MCC Out of Service alarms and b) 1PPAl D3 Distribution Panel undervoltage alarms
'i O
s
. ,. ~ , ..y,,e -._,-.----.-%.y,.7-,-.*-=*-------- ~,- - - - - i-- **-~;,--****--.=~ * - ~ ~ - -
y-..-.- , _ , . . ..
- l . .
t .- . , y = a e ,= e =e ? l 35401!OOJJ l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-4 Page 9 of 20 h PERSONNEL INJURY jr m y UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT Y 1. Transportation of contaminated
' N/A injured individual from site A,
to off-site hospital. l4 f
.k.
SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY N/A N/A 0 l
* :--~ ~ ,37 .; . 3.p :,,: -~ ~ ~ + - - - - - - - - - ~ ~ , - --~~~.~~ - --
- - - ~ ~ - ~ ' ~~r~--
843116530
-l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-5 Page 10 of 20 i
VAM/!!PG/mla FIRE k i f UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT 1 4 1. Fires involving permanent plant 1. Fire which could make an structures within the protected ECCS inop as indicated by Il.~ area lasting 10 minutes or more observation. after initial attempts to extinguish it. { SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL E!CRGENCY
- 1. Fire which makes an ECCS 1. Fire which causes massive inop and requires or causes damage leading to other immediate plant shutdown as General Emergencies.
indicated by observation. e
~~yyne n - - - . - - - - - - -r, . ~ ~ *- ~ - - + - - - - ~ ~ - - -
3843116530 EP-101, Rev. 3 C Appendix EP-101-6 (g RADIOACTIVE RELEASE Page 11 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla l
$ 1 4
UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Report indicates liquid 1. Radiological effluents release
. effluent release exceeds greater than 0.5 mR/hr at site H technical specification boundary as indicated by an un-
-3.11.1.1 or 3.11.1.2. controllable release for greater than 20 minutes with:
- 2. Report indicates gaseous a) North stack effluent radiation effluent release exceeds monitor exceeds 1.0N2 uCi/cc or technical specification 3.11.2.1 or 3.11.2.2 or b) South stack effluent radiation 3.11.2.3 monitor exceeds 1.2N2 uCi/cc.
a h - 11 1. 1-SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Radiological effluent release 1. Radiological effluent release greater than 50 mR/hr at site greater than 500 mR/hr at site 9{
; boundary as indicated by boundary as indicated by an -
an uncontrollable release for uncontrollable release for y greater than 20 minutes with: greater than 20 minutes with: a) North stack effluent radiation a) North stack effluent radiation
} monitor exceeds 1.0 uCi/cc. monitor exceeds 10 uCi/ce, d
- 2. Projected whole body dose 2. Projected whole body dose greater than .1 rem or thyroid greater than 1 Rem or thyroid dose greater than .5 Rem at or dose greater than 5 Rem at or beyond the site boundary over beyond,the site boundary over course of the event utilizing course of the event utilizing RMMS procedure calculating RMMS procedure calculating offsite doses. offsite doses.
F j l l 1.
,m. .n - ,- , ,- -. ,-. _ + -
l 3843116530 EP-101, Rev. ~3 Appendix EP-101-7 Page 12 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla EVACUATION OF COMTROL ROOM d t UNUSUAL EVEN"' ALERT f' N/A 1. Evacuation of Control Room anticipated or required with control establish'ed at remote shutdown panel.
?
i
- i i
i i
- 1 .
SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY _
- l. Evacuation of Contol Room N/A
} and control of shutdown I systems not established from I remote shutdown panel in } 15 minutes.
i 1 1 t T
}
i d i I
, .~. g - .; ,y v -, c - ,- . - ~.~ .
- --ym -,.~..._-.7~. _ _ %. ,.
_ w- - m -.
, q l
l
,._l.,_ .! D O O .J 3040 EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-8 ,
Page 13 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla DAMAGE OF FUEL I UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Steam Jet Air Ejector Discharge 1. Steam Jet Air Ejector Discharge radiation monitor exceeds radiation monitor exceeds 2.1P4 mR/hr. 2.lP5 mR/hr
- 2. Steam Jet Air Ejector Discharge 2. I-131 dose equivalent in the
( radiation monitor has an un- reactor coolant exceeds 300 uCi/g expected increase of 4000 mR/hr from sample and main steam over 30 minutes. line high-high radiation with resultant scram. '
- 3. I-131 dose equivalent in the 3. Spent fuel damage resulting in a reactor coolant exceeds refueling floor area ventilation 0.2 uCi/g from sample exhaust monitor alarm.
analysis. j 4. Containment Post LOCA Radiation j Monitors greater than 1P2 R/hr. l 1 d 1 SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY j- 1. Major damage to spent fuel: 1. Containment Post LOCA Radiation
- g Monitors greater than IP4 R/hr.
a) Observation of major damage to spent fuel or . b) Water loss below fuel level in spent fuel pool.
- 2. Containment Post LOCA Radiation Monitors greater than 1P3 R/hr.
l s c 'l lI r
' VT% Yr
?,r ~ '
. q?* V KW 77. . '".~. .~~' y,'." "~ - -
~~~~~~"''.~*~K,*T~
a
-, c ,-
OC40},lOOJV f ,- EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-9 Page 14 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla INSTRUMENT FAILURE UNUSUAL EVEN'" ALERT
- 1. Complete loss of all Main N/A Control Room communication equipment.
- 2. Significant loss of assessment capability in the Main Control Room as indicated by:
a) Loss of all flow or all ' radiation monitors for the North, South stacks or radwaste discharge while a release is in progress. 4 SITE EMERGENCY, , GENERAL EMERGENCY N/A N/A 1 l i 1 O
- ~17 ~ , .,..; ~,mv3.
s
--. ,~~. ,-,->~-- - . - - - - - - - ~ ~ - , ~ ~ ~ - - - - ~ - - , - - _,- - ~ ;n.
3843116530 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-10 Page 15 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla SCRAM FAILURE UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT N/A 1. Failure of the Reactor protection system to automatically initiate and complete a scram and Scram fails to bring Reactor suberitical as indicated by APRM's greater than 4%, one minute after scram initiates. SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EriERGENCY _
- l. Transient requiring standby 1. Transient requiring standby -
liquid control system to liquid control system to initiate with failure to initiate with failure to scram. Failure to Scram scram and Reactor does, not is indicated by APRM'S become sub-critical. As greater than 4% one indicated by APRM's greater minute after a scram than 41 10 minutes after initiates. scram initiates. y l t . w _- -. ... . g
_e __ _ 3c43116530 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-ll Page 16 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla BOUNDARY DEGRADATION /LOCA PAGE 1 of 2 UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Failure of a main steam relief 1. Scram with small leak as ,
valve or ADS valve to close indicated by: ' following reduction of a) Scram alarm and applicable pressure. b) Reactor level less than -129" As indicated by: and a) SRV 1 head vent valve leaking c) Containment pressure greater alarm on 10C826 (20C826) of than 1.68 psig and pressure ' is increasing. ~ b) Acoustic monitor valve 2. Reactor coolant leak rate exceeds position indication and 60 gpm total leakage averaged (safety relief valve open over any 24 hour period as alarm on 10C826 (20C826) indicate by surveillance test report. q- c) Increase in suppression pool temperature above 95 and d) Reactor pressure below 3. High airborne contamination in the 1130 psig Reactor Enclosure as indicated by: a) Reactor Enclosure vent exhaust
- 2. Reactor coolant leak rate RAD monitor A/B or C/D 1 exceeds 30 gpm total Hi-Hi ALARM on 10C800 (20C800) of l leakage average over any -
hour period as indicated b) 1000 fold increase of airborne by surveillance test radiation in a major area of report. the reactor enclosure as determined by health physics. U . l [ _ _ . _. , _ . _ , - . . .m f ,. _ - . _ . -
- 1 i 3843116530
_l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-ll Page 17 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla BOUNDARY DEGRADATION /LOCA
- PAGE 2 of 2 SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Scram with LOCA as 1. Scram with LOCA & no ECCS as indicated by: indicated by:
a) Scram alarm an'd a) Scram alarm and b) Reactor level less than -129" b) Reactor level less than -129" and and c) Containment pressure greater c) Failure to bring Reactor level than 10 psig above -129" af ter 3 minutes and Id d) Containment pressure greater than 20 psig
- 2. Main steam line break outside 2. Scram with LOCA & Containment containment without-isolation Failure as indicated by:
as indicated by: a) Scram with Reactor level less than-129" and a) High Main Steam Line Flow (108.7 psid) and b) Reactor Enclosure Vent Exhaust Rad Monitor A/B or C/D Hi-Hi alarm on 10C800 (20C800) b) High Steam Tunnel Temp (165 deg F) and , 3 c) Main Steam Line Low Pressure (756 psig) h 1
.,s.-, 7, ...%...ey,., .,. ,
, .. . ,, . _ , , , . , .,,,,y-
..7...- . , - . . .
~ '
3E43116530 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-12 Page 18 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla UNUSUAL SHUTDOWN UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT ~
- 1. Controlled shutdown due to N/A failure to meet limiting condition of operation.
- 2. Shutdown other than normal controlled shutdown and for the purpose of placing the plant in a safer cordition.
- 3. Cooldown rate exceeds technical specification limits.
e SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY N/A N/A O 4
'l f
t s
- (
-l 1 .
- -., .n ..,,...-.,n . - . . - - - . - -
3843116530 EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-13 Page 19 of 20 VAW/tiPG/mla LOSS OF HOT OR COLD SHUTDOWN CAPABILITY UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT N/A 1. Complete loss of any function needed for plant Cold Shutdown and main condenser unavailable as indicated by: a) Loss of RHRSW o b) Loss of shutdown cooling. l '1 l SITE E!!ERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Complete loss of any function 1) Shutdown occurs but Decay
] needed to maintain the plant in Hot Shutdown if Hot Shutdown Heat Removal Systems not available as indicated by: - condition is required as indicated by: a) Reactor operating and a) HPCI and RCIC not available el scram occurs and I b) All Reactor vessel relief b) RHR shutdown cooling i valves inoperable og not available and c) Loss of Suppression Pool c) All SRV's INOP and { cooling.
! d) HPCI and RCIC not I available t
e i l P' #' 9' 4 "*2* """Y " * " " " * ~ ' ' F " '*- *
, g
3843116530 l EP-101, Rev. 3 Appendix EP-101-13
. Page 20 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla SECURITY UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Security threat or attempted 1. Ongoing security compromise entry or attempted sabotage.
Event 1 - Sabotage or Bomb Threat Event 2 - Intrusion and Attack Threat Event 7 - Suspected Intrusion Event 8 - Actual Intrusion Event 9 - Suspected Bomb or Sabotage Device Discovered Event 15 - Guard Strike Event 16 - Onsite Hostage Situation i SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Imminent loss of physical 1. Loss of physical control of control of the plant. the facility. Escalation of Escalation of Event 8- Event 8 - Actual Instrusion
. Actual Intrusion or Event or Event 9 - Suspected Bomb 4
9 - Suspected Bomb or or Sabotage Device Discovered Sabotage Device Dis- depending on location and covered depending on size of device and radio-
- location and size of logical consequences.
device and radiological c onsequences.
- 1 I!
u l !i 9 y eeper-
.-w*_. ~ , =
f pw i ts ==== ' te e <-'8- *** ~
'# M
- NE
~ * '
3843116540 l EP-102, Rev. 6 Page 1 of 8 VAW MPG /rgs 4, PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC" COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
. EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE 3 l EP-102 UNUSUAL EVENT RESPONSE , i 1.0 PARTICIPANTS
- l .
1.1 Shif t Su'Derintendent or designated alternate shall assume tse role of Emergency Director and implement this procedure, until relieved. 1.2 . Station Superintendent or designated alternate shall relieve the Emergency Director, assume the role of Emergency Director, and continue implementing this procedure, if necessary.
.I d
- i .
2.O ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE . l 2.1 Emergency Director shall:
.,j 2.1.1 Verify the emergency classification as determined in b EP-101, Classification of Emergencies unless determination has just been made. ]
j 2.1.2 Complete Appendix EP-102-1, Unusual Event ~ Notification Message. Direct a communicator to - complete notification of the appropriate parties in y Appendix EP-102-3, Unusual Event Phone List within 15 minutes. 2.1.3 II Directtheevacuationofaffectedareas,stfs)i. necessary. Refer to the following procedure . EP-303 Local Evacuation fa k~ j 2.1.4 Contact the Station SuperAntendent '-l'f_ nEcessary, and *:he Shift TechnicaVAdvisor, inform them of t.bes
~
situation. Q; * . \; L d 2.1.5 For samples, contact the Shift Chem ry [ctEnTeian. d If necessary, implement EP-230, Ch'emistry SEm'pling
! and Analysis Team. T
- 2. go@in:bashulve7s,Tr ch :re iniury,
- p. ,
ccontact al Sh tCHP'yect)nician.N GIf Mcessary, i p, . "j [implempng EP ,25g,'jPerapn eQSaf ty jeam. (; {
- M o L uca ' .
.m.. -. _-_ __ . --__..._.__-..,._,,c.,..~ -.n...., .; , . ,
. .. ~ . . ~ _ .- __
J . 3843116540 l EP-102, Rav. 6 Page 2 of 8 VAW/ MPG /rgs
+
2.1.7 For fire / damage repair, contact the Maintenance Shift Assistance Foreman. If necessary, to implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team and/or EP-261, Damage Repair Group. 2.1.8 For a liould release, . implement EP-312, Radioactive Liquid Release, if required.- - 2.1.9 For security matters, implement EP-208, Security Team, if required. 2.1.10 For airborne releases, contact Shift Technical . Advisor. If necessary, implement EP-210, Dose Assessment Team. 3.0 AgTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Emergency Director shall: 3.1.1 Periodically reevaluate the event classification in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, and escalate or de-escalate the classification, as necessary. i 3.1.2 If classification is de-escalated fill out Appendix EP-102-2, Unusual Event De-Escalation Message and give it to the communicator and direct the . communicator to perform notification of the
- 3 appropriate parties listed in Appendix EP-102-3, Unusual Event Phone List.
3.1.3 Obtain the following information as necessary to i formulate further actions:
- I A. Sample analysis from Shift Chemistry Technician or Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader.
) B. In-plant surveys or status of contaminated injury J from Shift HP Technician or Personnel Safety Team
- j Leader.
C. Fire / Damage Repair status from the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader. is D. Airborne releases calculation results from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose Assessment Team Leader. E. Notification Results from Communicator. 1 [ <\ \ l- . I t,
.. _, *[ ~
EE.135.-
--um- ,inasi t . .
3843116540 l EP-102, Rev. 6 l '3 Page 3 of 8 VAW/ MPG /rgs ?j j
- d 3.1.4 Determine which support personnel are necessary
} for emergency functions and direct the Shif t j clerk to contact those personnel. If Shift Clerk
.l- is not available, this function shall be assigned to an available individual. d
- , 3.2 Communicator shall:
d j 3.2.1 Inform Emergency Director when appropriate 'j notifications have been made and submit completed copy of Appendix EP-102-3, Unusual Event Phone List, for Emergency Director's Signature. l$ 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-102-1 Unusual Event Notification Message 4.2 EP-102-2 Unusual Event De-Escalation Message 4.3 EP-102-3 Unusual Event Phone List 1 ii
! l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION , l 5.1 Purpose t- ! The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for site response to an Unusual Event. *
'l 5.2 Criteria for Use
! 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when an event i "
has been classified as an Unusual Event per EP-l 101, Classification of Emergencies, and EP-101 j has been completed.
+
5.3 Special Equipment None a i 4 o 4
-4 4
~ ' '
_L _2;R W X.l,f~:~[ C ]_TM ??T7?B.'XT"W T .?_
' ~
3843116540 l EP-102, Rav. 6 -l Page 4 of 8 't VAW/ MPG /rgs i 1 l 5.4 ' References 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 NUREG-0654, Criteria For Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. 5.4.3 EP-303 Local Evacuation 5.4.4 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies )" 5.4.5 EP-210 Dose Assessment Team 5.4.6 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team 1 j 5.4.7 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team j . 5.4.8 'EP-260 Fire and Damage Team t .; 5.4.9 EP-261 Damage Repair Group 5.4.10* EP-312 Radi'oactive Liquid Release i 5.4.11 EP-208 Security Team l 9 I I 1 I l 4 i i 1 t 1 i 4 I 9 9 I I i'
.. 4 7.;.,.=7 ,~:-e ,.-= ; = . =w w ,- - zu -- --
.u .-1 4
3E4311654d l EP-102, Rev. 6 Page 5 of 8 VAW/ MPG /rgs APPEMDIX EP-102-1
^
UNUSUAL EVENT NOTIFICATION MESSAGE MESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. This is the Limerick Generating Station calling to report an Unusual Event. My name is , telephone
. Limerick Generating Station is reporting an Unusual Event declared at Unit No. . Time and date of
{ . j Unusual Event classification are e 4 (24 Hr Clock Time) (Date) The basic problem is .
'l l'
l There (has been) (has not been) an (airborne) (liquid) radioactive l release from the plant. The plant status is (stable) (improving) . l (degrading) (not known) . There is no protective action recommended. l This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. ll fl . a i,t I
- l 1
H n c===ygy;=7 zw=~.n 777 .q:z7m,r c:m_ v::= T 7 : m - ; ~;; ___ ;; m y 3 r3; y _
., c 'p in e .
. . du tO I ,l C D -i U l EP-102, R2v. 6 l Page 6 of 8 F
VAW/fiPG/rgs i: h; l APPENDIX EP-102-2 P : k, l UNUSUAL-EVENT DE-ESCALATION MESSAGE I t
?
l P.ESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. i t l This is Limerick Generating Station calling to de-escalate an s l Unusual Event. Please connect me with the appropriate authority. 5 l This is Limeric!: Generating Station calling to report the l l termination of an Unusual Event. !!y name is . l Time and date are . This (is) (is not) a drill. A i This (1s) (1s not) a er111. I' 1. I b i e i e i l O k 9 b,~m;ne;7 ,r=wn;gn=w ,:.xm =- . - - . - - -~ - -
'i 38416540 j l EP-102, Rev. 6 ]
Page 7 of 8 VAW/ MPG /rgs 1 1 A P PI'llD I X EP-102-3 {; j UNUSUAL CVENT PilONE LIST 1 Time Initiated ,s \ . - h* Personnel / Agency To de Notified Phone Number Timeh Person Responding
- a. Station Superintendent ilome
., G. M. Leitch Office b
<! k
. .. r i
Alternate llome ghkw ; i J. F. Franz Office a A >_,_
- b. Load Dispatcher Office l c. Montgomery County Office of Emer. Preparedness and N, x ,
M al Services
- d. Pennsylvania Emergency ~,
Mana ment A enc
- e. Pennsylvania Bureau of Mg,f
/ Radiation Protection , k l
Ilarrisburg, PA 1: _ t 5
, f. Manager - Public Information Ilome l [ Ronald Ila r pe r Office 1 s ll' '
- g. Director - Emergency llome
; Pr e pa r ed n e ss Office Roberta Kankus Ij 's __
e
A. 384~'16540
! - EP-102, Rev. 6 l
~ Page 8 of b VAW/11PC/rgs
# APPEtIDIX EP-102-3
$ - UNUSUAI, EVEllT PIIOrlE I,IST i
[i; yime Initiated 1 't ! Personnel / Agency To De tiotified Phone ilumber Time Person Responding lE
\ -'
ll h. NRC Operations Center
- i Dethesda, MD j '
s Rf3:'.4
..-: _:9
- 0, . :cm a ! gik. * -
F, As-a
S lj *Ferson contacting NRC must be j I,1 censed rator
'[ n
'.N ls As encies to be contacted after ll tt e above personnel / agencies have '
l! been notifed i ri '.
\
l{ i. Berks County Emergency - ' Han ment A enc -- l
\ < '%
h j. Chester County Emergency _ Services Completed By: 'ime/Date , h
~
fled By: 9: E!!ERGENCY DIRECTOR t . l 1 ll 1
-P-
3843116550 l EP-103, R3v. 6 Pcga 1 of 14 VAW/ /rgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY ' LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
} EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE L
EP-103 ALERT RESPONSE 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 shift Suoerintendent or designated alternate shall assume the role of Emergency Director and implement this procedure, until relieved. j 1.2 Station Superintendent or designated alternate shall 3 l report to the Technical Support Center or Control 1 Room, relieve the Emergency Director, assume the role i of Emergency Director and continue implementing this procedure, if necessary. i 3
, 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Emergency Director shall:
1" 2.1.1 Verify the Emergency Classification as determined in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, unless
; determination has just been made.
2.1.2 Fill out appendix EP-103-1 Alert Notification Message and give it to the communicator. , I' 2.1.3 Direct the communicator to complete notification of the appropriate parties as specified in Appendix EP-103-4, Alert Phone List (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-103-5, Alert Phone List (Escalati.on or De-escalation) within 15 minutes. 4 \. *. p '* \, \,,' [. + THE COMMUNICATOR SHALL MAN THE NRC' RED TELEPHONE ON A CONTINUOUS DASIS UNTIL THE N M DISCONNECTS. IF THE j COMMUNICATOR IS REQUIRED FOlt D ~ NT. OPERATIONS RELATED TO THE "E 1 CE FOR SEC IN 29R 3 HO r FROM THE NRC@
.i
- gn 5% C6 NG S' '
V;. , p f's .. 2 $ at hp? 2.], . n E'a d !. f n pdti h , , , hs} Ski,ft a Ad r nform th of -s tuation. 3
=%
4 k,... No 7 4 .
- m. . _ _ , _
.w j
3E53116556 EP-103, Rav. 6 Pcge 2 of 14 VAW/ MPG /rgs 2.1.5 Direct the Information Center Staff 'I to implement EP-306, Evacuation of . . Center. Inform the Staff of the wind direction if there is an airborne release. 2.1.6 If there is a radiological release, implement EP-305, Site Evaluation. 2.1.7 If there has not been a radiological release, A. Evacuate all construction rso el by contacting Bechtel Safety Direct them to call for a " Total Project E uation" in accordance with Bechtel proce res. Inform them of nature of hazard.
- -y B. Contac* v Construction Security (, "'Off-Hours .and inform them that a To* _
Projec E cuation of Bechtel Construction personnel is being implemented. THIS WILL CALL FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF PERSONNEL AT TH2 UPPER PARKING LOT. IF IT IS DESIRED THAT THEY LEAVE THE SITE, INFORM BECHTEL COMMAND POSTS AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT. C. Select the type of accountability desired for personnel in the protected area and implement the required actions below:
- 1. Emergency Assembly Without Accountability
-Make the following announcement .
"THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A D RI LL. DESIGNATED i
EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED EMERGENCY RESPONSE FACILITIES OR ASSEMBLY AREA. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL STAND BY FOR FURTHER ANNOUNCEMENT. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL."
- 2. Emergency Assembly With Accountability A. Contact the Security Team Leader.
Inform him of the selected exist point (s ) , that emergency assembly with accountability is going to be implemented, and to activate the Securit
- g (EP-208) and to p o p ennel accountability in m a r ce tkith EP-110, Personnel 781 ,
, t m and Accountability.
s kkb.5
< ,h '
- c Q' s.
4g e
* - + -
h .. -.m._ mm.,.- -
- . . ~ .-.,..,..e._ , .
- f. .
3S43116550 l EP-103, Rev. 6 Page 3 of 14 VAW/ MPG /rgs t - t i . B. nt onstructi3n Security I Pand inform l them that personn aving Unit 1 r will be reassembling at the h Personnel Processing Center (PPC).
"THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL, THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED EMERGENCY RESPONSE FACILITIES OR ASSEMBLY AREA. ALL OTHER UNIT ONE PERSONNEL LEAVE THE PROTECTED AREA IMMEDIATELY AND REASSEMBLE AT THE PERSONNEL l PROCESSING CENTER. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRTLL. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL."
I 2.1.8 For off-hours, direct the Shift Clerk to activiate i the call list using EP-291, Staffing Augmentation. If Shift Clerk is not available, this function chall be assigned to any available individual. 2.1.9 Direct the activation of the Technical Support Center in accordance with EP-201, Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation. l 2.1.10 If necessary, activate the Emergency Operations
}
Facility in accordance with EP-203, Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation. 2.1.11 Assign an Operations Support Center Coordinator (PO) , to direct available personnel to report to the Operations Support Center on 269' Elev. Turbine Bldg. and to activate it in accordance with EP-202, Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation. 2.1.12 For samoles, direct the Shift Chemistry Te c' ' or Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Lem(er
- implement EP-230, Chemistry Sampling And@Ana '
is Team. gt 2.1.13 For in-clant surveys, dirsceAafS ff% l ician or Personnel Safety Team . d' o~ lem t EP-250, Personnel Safety Team. j 2.1.14 For field survd$1,iTTg 1whWp re ase of gaseous radioac tiveGha ti rial ecurred or is suspected, l direct the l Ddse nt Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose ss nt Team. c .-.-_. , , _ m._ m m - - -e =m_m .__, , -
~
l* EP-103, Rav. 6 Page 4 of 14 VAW/ MPG /rgs 2.1.15 For a release at o'r greater than the Alert level in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, direct the Dose Assesment Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose i Assessment Team. ) 0 2.1.16 on an interim bases, direct the Shif t Technical Advisor to perform dose projections using EP-316, Cumulative Population Dose Calculations For Airborne l Releases - Manual Method or EP-315 Calculations of Offsite Doses during a radiological Emergency using RMMS in the manual mode and to suggest Protective Action Recommendations per EP-317. 2.1.17 For fire / damage repair direct the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader to , implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team and/or EP-261, Damage Repair Group. 2.1.18 For a liquid release, implement'EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release, if required. 2.1.19 For Security matterst contact Security Shift Supervision and direct implementation of EP-208, q Security Team unless previously done. 9 M ' 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Emergency Director shall: 3.1.1 Verify that the Technical Support Center, the Emergency Operations Facility (if necessary) and~the Operations Support Center have been activated. 3.1.2 Periodically evaluate the event cla'ssification in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies and maintain, escalate or de-escalate the classification, as necessary. 3.1.3 If c1assification is de-escalated, fill out Appendix ! EP-103-3, Alert De-Escalation Notification Message and give it to the communicator and direct the communicator to perform notification of the appropriate parties listed in Appendix EP-103-5, Alert Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation). 3.1.4 Obtain the following information as necessary to j formulate further actions: m -nyv. .;. c ~~~~-~ = = , ~ ~ -
-- 3-- 3;- ;_- -- . ; 3 7 yy-= _ _ _
E' ' 3843116550
-{ EP-103, Rav. 6 Pcge 5 of 14 VAW/ MPG /rgs I
A. Security status from Security Team Leader B. Sample analysis from Shift Chemistry Technician or Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader C. In-plant surveys from Shift HP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader D. Field surveys from Dose Assessment Team Leader r E. Dose projections and protective action recommendations from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose Assessment Team Leader F., Fire / damage repair status from the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader G. Notification results from Communicator 3.1.5 . Determine which additional support personnel are l necessary for emergency functions and direct the i Shif t Clerk or other assigned communicator in TSC to
.j contact those personnel.
I q 3.1.6 Provide site personnel with public address (PA) 2 announcements for any major changes in plant i emergency status, such as changing emergency action
] levels and evacuations.
3.1.7 Evaluate the need and order evacuation of effected areas as necessary. Refer to the following procedures: EP-303 Local Evacuation, EP-304 Partial , Plant Evacuation, EP-305 Site Evacuation. 3.2 The Communicator shall: 3.2.1 Inform Emergency Director when appropriate Notifications have been made and submit completed copy of Appendix EP-103-4 Alert Phone List (Initial-Notification) or Appendix EP-103-5 Alert Phone List (Escalation or De-Escalation) for Emergency Director's Signature. 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-101-1 Alert Notification Message 4.2 EP-103-2 Emergency Exposure Guidelines 4.3 EP-103-3 Alert De-Escalation Notification Message
-- - - ,,.- ~ ..,-- . .m-- - _ ,
a.-..---- . . . .- . . , . , .- , _ . _ _ _
~
3843116550 l EP-103, Rev. 6 Page 6 of 14 VAW/ MPG /rgs 4.4 EP-103-4 Alert Phone List (Initial Notification) 4.5 EP-103-5 Alert Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation) l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for site response to an Alert. 5.2 Criteria For Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when an event has been classified as an Alert per EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, and EP-101 has been
, completed.
5.3 Special Equipment None 5.4 References 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and .
, Prepardness in Support of Nuclear Power Plant.
5.4.3 EP-303 Local Evacuation 5.4.4 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies 5.4.5 EP-304 Partial Plant Evacuation (. 5.4.6 EP-305 Site Evacuation 5.4.7 EP-306 Evacuation of the Information Center 5.4.8 EP-291 Staffing Augmentation
~
5.4.9 EP-201 Technical Support Center (TSC) Activiation 5.4.10 EP-202 Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation 5.4.11 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)
- , Activation -
/
~-.,v- . ->
. :~ -
- n. s ~ wm - ,- -- ,- :-- y--e-n --- - - -~-
- ;-- ---~~- ------e
I ' 3843116550 g ~[ EP-103, Rsv. 6 Paga 7 of 14 VAW/ MPG /rgs 5.4.12 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action . Recommendations
. 5.4.13 EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for Airborne Release - Manual Method 5.4.14 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability 5.4.15 EP-208 Security Team 5.4.16 EP-210 Dose Assessment Team a
5.4.17 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team 1 5.4.18 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team 5.4.19 EP-260 Fire and Damage Team 5.4.20 EP-261 Damage Repair Group
- 5.4.21 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release 1
l 5.4.22 EP-315 Calculations of offsite doses during a Radiological Emergency using RMMS in the manual mode 1 !i H 1 u . 1 i
, , , .g . .;, -. , - -
7-
3843116550 I- l EP-103, Rav. 6 Page 8 of 14 VAM/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-103-1 ALERT NOTIFICATION !!ESSAGE l MESSAGE: This * (is) (is not)
- a drill. This * (is) (is l not)
- l drill. This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report an Alert.
L l My name is , telephone . Limerick Generating 5 l Station is reporting an Alert declared at Unit No. . Time and date of Alert classification are , . The basic (24 hr. clock time) (da te) problem is . There * (has been) (has not been)* i l an * (airborne) (liquid)
- radioactive release f rom the plant. The plant r, l ctatus is * (stable) (improving) (degrading) (not known)*. There is no l protective action recommended. This * (is) (is not)
- a drill. This * (is)
I l (is not)* a drill. e _.. ,, _ _ ,._ .,_ .~ .;_.,,7._, .;_..._ ,. , _ _, . z..
~
~
384ali6anu. l EP-103, Rav. 6 Page 9 of 14 VAW/l!PG/rgs APPENDIX hP-103-2
, Emercency Exeosure Guidelines s-Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose g
- 1. Life Saving and Reduction of Injury 75 PIM* 375 RJ:!! Emergency **
Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an Emergency 25 RE!!* 125 RE!: Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health and Safety of the Public 5 PIM 25 RE!! Emergency **
Director
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Activities limits limits Emergency Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1 .
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis t
f G W .'79,*'***3' *3'*7"* %
. e-
*{ ',1* . ***I **
*7* ** 'T" . '- "-
3843116550 l EP- 10 3, Rev. 6 Page 10 of 14 VAU/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-103-3 ,
, l ALERT DE-ESCALATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGE lITESSAGE: *This (is) ~is
( not)* a drill. This * (is) (is not)
- a drill.
l This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report a change in l cmergency classification. The Alert has been * (de-escalated to an l Unusual Event) (Termina ted ) * . l Time and date are , . l (24 Hr Clock Time) (Date) e, . l The plant status is * (stable) (improving)*. My name is . l This * (is) (is not)* a drill. This *(is) (is not)* a drill. t k p!
- t o
l I e
.; < i: T l'K ;f y . :[ p r r: q g 7 T *- *- ~ :;, ~ >. e - - ~ "
. 2- ~
'f~! j { cj V i ((tgggi ge l EP-lea, Rev. 6 Page 11 of 14 l
l
; VAll/t1PG/ r gs
#~ - APPErlDI X EP-103-3
,' AI,ERT P!!Offi: I. I ST Time Initlated ( I r1ITI AI, IJOT I F I CAT I Off)
Personnel / Agency To fle flot if ied Phone riumbe r -~ Time l Person Responding
- a. Station Superintendent ilome G. M. I,eitch Office
( Alternate llome t J. F. Franz Office --
- b. 1,oad Dispatcher Office -
W- ~ 7 m { j c. , Montgomery County Office of Emer 1 Preparedness and tiedical Services , 1
- d. PennsyIvanla Emergency
____ Manas mpfL_
- e. Pennsylvania Bureau of Radlation Protection llatrisburg, PA , ,
- f. Planager - Public Information llome .
Ronald Ila r pe r Office N, f
- g. Director - Emergency llome Preparedness Office Roberta Kankus '
s
. _ . . . . . . - - . . . - . ~ . - .
. -- -= = . = - --. = - - - - -
- - u = -- = : -- - --' - - - - -
=
1 L 31F 1 16 5 '30. r l l EP-io3, Rev. 6 I Page 12 of 14 VAW/f1PG/rgs ' APPEtIDIX EP-103-3 AI.ERT PilOrlE I.IST ! % Time Initiated (ItIITI AI, ilOTIFICATIOti)
- . t Personnel / Agency To Be Notified Phone ilumber ) Time Person Responding j' I
- h. NRC Operations Center
- Bethesda, MD f l
[ hi
~~
Make this call last and remain on telephone until flRC disconnects , II !'
- Person contacting NRC must be Licensed O rator , , ,i.
"~
lj W' d ,! i Agencies to be contacted after i the above personnel / agencies have 6 p been notifed \w_ [ l' 1. ll
- 1. Berks County Emergency fian ment
) '
\. - j.'Chester County Emergency Services
'. ~
.t Completed By: Time /Date !!
Verified Dy: L. EMERGENCY DIRECTOR I l. i t m . I
- , - . . . . - - - - - - , - - - - - - - - _ , , - - . - - - - . .-----,,n - _-, _.-- _ ___ , . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ , - - _ - _ _ _ . - __ _ _ _ . .- - _ . . _ _ . . . _ _ , , - - . - - - - , , _ , . , - -
- . . . _ . . - . . . . . . . . - - . - - . . . . - - . - - . . . . . . .. . - - . - - - . ~ -
l EP-lu3, nev. 6 Page 13 of 14 VAW/flPG/rgs , , l; I l APPE!! DIX EP-103-5 j . AI.ERT PilOrlE I.IST ime Initiated (ESCAI.ATIOli Oil DE-ESCAI.ATIOti) Personnel / Agency To De Notified Phone ilumber Tlmg Person Responding l a. Station Superintendent Ilome \ s l G. H. Leitch Office '. Alternate Ilome J. F. Franz Office .
- b. Load Dispatcher Office ,
- c. Pennsylvania Bureau of en Radiation Protection -
l Ilar r isbu rg , PA .
- c.
i :. [
- d. NRC Operations Center *
~nm.y i
Bethesda, MD w l c ~-- 1 m u f k l Make this call last and remain g on telephone until NRC disconnects 5
- Person contacting flRC must be
- .icensed rator ;
9
i 384 'l6SSO '
) l EP-lu3, Rev. 6.
I ' Page 14 of 14 1 VAW/ MPG /rgs f 1 i APPEtIDIX EP-103-5
, AI,ERT PIIO!!E I.IST j Time Initiated (ESCAI.ATIOt1 OR DE-ESCAI.ATIOrl)
Personnel / Agency To Be tiotified Phone ilumber , Time Person Responding 0 Agencies to be contacted after ' the above personnel / agencies have - -- - been notifed
] _.
- e. Montgomery County Office ,
' -~
. of Emergency Preparedness $ "j and'fledical Services h .d h .! AM
; f. Berks County Emergency ~
tiana ment enc M F __ k
- g. Chester County Emergency .
i Services , g,yg m m. P l Completed By: ) Ef."-" _ j Verified By: EttERGErlCY DIRECTOR , h 'i s 3 3 i k i i i ) . L L l: 'l l 1. a f
=- _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _
3843116560 l EP-104, R2v. 6 PEgG 1 of 15 VAW P /rgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCESURE EP-104 SITE EMERGENCY RESPONSE 1.0 PARTICIPANTS k 1.1 Shif t Superintendent or designated alternate shall J assume the role of Emergency Director and implement I this procedure, until relieved. 1 1.2 Station Superintendent or designated alternate shall lli report to the Technical Support Center or Control Room, relieve the Emergency Director, assume the role i of Emergency Director, and continue implementing the procedure , i f necessary. 1.3 Site Emergency Coordinator shall report to the Emergency Operation Facility and implement the
! appropriate section of this procedure, if necessary.
i s 2.0 A_C,TIONS-IMMEDI ATE , l 2.1 Emergency Director shall: I 2.1.1 Verify the emergency classification as determine ~d in i EP-101,' Classification of Emergencies unless' 1S. determination has just been made. '. n \i,f.
; te 2.1.2 Fill out Appendix EP-104-1, Site 'EmeEgen\'h c %. i ,
Notification Message, and iv'e *1;t .to the'yD'"o
- Communicator. "I \ % " g[0.','.' . +c.'
. f
~
-'
- X \$ . \.
3,- e$ . 2.1.3 Direct the communicator to complete (notifi' ation..of c 't(,i,M, i the appropriate parties as specified \i'n ' Appendix EP-l 104-4, Site Emergency Phone List (Initiial *.} y. ." i Notification) or Appendix EP SO4-5,,, Alert',, Phone List (Escalation or De-egca ' i wi. thin il5.iminu te s .
* '.\yJ~'
p . THE Q2(N . SEh L NRC RED TELEPHONE ON A 13 E pI U N DISCONNECTS. 2-
- . - - - , ~ , . - ~ . . - , , , , , . . ~ . _ ..
i x- - 3843116560 l l EP-104, Rev. 6 i Page 2 of 15 I VAW/ MPG /rgs I b.l.4 Contact the Station Superintendent and the Shift Technical Advisor, inform them of the situation, if not already done. 2.1.5 Direct the Information Center Staff to implement EP-306, Evacuation of t In ormati h Center, if not already done. Inform the staff o the { wind direction, if there is an airborne release. 0 2.1.6 If there is a radiological release, implement EP-305, Site Evacuation. 2.1.7 If there has not been a radiological release, A. Evacuate all co tru ion personnel by contacting
, Bechtel Safety Direct them to call for a
" Total Project acu tion" in accordance with Bechtel procedures. Inform them of nature of hazard.
B. Contact Construction Security off-hour and inform them that a i ~1 Project Evacu of Bechtel Construction personnel is being implemented. THIS WILL CALL FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF PERSONNEL AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT . IF IT IS DESIRED THAT THEY LEAVE THE SITE, INFORM BECHTEL CCMMAND POSTS AT THE UPPER PARKING LOG. C. Select the type of accountability desired for a personnel in the protected area and implement the
- j required actions belows i
- 1. Emergency Assembly Without Accountability -
- Make the following announcement i "THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED jl EMERGENCY RESPONSE FACILITIES OR ASSEMBLY AREA. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL STAND BY FOR ; FURTHER ANNOUNCEMENT. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL." , 2. Emergency Assembly With Accountability I
[
- a. Contaje . thy 62cuqi
%p T m Leader.
In ege"h'i'm of'd'tihei s le ed point (s) , L . h erge rg'en s' einbl with
. h, [ ' .'bpc ofabilit ik g$n to be 3 ,. gee 4, d to activate the
- g. ,.
- v. ..
- ~ - -
38431416560 l J EP-10 4, Rev. 6 3 of 15 Pagy/ VA'.1 MPG /rgs Security Team (EP-208) and to perform perscnnel accountability in accordance with EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability
- b. t Yoh Construc n Security
'ind inform them that personnel eaving Unit 1 will be reassembling at the Personnel Processing Center (PPC)
"THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL, THIS (IS)
(IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED EMERGENCY RESPONSE FACILITIES OR ASSEMSLY AREA. ALL OTHER UNIT ONE PERSONNEL LEAVE THE PROTECTED AREA IMMEDIATELY AND REASSEMBLE AT THE PERSONNEL PROCESSING CENTER. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. 2.1.8 For off hours, if not already accomplished at the Alert stage, direct the Shift Clerk to activate the call list per EP-291, Staffing Augmentation. If Shift Clerk is not available, this function may be assigned to any available individual. 2.1.9 Direct the activation of the Technical Support Center in accordance with EP-201, Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation, if not already activated. 2.1.10 Direct the activation of the Emergency Operations - Facility in accordance with EP-203, Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation, if not already activated. 2.1.11 If the EOF has not been activated earlier, during the Alert Response procedure, direct a communicator to call EOF personnel (directing them to report 'to the EOF) using EP-279, EOF Group Phone List. 2.1.12 Assign an Operations Support Center coordinator (PO) if not already done, to direct available personnel to report to the Operations Support Center and to activate it in accordance with EP-202, Operations Suppor t Center (OSC) Activation. 2.1.13 For samples,41.rept @CSaifh CtfjEilksh Technician or q [CBemdstry;"5)ragling! And Aitaly' sis ,Tehm L der to yS . implement EP-234,i'CKhmisde Sdmp}ihg A1 d Analysis y ,. Te,a m . l '1 b , 9 ', 3f 'i . . g
g 3843116560 l' . EP-104, Rev. 6 Page 4 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs 2.1.14 For in-olant surveys, direct a Shif t HP Technician or 1 Personnel Safety Team Leader to implement EP-250, g Personnel Safety Team . 2.1.15 .For field surveys, when a release of gaseous {f' radioactive material has occurred or is suspected, direct a Shift HP Technician or Dose Assessment Team f Leader to implement EP-210, Dose Assessment Team . 2.1.16 For a release, at or greater than the Alert level in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, or at the discretion of the Emergency Director, direct the Dose j ' Assessment Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose
# l Assessment Team.
2.1.17 On an interim basis, direct the Shift Technical Advisor to perform dose projections using EP-316, Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases-Manual Method or EP-315 Calculations of Offsite Doses during a Radiological Emergency using RMMS in the Manual Mode and to suggest Protection Action Recommendations per EP-317. [- 2.1.18 For fire / damage repair direct the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader to implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team and/or EP-261, [l 1 Damage Repair Group.
) ;
2.1.19 For a liquid release, implement EP-312, Radioactive p Liquid Release, if required. f 2.1.20 For Security matters, contact Security Shift .
) Supervision and direct implementation of EP-208, security Team, unless previously done.
t l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l1 3.1 Emergency Director shall: l 3.1.1 Verify that the Technical Support Center, Emergericy Operations Facility and the Operations Support Center have been activated.
, 3.1.2 Periodically evaluate the event classification in
[ < accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies and escalate or de-escalate the classification, as necessary. 3.1.3 If classification is de-escalated, fill out Appendix EP-104-3, Site Emergency De-Escalation Notification Message and give it to the communicator and direct the communicator to perform notification of the
?. - u . 3843116560 l EP-104, Rev. 6 Page 5 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs appropriate parties listed in' Appendix EP-104-5, Site Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation). 3.1.4 obtain the following information as necessary to formulate further actions: A. Security Status from Security Team Leader B. Sample analysis from Shift Chemistry Technician or Chemistry Sampling And Analysis Team Leader C. In-plant surveys from Shift HP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader D. Field surveys from Shift HP Technician or Dose Assessment Team Leader E. Dose projections and protective action recommendations from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose Assessment Team Leader F. Fire / Damage repair status from the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader. G. Notification Results from Communicator. 3.1.5 Discuss protective action recommendations with the Site Emergency Coordinator. 3.1.6 Determine which additional support personnel are necessary for emergency functions and direct the . shift clerk or other assigned communicator to contact those personnel. 3.1.7 Provide site personnel with public addres (PA) announcements for any major changes in plant emergency status, such as changing emergency action levels and evacuations. 3.1.8 Evaluate the need and order evacuation of affected areas as necessary. Refer to the following procedures: EP-303 Local Evacuation EP-304 Partial Plant Evacuation EP-305 Site Evacuation
..,,._,._,s.. .
....,_.,m... . . . . , . . . _ . , . . .
.7 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ., .
,. ~ . . _
NF -- w - # 7,_ w-_ __ l'- 36431i6560 l EP-104, R3v. 6 Page 6 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs i e 4 3.1.9 Perform the following until relieved by the Site [ Emergency coordinators fl! A. Discuss protective action recommendations with the Dose Assessment Team Leader. I . iL B. Provide protective action recommendations, if
- l. necessary, to the Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection.
f C. Inform the various emergency response groups if the recovery phase organization is to be implemented. 3.2 The Communicator shall: 3.2.1 Inform the Emergency Director when appropriate notifications have been made and submit completed la copy of Attachment EP-104-4 Site Emergency Phone List 1 (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-104-5, Site Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation) .)' for Emergency Directors Signature. 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-104-1 Site Emergency Notification Message q 4.2 EP-104-2 Emergency Exposure Guidelines
) 4.3 EP-104-3 Site Emergency De-Escalation Notification .
1 , Message 4.4 EP-104-4 Site Emergency Phone List (Initial Notification) 4.5 EP-104-5 Site Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation) 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purnant The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the site response to a Site Emergency. e 6 go. , g eaq r- m'a : , +
*ew *p 6 s e % Aaem e *p peepeamm emenir gpe a p ** .e w++= -w**==- ***,e.' ass ess oa
- posta p e op 'e semig e i - d>e m e** , we o*-=+ *W 4 ** a
*7*e. *w mme *=
3843116560 l 2P-104, R3v. 6 Page 7 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs c 5.2 Criteria For Use $ 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when an event has been classified as a Site Emergency per EP-101, i Classification of Emergency and EP-101 has been completed. 5.3 Special Equipment None 5.4 References 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria For Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. g 5.4.3 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies 1 5.4.4 EP-291 Staffing Augmentation
- 5.4.5 EP-201 Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation 5.4.6 EP-202 Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation 5.4.7 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation 5.4.8 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations .
~
j 5.4.9 EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calucations For Airborne Releases-Manual Method 4 5.4.10 EP-303 Local Evacuation 5.4.11 EP-304 Partial Plant Evcuation-5.4.12 EP-305 Site Evacuation 5.4.13 EP-306 Evacuation of the Information Center 5.4.14 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability 5.4.15 EP-208 Security Team 5.4.16 EP-210 Dose Assessment Team 5.4.17 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team e
.= . . _ _ , . . . . - .
.._,_7 -..._ _
. _ , , ~ . = . . =. . . . ~ . . . . . , ~ -
. .n. . _ _ a . a :. - . . u . . . . z .a- .n . .
3843116560 1 EP-104, Rev. 6 l Page 8 of 15 VAW/MPC/rgs j
! 5.4.18 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team 5.4.19 EP-260 Fire and Damage Team ,
[ 5.4.20 EP-261 Damage Repair Group i' 1 5.4.21 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release 5.4.22 EP-279 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Group Phone List y 5.4.23 EP-315 Calculations of Offsite Doses During a
., Radiological Emergency using RMMS in the Manual Mode.
1 4 e i e s 9 , __a
1; - - ' ' ' ~ 3843116560 L .- l EP-104, Rev. 6 Page 9 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs j
- APPENDIX EP-104-1
. SITE EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE 5
jh l Message: This * (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not)
- a drill.
,7 l This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report a Site l Emergency. My name is __, telephone .
[ Limerick Generating Station is reporting a Site Emergency declared at l Unit No. .
.]
i l Time and date of Site Emergency classification are ___ , (24 hr. clock time) (Date) l The basic problem is . l There * (has been) (has not been)
- an * (airborne) (liquid)* radioactive ,
l release from the plant. The plant status is * (stable) (improving) l (degrading) (not known) .* There is no protective action recommended. l This * (is) (is not)
- a drill. This * (is) (is not)* a drill.
e i
* * [
__ *_ m an ' '
J - - 58431165d5 l EP-104, Rav. 6 Page 10 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-104-2, EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Liie Saving and Reduction of Emergency **
Injury 75 REM
- 375 REM Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an -
Emergency ** Emergency 25 REM
- 125 REM Director
- 3. Protection of Health and Safety Emergency **
of the Public 5 REM 25 REM Director
'4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director
- 5. Re-Entry / Station Station Recovery Administrative Administration Activities Guide Lines Guide Lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis D
9 e g _1 g _ t .. , a * '
- y t:
3E43116560
, l EP-104, Rev. 6
- g. Page 11 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-104-3
( SITE EMERGENCY DE-ESCALATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGE
-- l MESS AGE: This * (is) (is not)* a drill. This * (is) (is not)* a l drill. This is Limerick Generating Station call'ing to report a l chenge in emergency action level.
The site emergency has been * (de-l escalated to an) (Unusual Event) (Alert) (Terminated).* Time and l date are . 4 l' , . The plant status is * (stable) l (24 Hr Clock Time) (Date)
-) ; l (improving) .* My name is . This * (is) (is not)
- a r l drill.
l This * (is) (is not)* a drill. . .e t: i{ t t
;--.-+,-.....--+;--..+--. ,;--,-,,,
, - p ,; - .
---,-~.-
-,.q- ., . -
. e. = - - - . _ _ - - _ . = . = = - -= . - --
384311/'i60 . l EP-104, Re.. 6 Page 12 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-104-4 SITE EftERGEllCY PilOrlE LIST
~- (IllITI AL tlOTIFICATIOti)
T Time Initiated Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone ilumber Time Person Responding
- a. Station Superintendent ilome -
G. M. Leitch Office - 5 J- { Brown phone, Ext. ~~~;,.7 1 Alternate llome - ~
. f.)
J. F. Franz Office - 1 - - x
\
1 b. Load Dispatcher Office -
) l Black phone k
]
- c. Montgomery County Office of Emerg. yrgg[ i' Preparedness and !!edical Services ,pg'sQ,gg,.f
- d. Pennsylvania Emergency Management d I
, Agency A
.11
- e. Pennsylvania Dureau of Radiati Protection,Ilarrisburg, PA l
- f. Manager - Public Information llome -
. Ronald liarper Office - I Dlack phone, Pager - g (After tone, dial phone number which you are usin 5
- g. Director - Emergency llome -
Preparedness Office - ( Roberta Kankus Black phone, . N
- -- - -_ _g - - 3;- - : - --- -. -
- t. --- ~ - - - -
l 3843117'i60
\ , EP-104, Re.. 6 Page 13 of 15 VAW/t!PG/rgs -
5 [ APPEllDIX CP-104-4 (COrlT ' D) L, SITE Et1ERGEllCY PIIOtIP. I.IST (COtiT ' D ) (I13ITI AI. IlOTI PICATIO!!) Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone 11 umber Time Pers an Responding ' Agencies to be contacted after the ! above personnel / agencies have been i notifled
- h. :
FIRC Operations Center
- l Bethesda, MD "# '
ll - A lN :
\
L 5 : - ! t g Make this call last and remain on telephone until flRC disconnects 9 i I
- Person contacting !!RC must be licensed operator .
] 1. Berks County Emergency Management Agency 3 b,
- j. Chester County Emergency 4 Services -
Um
\
h s f Completed By: Time /Date Verified By: ~ Emergency Director e i b
rs, -
% ~
p l l (hereinaf ter referred to as "the Documents"), and knows the contents thereof.
; 2. The' parts of the Documents which are sought to be withheld from public disclosure are the listings of the home telephone numbers of employees of the company, direct-line work L telephone numbers of employees of the Company which are not listed in public telephone directories, and names and home and work numbers of emergency response support personnel and organisations.
- 3. To the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the names and telephone numbers set forth in the Documents have been treated as confidential information and have been withheld from public disclosure by the company.
- 4. The names and home telephone numbers in the
- Document,s should be considered by the Nuclear Regulatory commission as confidential and proprietary information and be withheld from public disclosure on the grounds that disclosure of the names and home telephone numbers of the employees of the company and emergency support personnel could constitute an unwarranted invasion of the personal privacy of the individuals t
involved, disclosure of the work telephone numbers of the i Company's employees and of the emergency response personnel and organisations could adversely affect the capability of prompt
! notification in the event of an emergency; such disclosure is not
' required in the public i t rn e ests and such disclosure could adversely affect the interests of the company and its ability to l
n
\
g . y ,.
~~- -
3134311/';60 . l EP-104, Rev. 6 Page 14 of 15 VAW/MPC/rgs APPDIDIX EP-104-5 SITE EttERCDICY PilOrlE LIST ~ I (ESCALATIOf3 Olt DE-ESCALATIOti) , Time Initiated ' Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone t! umber Time Person Respond. .ng
- a. Station Superintendent Ilome -
C. ft. Leitch Office - Drown phone, Ext
- Alternate llom e -
j J. F. Franz Office - *
- b. Load Dispatcher OffIcc - -
y i Black phone ... I' I Pennsylvania Dureau of Radiatio '
- c. di Protection,llatrisburg, PA -
I
- d. NRC Operations Center
- kn * .
Bethesda,itD g . Make this call last and remain on telephone until tilte disconnects i
- Person contacting flRC must be licensed operator M
8
! 334311/':60 ,
j l EP-104, net 6 Page 15 of 15 j VAW/ MPG /rgs [ APPDIDI X EP-104-5 (CO!IT ' D) i SITE D1ERGEllCY PilOFIC LIST (COrlT' D)
. (ESCAI.ATIOrt Oft DC-ESCALATIOrl) h 1
- Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone riumber Time Per son Responding 5 Agencies to be contacted after the above personnel / agencies have been
. notified
- e. Montgomery County Office o
, Emergency Preparedness and g. %,
Medical Services ..
- f. Berks County Emergency 0- #D Management Agency - -
.A .
l 1:
- g. Chester County Emergency Services (
E 1: 9 - -F/
, pleted Dy: Time /D' ate -
We fled By: nJ-j Emergency Director l-I: 1
. e- .
l'
. _ , _ . _ _ . __.,.._ _m ._,_ - - _ , _ _ _ - - . _ - _ . . . . . _ - - - - - . - - ~ ..___ ,-...._ _.__ - - - _ _ _ _
[y - - 3E43118/0 h EP-105, Rev. 6 b Page 1 of 15 l VAh' IPG/kml t' f * ' PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY / t LI!!ERICK GENERATING STATION h DIERGENCY PLAN IMPLDIENTING PROCEDURE 6 f EP-105 GENERAL EMERGENCY RESPONSE 1.0 PARTICIPANTS ! 1.1 shift Suoerintendent or designated alternate j shall assume the role of Emergency Director and implement this procedure until relieved. 1.2 Station Superintendent or designated alternate shall report to the Technical Support Center or Control Room, relieve the Emergency Director, assume the role of Emergency Director, and continue implementing the procedure, if necessary. 1.3 Site Emergency Coordinator shall report to the Emergency Operations Facility and perform the appropriate section of this procedure, if
, necessary.
2.0 ACTIONS - I! MEDIATE - l 2.1 Emergency Director shall: I 2.1.1 Verify the emergency classification as determined in EP-101, Classification of *. Emergencies unless determination has just;#beEn made. t d ' ': . ' 2.1.2 Fill out Appendix EP-105-1, General'Aergency rk N .}' l Notification !!assage, and giveritt;to ;th'e , communicator. hg.y %' ,4'.g,.,,,, %e* ,c, 1 't I I 2.1.3 Direct communicator to c6 fion Ap esish of' W,9 V the a o i
,In' l'al' i fc 16 EP 2 9' Esc'la on /
q 'i,scp
,, , ( wi SkWin e . t T!!E CO!!!!UNICATOR S!!ALL MAN T!!E 'NRC* RED TELEPl!ONE ON A CONTINUOUS DASIS UNTIL T!!E NRC DISCONNECTS.
i[ . g-.......4 . . . . . , . , ,,, .
..~ , -
i[ ' ~ i 3843116570 f ' EP-105, Rev. 6
, Page 2 of 15 VAW/ MPG /kml 2.1.4 Contact the Station Superintendent and the Shif t Technical Advisor, inform them of the situation, if not already done.
2.1.5 Direct the Info Center Staff to i implement EP-306, Evacuation of the Information j Center, if not already done. Inform the staff of the wind direction, if there is an airborne i release. 2.1.G ,If there is a radiological release, implement
! EP-305, Site Evacuation.
I 2.1.7 If there has not been a radiological release, f A. Evacuate all construction sonnel by contacting Bechtel Safety irect them to call for a " Total o] t Evacuation" in accordance with Bechtel procedures. Inform them of nature and preferred evacuation direction. B. Contact Yoh Co struction Securit Off-Hour, and inform them thbt a .otal Project frac ion of Bechtel Construction personnel is being implemented. THIS WILL CALL FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF PERSONNEL AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT. IF IT IS DESIRED THAT THEY LEAVE THE SITE, INFORM BECHTEL COMMAND POSTS AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT. C. Select the type of accountability desired for personnel in the protected area and implement the required actions below:
- 1. Emergency Assembly Without Accountability
- Make the following announcement "THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNATED EMERGEllCY PERSON!!EL REPORT TO ASSIGNED N R ONSE FACILITIES OR R L OTHER PERSONNEL B R 1ER ANNOUNCEMENT. THIS
[ ;/
. . ' ,. j
, ( ILL.*
/
*lO
- E., e a yA bl'y With Accountability
- a. Contact the (Interim) Security Team -
Leader. Inform him of the selected exit point (s), that emergency
3843116570 EP-105, Rev. 6 f
- Page 3 of 15
, VAW/ MPG /kml assembly with accountability is going to be implemented, and to activate the Security Team (EP- 208) and to perform personnel accountability in accordance with EP-llo, Personnel Assembly and p Accountability.
f.
- b. Contact n Se ity f Rev. 5 nd inform t m tnat personne in's l Unit 1 will be reassembling at the Personnel Processing Center (PPC).
" *'H I S (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL, THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO
- ASSIGNED EMERGENCY RESPONSE
; FACILITIES OR ASSEMBLY AREA. ALL OTHER UNIT ONE PERSONNEL LEAVE THE PROTECTED AREA IMMEDIATELY AND REASSEMBLE AT THE PERSONNEL PROCESSING CENTER. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A D RI LL . THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A i
DRILL." 2.1.8 For OFF-hours, if not already accomplished l during an Alert or Site Emergency Response
, procedure, direct the Shift Clerk to activate i the recall list using EP-291, Staffing Augmentation. If Shift Clerk is not available, .
this function may be assigned to any available individual. 2.1.9 Direct the activation of the Technical Support i Center in accordance with EP-201, Technical
; Support Center (TSC) Activation, if not already activated.
i 2.1.10 Direct activation of the Emergency Operations
! Facilit ith Eh 203', Emergency
~
e F d'ct iva t ion , if not 2 h e . activated earlier, n 1 t or Site Emergency Response
' i procedure, direct a communicator to call EOF
' ' ~
personnel (directing them to report to the EOF) using EP-279, EOF Group Phone List. 2.1.12 Assign an Operations Support Center Coordinator 1 (PO), if not already done, to direct available personnel to report to the Operations Support i
g . .
- 3843116570 4 EP-105, Rev. 6 -
Page 4 of 15 VAW/ MPG /kml n Center and to activate it in accordance with EP-4 202, Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation. p < 2.1.13 For samples, direct the Shift Chemistry T Technician or Chemistry Sampling And Analysis h Team Leader to implement EP-230 Chemistry sampling And Analysis Team. 2.1.14 For in-plant surveys, direct a Shift HP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader to implement EP-250, Personnel Safety Team . 2.1.15 For field surveys when a release of gaseous
., radioactive material has occurred or is suspected, direct Dose Assessment Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose Assessment Team .
2.1.16 For a release at or greater than the Alert level in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, or at the discretion of the Emergency Director, direct the Dose Assessment Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose Assessment Team. 2.1.17 on an interim bases, direct the Shift Technical Advisor to perform dose projections using EP-316, Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases-Manual Method or EP-315 Calculation of offsite Doses during a I Radiological Emergency using RMMS in the Manual Mode and to suggest Protective Action Recommendations per EP-317. . 2.1.18 For fire /damace repair direct the Maintenance Shif t Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader to implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team and/or EP-261 Damage Repair Group. 2.1.19 For a licuid release, implement EP-312, Radioactive Liquid Release, if required. ( 2.1.20 For Security matters,. contact Security Shift Supervision and direct implementation of EP-208,
'[-
Security Team, unless previously done. [....w,~.,.3~.,...-.~..y..,.
D, . . 3843116570 : }4 EP-105, Rav. 6 Page 5 of 15 j VAW/ MPG /kml 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP . ,, l 3.1 Emergency Director shall: 3.1.1 Verify that the Technical Support Center, i Emergency Operations Facility and the Operations Support Center have been activated. 3.1.2 Periodically evaluate the event classification in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies. If the conditions change, deescalate to an appropriate classification. 3 3.1.3 If classification is de-escalated, fill out Appendix EP-105-3, General Emergency De-escalation Notification Message, and give it to the communicator and direct the communicator to perform notification of the appropriate parties listed in Appendix EP-105-5, General Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation).
,' 3.1.4 Obtain the following information as necessary to formulate further actions:
A. Security Status from Security Team Leader B. Sample analysis from Shift chemistry Technician or Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader C. In-plant surveys from Shift HP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader , D. Field surveys from Shift HP Technician or Dose Assessment Team Leader E. Dose projections and protective action recommendations from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose Assessment Team Leader F. Fire / Damage Repair status from the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader G. Notification results from Communicator 3.1.5 Discuss protective action recommendations with the Site Emergency coordinator. 3.1.6 If not already performed, determine which additional support personnel are,necessary for emergency functions and direct the Shif t Clerk N . D bMIT T,' YY'IT (Y ** 'M * * * *T '#'*[D
' *@'
- D #
Y ~ ~'
364311657.0
. EP-105, R3v. 6 Page 6 of 15 VAW/ MPG /kml
, or other assigned person to contact those J- -
personnel. 3.1.7 Provide site personnel with public address (PA) speaker announcements for any major changes in plant emergency status, such as changing emergency action levels. 3.1.8 Evaluate the need and order evacuation of effected areas as necessary. Refer to the following procedures: EP-303 Local Evacuttion EP-305 Site Evacuation EP 306 Evacuation of the Information Center 3.1.9 Perform the following until relieved by the Site Emergency Coordinator: A. Discuss protective action recommendations with the Dose Assessment Team Leader. B. Provide protective action recommendations to the Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection. C. Inform the various emergency response groups if the recovery phase organization is to be implemented.
- l 3.2 Cgamunicator shall:
3.2.1 Inform the Emergency Director when appropriate notifications have been made and submit completed copy of Appendix EP-105-4 General Emergency Phone List (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-105-5 (Escalation or De-escalation) for Emergency Director's signature. 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-105-1 General Emergency Notification Message 4.2 EP-105-2 Emergency Exposure Guidelines
~
.h % 1.
~
t e # -
c 3843116570 I EP-105, Rsv. 6 r Page 7 of 15 VAW/ MPG /kal 4.3
- EP-105 .3 General Emergency De-escalation Notification Message 4.4 EP-105-4 General Emergency Phone List (Initial Notification) 4.5 EP-105-5 **
General Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation) 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 P 'The purpose of thi,s procedure is to provide
,* guideline,s for the site response to a General
';, Emergency. ,
5.2- Criter14 3for Usp,,, - -
'*.,, \ -
5.2.1 ,This procedure shallsbe implemented when an 3 ! event has beet! 31ars: find 'as a General Emergency I per EP-101, Classificution of Emergenclegd ' and EP-101 has been congleteid.
.,'+
l 5.3 S_pecial EqJi g gLt, ,> , s , j ' *V*,~? . No_ne ,-
- c
, 'g ; s\ g ,4 l 5.4 *q,M eren Q-N' ' '
.+ "g ' '
. w. ,
5.4.1 Limari d_cen4 rating Station Emerget'cy Plan *
- 5. 4,2; NUREG 0654, driteria for P'repar.2 tion and" L ', Evaluation of Radiological EmsFJepcy Responso
- j 7.- Plans \in Support 'of Nuclear Power . PJ.dnts '
i
- 5.4.S3\
EP-101, Classification of i.mergencie\s ,
.y ' u
- ~
t 5.4.4 EP-201 Mahnical'Nup' port Center (TSC) Activation , i . 5.4.5 EP-202 Operations Sapport Center (OSCL ' Activation 'W j :- 5.4.6 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility(EOF) ., . I Activat}1onu s q, >
;N
s l
! 5.4.7 EP-291rStaffing Augmentation n .
5.4.8" EP-303 Local Evacuation
- e F 5.4.9 EP-304 Partial Plant Evacuation '
w ' 5.4.10 EP-305 Site Evacuation \ . t , . N s y. me g "U*'* ~****9W**' ** TN'** * ** T*"v *3
- f* '***, r-
{_. -.
, P " *],** * 'M M. -, 4 '
'r
- T ' *
- f te
_ 'd{ 3 * { 'f ; 4 ***
- g
%r 3843116570 3t ! EP-105, Rev. 6
; Page 8 of 15 y , VAW/ MPG /kml 3
l 5.4.11 EP-306 Evacuation of the Information Center 5.4.12 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations 5.4.13 EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calculations For Airborne Releases - Manual Method j 5.4.14 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability f 5.4.15 EP-208 Security Team { 5.4.16 EP-210 Dose Assessment Team . l 5.4.17 EP-230 Chemistr'y Sampling and Analysis Team 5.4.18 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team , s 5.4.19 EP-260 Fire and Damage Team l 5.4.20 EP-261 Damage Repair Group 5.4.21 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release 5.4.22 EP-279 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Group Phone List , I- 5.4.23 EP-315 Calculations of Offsite Doses during a
- d
- Radiological Emergency using RMMS in the Manual Mode.
l d l e t e e e N Ms'
#8t- { **g9,* M g Ye ****1 e4R* , - - -
A7-f tf*g* *F *g*J 2 (9A* / * *T ](* 3'.u*. " * ', ' *E** * *** "-"* *"
- 38431165/0 EP-105 Rev. 6 Page 9 of 15 1 VAW/ MPG /mla APPENDIX EP-105-1
)
GENERAL EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE i
, ) ; . MESS AGE: This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill. This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill.
s - , This .is the Limerick Generating Station calling to report a General Emergency. My name is , telephone
. Limerick Generating Station is reporting a General IEmergency declared at Unit No. . Time and date of General
., Emergency, classification are (24 Hr Clock Time) (Date)
The basic problem is . There (HAS BEEN) (HAS NOT BEEN) an (AIRBORNE) (LIQUID) radioactive release from the plant. The plant status is '(STABLE) (IMPROVING) (DEGRADING) (NOT KNONN). The protective action recommended is
, (Note 1) . The affected area is .
This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill. This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill. I 1 IF A GENERAL EMERGENCY HAS BEEN DECLARED WITHOUT PRIOR EMERGENCY l^ CLASSIFICATION, PROVlDE THE RECOFMENDATION TO SHELTER WITHIN THE 2 MILE RADIUS AND 5 MILES DOWNWIND OF THE PLANT. IF PEMA & BRP ARE NOT AVAILABLE, !!AKE THE RECOMMENDATION DIRECTLY TO THE COUNTIES. Ik a'm 4[ .h= -
._ m
'\1% e.2 m
m - 3043116570 EP-105 Rav. 6 Page 10 of 15 VAW/ MPG /mla APPENDIX EP-105-2 e . EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES T Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized
, Function Dese Dose g
- 1. Life Saving and Emergency i Reduction of Injury 75 REM
- 375 REM Director **
- 2. Operation of Equipment
, to Mitigate an Emergency **
Emergency 25 REM
- 125 REM Director *
- 3. Protection of Health Emergency ***
and Safety of the rublic 5 REM 25 REM Director
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station
' Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis L
F A i e o i {. 0]_(k.""2 ~" ' T M, "3' W * ?(( ((J[g*Q]{-] , ^'Y *
-- ~'~
JCatal16570 EP-105 Rev. 6 Page 11 of 15 VAW/ MPG /mla APPENDIX EP-105-3 L GENERAL D1ERGENCY DE-ESCALATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGE Message: This (IS) (IS NOT) .a drill. This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill. This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report a change in emergency action level. The General Emergency has been (DE-ESCALATED TO) (AN UNUSUAL EVENT) (AN ALERT) (AN SITE EMERGENCY) (TERMINATED). Time and date are I
, . The plant status is (stable)
(24 Hr Clock Time) (Date) (IMPROVING). My name is . a.
)
This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill. This (IS) (IS NOT) a drill. , I l i 6 6 g (. S #
][* * - . N -
)
( [ 65s 1 g
. r S vf/
_ b eoG g R P n
,21/M i d
5 H n _ 3 0eA1 o
} gV p -
l - a s b PP e R ,h_ --- 3 E - )
- g d n -
o ' - { r s e P 8P))) t t
. /
(4MMMf PPPa 5r444 _ e- - - A - e .tMMt f f 1 L m vfAAAE i eA888P M T R (((( _ 5
/
- [Y .
~
T ,_ l S y 4 ' -. s _
, - < [y ys M
I ,- L ) p _3[. A;,g' N ...
. ~
3E O '
- N I
5O T 2'y ' e .b -
$ g_'
2 ' A __ 0l . Y4 . ;. $n i - J 1P C -
. - I r .^ '+,--
. 8o(t
_. e _ PY F EC I b 1 t T m -
._ XE 0 1 1 u -
I G t 1 _ DR . 3 t E L e _ EM A n ~- o J PE I P T h P AI I - A 3 1 R I
._. E ( e e e e e N
E G ei mf of c ei mf of c i f c f ei mf of c r e g a ei mf of c O l O l O O l O P l l I l I n - d y o c e i i n t e a f _ i g m
. t t r y f r o n e c o o
- i r e m n n f y d E e uo n c n B e o t n e n r y tc nn g ry ec rc mn ue ai et I i c e g r e s e ue T i Ee BtA l d y c n r eh pc ut z n h c t a CA o yt i aA nt g ar iP , n oP g br ue Pp r m Esk
- ea sn u
~
- t e e g Si e ea t r p s rn ee an anr ve vou
- al I rd nK a A nL aF i mm l m lib r oea
- o. n. D oe ye yt s l / ed t rt t l i r g sg sai gl car epe i e tM eF d ta na nl r aa n
I n n o ta. SG t l . AJ a o L nn oa MM nn ndr ea eaa PM PRI l nn ao MR reb iro DPR ~' e s i m r e . . c e g T P a b d f - ; I,1 y :'
~
?
-.I
- i I
l l j
]' #
p 3oci szo , i! EP-105, Rev. 6 : Page 13 of 15 [j j VAW/f1PG/rg s il h j' APPEllDIX CP-105-3 {j GEllERAL Et1ERGEt!CY PilOtlE I.I ST ]' r - J- Time Init lated (INITI AL NOTI FICATIOll) y Personnel / Agency To Be tiotified Phone riumber Time Person Responding i h. NRC Operations Center * ' Bethesda, MD i-
- Make this call last and remain on
- i j telephone until NRC disconnects w_
i i
- Person contacting NRC must be .
Licensed ra to r Agencies to be contacted a fter the above personnel / agencies have been notifed j 1. Berks County Emergency
,: Man ement A n
~
,j -) . Chester County Emergency ' [. ., Services _
\ ,
- I Completed By: , _
Verified By: /
~
( , EPIERGEllCY DIREC'IDR ,' I = 4 ]'4 e .
3U421165/0 j EP-105, Rev. 6 ' Page 14 of 15 VAW/11PG/rg a " APPEt3 DIX EP-105-5 GEllERAL Ft1ERGENCY PilOtlE LIST i
-Time Initlated (ESCALATIOtl Olt DE-ESCALATIOti)
] Personnel / Agency To Be flotified Phone ilumber s Time Person Responding I j ; a. Station Superintendent Ilome
,' G. M. Leitch Office Alternate llome J. P. Franz Offi -
~ t
- b. Load Dispatcher Office U I
l . j c. Pennsylvania Bureau of , j i Radiation Protection m) -
- f Ilaerisburg, PA pm) ll l pm) l after hours)
- d. FIRC Operations Center
- Bethesda, MD 11ake this call last and remain on telephone until flRC disconnects ,
- Person contacting flRC must be ;
Licensed rator =
'(
O
, d 3*!}~'lb'/O. ) , ! EP-105, Rev. 6 4 i Page 15 of 15 . l l VAM/flPG/rgs i i .
- APPEtIDIX EP-105-5 ;
GEllERAL E!!ERGEllCY PilOilE LIST l l
- 'P i me In it la ted f' 1
i Personne 1/ Agency To Be !!ot ifled (ESCALATIOtl Phone 11 umber OR DE-ESCM.ATIOti) i Time Person \ Responding l I Agencies to be contacted a f ter the above personnel / agencies have I been notified ! e. Montgomery County Of fice k of Emergency Preparedness . and !!edical Services --
, ~% R
- f. Berks County Emergency '- - - ,
Plan ment A n - k
~ '
i g. Chester County Emergency i Services l Comple ted By: Time /Date l Verified By: ) EtlERGEllCY D I REC'IO R Q / - r l
. 1
% 4 >
1 3E43116500 i EP-106, Rev. 2 Page 1 of 6 9 vat * G/rgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
- LIMERICK GENERATING STATION .
! EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l l
1 l EP-106 WRITTEN
SUMMARY
NOTIFICATION 1 l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Emercency Director shall direct the Shift Technical Advisor or other assigned Engineer to write a summary report following the closecut or de-escalation of an Alert, Site Emergency or General Emergency. 1.2 Shift Technical Advisor or assigned engineer shall write a summary report. I l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Emercency Director shall: 2.1.1 Direct the Shift Technical Advisor or assigned
! engineer to prepare the written summary in i
accordance with this procedure. I ] COMPLETE WITHIN 8 HOURS OF CLOSEOUT OR DE-ESCALATION.
}
{' l 2.2 Shift Technical Advisor shall: - fr.$ g h% .->'..s 2.2.1 Obtain the necessary infop'matio,n\ ' ot .'com'plete Appendix EP-106-1 Em 6cy Class Closeout / Reduction g,%\. -(', ' 'q. I Report.
.* - s.'f' l 2.2.2 Fill in the follow ng'informat' ion'on'the formii '
- k. '
i i'. .. *. Y 1. .i,
! a. Item 1 - Enter the number of\,th'e* af cied ;..
' units. If the e ~
ce t both uni , .
- b. It e 1
5000- (352) LG IT 2 05000- (353) 9
*4* ',Mn,I,****be+*
j' " W} f(*1
-*P# N** ***4
'**"7
't , *'" .~ '
,4,T "_ U F'
3E43116550 EP-106, Rav. 2 Page 2 of 6 VAN / MPG /rgs l l c. Item 3 - Enter the total number of pages.
- d. Item 4 - Enter a concise description of the event.
{. l e. Item 5 - Enter the date of the event. t l f. Item 7 - Enter the date of the report. L
- g. Item 8 - Enter name and docket number of Unit 2 if the eveht occurred at both units.
l LGS UNIT 2 05000- (353) l h.. Item 9 - Enter the operating mode.
- 1. - Power Operation
- 2. - Startup
- 3. - Hot Shutdown
} 4. - Cold Shutdown 1 5. - Refueling i
j i. Item 10- Enter the percent of licensed 1 thermal power at which the reactor was operating when the event occurred.
, j. Item 12 - Enter the name of the Shift Superintendent.
~
j k. Item 17 - Enter a brief description of the circumstances and reasons behind the closeout or de-escalation of the Alert, Site Emergency or General Emergency. . l 2.2.3 Submit the report to the Emergency Director. l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOWUP l 3.1 Emergency Director shall: l 3.1.1 Review the report for completeness.and accuracy. I
! 3.1.2 Have the Station Superintendent or Assistant Station . Superintendent and the Operations Engineer or j' Technical Engineer review the report. This may I require review over the telephone.
1 1 I
- , v , g, ,,,,,, -.r,,- , ,.,,.s,=.n...-.,,,.,.,--,. .
l , 3843116580 EP-106, Rev. 2 Page 3 of 6 . VAW/ MPG /rgs 3.1.3 Have the report telecopied within eight. hours to the ! . NRC Operations Center or Region I office via the ! following phone number: i d l J. NRC Operations Center ? i Region I Office l 3.1.4 Call and verify that the report was receiv - l NRC Operation Center I Region I Office l I . 3.1.5 If the report cannot be telecopied, have the report hand delivered within eight hours to the: i i Region I Office 631 Park Ave. King of Prussia, PA 19406 l 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-106-1 Emergency Class Closecut/De-escalation
; Report -
i l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this ' procedure is to provide i guidelines for the eight hour written summary { notification to the NRC following closecut or de-
! escalation of an Alert, Site Emergency or General ! l Emergency Classifica tion.
1 9
=~- ~
7__.__-
;x b b 43 l i b b bV' EP-106, Rav. 2 ' Page 4 of 6 VAW/ MPG /rge I 5.2 Criteria for Use
- h .
{" This procedure shall be implemented following a
- closecut or de-escalation of an Alert, Site h,
Emergency or General Emergency Classification per EP-101 Classification of Emergencies. W l 5. 3' Soecial Equipment 0 l None
;i References l 5.4 L
5.4.1 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of nuclear t l Power Plants l 5.442 EP-101 Classification of Emergency O e 4 I' h kh . I r H 9
.s
'- . =_ 1
, enri w -
-~- - --
i 3g43.)16580 EP-106, Rev. 2
"."Ju'*"'" Page 5 of 6 f APPENDIX EP-106-1 EE RGENCY CLASS CLOSEQUT/DE-ESCALATION REPORT VAW/t!PG/rgs
- . ...ciurv n a ni occast au"**a m 'a *
- 1J Limerick Generating Station Unit c(51oIeIol l t 1 lorj i Q n.a sai e ,
ev c man a ns,our urs in onesa eac4anas nevoLves a f naoarr;4 97 vlam .acedTM ' oAY YEAR e awTv seanses occEs7 asuaassmas o(510tolo ; ; l l l l l 0g5go,c o, p i ) ,,,,,,,,, n.e mesent s suunsrrreo evneuant to rus neouinassens or w c,a t. sen = - ., a= , nu moos = ,u ,,,, ,,3 ,,, 13,n , em mg gaggsygg MJsleNSMs4 F32tw
- ii === _
== _
-n== x
.__ ,,,,, ,,y,g l , --
<~.,
~
susewnme
~
sen wowe senwen w .nsa, j'
}
f_,{'[- manwnum m.asswnan eenwmma isnwem.
] san w on same eenwam.: ,
ucamssa consTact som Twas can stm /
' lea 488 ,i TELipascass .wese s. l l
_. . . . o . s o .. , , , , , , , o . o.. ...' ve y g su O vis <<< , tarnre swarasion urn p =o . ; ; as T=actso e. - u. _ - . __ n. This report is to satisfy the 8, hour written su==ary requirement for a closecut of an Alert. Site Emergenc'y or General Emergency. in accordance with . NUREG-0654 Appendix 1. Item 17 of this report is a brief description of the closecut of the event. If applicable, a LER vill follow in the required time frama. l . + - esas pg.s 33
... . . - w- ma_= e n. - . - > > _ - . _ _ . --_.___._--.__,___c --- - - -
3 584.511658') gy_tos, a,y, : e j **u Page 6 of f APPENDIX EP-106-1 EMERGENCY CLASS CLOSEQUT/DE-ESCALATION REPORT yaw / MPG /rgt
; , s TEXT CONTINUATION
*=wvv amane ni oocaer av .. as o, M.
'<, j(I '
- C- 6 rar - - . - ~ ~ - m m 015l010101 I I i I 0F l c '
I
- k F
l 6 9 9 AG
, :p O
e is i O 9 h i i l I e e # y ge e O e
/
7 f C 0 WR1 904 Bees T?.QRQ * * *f **Y Wi"YT%.\ . . - -; % ~ 'av? Y - .. ""- t^ ' " ~
~~~}
'**} 7 '} 77}}{}} '~
FA
$ -l, \
[ EP-110, Rev. 4 c . Page 1 of 8 VAV /mgd PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY '/Z// h. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION DIERGENCY PL.AN IMPLDIENTING PROCEDURE 3 6 $ EP-110 PERSONNEL ASSEMBLY AND ACCOUNTABILITY t L} l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS
+
1.1 Site Personnel shall report to their Emergency
., Assembly Areas or as otherwise directed.
n 1.2 - Emergency Assembly Area Coordinator shall perform an accountability check of personnel at their assembly area.
, 1.3 Bechtel and Subcontractor Personnel shall assemble and account for their personnel in A. .
accordance with Bechtel procedures. L 1.4 S_ecurity shall assemble a list of unaccounted personnel for the Security Team Leader and 1}j Emergency Di. rector. , 1.5 Emergency Director shall direct the Personnel Safety Team Leader to activate the Search and Rescue /First Aid Group in order to locate I unaccounted for personnel. q G ' l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE ,A THESE ACTIONS WILL IMMEDIATELY FOLLOW THE ASSDiBLY ANNOUNCEMENT MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY@F,THE FOLLOWING:
- 1 <?.:'a ,*,*, '
I. .] EP-103 - Alert Response gJ. p c%C .Q,3(\b#g. a Y,N , r, j EP-104 - Site Emergency Respons ig ' , 1 g p. EP-105 - General Emergency Response Q ** g'f h EP-305 - Site Evacuation (y,' V* l 2.1 For emer e e ' accountability areas (se 2.1.2 Other personnel shall remain at their normal positions until receiving further instructions. 7,; .cr ~3 m y. ~. w .-- w e ~ p-v - m y - ,7 m m z . - ~ x-~ 7
. . 3843116590 l EP-110, Rev. 4 Page 2 of 8 VAV/ MPG /mgd 2.2 For emergency assembly WITH accountability ;f check.
2.2.1 Unit 1 personnel shall report to their
; designated Emergency Assembly Area (see Appendix p
EP-110-1). If not assigned to an Emergency
@" Assembly Area, exit the Protected Area, and report to the Personnel Processing Center. ~
2.2.2 Personnel escorting visitors shall: c A. Escort visitors to Administration Building
- Guard Station i B. Report to their Emergency Assembly Area (see Appendix EP-110-1) or, if not assigned to an Emergency Assembly Area, exit the Protected Area, and report to the Personnel Processing Center.
S.3 Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators shall: q! . 2.3.1 For Assembly without an accountability check: A. Maintain a log of names and badge numbers of all personnel leaving and returning to y assembly areas.
.j 2.3.2 For Assembly wit.h an accoun'tability. check: ]
A. Record names and security badge numbers of
~
all individuals reporting to the assembly l area.
.1 a
- Conduct a roll call (if necessary) to verify an accurate listing of personnel.
B. Report names of accounted for personnel to Security when contacted. r j C. Maintain a log of names and badge numbers of t all personnel leaving and returning to [ assembly areas. D. If the entire group of assembled personnel l are to move to a new location, perform steps
- A through C to ensure that accountability is maintained.
- )
jj l 2.4 Security Personnel shall:
- 1'
- j l 2.4.1 For Assembly with Accountability
- A. Report to the appropriate personnel exit
! areas. l i [*hM '[ Y ' D
.* .ej[ v ' A *714Y ) 7.
- J ' 7 I ~* Ur k g
%..l';' p F; * ;
4b%[- $ _ f = E * }
a,, .
. . 3843116590 l EP-110, Rav. 4 Page 3 of 8 VAV/ MPG /mgd A :
h B. Ensure that personnel exiting the Protected 4 . Area follow the normal " Card-Out" procedure and utilize the portal monitors while
, exiting. ' =
k l C. If the COMPUTER is NOT operating: l 1. Obtain a copy of the Master Badge List. A f 2. Collect the badges of all existing g; personnel. Using the Master Badge List, p W check OFF the numbers of all the collected badges and those not in use at / the time of the evacuation. t
- 3. Give the completed Master Badge List to the Accountability Group Leader as quickly as possible.
t 2.4.2 For Site Evacuation: A. Report to the appropriate personnel exit areas and set out buckets or other containers to collect security badges. B. Have exiting personnel deposit their security badges and dosimetry in the appropriate containers, and utilize the portal monitors. f. IF PORTAL MONITORS ALARM, PERSONNEL SHOULD BE INSTRUCTED TO REPORT'TO THE VEHICLE AND
- EVACUEE CONTROL GROUP LEADER AT OFFSITE ASSEMBLY AREAS.
Emergency workers may be required to retain dosimetry. Prior arrangements should be l made through Security Team Leader. m y - C. If the Security Computer System is operable, badges will be carded out by security using p: the exit lane card readers. D. If the Security Computer System is NOT operable, perform the steps detailed in 2.4.1 of this procedure. l 2.5 Accountability Group chall: [ 2.5.1 For Assembly with Accountability: A. Report to the Administration Guard Station. T B. Contact the Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators for accountability reports
.L *. "g,'- 1 'I
% ) '*
~
/ *
' . 3843116M u l EP-110, R2v. 4 Page 4 of 8 7 VAV/ MPG /mgd 1
utilizing Appendix EP-110-1, Emergency Assembly Areas.
; C. Compile a list of personnel in the Protected 4 -
Area using information received from the Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators and the Security Computer System. i g IF THE SECURITY COMPUTER IS NOT OPERABLE, e PLANT SECURITY WILL PROVIDE A MASTER BADGE t LIST WITH ALL BADGES TURNED IN AND BADGES NOT IN USE CHECKED OFF. D. Compare the list of personnel remaining in the Protected Area with the Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators accountability reports to compile a list of unaccounted for personnel. E. Within 30 minutes from the time of the evacuation and assembly announcement, report the accountability STATUS and the names of the unaccounted for personnel to the Security Team Leader.
, F. Contact the Bechtel Command Post's at the North Parking Lot to. determine if any Bechtel or subcontractor personnel are unaccounted for and inform the Security e Team Leader.
G. As unaccounted for personnel are located, N immediate:.y provide an update of the - l accountab:.lity STATUS to the Security Team g Leader. 2.5.2- For Site Evacuation: A. Report to the Administration Guard Station. B. If the Security Computer is NOT operating, obtain the Master Badge List. l C. Complete steps 2.1.5.1 B through G of this procedure. \ 2.6 Security Team Leader shall: 2.1.6.1 Report the names of unaccounted for personnel to the Emergency Director.
, 2.6.2 Forward a list of unaccounted for personnel to the Personnel Safety Te4m Leader at the following locations: "s -' N, fm.- NN 'T *'" '
l'[ ""* *EN **7 V " * "[ ' 7 % 78 * ** ""'fPT""*"""9 ^*I -G 'E 1 */*'**
r[ . . 3843116590 l EP-110, R3v. 4 Page 5 of 8 VAV/ MPG /mgd A. Operations Support Center (If . Technical Support Center is not activated) . B. Technical Support Center (If Technical r Support Center is activated). 2.1.6.3 As unaccounted for personnel are located, immediately provide an update of the accountability status to the Emergency Director and Personnel Safety Team Leader. l 3.O ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 _Emercency Director shall: 3.1.1 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader to activate the Search and Rescue Group /First Aid if required to locate unaccounted for personnel. 3.1.2 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader for status updates. 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-110-1, Emergency Assembly Areas l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION
- l 5.1 Purpose l The purpose of this procedure is to provide the a
steps necessary for personnel assembly and accountability. L l 5.2 Criteria,for_gge, , 5.2.1 This procedure should be implemented whenever an ( Alert, Site Emergency, General Emergency, or Site Evacuation is declared. 5.2.2 This procedure may also be implemented when an Unusual Event is declared at the discretion of l the Emergency Director. 5.2.3 This procedure does not apply to Unit 2 Bechtel and subcontractor personnel since they will be assembled and accounted for per Bechtel , EFacuation Procedures. t m + ww- .
. - m - -- r+ r ~ ~- w'n~n-~~~ :~ ~^ - m e m ' w t' v m c ~ - ~
_ m . _: :w-- += -- :. {
- 38O}l60?). ..
y - - l , EP-110, Rev. 4 Page 6 of 8 VAV/!!PG/mgd i q l 5.3 Special Eculement
- l None ,
l-l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan l t E a 1 i 8 T . _7._ __ ry y ~ - gw . . --- -- . , ~ c . - - gn i . , --...._r:,,,---:-~ ----- .--~~ - -
.....n -
. __ _ _ _ . - . . _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
. . . ~ -_ y
~
!! ~58 d ' l 6 j ' 9() b' EP . e Rev. 3** 11 Page.7 of 8 ]if VAV/t1PG/mgd , p ,_ l APPEllDIX EP-110-1 l El1ERGEllCY ASSET 1BLY AllEAS , il .\ p PRIMARY ASSET 1BLY AREAS AI. TERNATE ASSE!1BI.Y AREAST !} GROUP AtID TELEPIIOtlE flut1HERS _ AtID _TijhEPilOt:E tllit1BERS ASSEMBLY AREA COORDINATOR (S) J Technical Support , Leader Personnel Safety Team 9 Center Staff: Leader
- t 3
1. " IIP Technicians (4) Sen h, Tec y
- i
} Plant Operators (4) 7 en ,ng 12 Auxiliary Plant P.O. ., or A.O. $ Operators . .. g 3 [j Security Guards Seni ng Secu son l: y l Notes:
,! (1) If the OSC becomes or is uninhabitable, the OSC Coord inato r, Plant Si trvey der and up to ? 5 IIP Technicians and 5 Operators report to the MRF Room in the Contrc 1 Roo thors report ! , to the Plaintenance Shop.
(2) If accountability is required they will leave the Protected Area. Ot ierwis will receive fur the r instructions and directions. (3) If the TSC becomes or is uninhabitabic, the Emergency Director, Persor ne l S m Leader, Technical Support Group Leader and up to 5 others designated by the Esergene or report to the Control Room. All others report to the 11aintenance Shop. L(4) The auxiliary OSC on Clevation 239' may be used to hold exps--pe el; he OSC on IIrevation 269' is the assembly area. o O
,,.,,_ ... - - , - - - - - - ~ . . . - - . - - - . _ - - . , . , - - - . - , _ _ - . . - - - , - - - - - - - , . , . - - , - - . . . - - - - - - . -- - -
38d g R
.f m O 1 vo/ T e e G A n R8P N r t n M I t o n o l
0 e/ Dns e s ' gV Rei s r aA Odv e e PV Onr r P . P Cee P . E t p Anu EiS Rr n o s
~ j Aet r pf e Yui P LSh t B S s r 1d Mt i o r b Ef : m i e md S t e n p en Shl h e u sa ASA C S S 3 as
}
n do A ni 7
' R E at c
A au er Y. - n t, l l it t
^ A l
i i n _ E e Sol Si t ce r AP eh t t R1 E.
- ar TI .l r u AT l
a l f t RD ee E l~ l h v i T. A~ t I e A ~ ec ve ar
' e
~ l 1
~ 1 S S~t~
1 i Al : 1 w EI i RD 1 wy Af e UJ yh Y et e L h B t , 1 t e U ds S ei S r w A i t ue Y qh R et A 1 r O P I s R i P . 1 yr l s_ e t e o r n it . r e n 1 n s n t e o ie r o n n s bC i< i o i r a t s C j< t e s e t g al i
& nn v rd P nn ro v &
s Ea i oe e ui os er r s l t t t P pt e n t nd P a rcc c cs l l Onsp ya nal rd oai n ce O or u rl eie d st ns r r a ac R l CoS t c mci er sarl t t n o G o.t si uiF t oi oens e s
- f r I P r at i n r n rt nf t t oe t e
t t rf mh t hOoiifihcRan nseiA o s ph T ec scc csmascb e i a t o
)
_ h e neC sidti eunr CAOSS TPEVASVBSiAH l ( CT I l iI l -
2843116600 EP-120 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 4' l VAW/MJM/mc PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION ftk EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-120 SITE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Site Erlergency Coordinator shall supervise the activation and manage the activities of the Emergency Operations Facility. 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Site Emergency Coordinator shall direct the Load Dispatcher to activate the Site Emergency coordinator's call list. 2.2 Site-Emergency Coordinator for Site and General emergencies shall: 2.2.1 Proceed to the Emergency Operations Facility. 2.2.2 Become cognizant of the situation directly from the Emergency Director. 2.2.3 Announce to EOF personnel that he is assuming the - role of Site Emergency Coordinator and inform the
] Emergency Director that he is assuming control of the emergency response organization. , r"g'.,
2.2.4 Supervise the activation of the.qE6F.A' \ y . .4
~
4('\,'8 h.".J'*, l 2.3 Site Emergency Coordinatof',ihsll as.*a,ppropriate' ' requast the collecti of, environmental' stat!.o:.1 samples per EP-C-315, tihere han'. been s, a e,.. radioactive material e'a's e . f 4 ,i 4 *W .
'i 4 * .
,,,7,*y \y .
2.4 Through the Dose Assessment Team- Leader \',,2 direct all radiation surveys conducted in of.fraite ar'eas. When field data becomes availabidW discuss the relationship of field data to'c,alculated data with Dose Assessment Team Leader, Health Physics and j Chemistry Coordinator in or' der to resolve any h discrepancies. h e
- A % J "
r z
. . . 3843116600 EP-120 Rav. 2 Page 2 of 4 l VAW/MJM/mc 2.5 Request activation of corporate support functions through dialogue with the Emergency Support Officer.
2.6 Obtain protective action recommendations from the ' Dose Assessment Team Leader upon completion of EP-317, Determination of Protective Action Recommendations. 2.6.1 Discuss recommendations with the Emergency Director and Emergency Support Officer to assure that all partiep are informed of the recommendations before they are made to government authorities. 2.6.2 Meet with the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania representatives in the Emergency Operations Facility to ensure that questions on protective actions to be applied are answered prior to formal recommendation. 2.6.3 Provide protective action recommendations to Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection. 2.6.4 Update these recommendations as new data become available or conditions change. 2.7 Upon completion of EP-318, Liquid Release Dose Calculations for Drinking Water, notify if appropriate downstream water users per EP-287. 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP - l 3.1 Site Emergency Coordinator is responsible for the I following: 3.1.1 Maintaining awareness of plant status and being i alert to potential off-site consequences of the. emergency. 3.1.2 Conducting periodic briefings for Emergency Operations Facility personnel. l 3.1.3 Coordinating between the on-site emergency personnel and the off-site emergency personnel, I when activated, to obtain necessary additional l facilities, equipment, supplies, personnel, or l technical services. i
- =9 hy '
3843116600 EP-120 Rav. 2 Page 3 of 4 l VAW/MJM/mc 3.1.4 Coordinating with the Emergency Support Officer concerning personnel, equipment, and materials expected to arrive at the plant site. 3.1.5 Ensuring preparations are made for check-in of incoming personnel, especially with regard to site area access control, indoctrination of visiting i personnel, maintenance of proper security, issuing dosimeters and preparing exposure records, and distribution of protective clothing and equipment. 3.1.6 Providing management direction for the
- establishment and functioning of the Emergency p Support. Center.
6 L 3.1.7 Continuing to supervise the operation of the Emergency Operations Facility. 4 3.1.8 Reviewing with the Emergency Director the current status of information provided to governmental agencies and relieving the Emergency Director of this responsibility. The Site Emergency g Coordinator will then serve att the primary-contact for Federal, State, and local emergency response agencies which dispatch personnel'to the plant vicinity, and will. provide status and assessment information to governmental agencies. l 3.1.9 Provide direction for Philadelphia Electric emergency response personnel who are dispatched to the plant site and for support personnel activated by Philadelphia Electric Company.
- 3.1.10 Keeping the Emergency Support Officer, the Emergency Director, Federal, and State Government Liaison apprised of actions taken and of consequences off-site.
L 3.1.11 Coordinating with the Federal / State Government . Liaison, Emergency Director and the Emergency Support Officer to determine when to terminate the j initial phase and enter the recovery phase, q informing various agencies and organizations when the modification is to be implemented. t h y;y a, , cv . - - -- r .
;, :- m n ~n;mm ,_ . . , - -
3843116600
.. , l EP-120 Rav. 2 l Page 4 of 4 i
, I VAW/MJM/mc 4.0 APPENDICES - None 'I 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION I l I l 5.1 Purpose I
- , The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines to delineate the responsibilities and actions of the Site Emergency Coordinator.
l 5.2 Criteria For Use The position of Site Emergency Coordinator is normally activated at a Site or General Emergency or at the discretion of the Emergency Director. l 5.3 Special Equipment { l None j - l 5.4 References
! 5.4.1 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) ! Activation 5.4.2 EP-307 Reception and Orientation of Support Personnel 5.4.3 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action .
Recommendations 5.4.4 EP-287 Nearby Public and . Industrial Users of Downstream Water 5.4.5 EP-C-211 . iealth Physics and Chemistry Coordinator 5.4.6 EP-C-315 Environmental Sampling Coordinator i i 1 i 1
,, +. aw .=.w- sow-- . . . . - .r--* *m,,w-
- - -e .* , e-. .. ---. . , - , ., p .,e_ ___ p. 9.y. , ,
_ _-x .
, ~ - m 3843116610 l EP-201, Rev. 2 Page 1 of 19
. VAW/ D /jmv PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY /b[/f. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-201 TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER (TSC) ACTIVATION
. CAUTION: VERIFY HABITABILITY FOR ACTIVATION.
1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Emergency Director shall direct the activation of the ,, . Technical Support Center. q 'l 1.2 Shift I & C Technician shall activate the equipment in
- I the $SC.
l.3 Communicators shall man assigned phones and communications log. .
.}~
1.4 Status Board Recorders shall obtain and post information on assigned status boards. 1.5 Health Physics Technician shall perform a habitability 4 check of the TSC. . 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE ,, p '[ a . 2.1 Emer nc Direc r shall: $ ', 's t 'c;. ' 2.1.1 th'e steps Support Arid. to ,..- j' 4 m <Equipmente. Activation. ,.' - .. . . g. 4 ~ ~. ' ' M., t ' ,r . . .. . . ,y ,i 2.1.2 Assign an individual the duties of Emerg'ency.~. Director's Communicator and direct the indiv.i~ dual to ' l perform the steps outlined in Section.<2,3.,of' this procedure. gp o .
.-3.. .
...,.... 7,, . ,.
-y ~
- 38:431.16610 - <
}* EP-201,^Rsv.,2 l Paga 2 of 19 ,
VAW/ MPG /jmv [' 2.1.3 Direct a HP Technician to perform a habitability check s of the TSC per EP-330, Emergency Response Facility., ' Habitability, if not already completed. s , 2.1.4 " Ensure that incoming personnel to the site enter thes s , j protected area through the TSC Guard Station. -
. x f
2.1.5 If the security computer is not operable ensure Security maintains a sign-in, sign-out log for '
} personnel reporting to the TSC.
j 2.2 Shift I&C Technician shall: c - i /.
- . 2.2.1 Use attached Appendices EP-201-1 and EP-201-2 to turn ,
j on lighting, and Particulate, Iodine and Noble Gas
~
i (PING) Monitor, and to place the EVAC in Emergency Mode. THE TSC EVAC SYSTEM SHOULD BE OPERATING IN THE ,
" NORMAL" MODE, IF NOT, START UP THE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH S81.1.B STARTUP OF THE TECHNICAL -
SUPPORT CENTER HEATING, VENTILATION,'AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. 2.3 Communicator for the Emergency Director shall: . 2.3.1 Using Appendix EP-201-10, TSC Telephone Checkoff List, verify communications capability exists from the TSC. 2.3.2 Inform the Emergency Director when the communications capabilities have been verified or of any discrepancies. If there a blems, have the Shift I&C technician cal nd ask for telecommunications on-cal personn 1. - 4 2.3.3 Man communications lines as directed by the Emergency ~ Director and maintain a communications documentation containing information received from and sent to b emergency response personnel and offsite agencies. - - 7 The log shall include as a minimum the following information: Date and Time (use 24 hour time notation) , Messages received or sent q Name of person information was received or sent to a'nd location f making entries [ - 9 I - _ _ - _ _ _ *T_~~_~~_-_L__ --________-~~-_----<--e-m-- ~s----~~----. " zv ~ ~2 7 ' . "- _
;~~---
- a - -
': ~
~
f EP-201, R3v. 2 Paga 3 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv 2.3.4 Inform the Emergency Director promptl'y of all significant information received from other emergency response personnel and offsite agencies. F - [ 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Emergency Director shall: 3.1.1 Ensure'that the TSC Guard Station is activated, in accordance with EP-208, Security Team Activation. k 3.1.2 Direct the communicator to call in additional personnel if needed. Use EP-280, Technical Support Center Group Phone List. 3.1.3 ' Assure that individuals are available as Status Board Recorders for necessary status boards. LGS Plant Parameter Status Boa _rd
, Plant Parameter Trends Board.
[; . Event Chronology Status Board Offsite Communications Status Board Staff Assignment Status Board Fire / Damage Status Board. llE Dose Assessment Status Board. , WHERE APPLICABLE, MAINTAIN DOCUMENTATION ON STATUS g' BOARDS ct ub. 3.1.4 Direct the Status Board Recorder (s) to perform the L. j ' ' steps outlined in Section 3.2 of these Actions - Follow-up. 3.1.5 ' Assign an individual to man the communication lines to
,3 the Control Room and Operations Support Center and direct the individual to perform the steps outlined in
, l. Section 3.3 of this procedure.
3.1.6 If necessary, assign two individuals to man the telephone consoles and direct the individuals to
,. perform the steps outlined in Section 3.3 of this q, procedure.
L' L i v - 1
. ------ - m m _ ..,, ,,,, , w a n w , _ m - n ~ n z , . ~ - .---
. .. . a.. .m . . . . .
~
?
*~
M5NO[]66}Q l- EP-201, R2v. 2 l Paga 4 of 19 '
. VAW/ MPG /jmv i
3.1.7- If necessary, assign a communicator to the Field
- m -
Survey' Group Leader for sending field survey data, and k other information to the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)'and to perform the steps outlined in Section 3.3 1 of this procedure. 3.1.L Assign individuals to be data display operators. t 3.1.9 Inform the Control Room when the Technical Support s Center is operational and manned, assuming control of p its designated responsibilities. 3.1.10 Brief the TSC staff on their arrival and periodically (normally every 30 minutes) on the status of the pertinent plant conditions. 3.1.11 Contact the various Team L'eaders for periodic status updates as necessary. - 3.2 Status Board Recorders shall: 3.2.1 Fill in their assigned status board (s). q j Format and content of the status board are given in
]
..t
.the following appendices:
Appendix EP-201-3, LGS Plant Parameter Status Board Appendix EP-201-4, Plant Parameter Trends Status Board Uk Appendix'EP-201-5, Event Chronology Status Board Appendix EP-201-6, Offsite Communications Status Board Appendix EP-201-7, Staff Assignment Status Board Appendix EP-201-8, Fire / Damage Status Board E Appendix EP-201-9, Dose Assessment Status Board h 3.2.2 Contact the following individuals for the various status board information. L. L Data Display operators for plant parameter status and plant parameter trend information. Emergency Director's Communicator or Control Room for event chronology information. - i I. Emergency Director's Communicator for offsite L communication information. t l l l-t Y:xs andWdECGQ;<u i:.+% +Lfa i: Jy wc h&MMa:. ~ T',T'7 ~ *' T ' W D '""', W } ~
4 . . 3843116610 b \ EP-201, R2v. 2 T Pegs 5 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv y jy , Emergency Director's Communicator for staff assignment j information. F { OSC Coordinator for site radiological status. M 1 Field Survey Group Leader for field survey status. Fire and Damage Control Team Leader for Fire / Damage 1 [ ' Status Board'. Dose Assessment Team Leader for Dose Assessment Status Board. 3.2.3 As information is received, post on assigned status [ board and maintain documentation of appropriate status p board entries. 3.2.4 Transmit plant status information and event chronology information to appropriate Status Board Recorders at a the EOF, if activated. p 3.2.5 Review and update the status board as changes in plant c conditions or information warrant. 3.2.6 Inform the appropriate Team Leaders as significant a changes in status board information are noted. 3.3 Communicators shall: 3.3.1 When directed, use.EP-280, Technical Support Center Group Phone List to call in additional personnel. 1c 3.3.2 Man assi'gned communication lines or consoles. 3.3.3 Maintain a communications log containing information
,'. received from and sent to other emergency response
[ - facilities and other support organizations. fl The log shall include as a minimum the following information: i, [ Date and time (use 24 hour time notation) t Summary of messages received or sent . Name of person information was received from or sent to Name and initials of person making entries
*'_ ' k % -
$- ,-nO- ' d.m %
-- _ % 2
l . 3843116610 i EP-201, Rsv. 2 l Poga 6 of 19 g VAW/ MPG /jmv 4 t 3.3.4 Inform the" Emergency Director or appropriate Team $ Leader proinptly of all significant information i-received from or sent to members of the emergency response organization or support organizations. 3.4 HP Technician shall: 3.4.1 Periodically confirm habitability per EP-330, y Emergency Response Facilities Habitability. r 6 ( ' 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-201-1 Technical Support Center HVAC System ( ' Emergency' Mode , 4.2 EP-201-2 TSC Equipment Activation i 4.3 EP-201-3 LGS Plant Parameter Status Board t ll 4.4 EP-201-4 Plant Parameter Trends Board [J + 4.5 EP-201-5 Event Chronology Status. Board l 4.6 EP-201-6 Offsite Communications Status Board 4.7 EP-201-7 Staff Assignment Status Board h Fire / Damage Status Board
~
4.8 EP-201-8 h i; 4.9 EP-201-9 Dose Assessment Status Board 4.10 EP-201-10 TSC Telephone Check List - 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to describe the instructions and actions required for the activation, manning, and operation of the Technical Support Center (TSC). 5.2 Criteria for Use l ' Activate the TSC when an event has been classified as j an Alert, Site Emergency or General Emergency in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, or at the discretion of the Emergency Director. v i I' we emm .r~= .-- - - -n----m-~ ~
--- r s _ . :_ , z. _
7-- _.: - 3 _- _ : =' -w + ~= j . . 3843116610 f '
- l. EP-201, Rsv. 2 Page 7 of 19
[)k VAW/ MPG /jmv 1 j 5.3 Special Equipment 6 [ None 5.4 References 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan I 5.4.2 NUREG 0654 - Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Nuclear Power f Plants. 4
~
l 5.4.3 NUREG 0696 - Functional Criteria for Emergency Response Facilities. 5.4.4 EP-280 - Technical Support Center Group Phone List. It - 5.4.5 EP-330 - Emergency Response Facilities Habitability 5.4.6 S81.1.B - Startup of the Technical Support Center a Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
. System G
s Qf__LhKN**lAU*?*? U ? ) ?^ 'Y' f ? ?. i . IN ~ '~ - - * * " *
[ -2 1, R3 .
/ Paga 8 of 19 % VAW/ MPG /jmv e .
APPENDIX EP-201-1 *
// TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER HVAC SYSTEM ' EMERGENCY MODE' y ?
- 1. . When the Shift I&C Technician arrives at the TSC, HVAC System i -should be operating in the ' Normal' mode per procedure S81.1.B
( Startup of The Technical Support Center Heating, Ventilating, [- and Air Conditioning System. If not, start up the system per S81.1.B. A TWO POSITION MANUAL SWITCH, LOCATED IN THE DISPLAY AREA ON THE EASTERN COLUMN IS PROVIDED FOR SWITCHING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER'S HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FROM THE.
. NORMAL MODE OF OPERATION TO THE EMERGENCY MODE OF OPERATION.
v
- 2. Turn the control switch on the eastern column of the display area to its " EMERGENCY" position in order to actuate the emergency mode.
r n VERIFY THE FOLLOWING:
- 3. Fan ME-03 is activated.
s '
- 4. The fan flow rate is 3000 cfm as read on the airflow monitor panel in the mechanical equipment room.
E 5. MD1 closes.
- Jj
- 6. Exhaust Fan ME-07 stops.
- 7. Inform the Emergency Director that the HVAC System is functioning in the ' Emergency' mode. -
h' = 4
- ~;- .,-~,-r r -,- ~, . ~r~.7g- - :ype y,- -
; ~.~~~.y,3 yw; - ; ~;= ~~' w ~ 3' - ---- - "
3843116610
!. EP-201, Rsv. 2 peg 2 9 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv
. APPENDIX EP-201-2
- TSC EQUIPMENT ACTIVATION t
- h. 1. Enter the TSC Dis' play area and turn on display area lighting i switches on the wall by the entry door and by the conference
). ROOM.
- 2. Turn on the Particulate-Iodine-Noble Gas Monitor (PING) a h l located in the hallway.
- 3. Turn on CRT's per posted procedures.
- 4. Check the radios in the equipment room for operability.
- 5. Inform the Emergency Director when the TSC Equipment setup is complete and of any equipment problems.
J-l p O e 1
- 1 i
S t
- I l -
1 a
-- ~;~ -~---n---~-~-.,-~,
v's ?MFTLM *.;:, pf;ga- u ;
. w_ . .m w _ - ,_ _
_ ,,m m m v . - _ mm,,
;- 00 4 31 l 6 6 l l) i l EP-201 'tav. : 2 -
P0g3 of 19 - y] VAW/ MPG /jav APPENDIX EP-201-3 [, LCS PLANT PARAMETER STATUS - UNIT NO. k. 1 h Radiological Parameters Time Reactor Parameters Time DATE: North Stack uCi/cc uCi/sec Power North Stack Flow cfm Level inches South Stack uCi/cc uci/sec Pressure psig cfm South Stack Flow l D/W Rad Monitor R/hr R/X Encl Exh ar/hr Reactivity Control Time Level Control Time Refuel Floor Exh. ar/hr { Air Ejector Offgas ar/hr 8 Of Rods not inserted F.W.A. on Unavail/ Reason .
] R/W Monitor cpm _
B C SBLC Ini. Unavail/ Reason CRD A
. Meteorological Parameters Time A B l
B HPCI L. C RCIC
;j Ave. Wind Direction (from) Cond. A Ave. Ambient Temp. degrees F B '
- j i Precipitation C
Lj Stability Class C.S.A Wind Speed ( ) (Tower 1) Pressure Control Time B Wind Speed ( ) (Tower 2) C [j Wind Speed ( ) (Satellite) fBypass Valves Open' D LPCI A POWER SUPPLIES Time SRV's A B C D E F G 11 J K L M N S B ,; Source Supplying Unavail/ Reason Open C 'l 220 kv Closed D
- j 1 offsite Nas'Open RIIRSW A 500 kv B
- l 2 offsite C '
, 'i D-1 D 0 D-2 Cond. D-3 Trans. , D-4 Refuel Bus' Offsite Dieself Unavail Trans.
, D1 1 SBLC D1 2 D1 3 ,
D1 4 d O
- -- _ =-
-_ _ -- .,y l
5U43116610-EP-20) *tsv. 2 - 74 a Piga . of.19 ' ' ' VAW/ MPG /jav APPENDIX EP-201-3 (CONT'D) LCS PLANT PARAMETER STATUS - UNIT NO. (CONT'D) DATE: a Containment Parameters Drywell pressure psig Containment Control Time Drywell Temp f Suppression Pool Temp f
- Suppression Pool Level ft Sup. Sup. Spray ,
^
Containment 402 SH2 Pool Pool D/W S/D Unavail/ RHR Cool Spray Spray Cool Reason a . A B C D . RHRSW On Unavail/ Reason A B C l D - 6 Isolations Isolated / Exceptions I MSIV II RHR j III RWCU VII Containment .-_ l q VII MISC 1 SGTS On Unavall/ Reason Train A
- j. . B Fan A j B
.ontainment C H2 Recombiners ON Unavail/ Reason !
.f A j B
.i h.i l
ij 3343116610
;.j l EP-201 mv. 2 ;; Pcga A. cf 19 F VAW/ MPG /jav L .
APPENDIX EP-201-4 i PLANT PARAMETER TRENDS
~
s Time Reactor Press psig Reactor Power %
'l Reactor Level in
'1 ( q
-l Drywell Press psig i Drywell Temp degrees F
'l Suppression Pool Level ft j t Suppression Pool Temp degrees F
] [4ctainment Rad R/hr Ndeth Stack Rad uCi/sec 9
- l
~i .4 i ,t
[
- i
- ]
e
'i..
- 1 .
<t if
7
. .. u . a-_ _
}
x 4 STi b b i u ,
-l' EP-201, RGv. 2 l Pcg3 13'of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-201-5 EVENT caxONOLOGY STATUS BOARD DATE: .
TIME - sysNT sysNT [ . 1 t e T [ . t, i, l 1 . s' fY *NN D'4 *' *' W *3 ; M * * * + FF ' " -( %}',]' {* ,'T*i Af j '.f M n*] {q7 "# [_". * * * ' " " " *
,]( ,' ' #
L ,__ 3 ,4,____.
r
- aE40116610 r EP-201, R0v. 2 Paga 14 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv L ,
APPENDIX EP-201-6 OFFSITE COMMUNICATIONS STATUS BOARD DATE: OFFSITE TIME COMMUNICATIONS RESPONSE / COMMENT l . O e a 1 5 f .
-r - -
* * ** eese . we. . . _ - - - - - . . .
. --a,w . - . - - - / -
3843116610 _
- l. EP-201, Rsv. 2
,.. Paga 15 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-201-7 STAFF ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD F DATE:
EMERGENCY TITLE NAME BADGE # EMERGENCY TITLE NAME Emergency Shift Director Superintendent Personnel Safety Shift Team Leader Supervisor Fire and Damage Team Leader Dose Assessment Team Leader Chem. Sampling & Analysis Team Leader Field Survey Site Emergency Group Leader Coordinator Security Team Leader Technical Support
. Group Leader .
US NRC Representative OSC Coordinator Emergency Support Officer O i r e O
-L' e . - 1 -.- ' -J -
r
-n y, i ,
- 0043}}6Dll I- ,
EP-201, Rev. 2 Paga 16 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-201-8 FIRE / DAMAGE STATUS BOARD DATE: TIME LOCATION DESCRIPTION REPAIR STATUS A p ._. I i O
' ' ~ " " ' ' ' " " * ' " * '
h* a aII haa _? *s ** '[ Y' $ 8 i A'*,$ 9
c ' > , ' i - [ t! ! ! s ey e cd t e x16 vf/ 029v 1a j t n e au et: lSy e t a R e t i S 4 c.. o G i s R mi s f
- P o a rv a f :
7M P e l ei e Oe ~ 1 ,1/ l aTt l t 1 W e e i c e ta 30eA s R t eA R sR 4 2 gV
'8 P P - a s a ee tl t
. nc.
er tut t e he gs 3E ae DR E s oos PSE E s io HD
, =
T
=
T 2 = D E T
- R N A I O D B O =
I T S U 9T
- A =
1 T T
=
0 S 2
- A P T =
E X A D T - I T D N = N E T E M P S S P S A AE G = S T S E A L B E O = S N T O D
=
T
)
r ) ) ) ) r r r ) r
) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) r ) ) )
) ( r r ) ( r r ) ( r r ) ( r r ) r r ) ( r r ( ( r ( ( r ( ( r ( ( r ( ( ( r (
h e h e h e h e h h e _ / s r r/ s r r / s r r/ s r r/ e r r/ s r r o h h r o h h r oh h r oh h r s h h r o h a D a D a D a D a o a D
- ) ( 2 6 ( 2 6 ( 2 6 ( 2 6 ( D 2 6 ( 2 n d + + + + d + + d + + + + d +
p e e T T e de h o T T e eT T e eT T e e T T e e T i : m t t t t t t t t t t t t t s ( a a n n a a n n a a n n a a n n a a n n a a n c s R ri i R r i i R r i i R r i i R r i i R r i e a d g g g g g g r l e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e i C e st s s s t s s s t s s s t s s s t s s s t s D p on o o o n o o o n o o o n o o o n o o o n o
. s DI D D DIDD DIDD DIDD DIDD DID d b d n r n i u i W T W -
l j) a .
} ;n
ut! {i
,i:
7 , 9% 2,
., L~ II
,-) v w sCs. 1. .,i D s,, ,I vi l EP-201, Rev. 2 l Page 18 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv =
APPENDIX EP-201-10 TSC PHONE CHECK LIST l ] - Test Prelude Phones for Dial Tone YES/NO 5, a Located at Emergency Director's Desk: E j [b, c;g;" ,93 .p..,,.c[g p.g :s,'o j . j +g. N. 3,Lt .q,,2 n-
- " f y;,. gA M,- s. :
{
.i , , , , + ., j- 5, t - .., . . _ . . ,;2 ,
z. s .q)w ,.3; -....,7.'.. h-- = 4 b;,,,? > %p.4 ! -, 3 c, ..y, sA'.g%p'y % ':' 1 ' .Y.; l'. . .. . ' . l . 'M y . =
~.<-.-ym q:"q l * .-
7 .... . . , i.,5, hW.h, . +? V <"' Nfl.$../l,,.-'li,l.,;k].l".5,"',mC' ,*;. f,
,r. ,e .,-;
y .'.'A.:..,., . e- . . - , . , . .. 9.
.i .
.y , , .
g ., ,
) ,. ,;.:. ny,- j
- .g _ [ v 173 f . C , '.,. * ,y,_
g - ....._ :.} p. _.; ; ,;.3 , }'
.,....,..a :- . . . , , , i.f, , . r .;Q+6 ,
&s.' f.i:f l,',l ,Y
'+., ... ,
g f.l ? b, y?(..'..:,. . i i Y.; .;.,E ;"..-;.] g,fN&tk J j - x-+ y . ,..y .a :j ,,,
...y ,
- y. ,,
. , . . , n m,,f g y +,.,. x.A, e. m ' r. .. i. a.ptsh y y; y
^ ?.y , ,
. a +c
., : :- - .! :., :,. -r.W , ;.
=
; t . .- : ,: :..1 *-
. f., .., . ;
,4 ,'.'-]-
.' /4 r . , . .
IV ;;; ',~.; L i. y "'%y" .
- q. '. ,. ' ' .hr z . ; yl. ' ,. .,_ ' y
,, . 1 g &' .",' : &,, ,f,_'$ f,
.h$[P..,? f- D_
r- {' i; / P'., 15 74 * c -> :, p. . -'i '_ N SE
*7% i y . $ .*.. ..
4"*F m
- 3 ,
S
- y. . ', ; - is L; g%p ".' . ^ ' b ' ' W '. 3:
j 3;
-A. Sv-9 ' '. ^ M,- p:'t 'd-M a- .%-
c
. ." . ,1 M ,.8 .,~%la-yf .. t. v . ..' '.2 ' R,
- d.k a,1, . .. N / ', ,' 4 t 4, u a,.< '*'..4' ,. Q. ., f. jV.. ' W y. k.k,it,. i M
~
.. ( [1. . ., [-
. y %g'. [y{l: j#,=e.. ',. . .. t ,' h. .,,,! l,-f), c;. '..p ef ,,d
> , , ,. , . . - -- . 1. , r- ,. i ,
Q...:t.'f: % Q ; ' ,w;r~'...'.4 d:)._If : if a gj mm : .. .;,m.t.n?; ..'. so .Lv, .h y?, *4 y. ) s .+,,. < A s? np.nV,, ,4. y
?
.y.m s - . , ,. ,u , vp .'
m'
%aM
..- e w j
. ' n/.:4 -*#t -@, '. - 3,p . : y' . . .;V (. . A e
;isq .
, : . - p _q s . . ; ,- l.; f.p,o. ' '. .'..' & _' ' lf.+ , _~ ,.} '.a:Q
.n '.-' p,;] f, . d, E% : h'.,fj_4,,4f f$'
.:':'.jw, *ka - s'h.~.. ;.,. g.;-
,...s . .
'=
. ,?'f4 y"*,% -l- :.
*]kt . -.?- p ,e
.t ~. ,;j : m..//.rd f;'
-i . -
2 ,b +R.! ' 5 / ~.sf "[Up 0,,' .4; p , q. * -1;
' , hW? *
.x l1 ,, ,y.'f[s j M , l'.. t' *1 A .-
.. i 3 .. ?r,L;
-l 2 * .- gu -;
' s%.'l 4f i2 ..;..e,
. , y g, J , ', ,'N ,. j". t r, , n_,. . ,, .\ :i , S _ \ A,. r' ~eto,,')b ri + .-
,.-p,,, 4 S
. Ma q_.
h[>p' g p ; ;. , y . p{I-'[. - k~k ',, * [.1
-]
.w.~ w.y . M k . :. . .
y[(q-M'j' 4~ N;4 -
. 'y ; j g 1 -
.r,MM' .:M a.,,,
e m:.#i.;..'M.w.W .a ',< w# w.../ye'4..e. &c - :. ;W .. >fde c .4.k/;,i.' O-q.~%' ' 2.
.es ee. , .,Q, .y.
,s ... <
t 1 4, y% e . p. ,m. ,, .. ,.
".. -@f C; s:p g " ,;,;,pj $ ,.g y%..
; e-L g ..y"y* ,gd,, -v, #j3 l,* . -..,l.. V' #
.y 2: .ip;],m;g.
.x, .
h;[ N M ' y Y aI r..','. $ y 'n;* .I A ' h". 5 %,T[ ?[O '.e n %..
, = .. .. . .
' t\ J
'j4,tf -
- i V Q T '.i[# 4
, y;%tWM R.^Q ..$p%; .
.L.
Vb :{.M.%: ; L .' - y .3g .,.'q.y.Q .Y ;hh @. _1 J 1
-4
- J M"' W. N d
l- EP-201, Rev. 2 Page 19 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-201-10 TSC PHONE CHECK LIST (CONT'D) . YES/NO Test Station Phones for Dial Tone (Black Phone) l ERFDS Computer Terminal Emergency Analysis Team Phone Fire / Damage Team Leader f Telecopier Technical Engineer
/ Emergency Director Office f Emergency Director Conference Room
. NRC Office ,
p Personnel Safety Team Leader j Personnel Dosimerry Field Survey Group Leader pling and Analysis Team Leader;; Dose Assessment Team Leader l ose Assessment Group Security Team Leader t Personnel Accountability l Emergency Preparedness coordinator l
- Status Boards
., Telephone Switch Room , ? Test Brown Conference Desk Phones for Dial Tone l I Emergency Director's Desk . RTechnicalSupportGroupLeader'sDesk l ]. Conference Room f I Test Outside Lines (Black Phones) Emergency Director Emergency Director Office
, Dose Assessment Team Leader Desk ,
NRC Office ;
; NRC Office j a
L-
,~~ + , g go,. y
. . ,9v m - e e- , =
sv* * ~ T* n*.~-R
~ -
s p
- t. m
.5843116620
'l '
EP-202, Rev. 3 Page 1 of 7 VAW/ G jmv PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANT / / LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-202 OPERATIONS SUPPORT CENTER (OSC) ACTIVATION l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Operations Support Center Coordinator shall activate, direct and coordinate the activities of the OSC. l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Operations Support Center (OSC) Coordinator shall: l l 2.1.1 Assign an individual the duties of OSC Communicator and one as OSC Status Board Keeper. Use Appendices EP-202-1, EP-202-2, EP-202-3 for status board i formats. I l 2.1.2 Direct the establishment and maintenance of a log of
.i pertinent events. The log keeper can be any available operations person or technician.
PERSONNEL SHALL LOG IN AND OUT OF THE OPERATIONS SUPPORT CENTERS IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN PERSONNEL l , ACCOUNTABILITY. I .i 2.1.3 Direct the Operations Support Center Communicator to
! verify operability of the telephones betwee.n.the OSC i and the Technical Support Center (TSC) and Control
! Room (in accordance with Appendix EP-202-4, OSC' Telephone Check List) and maintain thes status board.
,\ \ r 2.1.4 Notify the Emergency Director when the Operations Support Center is manned and co icatioris are ,
satisfactory between th m, Technical . Support Cente upport Center. , j l . . u e$[uipment. i . 1 * ,*+w g**** + P -e M sP9 **. sy*- ee . + . et * ** * - t 3' y , y to
. ,= - ~
fq.6 3843116620 l l EP-202, Rev. 3 ' Page 1 of 7 I VAN / MPG /jav 2.1.6 Direct Realth Physics set up a portable area fc radiation monitor (if available) or use a survey meter to monitor radiation levels.
, l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLON-UP l 3.1 Operations Support Center coordinator shall:
3.1.1 Remain available for contact with the Control Room or TSC in order to provide personnel to support the various emergency teams. 3.1.2 Direct personne1' entering or leaving the Operations Support Center to log in or out using the Operations Support Center log. J 3.1.3 contact the Emergency Director for additional
.j. manpower, if needed.
3.1.4 If the OSC becomes overcrowded, assign excess 1 personnel to report to the Auxiliary OSC on
! Elevation 239 (P.O. Shack) and have phones.there checked. .
3.1.5 Upon leaving the Operations Support Center for any reason, delegate the duties to the senior remaining operator or IP person. l* 3.1.6 Direct Realth Physics to periodically confirm , habitability using EP-330, Emergency Response Facility Embitability. 3.1.7 In the event the OSC becomes unhabitable, direct ' personnel as follows: 3.1.7.1 The OSC Coordinator, Plant Survey Group Leader and up to 5 EP Technicians and 5 Operators report to the MRF Room in the Control Room. l 3.1.7.2 All others report to the Maintenance Shop. l 4.0 APPENDICES i 4.1 Appendix EP-202-1 OSC - Operator Assignment Status Board l 4.3 Appendix EP-202-2 OSC - HP Assignment Status Board i
.%....._ r.- * . , . ,.,. g o.9, g gg.
,g S. 9.q , q p.p y 7 ,. s .p.y , . <
+4.+ . . r .. y . .
' ~ ~~
^
d q 3843116620 l EP-202, Rev. 3 Page 3 of 7 p VAW/ MPG /jmv I l 4.3 Appendix EP-202-3 OSC - Plant Status Board
, l 4.4 Appendix EP-202-4 OSC - Telephone Check List 5
i k g l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide j . guidelines for the actions required by the q Operations Support Center coordinator to activate, 1 man and manage the Operations Support Center (OSC). l 5.2 Criteria for Use l 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented;
; 5.2.1.1 When an event has been classified as an Alert, Site
! or General Emergency in accordance with EP-101,
; Classification of Emergencies, l 5.2.1.2 At the discretion of the Emergency Director.
l 5.3 Special Equipment l 5.3.1 Portable Area Radiation Monitor l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, Rev. 1 - Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. 5.4.3 NUREG 0696 - Functional Criteria for Emergency. Response Facilities. l 5.4.4 EP-330 Emergency Response Facilities Habitability
,y g ;1- gy gs;_p r ~f nr ~s. _7t ~. m - +
" 'Tn ~~~w-
%G . ,
384 66^ EP-20 ,lRev.Y' 1 l Page 4 of 7 VAW/ MPG /jmv l APPENDIX EP-202-1 l OSC - OPERATOR ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD l DATE: ESTIMATED JOB OPERATORS MAINTENANCE RETURN TIME DESCRIPTION SENT(NAME) CALLED TIME r f l i l 'l l l l I l~~....--,-.,7,,,,.:...;,,. _-.,;,-..,,....,_,..,.,.. ,
'4tiQ-3843116620 l EP-202, Rev. 3 Page 5 of 7 VAW/ MPG /jmv l APPENDIX EP-202-2 l OSC - HP ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD l DATE:
ESTIMATED JOB HP'S SENT RADIATION RETURN TIME DESCRIPTION (NAME) PROBLEMS TIME l. i l t i l i l i.- m m , m.t.,7,,- .yf 7 . .:..
. .-c... , -. . -. . .v . . . -
- a y n -
3843116620 l EP-202, Rev. 3 Page 6 of 7 VAW/ MPG /jmv l APPENDIX EP-202-3 l OSC PLANT STATUS BOARD l UNIT l RX LEVEL TIME EMERGENCY CLASS: 13 KV Bus 1: 2: HPCI: Condensate Pumps At B: C: RCIC: Recirc Pumps At B: 4 KV Bus D 1: D 2: D 3: D 4: Diesel D 1: D 2: D 3: D 4: RHR As B: C: Dr RHRSW A B: C: Dr Core Spray As B: C D
- ESW At B: C: D CRD At B:
Pumps A B C: SBLC Valves A B: C: SBGT SBGT Filter A Fans At B: SBGT Filter B Containment H2 Recomb. A B: Air Compressors At B: Service Air Backup Service Air
- q. . ;--..,..-.,.,.;.. , ,. . . .. . . . . ...,...-.1 . . , . - . _ . . . . . . _ _ _ . . . . . , . .
..y. -
Q'.h ' 3843116620 , l EP-202, Rev. 3 Page 7 of 7 VAW/ MPG /jmv i 4 l APPENDIX EP-202-4 l OSC - EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT INVENTORY LIST 3 I 'TCheckthefollowingphonesfordialtone' l YES/NO ; 1 l l l
'l .
I
'i il r YES/NO ,
I I 1 l I I . l i I j YES/NO l I - l i I ,
. , i i i
, \ "
! ( i f
. l i.. ..- .. .. . . . . .._ _ -- - . -.. .. = ,. =. .,. .- =.-m .---=r, n nre = - : ::=== : ==- ---
, .= - - ~ - - - -_~ . .
. . y1 1 3843116630 EP-203, Rev. 3 Page 1 of 18 VAW M G/jmv L PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
, LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE r
EP-203 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) ACTIVATION o 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 First person arriving at the EOF shall activate the EOF by performing the necessary steps in this procedure. 1.2 Communicator for the Site Emergency Coordinator a shall man communication lines and log information. I
! 1.3 Site Emergency Coordinator shall direct operation j at the EOF.
1.4 Status Board Recorders shall obtain and post information. 2.0 ACTIO_ tis. ,IMMEDI ATE t~ PERSONNEL ARE DESIGNATED AND ASSIGNED GENERAL DUTIES IN THE . EOF BY EP-279, EOF GROUP PHONE LIST. 2.1 First person arriving shall: 2.1.1 Obtain keys, if necessary, for EOF from the i Plymouth Dispatch office and open EOF. 2.1.2 Perform appendices EP-208-8 and EP-208-9. (O-,k , l 2.1.3 Assignthefirstavailablepersontotb\en. trance l of the EOF to control access until secuglty arrives and to establish a log for the purposes.of.,,~ ,.. personnel accountability. N >' ., , ;) ENSURE THAT PERSONNEL SIGN.INNANn OUT AND THAT ONLy INDIVIDUALS ON ACCESS LIST OR., CLEARED BY SENIOR ,
- PERSON PRESENT ARE ALLOWED TO, ENTER THE EOF.
...3..,_..... _v % _-.. y; - w . .; .rm-+ ,,- m w .7.y- 7--- '-r _
_s - __-.-
__ - m ___ _ EP-203, Rev. 3 Page 2 of 18 { VAW/ MPG /jmv
! 2.1.4 Assign an individual (as soon as one is available),
the duties of the Site Emergency Coordinator Communicator. The Communicator shall perform the steps outlined in Section 2.2. 2.2 Communicator for the Site Emergency Coordinator shall k ( ' 2.2.1 Use EP-279, Emergency Operations Facility Group ( Phone List to call in additional personnel to staff j the EOF, if necessary. 4 2.2.2 Inform the Site Emergency Coordinator when the
, above communications capabilities have been
[ verified or of any problems, f 2.2.3 As personnel arrive, man communications lines on i the Site Emergency coordinator's desk and maintain j a communications log containing information j received from and sent to other facilities and 4 other organizations. ENSURE ALL PERTINENT ACTIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS ARE LOGGED. 2.3 Security personnel shall 2.3.1 Post themselves at front and back of EOF. [ 2.3.2 Control access to EOF by allowing only people who [1 are on access list or cleared by senior person in
- EOF access to EOF. Access list is in Security Desk.
t 1 3.0 ACTIONS FOLLOW-UP SITE EMERGENCY COOPDINATOR SHALL ASSUME CONTROL AFTER HE HAS i ARRIVED AND IS COGNIZANT OF THE SITUATION. 3.1 Site Emergency coordinator shall: F 1 3.1.1 Assign personnel to be status board keepers and direct them to perform the steps outlined in section 3.3 of this procedure.
~
- a. LGS Plant Parameter Status Board
[ ,
- b. Plant Parameter Trends Board i
j c. Event Chronology Status Board i L y g - h _ .
u-m -- e--. .-_. - :__ q 4 g . 5 3 EP-203, Rev. 3 1 Page 3 of 18 ' If '
- d. Staff Assignment Status Board VAW/ MPG /jmv
- e. Headquarters Support Requests Status Board e
- f. Offsite Communicetions Status Board
?
- g. Radiological Status Board 3.1.2 Ensure that an individual has been assigned as the Site Emergency Coordinator's Communicator.
4 3.1.3 Inform the Technical Support Center when the Emergency Operations Facility is operational, manned and in control of its designated responsibilities. f 3.1.4 Brief the EOF Staff, periodically on the status of the emergency and pertinent plant conditions. 3.1.5 Direct transmission of all Status Board information to appropriate Headquarters Emergency Support Center Status Board Recorders. 3.1.6 Perform actions in EP-120 Site Emergency coordinator. 3.2 Dose Assessment Team Leader shall: ' 3.2.1 Complete the Dose Assessment Team Activation in accordance with EP-210, Dose Assessment Team Activation. - 3.3 Status Board Recorders shall: 3.3.1 Fill in their assigned status . board (s) . Format and content of the Status Boards are given in the following appendices:
- a. Appendix EP-203-1, LGS Plant. Parameter Status.
Board
- b. Appendix EP-203-2, Plant Parameter Trends Status Board
- c. Appendix EP-203-3, Event Chronology Status Board
, d. Appendix EP-203-4, Staff Assignment Status Board e
# l 'l % _ g _ # 5" -
-. . _ _ . , . , u. mu =. . c_. 2 . m. ..__ __ . . . - m- _ _ ..
2
, . . ?
. s EP-203, nev. 3 Page 4 of 18 VAW/ MPG /jmv
- e. Appendix EP-203-5, Headquarters Support Requests Status Board
- f. Appendix EP-203-6, Offsite Communications Status Board . -
- g. Appendix EP-203-7, Radiological Data Status Board , .. e .
)
l I 3.3.2 Contact the following individuals for the various Status information.
- a. TSC Plant Parameter Status Board Recorder for a
Plant Status information.
- b. TSC Event Chronology Status Board Recorder for Event Chronology information.
k- , c. Site Emergency Coordinator's Communicator for i Staff Assignment Information and Headquarters j Support Requests. l! d. Emerg%ncy Director's Communicator Site j Emergency Coordinator's Communicator or Control 1 Room Communicator for offsite communication information.
- e. Field Survey Group Leader for field survey data.
- f. Dose Assessment. Team Leader for radiological ,
data. 3.3.3 Post appropriate information on assigned status board and maintain a log of all status board entries. . 3.3.4 Review and update the status boards as changes in plant conditions or information warrant. 3.3.5 Inform the appropriate coordinator, Team or Group
, Leader as significent changes in status board information are noted.
4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-203-1 LGS Plant Parameter Status Board 4.2 EP-203-2 Plant Parameter Trends Board i [ TNLDg.,, * && ,%RRY "*Cr*"T'"" * ';" ' 3 7' ** #:'m ""*'".~ '7s?! W"" # # #~'" ~ ~ ~ ~': ^ # ' - ~7~T ' pf-y~rsq;': "'
i m- - g 7.s.',T' . l l' g s - EP-203, Rev. 3 lj - % Page 5 of 18
- ~;f
# 1 ^
, VAW/ MPG /jmv f' ::' -.
~~
4.3 EP-203-3 y,. Event Chronology Status Board $ c 4.4 EP-203-4 Staff Assignment Status Board 45 EP-203-5 Headquarters Support Requests Status s 5[' r '
, Board 4.6 EP-203-6 Offsite Communications Status Board 4.7 EP-203-7 Radiological Status Board Y
, 4.8 EP-203-8 EOF Phone Check List f
ip 4.9 EP-203-9 EOF Equipment Activation 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION . 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide
- guidelines for the activation, manning, and conduct
'of operations of the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF).
5.2 Criteria for Use The EOF is activated when an event has been
- i. classified as a site Emergency or General Emergency ,
in accordance with EP-101, Classification of L Emergencies, or at the discretion of the Site j Emergency Coordinator or Emergency Director. 5.3 Spe. cia,1, Equipment None 5.4 References . [ 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan i 5.4.2 NUREG 0654 - Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Fmergency Response Plans
; and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants.
5.4.3 NUREG'0696 - Functional Criteria for Emergency i . Response Facilities.
~ ,; - . v : y r ~ - - - -~ v - m ---n - ;:- . : .mg- .g - ,--- y y --.
e- . ._ _ - 4 , ,
; EP-203, Rev. 3 h Page 6 of 18
( VAW/ MPG /jmv n . 1 5.4.4 EP-279 - Emergency Operations Facility Group Phone List r 5.4.5 EP-210 - Dose Assessment Team Activation o t P *
, /
p
/
i.l 1 t Je E l r t .. [ s O
"A [ ' "
,ta^ g.~ aa = "
R9 =,, M > w_ V ,_
* ! ,_f, ._g 4 _
.-' -dj' ,_ }
~: '
^
.a__.' '
Ai_a :2& _a_ . . _ ~ z' 3 EP-203, Ibv. 3 "y Page 7 of 18.
.1 VA11A1PG/jav ~.Id APPEtOIX EP-203-1 i .[ IES PIJNP PMW1EITR STA'IUS - UNIT PD. i Radiological Paramters Time Reactor Parameters Time DATE:
tbrth Stack uCi/cc uCi/sec Ibwer % tbrth Stack Flow cfm Invel inches * . South Stack uCi/cc uci/sec Pressure psig , .?- South Stack Flow cfia DAf Rad Honitor R/hr - 1 lj R/X Ehcl Exh arAir Reactivity Control Time Invel control Tinc < J1 lefuel Floor Exh. mr/hr i Aj ar/hr 8 Of nods not inserted Air Mector Offgas F.W.A. on thavail/heason
'ti
. RAf itnitor cpn B 1.1 C N SBIC Ini. Unavail/Deason CIO A h Heteorological Parameters Time A B i'
. B IIPCI
'll C ICIC f q Ave. Wind Directim (from) Cond. A lp Ave. Anblent Temp. degrees F SBIC Tank Level B d Precipitatim C N Stability Class C.S.A , p Wind Speed ( ) (Tower 1) Pressure Control Time B Wind Speed ( ) (Tower 2) C Wind Speed ( ) (Satellite) fBypass Valves Open D LPCI A PG1ER S.JPPLIES Time SRV's A B C D E F G 11 J K L M N S B .g Source S@ plying Unavail/ Reason Open C [, 220 kV Closed D fj 1 offsite les Open RIRSi A .3 500 kv B
- 2 offsite C i D-1 D }
D-2 Cond.
, D-3 Trans.
D-4 Defuel Trans. Bus Offsite Dieself Unavail SBIC D1 1 D1 2 - D1 3
.i D1 4 7 4
e t'
_ . - - . .g-5 7 EP-203, new. 3 0 Page 8 of 18 ) Y VAWASPG/ jay
./. .
APPDOIX EP-203-1 i,- ICS PIJNP PARAMEPER SPNIUS - UNIT 10. (CONT'D) ' 5 DM'E E_ A' . y Cmtainment Paramters Drywell pressure psig Containant Control Tim ,. Drywell 'Ibmp f i g Suppression Ibol Tenp f )) Suppressim Pool Level Containant 402 ft Sup. Sup. yf 4I12 Pool Pool DAf S/D Unavail/ RIIR Cool Spray Spray Cool Reason A )
$ B l .h3 C D
[ i, RIRtSN Q1 Unavail/ Reason , A j B -
; C i? D l'.:i 3] Isolatims Isolated /Exceptims ,j': I MSIV ,l II RIIR III INCU
- i VII Cmtainent
! , VII MIfC l SGTS Os Unavail/ Reason
. Train A B ,. , 5 Fan A , B i Cmtainent 11 2 Recombiners 01 Unavail/ Reason A B l-p l-
d,
;1 .1 9 EP-203, Ibv. 3 Page 9 of 18 .i VAWA!PG/jmv n -
i- r ti C a
- d PLANT PARAMETER TRENDS * '
8j DATE:' . N 1 n TIME I . M . HEACTOR PRESS.pele REACTOR' POWER % L REACTOR LEVEL In. q l .'J :
. I oRYwaL PRESS.p4 ; .j DRYWat TEMP.%F s .
j SUPPRESSION PO31. ' i LEVELft. I'
- SUPPRESSION POOL i
TEMP. % F - GONRNACHT
' RAD. RAir HORTH S1ACK RAD UCl/sec. I t
1I I i
+ .
t e
. 9 , ~
- l 38v
., 1 jm
- vf neo/ G
-n 0 T 3 ,1 A
- s 3 N 0eA 9 2 gV
- a ; PP -
- E _ = D - R 3 A .
- O _
- B T ~; S N E U V _ E W S Y G O L O N _ O . R
- H _
C T N E _ V E . O N _ T - N 9 E V - _ E _ e e
- E .
E M 9 -
, T I -
A T l D
,8 4 3.' ) j:i i $iil4.?
e I : ' !
.fu 4 .
.i' -: - 1 o !td1t
- 39<
_=- ; _
- t i
- 7 .' 203, Ibv. 3 Page 11 of 18 -
I p VAWA110/jmv 1 . p APPD OIX EP-203-4 .
>\
; STAFF ASSIGNINP SPNIUS DONO '
Dates o j TI'ILE NME IOCATIOtl
~
SlIPP SUPHlINPD0lWT
,, SilIFT SUPPRVISOR i
DIDCHEY DIRIE'IOR [ PERSOt3HL SAFE'IY TEN 1 ITADER FIRF/DM1 AGE TFAM LDOIR i.
- !r SITE D1E20. CODIO.
lilE'Ill IllYSICS/CIIR1. CODIO. i i DOSE ASSESSt1DTP TEN! ITADER f CilD1ISTRY SM1PLIPC & MIALYSIS TDM IDR. 1 1 FIEID SURVEi GROUP IEADER 1;
., IDF LIAISDN - CORP. COM.
JJ. 3 (.] PDOCIIURE SUPIORT CODIVItWIOR Xi 4 PIANtlItG M0 SCIIHXILItB CODIDItWIDR 0 1 11IIII. D UR. LIAISON
- d
)i ELIC. ENGR. LIATEDN E j} M1ETCDKY SUPPORT OFFICER a 1 toe SECURIw
- l. -
[.a 1, M1ETCDXN PREPAREDtESS C00TOINNIOR it , I
_. . _ _ . . . . _ . _ . _ . . . . . . _ _ - . _ _ _ _ . , _ . _ . _ _ . . . _ _ . . _ _ . . . . . . . . . _ _ _ _ . ___a_,... j I 203, Rev. 3
- . age 12 of 18 '
VN4/1frC/jmv V l'
...HEpDQUARTERS SUPPORT ... RE. QUEST STATUS BOARD l' DATE 1
TIME SUBMITTED TO ITEM RESPONSE STATUS { t l i . d J. e 1 - 1 1 e
![
l 6
, a . ._. -- -._ - - -
{ [! i.. ~ D e T N E 38= 1 j M M ~ vf O ~ k o /c I i w C 3
,1 k /
3 w E ' 0ea 2 gv D S
- a N
- PP R O E A P S
O E B R . S
- . U T
- r. ^
A J. T S T S N O I S T A N C C' _ O I I N T U A M M - C I O N C U E O I V T I ~ i S 6 ~
~
M F F O O C ~ E T I S
~- F F
O O e e E M 4 I
.- I T O
,' i 1
'o
. . . . - . . - c. ...:.-. .
= = = - :. =- .: .t . .. :. . =
3
+
o, 3 EP-203,11cv. 3 . Page 14 of 18 VMFA11E/jmv i l, ' I ti d lRADI.OI,.OGICAL STATUS..p.O.ARD f tI l'e DATE !i TIME - AM PM .
, s p ,.RELE AS E
. .O. CCURRING . ANTICIPATED' WHEN Ans ' Pas
. LOCATION '~~ ~
OF RELEASE NORTM. STACK U1 SOUTN STACK . OTHE,R
' ' t, i I '
U2 SO,UT'N STACK ij E' STIMATED DURATION ON RELEASE NAS. *; RELEASE MONITOREO - YES NO
- i. .
N - NORTN VENT U1 SOUTN VENT USSOUTN VENT DESCRISE
- n .
!' HOSLE. G AR UCI/CC UCI/SEC - UCl/CC UCl/CC - }N, LODINE; UCl/CC . UCI/CC UCI/CC
) ! FLOW RATE _CFM _CFM' CEM e-
!. WIND SPEED MPN DIRECTION (FROM)
. }; ~ ',- STABILTY CLASS id i; . CENTERLINE. .P LUME. DOSE ESTIM ATED INTERGR ATED DOSE TIME TO AFFECTED 1
DOSE ARRIVAL RATg" -(SASE RELEASE DURATION) REACil PAG SECTORS . PROJECTION TIME W.S. THY p: W.B. THY.- W.S. THY. ? l-k* e' I l > 1; l f [ i' i p RE. COMMENDED PRO. TE.CTIVE ACTION. REC.OMMENDAT. IONS: e
- - I
. I
EP-203, Rev. 3 Page 15 of 18 VAS/ MPG /jmv i APPENDIX EP-203-8
,/ EOF PHONE CHECKOFF LIST
.;:. eu.s.; ^ :m .: . 7 )
- g. . ;,;; ; :- f. - q.b'.4f. . BRP - Rad m :. . <
..s !: ,e(%, g,/ , 4.. . e ,7-i
- C, ;;.c.M. . .i. 'J -f;
.1, BRP - Tech. --------.
" . . , uz..,,.. :
.. . .. i s
,p & :- . ; . ..,, : . ,.m .. ; '., + .f Dose Assessment ----------
. s .'v,. w . ~;.-c -
. , ('1 # ,-
fp..
? c. .N f( k@m$," . , w,e, Dose g...
,. f. Asses./Fld. Survey ----------
. . .~y .x pp
-1..-~. :> -
N.,f.k[:,kl. ;rghk by j ..r.y. ' Dose Assessment Table ---------- u'.~ . x(,'_.9
. ,2--
.e ,.;y .i ;3h,, .
Dose Assessment Table ----------
,;5- jyA,<.: r;;t:h;.;
- :,. , .,; ,a('!pgy%g
- ,c.w:. .
t d#, i: t f.y. w. - ,.' t,-'jf8 ' . Z? g.J
; :- i HP & Chem. Table ----------
I.hN,. d-, .~SNM .; s ...;M HP&C ---------- t g g
. J ;,g < e i
- 1; , d -aJi.:$'e. y . p 7f- c.04 - --- 3.'. HP & Chem. Table i ----------
; _w ,_ ,,
=== -
~- = m
- m. f. <.w yt Near HP & Chem. Coordinatoc ----------
g ,g g.y-- p_:.ekKPW.c..s - Gxn : x y %.v. s w. Near HP & Chem. Coordinator ----------
/W 4c : yA. ..-t p- M C_,. -
, .r: .s f,3 x1py y% :,n b y te
[.n:-j./]7.,]Qg[.. ERFDS/ Operator ----------
'9. : ,: ; :: . <^ ;m .a . . . .. .,- :n. ,< . +.e .:.
. t . 1.c. .g . ; . RMMS Modem ----------
;[, s ; . . .v.. .... . . . . ? .4.gm$ r , . ,..
p, q. ..
- e. ., c: :.. . . x. n 2 ,,.4 4
- f, dp :E., .[.Y J.l,4j f y Field Survey ----------
.. - - e n, . m L
.- g .
! .m E. p.,fy. um.Q'.f.Nd., a . . .k
. [%e Field Survey ----------
, A- m. m.
..,~:.,.,.,. : , p:.-
, n - .. ..
.. . .yg t. *
- i h g.(I[i.3.g. ... .m.gdy NRC Table ----------
- p . L.p
'fg .27.;_;m' w.;
y . r. 7..e:.;;'.u.p.~.g;A.,,, - NRC Table ----------
... v.s.m
.z...{h d:hy .,p; t.'[. $. ..
-v 4 J.f.)U ..l;. j/]'%(; NRC Table ----------
'.8 %..x ,:r ,; Q Q;; ' .> ' t:' .
'$ 09,,.8.
- f. .
. ,. . NRC ----------
[%'.=y ,: ,v wi..w 3 . ;. . : .
. . .-;y ..s
.).y.q ,. , .-;. . _.. .::. _
..; -,t- , (i t ,
m a ; 7 y 6.' ra.p: u ' \ ' t,.. q
,,1
. .'2.l.. :a.
2 i f- -}.
,h C Table ----------
. .- 4 kdc s bf 4.:RW ' ud
. NRC Table ----------
AtfG-U; 4Qti. 'nh . 5,f n 1LH. M6"Y'.h?y).l NRC Table ----------
- a f. - s . v: +.
Q
l i r l l l EP-203, Rev. 3 l Page 16 of 18 VAS/ MPG /jmv I i , l' APPENDIX EP-203-8 (CONT'D) EOF PHONE CHECKOFF LIST /' q
, . ,,~ .: ..: ,
f
> .y fq: 3
..... .. . c.; 4- :~ . -
s- ...
., .., . . , y ; - .,
.: . 34 .
NRC Desk i
., .v -
- i -; ...
..:' . ..-. .:f.. .... ..;,...j.. ... : .:9 . W. . . . .S. ,.
NRC Table ---------- t m . , :.; . .
. . n. - 7. : .c . . e. . .
n . . ; .. ' ;, .:
., ~ :. upc Table 7,,.,, . .
y w..
.f. ,.....,.:....
- y i.'. ;.
.,~ - ..;
'+ j.' j' .". S ,' C . . g; .':'7;$0 _.- .l 7
.., :s n :, ;< m. > .~. ; * ::' .. .?. NRC Tab 1e p ;u.pt.w v-
..; 5., e - - q . .t. : . -
c ., r . . . 1 :
., x44,v . SEC Communicator's Desk
.g,.............4 ,:; '. ,.J. .d.
... m .i : ,n .:
t- . ; ... .. ~. y - ((J.m.iv (. ,e'D 4 (. . ;TJd [Q[Ik. .q,k,. . SEC Communicator's Desk
~
N-h ; . .N N l ; .. . ,' :.;.,w'-f. . ,.- -!k l:w[ t ry'. .'
+Q. .. ; : .,. , . . ~ ~ , .~.... . . . . ' . mm.
. .n. t m
- a. s ----- ----
d k i'i. i,f.,'. A h. f.k . ,. . :v. 2 :Y.'n.s . , ' ll ;i Md I; 9: . - :;- 'g; b;.. '.9;'.;7. .: - , c.. y 3ec's cesk ----- ---- ig i.s. .,4 \: :?. : ;. ' ... : e * :. ;h, a@j ' o '
&]p. :yy:,; ,C,.'. maH.h Q .?;, f. . ' f..L . ] w' [.i:. Sec's . . r .2 Desk ----------
gs ' .. ' ' m t. -
. S .- ;. _; .. + a':.,... . y . . 7: y'v; ,, * [: ; ] , ; 3 ; :. .Q; .
. . /m ..g f -: 9.gnw., mergency Preparedness M2YY. '~: y .- ,:. .:...... ----------
.. p
\.,.;. . ;f. ;
l
.q, 2. -2
- . _J
' :: 'e . :f' .y. ; .n.: :kW ECF Corp. C c:~.m . Liaiscn
.x. 4 y;... .,' .W.$:
w..::g e_.. .
.v. .
*::a .
, . . , , . . :, j 9
' ' . ;- . l '_ .: *-y 4 ;
< f t. :.,..;r . , .; e.! .;;,-/ , . ECF Co p. C cm:n . *iaison ----------
. t s..;% . ;%
.y. . i; .. . .:. ... ;::<. -
. ,..*. ' , .;.;.' , f,: .".: .
p -
. .- s. . .
i f. ., .;. . . . ' i %: *. ?. .. , ,1 :. t.f. .Q .... .. . Security ---------- _ l . ' :. . :
.Y "'- ' ; % h ,'
[.w . . N..
.. . . . . . ,. . h.y ,fi[.
. . . . .ve
. Security ----------
' .: . n 7.f :' . g. ( ,{ g;:g. . 2 .
. 1.W ECF Engineering Liai" ---- -
- 3. , - . .. . . .... . ; ._
. . ; .^4
'.. ...:..u .c.. n. ?; 6 ,
g 3- % ." -
. .r...: . .;: ..s ., ;.L. . '.i.) .;; 4 1 s :; ECT E~ '~ \ ~~--
. g.. .;. :. t. , j gg a
. y.. .p y. u. ;.g::.g:4.p,
.1. s.,....r.,_,
s
, . ,..,n.
.:. ~c. .. ;
.~.&..
['.l. 2. .].[', ,. .
'. p s u1ing Cccrd.
.g, :;. .; .
. .' '; . i:. y.. .
. ;-:! :'.%;fts 1 ,, ----------
p .j. ' 4.-. ~ .t
;;;;;. ,- 1.-2. 1.7 . '.
la nn ing & Scheduling Ccord. ---------- s . .: . .: - .
.-- u .; . .. ..:
g .- 1, , .: ; . 4 ;;; .3 7. s._ f
+:;: . .: .
v d. ',
.. . c
. . . . .-K.lg. .,,,-.c.r..g . -
a
,.7-
. - u . y.
End Tab Les ---~~~~-~~
.y ....s .a y.. p.?. .'R . '. .c Y . .ys ff..'.[yNd :. q w. . p ,.{ ,,
Sec. Office ----------
; s:. : .,.. .
. t. p
- n. . .::.: -
.r
.% .. ., t . .b::..: aye :.:& :!g :..Q :;. Sec. CEEice ----------
,.....,.g...
n.6.g....:* ,, .;
..c.,., w .+ . ~e :n :
. . , .ac
.f.s. 7
.. .a..
i: .
.m;7. . ? ; ;t.) ' .'.' .
n m 7 q.~),.3>6.. . . . . .OEEice .
-m ;'- Q.:. c: a s;sSec. ) .. -----~~---
t.E. y ~;, .C :fG. c.- r .ois 5 $'M
@Q.V:.~.;if:f
-(,* .* - e:.sy. +Q';'y ';.M,- t c,
_t.
,.- MU.L F-J." q g'ggq;*K' ; ;Q' '.%. . .. f J. 3 p6..
2
- D-;#g-
[.t Sec. Cffice ---------- t t -/g.4" .4 - M
/
j w / I s t
I EP-203, Rev. 3
. Page 17 of 18 VAS/ MPG /jmv
/ '
APPENDIX EP-203-8 (CONT'D) ' , EOF PHONE CHECKOFF LIST I f i l Sec. Office ---------- ! NRC Office ---------- l NRC Office ---------- l NRC Office ---------- r i I NRC Office ;,---------- NRC Office ---------- Conference Recm ---------- l State / Local Government Office.---------- State / Local Government Office ---------- State / Local Government Office ----------
' o eception Desk ----------
5 (Near Plant Status Printer) Telecopier .' ---------- i j Telecooie- ~
,f .
,.r" J
l 4 e P 5 t ._ . . . . . . . _ . - . . _ _ . _ . - . r
EP-203, Rav. 3 Page 18 of 18 VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-203-9 - EOF EQUIPMENT ACTIVATION
- 1. Turn on Lights in EOF using switch (es) to the left of the
. door.
- 2. Turn on CRT's using posted procedures.
- 3. Check radio base station for operabi.lity.
- 4. Inform Site Emergency Coordinator or Site Emergency f
Coordinator communicator when activation is complete, and of any problems discovered. J r i L t si. lj r ii e n 4 t
, i. -..;.-._... . .
. .j . _ . - .
~ ' ~J . .
p . q - . 3843116640 "";2o8,Re;.; 1 1 7 VAW/jmv
&a h/t
- PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY a' LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-208 SECURITY TEAM 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Security Team Leader shall assign group leaders, activate the groups, and coordinate the team's activities.
1.2 Access Control Group shall perform access control activities. 1.3 Accountability Group shall perform personnel accountability activities. 1.4 Security Personnel shall maintain plant security,
'p issue emergency dosimetry to offsite support personnel, and assist in the evacuation of personnel and personnel accountability.
2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE [ 2.1 Security Team Leader shall: 2.1.1 Call or assign someone to call required Team members by using EP-278, Security Team Phone List. L 2.1.2 Assign Group Leaders from available security personnel to the following groups to perform the
- j. , duties in Section 3.1 as required for the situation:
,j-l A. Access Control j/, s \, B. Accountability [ 3
%\\\ \, 'a
\
l AT AN ALERT OR HIGHER CLASSIFICATION, THE SECURITY GATE ON THE 269' ELEVATION OF THE. TURBINE' ENCLOSURE f L SHOULD BE LOCKED. p\,'\\'-\ ' ss % [, - .- i If informed by the Emergency Direc, tor that the 2.1.3 ',. .. Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) is to.be ' ' l . activated, contact the Access Control Group Leader ~,, 1- to have personnel dispatched to the EOF. m .' .
$ s d Ni',,
I
'- ~" r+ '
~ f, ' ~'" ~
" '~ ~N 'P~" T ^M7'~"'~U T #: " ~,~3%'2D75~ 7 7 -
] , ' ']{
q . . EP-208, Rsv. 4 Page 2 of 11 VAW/jmv 2.1.4 If assembly with. accountability is announced,
- i. perform the following steps:
A. Ensure that the Access Control Group Leader assigns security personnel at the Personnel Processing , Center to assist in controlling personnel access. B. Ensure that security personnel are stationed at the appropriate personnel exit areas. C. Activate the Accountability Group to perform personnel accountability checks in accordance with EP-110, Personnel Acsembly and Accountability. 2.1.5 If informed by the Emergency Director that a site evacuation is going to be declared, perform the following: A. Ensure that the Access Control Group Leader assigns security personnel to the appropriate site access l j control points and selected offsite assembly area. j! f .B. Ensure that the Access Control Group Leader assigns security personnel to the selected personnel exit areas a.nd required protected area access control points. C.. Activate the Accountability Group to perform personnel accountability checks in accordance with EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability. D. Immediately notify the Emergency Director when the Access Control Group is at the appropriate site
- access control points and security personnel are at the selected personnel exit areas so that the site evacuation can commence.
2.1.6 Advise the Emergency Director concerning the need for support of off-site security agencies, if necessary. ( 2.1.7 Coordinate the actions of off-site security agency { personnel if their assistance is required. 2.1.8 Use checklists in Appendix EP-208-2 as necessary. l 1
....._._7.-- , . _ _ , , _ .. ... .,
y ., .y .q , . . g .-. .
w_
~
- m . EP-208, Rev. 4
. Page 3 of 11 VAW/jmv 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP -
3.1 Security Team Leader shall: 3.1.1 Review the current status of the emergency. 3.1.2 Ensure that the necessary groups are staffed and performing the appropriate sections of this procedure. Augment groups as necessary, by using EP-278, Security Team Phone List. 3.1.3 Keep the Emergency Director updated on status of the team's activities. 3.1.4 . Periodically re-evaluate the security situation and make appropriate recommendations to the Emergency Director. 3.1.5 Use checklists in appendix EP-208-2 as necessary. 3.1.6 Implement LGS Plant Protection Procedures as j appropriate. Access' Control Group shall: ] 3.2 THIS GROUP IS COMPRISED OF CONSTRUCTION SECURITY FORCE MEMBERS. THE CONSTRUCTION SECURITY SHIFT SUPERVISION IS THE APPROPRIATE CONTACT. j ACCESS TO THE SITE FOR SUPPORT PERSONNEL WITHOUT LIMERICK SECURITY BADGES DURING AN ALERT, SITE EMERGENCY AND GENERAL EMERGENCY MAY ONLY BE AUTHORIZED BY THE FOLLOWING PERSONNEL: EMERGENCY DIRECTOR SECURITY TEAM LEADER SITE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR 3.2.1 Be activated when directed by the Security Team Leader.
.- 3.2.2 Receive instructions via the best means available } (telephone, radio, etc.) and obtain traffic vests ;. from the Security stocks.
I t 1 m gg m.j.py 7m ym.-, m, . mg a g - ng7 p ; -: . : --- -- --w
;c -. 3 Y . .
1 EP-208, R0v. 4 Pcgs 4 of 11 VAW/jmv 1
' 3.2.3 Be dispatched to each of the following locations to l control access: !
A. North Parking Lot B. Main Access Gate (Gate #1) C. Gate #2 D. Back Access Gate (Post #10) E. Cross Road Outside Gate #1 (Evergreen and Sanatoga Roads) SECURITY PERSONNEL NEED NOT BE POSTED AT ' A GATE THAT WILL REMAIN LOCKED DURING AN EMERGENCY. 3.2.4 If the EOF is activated, be dispatched to the EOF to perform the actions in EP-203, Emergency Operations Facility (EOF.) Activation. 3.2.5 During assembly with accountability:
- a. Dispatch Access Control Group members to the Personnel Processing Center to control personnel 1 access.
J.2.6 During a site evacuation:
- a. Control access and vehicle traffic by providing security personnel,at locations required by Appendix EP-208-1, Exit Point Staffing for Site, Evacuations.
- b. Immediately notify the Security Team Leader when i security personnel are stationed at the required site access control points so the site evacuation can begin.
3.3 Accountability Group shall: l 3.3.1 For Personnel Accountability Check without Site 3 Evacuation:
- a. Perform a personnel accountability check as detailed in EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability.
[ 3.3.2 For Site Evacuation
- a. Report to the Administration Guard Station and 1 . perform personnel accountability in accordance with
! EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability.
] _ _ b *i 7 -
@-g W as -w - - -
_ -----w- --i.w- - -.m-,,. ,, , -w---- ---w-- + - - -w,- - ew e
t EP-208, Rev. 4 Page 5 of 11 VAW/jmv 3.4 Security Personnel shall: 3.4.1 Maintain plant security in accordance with Plant Protection procedures, and as directed by the
~
Security Team Leader. 3.4.2 In the event of an Assembly with Accountability and Site Evacuation, assist personnel in the evacuation of affected areas and the performance of personnel accountability in accordance with EP-110. 3.4.3 Issue emergency dosimetry as directed by the Personnel Safety Team Leader for incoming personnel per PP-2, Emergency Admittance Procedure. 3.4.4 For assembly with accountability:
- a. Assist the Accountability Group with the evacuation of non-essential personnel from the Protected Area.
- b. Perform the instructions detailed in EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability.
3.4.5 For Site Evacuation: I a. Control access to the protected area by providing security personnel at locations required by Appendix EP-208-1, Exit Point Staffing for Site Evacuation.
- b. Perform the instructions detailed in EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability.
- c. Immediately notify the Security Team Leader when security personnel are positioned and ready at the personnel exit areas.
4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 Appendix EP-208-1 Exit Point Staffing for Site Evacuation. 4.2 Appendix EP-208-2 Security Team Leader checklists. i a e
. SP,*r] M r9* ++M* N W ** *wy****-=** - t Nw ~* *****%m*--N* * ** m "* - + * * * %^=-^e*-**** == =
l' , . i jr EP-208, Rsv. 4 Page 6 of 11 . VAW/jmv 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the activation and conduct of operation for the Security Team. 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented whenever; 5.2.1.1 Personnel assembly is announced; 5.2.1.2 Alert or higher classification is declared; 5.2.1.3 Site Evacuation is declared; 5.2.1.4 The Emergency Director deems the team's activation and operations necessary. 5.3 Special Equipment 5.3.1 Traffic Vests 5.4 References 5.4.1 Limerick Generation Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 Limerick Generating Station Security Plan and Procedures
- 5.4.3 EP-278 Security Team Phone List b -
5.4.4 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability 5.4.5 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation-5.4.6 PP-2 Emergency Admittance Procedure b h l i
,,,e _ .--
. = . . . .
E EP-208, R3v. 4 l Page 7 of 11 VAW/jav s : f- APPENDIX EP-208-1 1 EXIT POINT STAFFING FOR SITE EVACUATION (1) DAY SHIFT AFTERNOON SHIFT NIGHT SHIFT TSC PERSONNEL l EXIT AREA X ADMIN PERSONNEL EXIT AREA X X X TURBINE DECX GATE - 269'(4) X NORTH vrnICLE ACCESS GATE X SOuTu vr.nICLE ACCESS GATE X COOLING TOWER GATE X NORTH PARKING LOT X X - MAIN ACCESS GATE (GATE #1) X X X GATE #2 X X BACK ACCESS GATE (POST 10) X CORNER SANATOGA tr EVERGREEN ROADS X X X OFFSITE ASSEMBLY AREA (SEE NOTE 2) X X X NOTES: (1) Security personnel need not be stationed at a gate which is to remain locked during the Emergency. i (2) The offsite assembly area is either Cromby Generating Station or Limerick Airport. + (3)_ This should be locked at an Alert classification or higher. G
-9 .t . v.. y g ,-p,-, - - - - * - p.- -
V v w--1 '- --*-e-9w-+ m e--==w '" ~ -+- *' - ' "'
~ ~
[ , EP-208, RGv. 4 Page 8 of 11 VAW/jmv q APPENDIX EP-208-2 SECURITY INFORMATION ONLY Notice of Personnel Arrival DATE: TIME: Time of Notice: Time of Arrival: _
- 1. Names of Persons Social Security Number A. A.
B. B. C. C. D. D. E. E. 4 F. F. t
- 2. Where personnel are arriving from i
l'
- 3. Name of person individuals are to see i.
i 4. Escorted by:
- 5. Security Clearance Basis if unescorted access granted NAME SSN COMMENT i
.i
^-
1 4 B. l . j C. l l i - e' * * '- '
. . 4 4 . .) , , ,[ [ _ __ , y g ..,,m__[,
EP-208, Rev. 4 Page 9 of 11 VAW/jmv APPENDIX EP-208-2 SECURITY INFORMATION ONLY Notice of Vehicle Arrival DATE: TIME:
- 1. Type of Vehicle
~ 2. License Number
- 3. Company Truck registation number
- 4. Name of Driver
- 5. Helper (If any)
- 6. Expected arrival time -
- 7. Actual arrival time
'{ 1 I 8"h k P# O 8
EP-208, Rav. 4 Page 10 of 11 VAW/jmv APPENDIX EP-208-2 SECURITY INFORMATION ONLY Injured Person HLf;ory DATE: TIME:
- 1. Name of Person Injured
- 2. Social Security Number
- 3. Payroll Number
- 4. Home Address
- 5. Company Injured Person Employed by
- 6. Contamination (If any)
- 7. How did injury happen?
- 8. Where did accident happen? (Location) -
Location of gate required for access to protected area
- 9. Under what circumstances did accident happen?
I t
- 10. Was ambulance called? (At what time?)
1 I
- 11. Time of ambulance arrival
- 12. Time of ambulance departure
- 13. Where was injured taken? (Hospital name) -
( 9.-- _. _M_ _ M4WP _ ya #ep4 j ,#
~# '
d "- +
' V P, #
EP-208, RGv. 4 Page 11 of 11 VAW/jmv APPENDIX EP-208-2 SECURITY INFORMATION ONLY Notice of Release DATE: TIME:
- 1. Notice of Site Evacuation ,
A. Ascertain from Dose Assessment. Team Leader the plume direction , j B. Note the course of plume so that gates or posts in the plume path can be evacuated. , 1) Annunciate this information to Operation Security and Construction Security
- 2) Check with Security Forces to make sure that Security Force Members are not in path, make sure all gates, posts.in path are locked and secured.
l
- 3) Ensure by checking with H.P. that the planned path taken by rover patrols does not take them through plume path.
I 1
- i 1 -
W% eix .
~ . -: ~
m ,j - . . g no-. 3843116650 EP-210 Rev. 3 Page 1 of 4 VAW/ /rgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-210 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Shift Technical Advisor (STA) performs dose , assessment activities until relieved by the Dose Assessment Team Leader. l.2 Dose Assessment Team Leader directs the activities of the Dose Assessment and Field Survey Groups and advises the Emergency Director on Protective Action Recommendations. i l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE . l 2.1 Shif t Technical Advisor shall~: 2.1.1 Perform necessary dose calculations with the RMMS
, computer (using EP-315) or manually using the following procedures:
EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for . Airborne Releases EP-318 Liquid Release Dose Calculation Method for Drinking Water l EP-319 Fish Ingestion Pathway Dose Calculation . EP-325 Use of Containment Radiation Monitor to ' - Estimate Release Source Term ; ," s ' ,
.)?,
- '. ~
2.1.2 Advise the Emergency Director on protective action recommendations in accordance with epa 3I7,s .
.,Ji Determination of Protective Action.'Recommen'dati'ons. 5
( \ ',' * ,,, , 4 ,1 '>
)-
l 2.2 The Dose Assessment Team Leader shall: '
,,v c ,,
l 2.2.1 Upon notification that the TSC is to be activa.ted and prior to reporting members to the TSC, implement EP-294, Dose Assessment Team Phone List. -
%,s\',
W.
\
l
,m . ,, , . m . , , s;: au s
L v EP-210 Rev. 3 Page 2 of 4 L VAW/ MPG /rgs l 2.2.2 Contact the Shift Technical Advisor to receive an update on plant status and Dose Assessment actions which have been taken. 2.2.3 Assemble and brief Dose Assessment Team members
. including the Field Survey Group Leader. -
l 2.2.4 Direct the team members to perform dose calculations with the RMMS computer (using EP-315) or manually using the following procedures: , EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases EP-318 Liquid Release Dose Calculation Method for Drinking Water SP-319 Fish Ingestion Pathway Dose calculation
- EP-325 Use of Containment Radiation Monitor to j Estimate Release Source Term
- d. ! 2.2.5 Request the appropriate number of personnel.to form Field Survey Squad (s) from the Personnel Safety Team
]' t . Leader. A SQUAD IS COMPRISED OF A HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN AND A DRIVER , l 2.2.6 Contact the Emergency Director when the Dose Assessment Team is ready to assume responsibility - l for dose assessment activities. l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Dose Assessment Team Leader shall: l 3.1.1 Advise the Emergency Director on protective action recommendations in accordance with EP-317, Determination of Protective Action Recommendations. I 3.1.2 Coordinate the placement of Field Survey groups, through the Field Survey Group Leader and coordinate
! l with the Technical Support Group Leader periodically l to ascertain plant status and impact of operator 1 actions on releases.
4 i
- l i
m . ;9yj 9y'. '. dL ; v_. _..
.- N- $5hl. - : Q,0 '
- c'
TL . a . .. EP-210 Rev. 3' Page 3 of 4 1; VAW/ MPG /rgs
]
l 3.1.3 Report dose projection and field survey results to ' offsite organizations, as requested by the Emergency Director. Ensure that the field survey results are coordinated with the offsite agencies. (e .g . , sampling locations are in agreement - ESE-5.3 is at the intersection of Bechtel Road and Old State Road). l 3.1.4 Contact the Load Dispatcher or the National Weather Service for an extended weather forecast. 3.1.5 Keep the Emergency Director apprised of release rate, meterological trends, and any changes which require a modification to the protective action g recommendation. 3.1.6 Request inplant and effluent sampling as necessary from the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader
.to provide data which would improve dose projections.
i 3.1.7 Prior to tran,sferring responsibility to the
! Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) , inform the Dose Assessment Team Leader at the EOF of the following: -
a. h)I j Status and location of Field Survey Squads >
- b. Results of last dose calcula, tion l
h
~
- c. Any ongoing release and projected duration l d. Current protective. action recommendation p .
- e. Plant status as affecting dose assessment
] 3.1.8 Transfer Dose Assessment responsibility to EOF on L the concurrence of the Emergency Director, the Site Emergencf Coordinator .and the Dose Assessment Team j Leader at the EOF.
D ' l c l 4.0 APPENDICES l None 1 - I, . 1 [ l
~ _J ; 8 %if M y @ Bc @ yy % .i4 N 9 m M : @ M4ffg t t W 3 o sm n . c 7 .. 1
1d .. EP-210 Rev. 3 Page 4 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose
? The purpose of this procedure is cc provide I
guidelines _for the activation of the Dose Assessment P h} x l Team in the Technical Support Centor (TSC) and the transfer of Dose Assessment functions to the p Emergency Operations Facility (EOF). l 5.2 Criteria for Use [ 5.2.1 This procedure should be implemented whenever an actual or potential release of radioactive material occurs at the site boundary in excess of technical
! specifications.
5.2.2 The Dose Assessment Team should be activated and
, this procedure also implemented at the discre' tion of j- the Emergency Director or when the Technical Support !! Center (TSC) is activated.
_l 5.3 Special Equipment None rf24 l 5.4 References 5.4.1 EP-316 Cumulative Population and Near Real-Time
- Emergency Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases Manual Method l 5.4.2 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations l 5.4.3 EP-318 Liquid Release Dose Calculations Method for Drinking Water
, l 5.4.4 EP-319 Fish Ingestion Pathway Dose Calculation l 5.4.5 EP-325 Use of Containment Radiation Monitor to Estimate Release Source Team l 5.4.6 EP-222 Field Survey Group lc 5.4.7 EP-315 Calculation of Offsite Doses During a l~ Radiological Emergency Using RMMS in the Manual Mode l r ( , 9 yM3;isc4s c 3kihjjN:IMej,Mfj;t%/4@.d4NM; i.3 + 1iM'I' * .C '-
y J 3843116660 g EP-211, Rev. O Page 1 of 16 P nip PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY / LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLE!M TING PROCEDURE j EP-211 FIELD SURVEY GROUP '1 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Field Survey Groue Leader shall direct the actions of the Field Survey Group members. 1.2 Field Survey Group Members shall conduct field surveys. 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE 2.1 Field Survev Group Leader (FSGL) shall: 2.1.1 Report to the Technical Support Center (TSC). 2.1.2 Discuss the situation with the Dose Assessment Team This discussion should include: the Leader. !. potential for release, the magnitude of the
- l. radioactive source term, meteorological conditions and potential for change, and'the number of field
. survey squads needed.
y . 3 2.1.3 Coordinate the formation of the necessary 4 of field survey squads from personnel su pl ! he 3} Operations Support Center (OSC). , j ts F of a Health Physics Technicia r q , s Obtain drivers and vehi p s8f' ,y '
~
2.1.4 add Damage Team Leader and hav theme )rs \g TSC. V
\.
2.1.5 Direct field su Y ad ,( $ 3 in emergency.1,
=
dosimet y.
, g '4 ,,. '- g" Dg \ (-. i } ,
- m. ' , , .
N,.' 2.1.6 Instruc 1 .T icians. $+4 cure \and5'v-invento b utred num M M ligid'..sdrvey kits
.and radi per form e'id . ument htfecks.- The radios ar located in % ! *.c .id 6 Assessment Room in the Technical Suppor', 'en't 'and th'e' field survey. ' , ' . ' , .
kits are located in tb m -,1ge closets in the- - g ;# Personnel Entry Area of the TGehnical Support ,.' Center. - e
**3 , d
't ,e'# .
I s ,
$N ' er f3 *[ } ii , *
- f ],\ '# ~
~ --
EP-211, Rev. O Page 2 of 16 REL/nlp 2.1.7 Discuss the situation with each' squad, assign each squad a unique color designation, and direct them to specific initial locations in the field. Meteorological conditions, expected radiation levels, and other hazards shall be used to determine the positioning of field survey groups. 2.1.8 Notify Security Team Leader of the names of field survey squad members so that they will not be [ detained upon leaving the site. L . 2.2 Field Survey Scuad Members shall: . 2.2.1 Report to the Field Survey Groep Leader (FSGL) at the Technical Support Center er the Personnel Safety , Team Leader after the EOF has been activated. f 2.2.2 Obtain a field survey kit and a radio. l 2.2.3 Break the seal on the field sucvey kit and check equipment for operability including source check of i survey equipment. Document equipment checks on EP-1 211-2. 1 IF THE SEAL ON THE FIELD SURVEY KIT WAS ALREADY BROKEN, PERFORM AN INVENTORY OF THE KIT CONTENTS. 4 2.2.4 Obtain emergency dosimetry (0-1500 mR and 0-5 R Direct Reading Dosimeters (DRDs). Ensure that DRDs
- j are zerced prior to leaving the TSC.
I ! 2.2.5 Obtain information from the FSGL on the situation, y plan of action,- specific survey locations, and 3 necessary precautions. ISSUANCE OF A 0-5 R DRD IS NOT TO BE INTERPRETED AS AN AUTHORIZATION TO EXCEED STATION ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDELINES. 2.2.6 Upon leaving the TSC keep all dosimetry. 2.2.7 Ensure that the E-520/HP-270 or equivalent is on and operating prior to leaving the TSC. + 2.2.8 Perform communication check of radios with the FSGL prior to leaving the site. 2.2.9 Proceed to the first field survey point as directed by the FSGL. I , mq9,wygp:mac..~ ~ w . ~
, .~ n. :o . = n . .- z ,..
_ _ _ _ _ _. .-. _, ; , . . . . m . _ m .w..w a - - 't s ?ll?- - t
+
EP-211, Rev. 0 [ - Page 3 of 16 A REL/ nip N & :2^. [1 p 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP j 3.1 Field Survey Group leader shall: - ) 3.1.1 Maintain communication with and direct the !? activities of the field survey squads. Ensure that 3 the location of each squad on the Field Survey 3 display map is updated as necessary. - W 5 3.1.2 Obtain field survey results as provided by field h survey squads and record results on EP-211-5, Field Survey Group Leader Data Record. v 1 3.1.3 Provide the field survey squads with status updates including: radiological and meteorological conditions, etc. S 3.1.4 Dispatch the field survey squads to additional
, survey locations as necessary.
3.1.5 Field Survey Group Exposure Record, Appendix EP-211-3, shall be completed as directed by the Field Survey Group Leader. 3.1.6 If the field survey squad members and/or vehicles become contaminated inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader. 3.1.7 When advised that the EOF has taken over the Dose 1 Assessment function, inform the field survey squads. 3 Perform a formal turnover with the EOF Field Survey
- y Group Leader and report to the Dose Assessment Team Leader.
) 3.2 Field Survey Squad Members shall: 3.2.1 While in transit, ensure that the E-520/HP-270 or equivalent is on and switched to the lowest appropriate scale. Hold 'the probe outside the vehicle and have the driver proceed until the specified survey location is reached. Continuously monitor the survey instrument while in transit. 3.2.2 When survey location is reached, pull off the road and turn on emergency flashers. Exit vehicle and determine the maximum dose rate at waist height in a 360 degree radius using the E-520/EP-270 or & equivalent. Take readings with the probe shielded and unshielded. If the unshielded reading is greater than two times the shielded reading, assume g that you are immersed in the plume (as opposed to j seeing the effects of skyshine). IL
-w, s. .
3 w.o. m. %,e : . .se u
EP-211, Rnv. O Page 4 of 16 REL/ nip 3.2.3 Record all results on EP-211-2, Field Survey Group Survey Record, and transmit information to the FSGL by radio. If the radio does not function properly, loca tele one and vey information. Cal TSC) or EOF) and ask for the Fie rvey Group Lea er [ 3.2.4 Take air sample at the location if directed by the j FSGL as follows: L CAUTION ENSURE THAT THE ON/OFF SUITCH IS OFF PRIOR TO k CONNECTING THE AIR SAMPLER TO THE VEHICLE BATTERY. 'j CONNECT RED LEAD TO THE POSITIVE BATTERY TERMINAL I
'MD BLACK LEAD TO '!EGATIVE B ATTERY TERMINAL.
l 1
' . 2.4.1 Connect terminals of Radeco H809C or equivalent to vehicle battery with engine running as stated above. ' Place air sampler on an elevated surface, not the ground.
3.2.4.2 Mark filter and silver zeolite cartri dicate air flow direction. 3.2.4.3 Orient the air sampler toward un air sampler for 5 minutes or as ~ 4$sCL. Record the indicated flow n 1-4, Field l Survey Air Sample Data )> . j 3.2.4.4 While air sampler Dj el one envelope and one small plast * ' e following
! information: Lo a , Flow rate, Time'On, and Time Off. q k AIR SAM BE RUN AT GREATER THAN 2.5 cfm. AD F SUCH IS THE CASE.
l v I 3.2.5 If so dire bd by the FSGL take 6 inch and waist level shie ed probe measurements using the E-520/HP-270. If the 6 inch reading is greater than the waist level reading, take several disc. smears of representative flat environmental surfaces. Using caution to prevent the spread of contamination, place smears in labelled envelopes for counting at a later time. 3.2.6 When you have finished collecting the Air Sample,
- inform the FSGL that the air sample is ready to be analyzed. Disconnect air sampler, place air sampler in vehicle, and drive to a low background counting area, as directed by the FSGL. While in transit,
=+h E , g O dg gg= g, +
I . . EP-211, Rav. O
; Page 5 of 16 REL/nlp
{ S . i' monitor E-520/HP-270 or equivalent for radiation levels. Note minimum-and maximum readings and I , transmit the location of these readings to the FSGL. } i 3.2.7 Upon arrival at the low background counting area, j set up the SAM-2 or equivalent and allow to warm up pl and stabilize, as follows: k 3.2.7.1 Connect cable from RD22 probe to " Detector" jack on the front of the SAM-2. 3.2.7.2 Connect the battery lead to the " Battery" jack on the back of the SAM-2. Plug other end of lead into the socket on the side of the battery pack. 3.2.7.3 Set the SAM-2 Controls as follows: Stabilizer: OFF h Count Mode: TIMED Meter Channel: 1 Window: Set as shown on Calibration Sticker Threshold : Set as shown on Calibration Sticker Multiplier: x10' Response: " Midrange" "IN" . Count Time: 5x1 Channel 1: In, + Channel 2: Off,out H.V.: As shown on the SAM-2 Calibration Sticker. 3.2.7.4 Switch the " Power" Switch on the back of the SAM-2 to "ON". Press the " RESET START" button on the front of the SAM-2 and allow the instrument to count for 5 minutes to warm up. i IF THE "BATT OK" LIGHT IS NOT LIT, INFORM FSGL. 3.2.8 Remove only the particulato filter from the air 4 sampler head and perform an analysis of the 4 particulate filter using the E140N/HP-210T with the SH4A sample holder. Record backgtound readings and sample readings in EP-211-4, Field Survey Air Sample h Data Record.
, iQQ1j;O;c'- gm ,. - .-a:h,.yAg Qm Q ,gahg.g . .,. . [ _[ _ _ , ,.. _ _ _ _
s . ry . .. f
/
[ , EP-211, Rev. O Page 6 of 16 - REL/nly h j! CAUTION ! ) T IF BACKGROUND RADIATION LEVELS EXCEED 300 CPM USING l l f' THE E-140N/HP-210 T, INFORM THE FSGL AND MOVE TO ' l 'ANOTHER COUNTING AREA WHERE THE BACKGROUND IS LESS l THAN OR EQUAL TO 300 CPM. j 1 3.2.9 Run the air sampler for one minute with the silver zeolite cartridge in place to purge the cartridge. 3.2.10 Place the Ba-133 check source cartridge against the y end of the RD22 probe in the sample holder and set T the count time on the SAM-2 to 2x1 minutes. Press t the " RESET START" button and count. Record total l number of counts on Appendix EP-211-4. 3.2.11 To establish the background of the counting system, exchange a clean silver zeolite cartridge for the I Ba-133 check source and press " RESET START". Record f total number of counts on Appendix EP-211-4. 6 I 3.2.12 Compute the net count rate as follows: f,- NET (CPM) = GROSS COUNTS-BKG COUNTS 2 i and record on Appendix EP-211-4. 3.2.13 Compare the net count rate.to the allowable net count rate listed on'the SAM-2 calibration label.
- n If the measured net count rate is within the range specified, proceed to 3.2.14 and use the SAM-2 for f I-131 determination. IF THE NET COUNT RATE FALLS OUTSIDE OF THE ALLOWABLE RANGE, REPEAT STEPS 3.2.10 TO 3.2.13 ONE TIME. If results are still unsatisfactory, inform the Field Survey Group Leader.
THE BA-133 SOURCE CHECK STEPS 3.2.10 to 3.2.13, MUST BE PERFORMED INITIALLY TO VERIFY SATISFACTORY j- OPERATION OF THE SAM-2 COUNTING SYSTEM. THIS CHECK NEED NOT BE PERFORMED PRIOR TO COUNTING SUBSEQUENT L AIR SAMPLES UNLESS THERE IS REASON TO SUSPECT A PROBLEM WITH THE SAM-2 COUNTING SYSTEM. THE j BACKGROUND, HONEVER, MUST BE COUNTED PRIOR TO COUNTING EACH AIR SAMPLE. 3.2.14 Remove the silver zeolite cartridge with the field sample from the air sampler head and carefully wrap the cartri'dge in cellophane.
- i- 3.2.15 Place the wrapped cartridge in the sample holder and
! press " RESET START" . Record TOTAL number of counts on EP-211-4 when the count is complete.
[ ). J;y . .;* :s my:q:65d Mi;h u,%,n .
- n -
_ . =
li
~
. )
y . . I g EP-211, Rev. 0 ) y Page 7 of 16 y REL/ nip 1 I 3.2.16 Calculate I-131 concentration using the equation l listed in EP-211-4, Part 2 and transmit the results to the FSGL. 1 3.2.17 Rebag the-samples for transport back to the site for i- analysis. 0 3.2.18 Await further instructions from the Field Survey Group Leader. 3.2.19 Before returning to the site, survey self and vehicle for contamination. If contamination is found, inform the Field Survey Group Leader and take I the vehicle to the designated Vehicle Decontamination Facility. i : + 3.2.20 Bring all environmental samples.to the Personnel L Decontamination Facility in the Radwaste Enclosure and turn them over to a member of the Chemistry f Sampling and Analysis Group or as directed by the FSGL. 3.2.21 Place all data forms in a clean plastic bag and have a noncontaminated individual bring the bag to the Field Survey Group Leader in the TSC. l n 3.2.22 The Health Physics Technician shall inventory the l field survey kit upon returning to the site and report results to FSGL. L 4.0 APPENDICES
- r 4.1 EP-211-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines
- j. 4.2 EP-211-2, Field Survey Group Survey Record 4.3 EP-211-3, Field Survey. Group Exposure Record r 4.4 EP-211-4, Field Survey Air Sample Data Record I
- > 4.5 EP-211-5, Field Survey Group Leader Data Record 4.6 EP-211-6, Field Survey Checklist i
i ll h
** ' 'f '
**k h '] $ thf_ rQ r . ' ~^ * ' ' ~
a *' ?
- __ ,__,[ , ,
f: i l' t EP-211, Rev. O L Page 3 of 16 REL/nlp a 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide f instructions and guidelines for the actions of the Field Survey Group. 5.2 Criteria for Use
!! 5.2.1 An actual or potential release of radioactive material beyond the site boundary in excess of technical specifications.
5.2.2 The Field Survey Group shall be activated at the Alert level or as determined by the Dose Assessment { Team Leader. [. 5.2.3 The group members exposure shall be limited to the
. guidelines in EP-211-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines.
5.3 Special Equipment a 5.3.1 Radio with 2 Battery Packs l 5.3.2 Field survey kits t 5.3.3 Vehicle 1 - l 5.3.4 Emergency Dosimetry (0-1500 mR and 0-5 R DRD's) I l 5.4 References None i L L k
-fkL2 ' k l & i:t 2 .-ry ~ - s. N'* - r %- 8 -
~ ?% 3 4 -l, * ~ ~ '
?
- r. . .
. EP-211, Rev. O Page 9 of 16 REL/ nip APPENDIX EP-211-1 .
- EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose By
[ 1. Life Saving and Emergency ** Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Director ,
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an Emergency **
~
Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Director
- 3. Protection of Health Emergency **
g. and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem Director f 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director 5.-Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activities ' Administra- Adminis-
, tive Guide- trative lines Guide- .
lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis
[ -
~
)
; -. . . > . . . . ;, ; . n .a ,. :-~ ] _ .
[. ..;, _ g. .
. . m ,
y . EP-211, Rav. O Page 10 of 16 REL/nlp APPENDIX EP-211-2 FIELD SURVEY GROUP SURVEY RECORD (Page 1 of 2) Fiold Survey Team Taam Members: Date: /__ _ _ /
'INSTRUM_ENT,INyENTORY
' Instrument Type Serial Number Calibration ok Batt ok Response ok RO-2A .
E-520 E-140N HP210T eco H-890C
~
SAM II l l Ii 't l 1 .
+.
., $. ,i , , g ,. . u, . ..) - . f _ , .
. _ -__-w_.-. ..g,,_ . _ _ = . , _ . _ _ _ /
EP-211, R3v. 0 4 Page 11 of 16 ,, REL/nlp a APPENDIX EP-211-2 I'
, FIELD SURVEY GROUP SURVEY RECORD 3 (Page 2 of 2) h' E-520/ IIP- 270 Date/ Shie lded Unshielded MPC Smear Whole Time Time in 6"/ waist waist Fraction uCi/cc Results Body g Survey Location of Survey Area MR/IIR MR/IIR Gross B I 131 dpa/100cm2 Exposu res ? .s l- .' 2.
3. 4. r . 5. 6.
- 7. ,
8. 1 9. 10. i ~
- 11. ,,
12. , 13. f,: 14. t 4 15. I . L
EP-211, Rev. 0
. Page 12 of 16 REL/ nip APPENDIX EP-211-3 FIELD SURVEY GROUP EXPOSURE RECORD Fiold Survey Team Date: / /
Time: Dose [. Rec'd. Time Spent In Name (mR) Area (Hrs.) MPC-hours ** [ (A) HP TECH (B) DRIVER' (C) OTHER .. _ _ _ -
**MPC-hrs (I 131) =(Detected conc. uCi/cc I 131) (Time in Area) (1.llP8 MPC/uCi/cc)
** NOTES:
- 1. MPC-HOURS ARE CALCULATED USING I-131 AS THE LIMITING ISOTOPE 2 MPC-HOURS ARE ADMINISTRATIVELY CONTROLLED A* 20 MPC-HRS /WK; Exposures >20 mpc-hrs /wk to 40 mpc-hrs /wk can be authorized by the Personnel Safety Team Leader (A) (B) (C) (A) (B) (C)
Previous Daily Exposures (mR) W/B MPC-hrs. Exposure from this entry + (mR) W/B MPC-hrs. Exposure Totals (mR) W/B MPC-hrs. Remaining Balance (mR) W/B l l MPC-hrs.
- 3. INDIVIDUALS SUSPECTED OF EXCEEDING 10 MPC-HRS /WK ARE REQUIRED TO HAVE A WHOLE BODY COUNT
- 4. DOSIMETRY RECORDS ARE REQUIRED FOR EXPOSURES > 2 MPC HRS / DAY,
>10 MPC HOURS /WK.
'C ES TO: -
FIELD SURVEY TEAM LEADER; - DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM LEADER
...L : .4 .' 'n' __
- A,
- ' . . _L
- l . #
. N -
_. - . .- ,. =......=.a EP-211, Rev. O Page 13 of 16 REL/nlp c APPENDIX EP-211-4 FIELD SURVEY AIR SAMPLE DATA RECORD l r Date: / / Time: . Survey Team " Location Sector-PART 1
- 1. Air Sample " Time On"
, 2. Air Sample " Time Off"
- 3. Air Sample Run Time minutes
- 4. Air Sample Flow Rate cfm
- 5. E-140N/EP-210T Background cpm
- 6. Particulate Filter Gross Count Rate cpm
- 7. Particulate Filter Net Count Rate cpm (net)
- 8. AgX Cartridge Gross Count Rate cpm
- 9. AgX Cartridge Net Count Rate cpm (net)
*10. SAM-2 Ba-133 Check source Counts /2 min.
- 11. SAM-2 Background (clean cartridge) Counts /'2 min.
*12. Ba-133 Net;, Counts Counts /2 min.
- 13. SAM-2 I-131 field sample Counts /2 min.
1erform initially to verify operation of SAM-2-See NOTE, sec. 3.2.13 PART 2 Determination of I-131 Concentration
- 1. Air Sample volume: -
Run Time (#3) X Flow Rate (14) = cubic feet (ft3) 2. ( #13) (#11)
- ~ ~ - ~ ~ ~ ~
Counts - Bkg l l 1 _ 2 Minutes _, _ Eff _ _ Volume _ _ 0.95 _ x 1.59 Nil = uCi/cc _ 2 Min _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.95 _ x 1.59 Nil = uCi/cc PART 3 Det'ermination of MPC Fraction (I'f directed by FSGL) E-140N - (Met CPM)
= 1 MPC (Volume) (18.7) b#. hfbrih,' % s . < * '
- . . . . . _ . . _ _ _ ____.____,_,,..__--.m.~ --
EP-211, Rev. O Page 14 of 16 REL/nlp APPENDIX EP-211-5 FIELD SURVEY GROUP LEADER RECORD -
~ 'l Date: / / Time: EST Survey Team " Location 6" Waist High Sector Area Dose Rate ( ) mR/Er (shielded) E-520/HP-270 mR/Er (unshielded) E-520/HP-270
() Direct Frisk of Air Sample Filters , 8 I AgX net cpm
- ) Particulate Filter net cpm f .
- ! .ir Sample Data (Part) MPC Fraction (unidentified)
(I - 131) uCi/cc g Copies to: Field Survey Team Leader - Status Board Keeper - Dose Assessment Team Leader , i O
$' ~ . _v :> , u __~<i r ~ , %' .-ii - * 's-* s 'c
,n.. A
EP-211, Rev. 0 Page 15 of 16 REL/nlp i 1: APPENDIX EP-211-6 FIELD SURVEY CHECKLIST
- l. BEFORE LEAVING SITE A) All Equipment accounted for and operable B) Have been briefed on situation, etc.
C). Have Emergency Dosimetry and they are zeroed D)' Communication check performed E) E520/HP270 is ON
- 2. AT THE SURVEY LOCATION AND WHILE IN TRANSIT A) Looked for and reported location where increasing radiation levels occured while still in transit to specified survey location .
B) Performed survey using E-520/HP-270 to look for maximum dose rate at waist level in 360 deg. radius , C) Survey with E-520/HP-270 with probe shielded and unshielded - D) Have notified FSGL of arrival and dose rate encountered E) If advised to take air sample:
- 1) Particulate filter and silver zeolite cartridge marked to indicate direction of air flow
- 2) Air Sampler head loaded with filter located outside of cartridge
- 3) Air Sampler head oriented toward the plant and running
- 4) Flow Rate observed and recorded
. .. .- . .. . - ~ ~-- .
Lki % _ . < '
~
t:MA~r-QVim&'i 'i-s ' > w : ~ 4 *. 4% b'OrMMkiIQs A 5*"'L_+:
-.. - --.n- -
- . _ , H I
EP-211, Rev. O Page 16 of 16
- REL/ nip r
I- F) If directed by FSGL, 6 inch gamma readings taken with E-520/HP-270 e G) If 6" readings higher than waist level readings, smears i taken H) . Notified FSGL that Air Sample has been pulled and
-advised to move to low background counting area to analyze sample I) E520/HP270 is ON during transit - looking for and
. reporting locations of maximum and minimum dose rates
- 3) AT LOW BACKGROUND COUN*ING AREA A) SAM 2 set up and counting for 5 minutes to warm up
! *B) 2 minute count of Ba-133 check source (for initial analysis only) j C) Remove and count particulate filter with E-140N/HP-210T 'I D) Purge Silver zeolite cartridge for 1 minute E) 2 minute count of Clean Silver Zeolite cartridge .i 1 F) 2 minute count of Sample Silver Zeolite cartridge G) I-131 Concentration calculated H) All results recorded and relayed to FSGL I) Advised to move to new location J) If advised to return, monitor self and vehicle and relay findings to FSGL K) All samples turned over to Chemistry Sampling &
Analysis Group at Personnel Decon Facility in Radwaste Enclosure L) All forms turned over to FSGL for subsequent dispostion ~
- Perform initially to /erify satisfactory operation of SAM-2 counting system only
- t tt
'I d 1 I; , + v .. ;m. . ,wu na.,; .
3843116670 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY ELECTRIC PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT LIMERICK GENERATING STATION g 12/11/84 P FROM: R. Dubiel TO: G. M. Leitch
SUBJECT:
CANCELLATION MEMORANDUM FOR EP-221, Rev. 1
Reference:
Limerick Administrative Procedure A-21 EP-221 should be cancelled because it is being re-issued as EP-253. i i t j R. Dubie i i FROM: G. M. Leitch TO: Holders of EP Procedures This cancellation Memorandum has been reviewed by PORC and is approved. All holders of EP procedures should discard EP-221. , In accordance with Administrative Procedure A-21, procedure number EP-221 will not be re-used. APPROVp STATION SUPER 2NTENDENT
,,,,, ,i/dyj:'.\ '9' .
, A \\ e '...-
i pQ\ ss ,
i y,
) ~ ,
' , t .
*, a r
l
. ./+;vw. . . +.~;v & e n s d W ih u n - = =
3843116650 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY ELECTRIC PRODUCTION DEPARTMDIT LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
'4 12/11/84 , FROM: R. Dubiel TO: G. M. Leitch
SUBJECT:
CANCELLATION MEMORANDUM FOR EP-222, Rev. 2 Re ference : Limerick Administrative Procedure A-21 t EP-222 should be cancelled because it is being re-issued as EP-211. h
. Du i 9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FROM: G. M. Leitch l TO: Holders of EP Procedures This Cancellation Memorandum has been reviewed by PORC and is ! approved. All holders of EP procedures should discard EP-222. l In accordance with Administrative Procedure A-21, procedure [. number EP-222 will not be re-used. k A APPROVED: [ETATION SUPERINTENDENT DAT4r5 *
.f,.',a 5\ p, .
- s. , .. ..-
g % ./ ' - 4 e
\
*aO s -
Q lc, \~\ - g ,
.. s . ..e.,.o u ,,waacserGG - . . e- - - '
e
- s. .
- s 3843116690 EP-230 Rav. 4 Page 1 of 9 TJY/ /jmv PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
( EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE 2
$ l EP-230 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM E
l l'.0 PARTICPANTS 1.1 Emergency Director shall direct the Chemistry 3' Sampling and Analysis Team Leader to activate the team.
) 1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall A direct and coordinate the team's activation and
- operations.
t. 1.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group r. embers' activities. 1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall obtain and analyze chemistry samples. l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE
; l 2.1 Emergency Director shall:
3 l 2.1.1 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team
- s . Leader to collect samples, as necessary, and
? analyze the samples or use offsite support groups . for the analysis. 5 l 2.2 Chemistry Sampline and Analysis Team Leader Shall: 1 2.2.1 Report to the Chemistry Lab and verify habitability j in accordance with EP-330, Emergency Response Facility Habitability. Report to the chemistry J area on the 2nd floor of the Administration . Y Building if the Chemistry L is'n h habitable. + , 9, IF THE CHEMISTRY LAB HABI ILITY S DEGRADED, TIME h S?ENT IN THE LAB ANALYZING \ SAMPLES SHOULD BE *' f, MINIMIZED AND PROTECTIVE MEASURES SHALL BE d EMPLOYED. CONSIDERATION SHOULD BE GIVEN TO SENDING THE SAMPLES OFFSITE FOR ANALYSIS. ,, ,. L
, ,fw.
, e-k Qf MT I'[? _I},'iV~, - " ' " "' ' ' X; 'G '"*~T*" ~ ~ : Y'"T"
. ~ ~ . . _ . -.. . . .. ., w l EP-230 R v. 4 l-l l Page 2 of 9
[ TJY/RGH/jmv E R r @ l 2.2.2 After discussing the situation with the h Emergency Director to determine the priorities [ of group activation and immediate responses of the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team, assume H [ l the role of Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team E Leader. l 2.2.3 Appoint Group Leaders from available personnel and/or assume the role of group leader and group [; member (s) (until relieved) and complete the appropriate steps in this procedure.
) l 2.2.4 Assign sampling tasks to the Group Leader.
1 Brief Group Leaders on plant status and C potential or existing radiological conditions and/or hazards, as the information becomes available. l 2.2.5 Request emergency exposure authorizations from the Emergency Director for the appropriate group members as required. PLANNED RADIATION EXPOSURE SHOULD BE LIMITED TO THE ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDELINES IN APPENDEX EP-230-1, EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES. l 2.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 2.3.1 Assemble the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis
- Group members at.the Chemistry Field Office and perform accountability if required per EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability.
2.3.2 Obtain all PASS keys from the key cabinets located in the Chemistry Field Office or Chemistry Administration Office. l 2.3.3 Direct group member (s) to prepare sampling equipment using the appropriate procedures. 2.3.4 Direct group member (s) to prepare sample preparation station, Counting Room and analysis
< instrumentation using the appropriate procedures.
l 8 m t
'l is g , gg. ;y - --
m . m o r___f =
. _E: ur 1 _. <
e- .. -. w a - J
_ ___ _ . - _ - _ . . , ~_ .. _ - - . mp-m_ __ EP-230 R3v. 4 l . Page 3 of 9 R li- TJY/RGE/jmv
,k I*
9 l 2.3.5 Appoint group member (s) as necessary to assist
-in maintaining accountability logsheet, sampling and analysis logsheet, plant status record g' keeping and other appointed duties.
p 2.3.6 Evaluate sampling conditions and/or locations fi identified and instruct group members to take the necessary samples using indicated procedures. l 2.3.7 Refer to the,following procedures to sample primary coolant and drywell atmosphere as necessary:
} EP-231 Operation of Post Accident Sampling System (PASS) l 8 EP-233 Retrieving And Changing Sample Filters f And Cartridges From The Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies EP-234 Obtaining Containment Gas Samples From 1
the Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies EP-235 Obtaining Reactor Water Samples From Sample Sinks Following Accident Conditions l 2.3.8 In the event of a unplanned radioactive liquid release, to the Schuylkill River, obtain samples . of the. blowdown line water in accordance with: EP-236 Obtaining Cooling Tower Blowdown Line Water Samples Following Radioactive Liquid Release After Accident Conditions l 2.3.9 Use the following procedures to obtain samples, as necessary, from the various sample points. North and South Stack b EP-237 Obtaining the Iodine / Particulate and/or gas samples from the North Vent Wide l Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) c i i 6 l l i
~*
y , e * .
,r . r .
y
- i EP-230 R0v. 4 E
Page 4 of 9 TJY/RGH/jav x Liquid Radwaste EP-238 Obtaining Liquid Radwaste Samples from Radwaste Sample Sink Following Accident Conditions
, Off Gas EP-240 Obtaining Off Gas Samples from the Air Ejector / Holdup pipe Discharge Reactor Enclosure or Suppression Pool i EP-231 Operation of Post Accident Sampling Systems (PASS) r l 2.3.10 Use the following procedures for the preparation and handling of highly radioactive samples.
j ' EP-241 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples k EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters
- and Iodine cartridges EP-243 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples l 2.3.11 Periodically have group member exposures evaluated to ensure that group members do not -
exceed normal administrative exposure guidelines + l without prior approval of the Emergency Director. l 2.3.12 As required, request the Chemistry Sampling and . Analysis Team Leader to obtain emergency . I exposure authorizations from the Emergency Director for affected group members. ! 2.3.13 Assign a sample number to each sample to be analyzed and record on Appendix EP-230-2, Sample and Analysis Logsheet. Complete the appropriate line for each sample taken as the information becomes available. ! 2'.3.14 Appropriately file the data sheets and analysis' reports with Appendix EP-230-2, Sample and Analysis Logsheet for each sample analyzed.
. s.x u.w .w .. .w ... . u. . x .w ;.a - .
7 _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . . . . . I . . EP-230 rov. 4 Page 5 of 9 TJY/RGE/jmv
, l 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members j shall:
) ( l 2.4.1 Assemble the necessary equipment needed.to obtain and analyze samples. Label all sample l containers before sampling.
"; I 2.4.2 - Collect and analyze samples as directed by the Group Leader.
l l 2.4.3 Give data sheets and analysis results to the sampling and analysis Group Leader. l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 3.1.1 Report the results of these analyses to the Emergency. Director, Dose Assessment Team Leader and Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator. l 3.1.2 Provide group leaders with periodic plant status , changes including significant radiation exposure and radioactive contamination problems which may affect the functions of the team. l 3.1.3 If necessary, use the post accident sampling analysis off-site capabilities by referring to - EP-244, Off-Site Analysis of High Activity Samples. l 3.1.4 Provide additional personnel support, if necessary, using EP-292 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Phone List. l 3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall l 3.2.1 Report results of samples and analysis to the t Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader. l 3.2.2 Provide Group Members with periodic plant status changes to include radiological conditions which may affect the group. _dg F9 '
}. # 17 I
- it., p 9,,_ %g y J, 3 IgL y. .,
W , e a EP-230 RGv. 4 ) Page 6 of 9 l TJY/RGH/jav l I I f; 9 l 3.2.3 Request augmentative personnel from the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader as !. required. 1: f: a 4.0 APPENDICES L l 4.1 EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines l 4.2 EP-230-2 Sample and Analysis Logsheet l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose
- l. 5.1.1 The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the activation and conduct of operation for the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team.
l 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 This procedure should be implemented when the Emergency Director directs the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team to be activated in order to obtain and analyze chemistry samples. l 5.3 Special Equipment l 5.3.1 None l 5.4 References - l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan l 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, Rev. 2 - Preparation and Evaluation-of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and [ Preparedness In Support of Nuclear Power Plants l 5.4.3 EP-231 Operation of Post Accident Sampling System (PASS) l 5.4.4 EP-233 Retrieving and Changing Sample Filters and Cartridges from the Containment Leak Detector during Emergencies
< esmm # ,.um . ._
____. . . . . . , . - . z __ , _. . . - . EP-230 RGv. 4 Page 7 of 9
- TJY/RGH/jmv L
l 5.4.5 EP-234 Obtaining Containment' Gas Samples from the Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies l 5.4.6 EP-235 Obtaining Reactor Water Samples from sample Sinks Following Accident Conditions l 5.4. 7 EP-236 Obtaining Cooling Tower Blowdown Line Samples Following Radioactive Liquid Releases After Accident Conditions l 5.4.8 EP-237 Obtaining the Iodine / Particulate Samples and/or gas samples the North Vent Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) l 5.4.9 EP-238 Obtaining Liquid Radwaste Samples from the Radwaste Sample Sink Following Accident Conditions l 5.4.10 EP-240 Off Gas Samples from the Air Ejector / Holdup Pipe Discharge l 5.4.11 EP-241 Sample Preparation and Randling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples l 5.4.12 EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges l 5.4.13 EP-243 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples l 5.4.14 EP-292 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Phone List l 5.4.15 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability l 5.4.16 EP-244 Off-Site Analysis of High Activity Samples e- ' f } _fy
3 EP-230, R3v. 4 Pag 2 8 of 9 TJY/RGE/jmv d. APPENDIX EP-230-1
, Emergency Exposure Guidelines I
Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose Br l 1. Life Saving and Reduction of Injury 75 REM
- 375 REM Emergency **
Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment l to Mitigate an Emergency 25 REM
- 125 REM Emergency **
L Director l 3. Protection of Health and Safety of the Public 5 REM 25 REM Emergency ** Director
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis I
c .. .
,. . : . , .~~ .
. . . n . n ... .+. -. . -
EP-230, R3v.-4 .- f Page 9 of 9 . j ' TJY/RGH/jmv 1 f -q. APPENDIX EP-230-2 , L SAMPLING & ANALYSIS LOGSEEET ,.; Date: p Time z Time Time Analysis
't Sample Sample
- Sample Sample Results 2: Sample 1 Source Type Requested Received Reported b
1 t-e (
/
i r b
'T r
4
- Sample Type: - Charcoal * - Smear
- Liquid - Other (describe)
- Gas
_ . E.: ._ . s ~~ >
~ . n ;_ . . . '. y.<,2 _; <.,o _. , 7. A , .G r* - . Sc. " ~yf1
. _--.;_ _ 7 _ 7 _ g _
w . 3 8 4 31 16 7'00 ' EP-231, Ray, s 4 , Pago 1 of 64 TJ /jmv e.[ ,,
/
j PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMP,ANY O . LIMERICK GENERATING STATION gj 4 EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE Jt- , l l EP-231 OPERATION OF POST-ACCIDENT SAMPLING SYSTEMS (PASS)
! l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS Li .
' l.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader d~ shall obtain necessary information and permissions to obtain sample.
a ., l.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall organize and brief the sampling group and have operations defeat isolations. 1.3 HP Technicians shall provide radiological assessment of the task. I Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group shall 1.4 obtain the sample. 3 l,2.0 , ACTIONS-IMMEDI ATE 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader
^ shall:
a 2.1.1 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. 2.1.2 After discussing the situation with the 9[i - Emergency Director, determine which of the
.,j following PASS samples are required based on the
.. following information s g _. . s. b l Sample *k . l 1. Drywell Atmosphere tg#{
- s .,
.g. >#
l A. Upper DrywelTA291f.iElh ,. d', (?/ ' k hl '" ^ * ? n.') \'Y r. -i
.l B. Lower Drywell4 42' El 1( ,g . .).
l 2. Suppression Pool Atmospher 222' El-250 Deg Az.. A . %)* h from* North l A.
' 222' El-70 Dog A h from North l B.
0 4 Y em I i g s, e , R',0 * * < , e _ra y a sm , s 1
~
EP-231, Rav. 5 J e PEgo 2 of 64 TJY/jmv l 3. Secondary Containment Atmosphere l 4. Primary Coolant Jet Pump { ' At low (<l%) power for small break or non-break events, raise Reactor Water level to level of the moisture separators. j l S. RER l A. "A" RHR l B. "B" RHR
? . .
MODE SYS. OP. TIME SOURCE' LPCI 30 mins. Supp. Pool Cont. Spray Cooling Supp. Pool ! Supp. Pool Cooling Supp. Pool Shutdown Cooling 30 mins. Rx Coolant Steam Condensing Rx Stream Fuel Pool Cooling Fuel Pool 2.1.3 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological conditions.
, 2.1.4 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader and check on the latest developments related to radiological conditions and inform him what sample (s) are to be taken and that Health Physics' coverage is required.
CONTINUOUS COVERAGE BY A HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN MAY SUBSTITUTE FOR THE RADIATION R, WORK PERMIT. l[ 2.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what analyses are required. If an iodine / particulate sample is desired, recommend sampling time. n (l l 2.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from
. the Emergency Director for group members (as required) and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this development.
e 9e + e e
~
I' h ' , , ' - a ra 65- f' g EI' + 4-
. ~ , . - -
1 EP-231, Rav. 5
- PEge 3 of 64 ,
TJY/jmv ! t 2.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group i Leader to collect and analyze the PASS samples. !
)
2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader I shall 2.2.1 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment to collect and transport the sample to the hot chemistry lab.
; EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORN BY ALL PERSONNEL WHEN OBTAININC SAMPLES FROM THE SAMPLE STATION.
2.2.2 If a particulate / iodine cartridge sample is to be obtained, contact the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team. Leader (TSC) for an estimated m sampling time and record this time on Appendix EP-231-3. s 2.2.3 Once the sample type and sampling location has been determined, contact the Control Room and
; request a system line-up to permit collection of the appropriate sample in -accordance with the following information. Also, inform operations to contact the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader if problems with the line-up arise during sampling. -
l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITH SWITH NAME POSITION A. Upper Drywell (2 91' ) SV-57-132,134,150 1 B Containment OPEN or -(232,234,250) Atmosphere Sample , I Lower Drywell (242') Sys. Isolation HS-57-153 (25 3) Drywell Atmosphere AUTO Sample Sys. Isolation SV-57-183 (283) 1A Containment AUTO L Atmosphere Sample Sys. Isolation !: SAMPLE LOCATION l SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION HS-57-187 (287) Suppression Pool AUTO Atmosphere Sample Sys. Isolation
*HSS-57-191A (291A) Containment BYPASS Isolation l Signal Bypass
. . . - . . . . . _ . .- - ---- - ..... ... .-- ... ~ .
NO enme_; ew. :: + -
+
EP-231, Rev. 5 PEge 4 of 64
, TJY/jav
.* HSS-57-191B (291B) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS- 57-191C (291C) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS-57-191D (292D) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass l
- Only necessary if containment isolation signal is present l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION B. Suppression *'
Pool ( 222') SV-57-183,191 1 A Containment AUTO (250 Dog Azimuth -(283,291) Atmosphere Sample from North) Sys. Isolation HS-57-187 (287) Suppression Pool AUTO Atmosphere Sample Sys. Isolation s
*HSS-57-191A (291A) Conta inment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS- 57-191C (291C) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass .
J
.'i' .I O
{ [a f' ~ *1' E **[ -ej g'.) ;, [ e E ' w* ; ['f,, _'] m , ';<= d . ' i 5- T _en .$. 1Tp k , T/d -h-k' ;,,' '
EP-231, R2v. 5
, Pcgo 5 of 64 TJY/jmv l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITH NAME POSITION C. Suppression .
Pool (222') SV-57-181 (281) 1 B Containment AUTO (70 Deg Azimuth Atmosphere Sample from North) Sys. Isolation HS-57-187 (287 ) Suppression Pool AUTO Atmosphere Sample Sys. Isolation
*HSS-57-191A (291A) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS- 57-191B (291B ) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS-57-191C (291C) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass SV-57-183, 191 1A Containment AUTO
- (283,291) Atmosphere Sample System Isolation l
- Only necessary if containment isolation signal is present l D. Secondary Containment No Line-up Necessary E. " A" RER HV-51-lF079A Sample OPEN l
(2F079A) Inboard HV-51-lF080A Sample OPEN (2F080A) Outboard
*HSS-57-191A (291A) Containment BYPASS i
Isolation j Signal Bypass
*HSS 57 191B (291B)
Containment BYPASS Isolation j Signal Bypass 1 1 **HV51-lF047A Heat Exch Bypass OPEN j INLET i f M j. p g g $ "
% m * .
7 EP-231, R3v. 5 Ptge 6 of 64 a .
, TJY/jmv i. ;.. l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITH SWITH NAME POSITION F. "B" RER HV-51-lF Q79B Sample OPDT J (2F079B) Inboard
[: HV-51-lF080B Sample OPEN (2F080B) Outboard j *HSS-57-191A (291A) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS- 57-191B (291B ) Containment BYPASS
, Isolation Signal Bypass
**HV51-lF047B Heat Exch Bypass OPEN (2F047B) INLET l* Only necessary if containment isolation signal is present .
l ** Only necessary if RER placed in LPCI mode. l G. JET PUMP To ensure a representative liquid' sample from the jet pumps at low (<1%) power conditions for small break or non-break events, the reactor water level will be raised to the level of the moicture separator when this action is not inconsistent with station emergency procedures. This will fully flood the separators and will provide a , thermally-induced recirculation flow path for mixing.
- 2.2.5 Have the shift verify that the liquid return line to the Suppression Pool is open by placing the following switch in the appropriate l' position
l UNIT SWITH SWITH NAME POSITION 1 HV-52-lF001D Core Spray OPEN L Suction D 2 HV-52-lF001A Core Spray OPEN Suction A 2.2.6 Appoint Group member (s) to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF 'IHE HOT LAB. __ 4Se ,g =meosmepetsw,m g w eame. em - eg e bwa-em e- em * *b-We p-h# 4 ge .a p + F 4**
- _ ._ . . _ _m
~f_ _.
'p. - . ' - ,.p , ,l _ _,
_. . _ - . _ _ -=~ ~ - ..~.--- EP-231, Rav. 5 PEge 7 of 64 TJY/jmv
. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartr idges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparatica and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 2.2.7 If a large volume liquid sample is to be taken and an outside route is to be taken, contact the Fire and Damage Repair Team Leader for providing the means of transportation for the Large volume Cask.
2.2.8 Brief the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following: l 2.2.8.1 Communications equipment and channel 1 , l 2.2.8.2 Type of sample (s) to be collected i l 2.2.8.3 Location of sample points l 2.2.8.4 Suggested Routes to be taken l 2.2.8.5 erecautions for operating the PASS 2.2.8.6 Projected amount of time required to collect and
~
tranport the sample 2.2.8.7 Review the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis 2.2.8.8 Special tools and equipment required for sample L t handling and/or collection l 2.2.8.9 Proper completion of data sheets 2.2.9 Dispatch the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team members to the OSC for Heatlh Physics support if radiological conditions permit or L i other appointed location as determined by the Plant Survey Group Leader. L l 2.3 Health Physics Technician shall: i i; l 2.3.1 Determine the appropriate route to be taken. 1 _._____s2 - __.,__es'W
+-
__E_ -
-_ _ - . _ . .. - . , .a .s w. . . . . . < . .
b . EP-231, Rav. 5 3 . Prge 8 of 64 TJY/jmv Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and 2.3.2 ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated.
; 2.3.3 Provide group members with the appropriate f dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment.
) 2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry j technicians assigned to obtain the sample to 'l discuss the following: l 2.3.4.1 RWP requirements l 2.3.4.2 Routes to PASS Facility l 2.3.4.3 Authorized doses l 2.3.4.4 Radiological concerns and precautions 2.3.4.5 Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab j l 2.3.4.6 Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA l 2.3.4.7 Stay times and Abort Criteria 2.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining and transporting samples from the PASS. 2.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location. If the general area dose rates exceed , 5 R/hr at the door leading to the Turbine Enclosure , 217'-0" El. or 10 R/hr within the Turbine enclosure (enroute to or at the sampling poin t) instruct Group Members to immediately exit the area and report to the Chemistry sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 2.3.7 Survey the sample area (concentrating especially on the PASS) and the sample container once the sample has been collected and the shielded sample cask. MINIMUM AMOUNT OF TIME SHOULD BE SPENT NEAR THE SURFACE OF THE SAMPLE ENCICSURE. 2.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) j when arriving at the hot lab. f i
~
1+hwwM. hieAs e Ye Gn> Mir > ' '
7 -- - __ -_ ..__-. . .. _. _ .-. , , . _ , . _ . _ _ - -
] ,
- 4 -
EP-231, Rav. 5 Page 9 of 64
- j. . TJY/jmv v
H' 2.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241, EP-242 or EP-243. 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members f shall: y 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry {" 1ab. 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the Administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. s 2.4.3 Obtain the Chemistry Emergency Supplies Toolbox Key. 2.4.4 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the Hot Lab is ready to accept the sample.
] l PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS 2.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled proceed to the OSC or other designated location for ~
Health Physics coverage. Once briefed by Health Physics collect the sample in accordance with the appropriate appendix to this procedure. (see following) THE INDICA'IOR FOR AREA RADIATION DETECTOR - RE-507 IS ON THE CONTROL PANEL AND ITS l READING SHOULD BE NOTED. c PRIOR TO COLLECTING A SAMPLE, (AND AFTER [ THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN OPERATED) THE PASS o SHOULD BE DRAINED AND BLOWN OUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPE'NDIX EP-23-1. l Appendix Title t EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining a 14.4 ml Gas Sample
. EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining an J. . , Iodine / Particulate Sample 1 EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining a 14.4
-] ml Gas Sample and an 1 Iodine / Particulate Sample Simultaneously i: Mm d%r : _.. _. .
.o .
- 5_ _ c-__
4 EP-231, Rav. 5
$ , PEge 10 of 64 s.
TJY/jmv f' EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining a y Small volure Liquid Sample EP-231 Procedure for Monitoring Total y Dissolved Gas (and, if 1 desired, Obtaining a Dissolved Gas Sample) and/or Obtaining a Large volume Liquid Sample. 2.4.6 Once the H.P. technician has surveyed the sample cask, take the - sample to the hot lab retracing the route back from the sample point. 2.4.7 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample,will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. Y 2.4.8 Contact the Group. Leader as soon as the sample j reaches the hot lab and inform him that the y sample collection has been completed and what
, the sample status is.
t l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOWUP 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 3.1.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF). L ^ 3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall:
. 3.2.1 Notify Shift Supervision that a sample has been taken and the aligned valves may be returned to the " NORMAL" position.
3.2.2 Have group member (s) dose monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 3.2.3 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team r Leader that the required sample is in the hot c , ( lab. 3.2.4 Instruct the group nembers to perform calculations (if any) on the Data Sheet of the appropriate Appendix. l 3.2.5 Obtain pass key from Group member. , l 3.2.6 Instruct the appropriate group members to refer to the appropriate procedure for guidance on (I l
~ sample preparation and handling.
~
k W rh . A :6v~ - - - - -
~
e- -
__ _ ____. _ - . . - .- _ .- - - - .- - ~ .-. f a EP-231, Rav. 5 Page 11 of 64
, TJY/jcv l, Sample Procedure No.
Liquid (EP-241) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples Iodine (EP-24 2) . Sample Preparation and l
~
(Particulate) Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Car tr idges
?
[ ' Gas (EP-243) Sample Preparation and 8, Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples Li 3.2.7 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets and report the j sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and y Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets K to Appendix EP-230-2. 3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 3.3.1 Complete the appropriate Appendix Data Sheet (s) s{ 8 : when applicable. 4 3.3.2 Prepare, handle, and analyze the sample using the appropriate procedure. F 3.3.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and f t Analysis Group Leader.
.. 3.3.4 Return sampling equipment to the CHEHISTRY ?, EMERGENCY CABINET, if applicable.
3.3.5 Return CHEMISTRY EMERGENCY CABINET and CHEMISTRY f' EMERGENCY SUPPLIES Tool Box Keys to the j ' appropriate control point. C - o X f l 4.0 APPENDICES q 4.1 EP-231-1 Procedure for Obtaining a 14.4 ml Gas i Sample. 3 : .
- 4.2 EP-231-2 Procedure for obtaining an 1 .
Iodine / Particulate Sample. 4.3 EP-231-3 Procedure for Obtaining a 14.4 ml Gas Sample and an Iodine / Particulate Sample
- Simultane ously. -
w, . , a ~ . ,~
._ ._ m_.
__- - . _ . _. - - ._ .- ._m.. _..-.,m - . :. _ . mm. m. m EP-231, R3v. 5 Page 12 of 64
. TJY/jmv 4.4 EP-23l-4 Procedure for Obtaining a Small Volume Liquid Sample 4.5 EP- 231-5 Procedure for Monitoring Total Dissolved Gas (and, if desired, Obtaining a Dissolved Gas Sample) and/or Obtaining a Large volume Liquid Sample.
L 4.6 EP- 231-6 M-102 General Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-0" l 4'. 7 EP-231-7 Diagram of Control Panel-left side. l 4.8 EP-231-8 Diagram of Control Panel-right side. l 4.9 EP-231-9 Control Panel Switch Layout 4.10 EP-231-10 Schematic of Post Accident Sample Station l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose - The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for obtaining samples from the Post-Accident Sampling Station following accident conditions. l 5.2 Cr iter ia for use 5.2.1 Prior to entering the plant to obtain the sample, ensure that the Post Accident Sample Station is operable by verifying that RT-5-030-800-0, POST ACCIDENT SAMPLE STATION OPERABILITY . TEST, was successfully performed in the previous six months. 5.2.2 This procedure shall be implemented when a sample shall be taken from the PASS during an emergency situation. 5.2.3 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levles in Appendix EP-230-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 5.2.4 There is no automatic drain or blow down but there is an alarm light to indicate that the level in the trap T-717 is high and that the trap needs to be drained right away. This trap l removes water from the gas sample lines. If the liquid level becomes too high, water will be l sucked into the gas breakdown pump and i nechanical damage may result. i 92 !. ' 4_-__ .A t_.*O'_ , w -' * ' . ,' ;_. :a _: _ .E _ -[t 4 a ,; . s L
_ _ _ _ _ _ .,..e m-g f EP-231, Rsv. 5 l l . PEge 13 of 64 TJY/jmv l 5.3 Special equipment (* ~' l 5.3.1 Gas vial sample tube l 5.3.2 Iodine & particulate sample assembly l 5.3.3 14.4 ml gas vials and caps l 5.3.4 Liquid sample bottles and caps l 5.3.5 10cc syringe with luer-lok fitting 5.3.6
- l Silver zeolite cartridges l . 5.3.7 47mm particulate filters (Gelman) l 5.3.8 Small bottle of demin water l 5.3.9 Large volume cask l 5.3.10 Small volu'me cask l 5.3.11 Gas sample cask l 5.3.12 Flashlight l 5.3.13 Mirror
)
l. l 5.3.14 Watch with secondhand or stopwatch l 5.3.15 Plastic bags l 5.3.16 PASS carrying box , 5.3.17 Copy of EP-231-Operation of Post-Accident ? Sampling Systems (PASS) s l 5.3.18 Blank Dat.2 Sheets s. l 5.3.19 Portable Communication Equipment (if available) l 5.3.20 Clip Board l 5.3.21 Pens, Pencils, etc. l 5.3.22 Towels l 5.3.23 Control Panel Power Key l S.3.24 Ramp for Large Volume Case , l 5.3.25 Scissors g $. Y g g E D
'_ h -,
- I l ___ - - . I
_ ,__1 -__.-.
f EP-231, Rav. 5 h' Page 14 of 64 TJY/jmv r g l 5.4 Re fe rences , f
- 8 5.4.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation l 5.4.2 M-102 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-0" l 5.4.3 M-30, Rev. 7 - Post Accident Sampling P&ID 5.4.4 M-42, Proposed Rev.19 - Nuclear Boiler Vessel
.. Instrumentation 5.4.5 M-51, Sht. 1 - Rev. 29, Sht. 2 - Rev. 29, Residual Heat Removal P&ID 5.4.6 M Sht. 1 - Rev. 19, Containment Atmosphere Control P&ID 5.4.7 M1-D24-200 1, Vol. I & II, GEK83344, Operation and Maintenance Instructions - PASS, Vol. I & II .i -
5.4.8 A-107, Rev. 30, Architectural ~ Floor Plan at it Elevation 217'-0".
'1 e
l'
't g'
e-_Y h ] __m %S '
?__ _ R-
- I A o - * '
j4 - l EP-231, Rav. 5 [l t Appendix 1 l Page 15 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-1 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE ) IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING LINE), THERE EXISTS THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-42-lF059H - TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING
$ BY OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 AND bC MAIN CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (EXCESS FLON CHECK VALVE OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE SAMPLING AN INDICATION OF DECREASING FLON (FCV627 on FI-664) AND/OR g DECREASING PRESSURE (PI661) II;* NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST MONI'ZORING OF THESE, ANNUNCIATORS.
l _ l. Ensure that the nitrogen supply valves are open and that the pressure is set at 100 psig by opening the following valves: (Sign-off Required) l N2 Bottle 1 - N2 Bottle 2
, es-v Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve
'. I PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073
) Isolation Valye . ... Isolation Valve -
30-0022 30-0023 l , l Unit 1 Unit 2 l ,30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l Domin Water Tank l 30-0017 - 2
- 2. Ensure that the Demineralized Flush Water Tank OOT 945 is
- full and is pressurized at 100 psig and the following valves are open to the sample station (Sign-off required) l 30-0014 l Unit 1 Unit 2 3 l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100 If not, open valves 30-0011 and 30-0015, verify that valve 30-0014 is open, remove the plug on the Hydro Test Tap by valve 30-0015, and SLOWLY open valve 30-0010. Continue flow j until water appears at the test tap. Close valve 30-0010 h ~
FIRST, then close valves 30-0011 and 30-0015. Replace the Test Tap plug and secure. . O E 8 6.a ( h E b 4 m
,, __ ,,_,_,,# [__ q_ _ , _ . , _ . , _w _ . _ _ - -
p __ _ ._- . I e l l- EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 1 l Page 16 of 64 i TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-1 (CONT'D) PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE
- 3. Verify that the damper is open (half-way) to Secondary Containmen t.
- 4. Adjust PCV-627 on the control panel to have a 15 psi reading on the gauge.
- 5. Turn all control panel switches "OFF" (except HC-723, place
, in position 4 " SPARE") and then TURN the Control Panel Power
_j 'r Selector Switch HC-600 to "A" (Alternate "B") . l 6. Turn the Liquid or Gas Selector Switch to Liquid. ) 7. Turn Flush System Switch BC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and HC-626 to position 1 (Jet Pump) or position 5 (RRR) and observe that approximately 0.3 gpm flow per FI-664 is occurring and providing a positive indication that the discharge line to the Suppression Pool is open.
- 8. After being assured that- the discharge line to the suppression pool is open, drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump
! by turning Switch HC-715-1 clockwise thrgugh its eight I
positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position.
! ] 9. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and than HC-628-1 to "OFF".
L
, 10. With the Drain System Switch (HC-715-1) in the "OFF"
- position, place Switch HC-700 (liquid / gas selector) in the l " GAS" position. Ensure N2 bottle valves are open and a regulated to approximately 100 psig.
l.11. Ensure the Chiller E-703 is on.
- 12. Quickly inspect the needle in the gas port to determine that its condition is satisfactory for obtaining a sample.
IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, ONLY TIGHTEN THE IODINE CARTRIDGE DRAWER UNTIL THE " CARTRIDGE IN" LIGHT '! URNS GREEN AND NO FURTHER. l 13. If a particulate / iodine sample will be obtained later, make sure that the desired filter cartridges are properly l.- installed (including "O" rings) in the cartridge retainer. 1 Install the gas filter drawer into position. Verify that the i " CARTRIDGE IN" light is green. i e l. i
. = _ _ _ _ _ i _i_______ _ -- - _... .. . - - - - . ,, . - - - . . . , . - - - , - -
y - W - E 3 , l EP-231, Rov. 5 Appendix 1 l Page 17 of 64
~
. TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-1 (CONT'D)
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE
- 14. Turn Switch HC-723 (GAS SAMPLE SELECTOR SWITCH) to the desired sample location:
l POSITION LOCATION 1 Drywell Atmosphere 2 Suppression Pool Atmosphere 3 Secondary Containment Atmosphere 4 Spare
- 15. Open the respective Reactor system valve in the gas sample line as follows:
l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH NAME POSITION
- Upper Drywell ATM. SUP POOL /DRYMELL AIR DRYWELL (291') TO POST ACDT SAMP
.] SV57-146A/SV57-146B
- Lower Drywell ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR DRYWELL (242') TO POST ACDT SAMP SV57-147A/SV57-147B
- Suppression Pool ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL SUPP POOL
, (222') (250 Deg Azimuth TO POST ACDT SAMP from North) SV57-147A/SV57-147B
- Suppression Pool ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR SUPP POOL (222') (70 Deg Azimuth TO POST ACDT SAMP from North) SV57-146A/SV57-146B
- Secondary Containment No Line-up Necessary ATM.
~
l
- Verify that the light changes from green to red. '
- 16. Place a standard 14.4 milliliter off gas vial into the gas vial positioner, slide the positioner into the gas port.
, observe that the " Bottle In" status light changes from red to L green. If the light does not change to green, reposition the bottle. .1 4 e d
; l
}
- 1 .
I! ) a
$-- *8-, v-e-ww-&yV, y--,,y-iw$-v =-+-w ww-, -
-* w - -rwg-- * - -
-n. _ . - n.~ - - .. _.=..= -- - -. -. --
l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 1 l Page 18 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-1 (CONT'D) PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPL'E
- 17. Turn the "15 ml Gas Sample Switch" HC-705 to position 2 and '
circulate gas for the appropriate time: l Sample Time (min) Drywell Atmosphere 23 9 Suppression Pool Atmosphere 17 ; Secondary Containment Atmosphere 9 Be sure that the flow as read by the rotameter (FI-725) thru the sample enclosure window is greater than 10 SLPM. Record flow and flush duration on data sheet.
- 18. Turn HC-705 to position 3 and evacuate the off gas vial.
Record pressure PI-708 of the evacuated vial on the data sheet. Make sure the vacuum in the gas vial reaches a stable minimum reading.
- 19. Turn HC-705 to position 4, "TAKE SAMPLE". Verify that pressure (PI-708) does not change significantly. If the pressure changes significantly, it may indicate a system leak. Therefore, turn Switch HC-705 counter clockwise to position 2. Remove the sample vial and place in a plactic bag for transportation to the hot lab. Place a new 14.4 al off gas sample vial into the gas positioner and return to Step 5.
- 20. Press the HC-720 button to obtain the sample. Keep button depressed until a steady pressure is reached (approximately 5 seconds). Record pressure from PI-708 on data sheet. This -
pressure should correspond to actual pressure of sample being ob tained. Record sample temperature from TI-724 on data shee t. , 21. Turn HC-705 to position 5 " FLUSH SYSTEM" and flush for approximately 1 minute. l 22. Turn HC-705 clockwise to "OFF".
- 23. Turn Switch SV57-147A/SV57-147B or SV57-146A/Sv57-146B (if opened in Step 14) to the CLOSE position. :
- 24. Wearing cotton liners and gloves, and observing ALARA practices, withdraw the gas vial positioner and immediately i have the HP technician survey the gas sample vial and record Fj~ the Initial Contact Cose Rate on the Data Sheet. Keep the vial at the maximum distance from the individual and quickly 1 ; insert the sample bottle into the gas vial cask. Close and latch the gas vial cask. Put a stopper or the gas vial '
l positioner back into the port in the sample station. l 25. Turn HC (Liquid / Gas Selector) to the LIQUID position.
'.i - . . . . - . - . . . . -- - -- ..--- -- - --
+
- _ _ _ _ . , ,, .,.,-.c _,,,_-.+g_._..p_.wy , , , , ..,._v.,._m- -
l EP-231, Rhv. 5 Appendix 1
, l Page 19 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-1 (CONT'D)
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE
- 26. Turn Flush Sytem HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and EC-626 to position 1 and observe that approximately 0.3 gpm flow per FI-664 is occuring. Leave in this position for 4j, minutes then turn to OFF.
l 27. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" First and then HC-628-1 to "OFF".
- 28. Drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning switch HC-715-
;- 1 clockwise thrcygh its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position.
l 29. Close FCV-627 to O psig.
- 30. Close the nitrogen supply valves opened in Step No.1:
(Sign-off required) l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2
.] Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve i PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023 l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l Demin Water Tank l 30-0017 -
- 31. Close the Demin Water Tank valves opened in Step No. 2:
(Sign-off required) l' l 30-0014
- 1
'l l Unit 1 Unit 2
; ] 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100
-l l: l 32. Close the damper. !t l 33. Turn the Chiller E-703 OFF. l! l 34. Turn all switches (except for HC-723 which is left in - i; position 4) to their "OFF" position. I li l l 1
,, _ _ _ __ . . . . . . _ , ~ . . . _ .
J l EP-231, Rav. 5
' App 2ndix 1 20 of 64 TJY/jmv
, l APPENDIX EP-231-1 l, PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE (CONT) c l Data Sheet for 14. 4 ML Gas Sample l DESIRED ANALYSIS l A.
I a. l C. l 1. Sample Source Date Time l 2. Sample Flow FI-725 (SLPM) l 3. Flush Duration (Min.) l 4. Absolute Pressure of Vial PI-708 (PSIA) l S. Final Sample Pressure PI-708 (PSIA) l 6. Sample Temperature TI-724 (F) . l 7. Calculated Sample Volume (ML) V= (14.7) (14. 4 ) (T F + 460) (530) (P PSIA) l 8. Initial Contact Dose Rate (mR) Name
- 1,
'Ii i .j - - 1 . 1 _ ,.._.. ,,. ., - - < - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - ~ - - - - - ' * - - - - ' * - ' ~ ' - - ' ~- g o a. g #_ 6-
n - l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 2 l Page 21 of 64 ! TJY/jmv i APPENDIX EP-231-2 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING LINE), THERE EXISTS THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-42-lF059H TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING BY OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 AND MAIN CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE SAMPLING AN INDICATION OF DECREASING FLOW (FCV627 on FI-664) AND/OR DECREASING PRESSURE (PI661) IS NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST MONITORING OF THESE ANNUNCIATORS.
- 1. Ensure that the nitrogen supply valves are open and that the pressure is set at 100 psig by opening the following valves:
(Sign-o f f - Required) l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 L Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve PCV-30-074f PCV-30-073 Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023 7 l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *OR* ' 30-2114 l Domin Water Tank . l 30-0017 i' 2. Ensure that the Demineralized Flush Water Tank OOT 945 is [. full and is pressurized at 100 psig and the following valves ( are open to the sample station: (Sign-off required) l [ ] 30-0014 l{ l Unit 1 Unit 2 c1 l- l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100 If not, open valves 30-0011 and 30-0015, verify that valve l b 30-0014 is open, remove the plus on the Hydro Test Tap by valve 30-0015, and SLOWLY open valve 30-0010. Continue flow until water appears at the test tap. Close valve 30-0010 l FIRST, then close valves 30-0011 and 30-0015. Repla'ce the l Test Tap plug and secure. l
- 3. Verify that the damper is open (half-way) to Secondary i
Containment. l U $ b, UO k I N
** , 'g ,
Y #
=- - - _ _ . . _ _ - - _ _ . .. . -
.l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 2 l Page 22 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-2 (CONT'D)
~ PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE
- l
- 4. Adjust PCV-627 on the control panel to have a 15 psi reading on the gauge. '
- 5. Turn all control panel switches "OFF" (except HC-723, place in position 4 " SPARE") and then TURN the Control Panel Power Selector Switch BC-600 to "A" (Alte rnate "B") .
l 6. Turn the Liquid or Gas Selector Switch to Liquid. i
- 7. Turn Flush System Switch HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and HC-626 to position 1 (Jet Pump) or position 5 (RHR) and observe that approximately 0.3 gpm flow per FI-664 is occurring and providing a positive indication that the
, discharge line to the Suppression Pool is open. 8.' After being assured that the discharge line to the suppression pool is open, . drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump
; by turning Switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight l
positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position. l l 9. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HC-628-1 to "OFF".
- 10. Verify that HC-715-1 DRAIN SYSTEM SWITCH is in the "OFF" position. Place Switch HC-700 (LIQUID / GAS SELECTOR) in the
" GAS" position.
IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, ONLY TIGHTEN THE IODINE CARTRIDGE
~
- DRAWER UNTIL THE " CARTRIDGE IN" LIGHT TURNS GREEN AND NO FURTHER.
- 11. If the gas filter drawer is already in place and there is any doubt about the desired filters being in place, pull the drawer and check the filter cartridge (s) . Put the desired filter cartridge (s) into the cartridge retainer, put the cartridge retainer into the gas filter drawer including "O" !
l rings and put the drawer into the sample station and verify
- that the " CARTRIDGE IN" light is green. If not, reposition the d rawer.
4
! 12. Decide whether a timed or non-timed sample is desired and t- record. Generally speaking, if a high activity condition I exista or is suspected, a timed sample should be taken. For a timed sample, set the Timer KC-712 between the range of 0 to 30 seconds. Select a low enough time so that the activity 2
i on the filter cartridge will not be unnecessarily high and
- cause special handling problems. Observe the RI-704 reading to determine if there is a rapid activity buildup. Set the Switch HC-704 located to the left of the timer labeled TIME SAMPLE on either YES or NO.
~. . , . . . .- . - . . - - - - . - . , .- -
l EP-231, Rsv. 5 Appandix 2 l Page 23 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-2 (CONT'D) PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE l 13. Adjust PCV-30-127 to 2 psi. l 14. Turn the Chiller E-703 ON. I
' 15. Turn the GAS SAMPLE SELECTOR SWITH (HC-723) to the desired sample source.
l SAMPLE SOURCE POSITION l Drywell Atmosphere 1 l Suppression Pool Atmosphere 2 l Secondary Containment Atmosphere 3 l Spare 4
't I 16. Open the respective Reactor system valve in the gas sample j
- 6 line for the appropriate sample as follows:
l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITH NAME POSITION
- Upper Drywell ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR DRYWELL (291') TO POST ACDT SAMP SV57-146A/SV57-146B
- Lower Drywell ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR DRYWELL (242') TO POST ACDT SAMP .
SV57-147A/SV57-147B
- Suppression Pool ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR SUPP POOL (222') (250 Deg Azimuth TO POST ACDT SAMP from North) SV57-147A/SV57-147B
- Suppression Pool ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR SUPP POOL (222') (70 Deg Azimuth TO POST ACDT SAMP 1
i from North) SV57-146A/SV57-146B
~
Secondary Containment No Line-up Necessary ATM.
, l
- Verify that the light changes from green to red.
l
.h l
t
. . . m._,_ ,. -
l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appandix 2
). Page 24 of 64 TJY/jmv l APPENDIX EP-231-2' l l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT')
1
- 17. Turn the IODINE CARTRIDGE SAMPLE SWI'ICH HC-712 to position 2 and circulate gas for the appropriate time:
l SAMPLE TIME (MIN) Drywell Atmosphere 23 Suppression Pool Atmosphere 17 Secondary Containment Atmosphere 9
- 18. Be sure the flow as read by the rotometer which is visible thru the window in the sample station enclosure is greater than 10 SLPM. Record the flow (FI-725), temperature (TI-724)
, and pressure (PI-726 and PI-727) on the data sheet. The two pressure gages (PI-726 and PI-727), as read thru the window, j should be the same.
s
- 19. Turn DC-712 to position 3. The sample gas will start to flow through the filter cartridge. On the DATA SHEET record PI-727, PI-726, FI-725, the flow duration in seconds and RI-704.
After the timer h'as timed out for a timed sample or after the predetermined time has elapsed for a non-timed sample, verify critical flow by completing the appropriate sections of the Data Sheet.
- 20. Turn Selector Switch HC-712 to position 4 for 10 seconds to .
evacuate the filter cartridge. A vacuum will be quickly drawn on the system.
- 21. Turn Switch BC-712 to position 5'which will admit a nitrogen flush through the filter cartridge to remove Krypton and Xenon gases. This purge should last approximately 20 seconds or until RI-704 is stable. Record the final radiation, RI-704.
3 22. Rotate EC-712 clockwise to the "OFF" position. Turn other switches (except HC-600) to the "OFF" pos itions. Remove cartridge retainer and immediately survey the cartridge retainer and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on the Data Sheet and put the cartridge retainer in a plastic bag. Tape bags closed. If available, install a new cartridge retainer complete with filter paper and iodine cartridges. Put drawer ] ; back into sample enclosure. Place the sample into a transport cask. . 1 i l s'
~
+ -
.x'., wnw - =;_;D xx ,n.& aec &c T -. :
,__,_____.,_-)
- l. EP-231, R3v. 5 l Appandix 2
.l Page 25 of 64 .
TJY/jmv i 1
-l APPENDIX EP-231-2' l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT)
- 23. Turn Switch SV57-147A/Sv57-147B or SV57-146A/SV57-146B opened in Step 15 to the CLOSE position. .
[ ] 24. Turn HC-700 (Liquid / Gas Selector) to the LIQUID position.
- 25. Turn Flush Sytem HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and
' HC-626 to position 1 and observe that approximately 0.3 gym flow per FI-664 is occuring. Leave in this position for 5 minutes then turn to OFF.
- l 26. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then BC-628-1 to "OFF" .
, 27. Drain Collector Tank, Trap and Subp by turning switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position. , l 28. Close FCV-627 to 0 psig. l '29. Close the nitrogen supply valves opened in Step No.1: j (Sign-off required) . I l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 3 Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073
- Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023
,g l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l Demin Water Tank l 30-0017
- 30. Close the Demin Water Tank valves opened in Step No. 2:
(Sign-of f required) l 30-0014 jl l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100
- p l 31. Close FCV-627'to O psig.
ci t,
- 1
_. swmn .+ . m .-:- w w : e- - + - -
?
l EP-231, R0v. 5
. Appandix 2 .. l Page 26 of 64 1
TJY/jmv
.) l APPENDIX EP-231-2 l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT) 3 l 32. Turn the Chiller E-703 OFF.
j 33. Turn all switches (except for HC-723 which is left in j c; position 4) to their "OFF" position. i
> i 's N-
- l
- i O
O i 9
,. h ' Y p' ,- s at
.-[_E[_t y h ,3 g , , .,,
- 7. - ,
Y* 7
-.. . _. _ _ _ _ _____m. _
,_ w 7
,l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 2
! Page 27 of 64 j l APPENDIX EP-231-2 l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT) l Data Sheet for Iodine / Particulate Sample
{ l DESIRED ANALYSIS l A. l B. l ESTIMATED SAMPLING TIME l 1. Sample Scarce Date Time l 2. Orifice Sir.:e 3.0 1pm l 3. Timed Sample Yes or No l 4. Flush Time in Minutes ~] l S. Sample Flow FI-725 (slpm) (not thru cartridge) l 6. Temperature TI-724 (F) l 7. Pressure PI-726 (PSIG or "Hg) l 8. Pressure PI 727 (PSIG or "Hg) l 9. Pressure PI-726 (PSIG or "Eg) l 10. Pressure PI-727 (PSIG or "Hg) ' l 11. Flow FI-725 (slpm) (flow thru cartridge) l 12. Flow Duration seconds - l 13. Radiation RI-704 (mR/hr) l 14. Final Radiation RI-704 (mR/hr) j l 15. Initial Contact Dose Rate (mR/hr) f f Name s i l t :,; ns. ><m _ s a_r T_+_ _ _ . _ .
.. l ,* ,, _a
( 4 ,l EP-231, Rev. 5 Appendix 2 g l Page 28 of 64
' TJY/jmv
'1 APPENDIX EP-231-2 DATA SHEET FOR IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE VERIFICATION OF CRITICAL FLOW For the Upstream Pressure Found on PI-726, verify Critical. Flow through the Iodine Cartridge by having the corresponding valve el 1
; creater vacuum on the downstream pressure gage PI-727 as given below.
- 9. UPSTREAM PRESSURE 10. DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE PI-726 PI-727
[ .1 PSIG or "Hg PSIG OR "Hg ; 11 "Hg 21 "Hg
, 10 "He 20 "Hg 9 "Hg 20 "Ho 8 "Hg 19 "Hg 7 "Hg 19 "Hg 6 "He 18 "Hg a 5 "He 18 "Hg
}$ 4 "Hg 17 "Hg 3 "Hg 17 "Hg
- 2 "Hg 16 "HQ l "Hg 16 "Hg 0 PSIG 16 "Hg 1 PSIG 15 "Hg 2 PSIG 13 "Hg 3 PSIG 12 "Hg 4 PSIG 11 "Hg 5 PSIG 10 "Hg 6 PSIG 9 "He L 7 PSIG 8 "Hg
,. 8 PSIG 7 "Hg f 9 PSIG 6 "Hg 10 PSIG S "Hg - F 11 PSIG 4 "He r 12 PSIG 3 "Hg 13 PSIG 2 "Hg 14 PSIG 1 "Hg k 15 PSIG 0 PSIG 16 PSIG 0 PSIG 17 PSIG 1 PSIG L 18 PSIG 1 PSIG 19 PSIG 2 PSIG 20 PSIG 2 PSIG 21 PSIG 3 PSIG 22 PSIG 3 PSIG ,! 23 PSIG 4 PSIG l 24 PSIG 4 PSIG L 25 PSIG S PSIG 26 PSIG S PSIG 27 PSIG 6 PSIG 28 PSIG 6 PSIG I 29 PSIG . 7 PSIG 30 PSIG 7 PSIG Critical Flow (Ye s/No) l I When critical flow is obtained through the cartridge assembly, a l ll NOTE: flow of 3.0 liters per minute + 15% is achieved. j i ,:;a e . , ,. 3 ,x.. ,.- , _ :. e -
._~ . ..
_--n _.- -_ < 9-f : l EP-231, Rav. 5 .C Appandix 3 h , 'l Page 29 of 64 ( . TJY/jmv a - APPENDIX EP-231-3 t . [ PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE
, _ AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY
? , h j IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING LINE), THERE EXISTS.THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-g, 42-lF059H TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING BY r OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 AND MAIN i CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE { OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE SAMPLING AN INDICATION.
. OF DECREASING FLOW (FCV627 on FI-664) AND/OR DECREASING PRESSURE (PI 661) IS NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST MONITORING OF THESE ANNUNCIATORS.
1.. Ensure that the nitrogen supply valves are open and that the <. pressure is set at 100 psig by opening the following valves:
- 1. (Sign-off Required) l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve
. PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023 l Unit 1 Un it 2 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 i j l Demin Water Tank f i . l 30-0017 ( ; y 2. Ensure that the Demineralized Flush. Water Tank OOT 945 is full J and is pressurized at 100 psig and the following valves are open to the sartple station: (Sign-off required) l 30-0014 l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100
, If not, open valves 30-0011 and 30-0015, verify that valve 30-0014 is open, remove the plug on the Hydro Test Tap by valve 30-5, 0015, and SLOWLY open valve 30-0010. Continue flow until water appears at the test tap. Close valve 30-0010 FIRST,*then close f <
valves 30-0011 and 30-0015. Replace the Test Tap plug and secure.
- 3. Verify that the damper is open (half-way) to secondary Containment.
. ,1
'y 9 y .'. (*L *f \ . :' "* $. lat * ' sd e %
- - . - , , - , . - - . - - - _ , ., n , nw 4
l d
- l , EP-231, Rav. 5 S -
Appandix 3 4 Page 30 of 64
~^
~
' l' TJY/jmv s APPENDIX EP-231-3 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS " SAMPLE AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY 6 :
- 4. Adjust PCV-627 on the control panel to have a 15 psi reading on the gauge.
- 5. Turn all control panel switches "OFF" (except HC-723, place in position 4 " SPARE") and then TURN the Control Panel Power Selector Switch HC-600 to "A" (Alte rnate "B") .
l 6. Turn the Liquid or Gas selector Switch to Liquid. lg 7. Turn Flush System Switch BC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and HC-626 to position 1 (Jet Pump) or position 5 (RHR).and g observe that approximately 0.3 gpm flow per FI-664 is occurring L and providing a positive indication that the discharge line to
. the suppression Pool is open.
( ,- l 8. After being assured that the discharge line to the suppression pool is open, drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning
~ Switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position.
l ^ 9. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HC-628-1 to "OFF".
- 10. Eith the Drain System Switch (HC-715-1) in the "OFF" position, place Switch HC-700 (liquid / gas selector) in the " GAS" position.
l 11. Ensure the Chiller E-703 is on.
,; 12. Quickly inspect the needle in the gas port to determine that its t condition is satisfactory for obtaining a sample.
t IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, ONLY TIGHTEN THE IODINE, CARTRIDGE DRAWER UNTIL THE " CARTRIDGE IN" LIGHT TURNS GREEN AND NO FURTHER. p L 13. If the gas filter drawer is already in place and there is .any if doubt :that the desired filters being in place, pull the drawer and check the filter cartridge (s) . Put the desired filter 1 car tr idge (s) into the cartridge retainer, put the cartridge a retainer into the gas filter drawer including "O" rings and put j the drawer into the sample station and verify that the }
" CARTRIDGE IN" light is green. If not, reposition the drawer.
e . t mwn. s m+..- . . c. x= . ~ ..
. . . - - - - . _ _ .- _.nwma- .
m E .
,l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 3 I Page 31 of 64 TJY/jmv
, APPENDIX EP-231-3 (CONT'D)
? ,
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY y 14. Decide whether a timed or non-timed sample is desired and E record. Generally speaking, if a high activity condition exists i or is suspected, a timed sample should be taken. For a timed [f sample, set the Timer KC-712 between the range of 0 to 30 4 seconds. Select a low enough time so that the activity on the filter cartridge will not be unnecessarily high and cause special handling problems. Observe the RI-704 reading to determine if there is a rapid activity buildup. Set the Switch , HC-704 located to the left of the timer labeled TIME SAMPLE on either YES or NO. l 15. Adjust PCV-30-127 to 2 psi.
- 16. Turn Switch HC-723 (GAS SAMPLE SELECTOR SWITCH) to the desired i sample location:
^:) l POSITION LOCATION 1 Drywell Atmosphere 2 Suppression Pool Atmosphere 3 Secondary Containment Atmosphere 4 Spare
- 17. Open the respective Reactor system valve in the gas sample line as follows:
l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH NAME POSITION
- Upper Drywell ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR DRYWELL (291') TO POST ACDT SAMP SV57-146A/SV57-146B
[
- Lower Drywell ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR DRYWELL .
l (242') TO POST ACDT SAMP l SV57-147A/SV57-147B L
- Suppression Pool ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR SUPP POOL (222') (250 Deg Azimuth TO POST ACDT SAMP from North) SV57-147A/SV57-1473 h
- Suppression Pool ATM. SUP POOL /DRYWELL AIR SUPP POOL (222') (70 Deg Azimuth TO POST ACDT SAMP from North) SV57-146A/SV57-146B Secondary Containment No Line-up Necessary l ATM.
. l
- Verify that the light changes from green to red.
.-r-t .
.s...,;,.. . f. - m .;, : Wa~n;;;;s. in _. W ~= ~ ~ ~ " - - -
?
{'i
, , l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 3
/{l j -
l Page 32 of 64 a TJY/jmv jc , APPENDIX EP-231-3 (CONT' D) $ PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY Q: e. ( '
!+
- 18. Place a standard 14.4 milliliter off gas vial into the gas vial L positioner, slide the positioner into the gas port. Observe that the " Bottle. In" status light changes from red to green. If j the light does not change to green, reposition the bottle.
i s, 7 19. Turn the "15 ml Gas Sample Switch" HC-705 to position 2 and ( circulate gas for the appropriate time: , l ' SAMPLE TIME (MIN) Drywell Atmosphere 23 c Suppression Pool Atmosphere 17 Secondary Containment Atmosphere .9 Be sure that the flow as read by the rotameter (FI-725) thru the sample enclosure window is greater than 10 SLPM. Record flow and flush duration on data sheet.
- 20. Turn HC-705 to po'sition 3 and evacuate the off gas vial. Record pressure PI-708 of the evacuated vial on the data sheet. Make sure the vacuum in the gas vial reaches a stable minimum
, reading.
- 21. Turn HC-705 to position 4, "TAKE SAMPLE". Verify that pressure (PI-708) does not change significantly. If the pressure changes s igni ficantly, it may indicate a system leak. -Therefore, turn Switch BC-705 counter clockwise to position 2. Remove the sample vial and place in a plactic bag for transportation to the hot lab. Place a new 14.4 ml off gas sample vial into the gas positioner and return to Step 5.
o 22. Press the HC-720 button to obtain the sample. Keep button depressed until a steady pressure is reached (approximately 5 seconds) . Record pressure from PI-708 on data sheet. This pressure should correspond to actual pressure of sample being obtained. Record sample temperature from TI-724 on data sheet.
- 23. Turn HC-705 to position 5 " FLUSH SYSTEM" and flush for approximately 1 minute.
l 24. Turn HC-705 clockwise to "OFF".
) . -' } ,N
?
_f M j , .'k :
- f p p 4
_-_ _ _- - __ m, _----_-w a-wm % l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 3 1," l Page 33 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-3 (CONT'D) n PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE i AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY . 25. Wearing cotton liners and gloves, and observing ALARA practices, withdraw the gas vial positioner and immediately have the HP 4 technician survey the gas sample vial and record the Initial-I Contact Dose Rate on the Data Sheet. Keep the vial at the maximum distance from the individual and quickly insert the k , sample bottle into the gas vial cask. Close and latch the gas
- .y vial cask. Put a stopper or the gas vial positioner back into the port in the sample station.
[([
- 26. Turn the IODINE CARTRIDGE SAMPLE SWITCH HC-712 to position 2 and circulate ga6 for the appropriate time:
l SAMPLE TIME (MIN) Drywell Atmosphere 23 Suppression Pool Atmosphere 17 A Secondary Containment Atmosphere 9
- 27. Be sure the flow as read by the rotometer which is visible thru the window in the sample station enclosure is greater than 10 SLPM. Record the flow (FI-725), temperature (TI-724) and pressure (PI-726 and PI-727) on the data sheet. The two pressure gages (PI-726 and PI-727), as read thru the window, should be the same. -
- 28. Turn HC-712 to p$sition 3 n The sample has will start to flow through the fiter cartridge. On the DATA SHEET record PI-727,
- L PI-726, FI-725, the flow Suration in seconds and RI-704. After y the timer has timed out for a timed sample or after the predetermined time has elapsed for a non-timed sample, verify 3 critical flow by completing the appropriate section of the Data .
Shee t. 3 x 29. Turn Selector Switch HC-712 to position 4 for 10 seconds to evacuate the filter cartridge. A vacuum will be quickly drawn on the system.
- 30. Turn Switch BC-712 to position 5 which will admit a nitrogen flush through the filter dartridge to remove Krypton and Xenon ga se s. This purge shouldplast approximately 20 seconds or until
, RI-704'is stable. Record Ithe final radiation, RI-704.
e e e- w * *w**ep- = = = . = eme e a m .. . . ,.. ..emme. , w_. , , , , , , , m r d-a -
- E
m ; l
. l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 3 l l Page 34 of 64 )
TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-3 (CONT'D) 1 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY
- 31. Rotate HC-712 clockwise to the "OFF" position. Turn other switches (except HC-600) to the "OFF" positions. Remove cartridge retainer and immediately survey the cartridge retaininer and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on the Date Sheet and put hte cartirdge retainer in a plastic bag. Tape bags closed. If available, install a new cartridge retainer complete with filter paper and iodine cartridges. Put drawer back into sample enclosure. Place the sample into a transport cask.
- 32. Turn Switch SV57-147A/SV57-147B or SV57-146A/SV57-146B opened in Step 16 to the CLOSE position.
l 33. Turn RC-700 (Liquid / Gas Selector) to the LIQUID position.
- 34. Turn Flush Sytem HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and HC-626 to position 1 and observe that approximately 0.3 gpm. flow per FI-664 is occuring. Leave in ths position for 5 minutes
, then turn to OFF.
l 35. Turn BC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then BC-628-1 to "OFF" .
- 36. Drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position.
l 37. Close FCV-627 to O psig. t 1 38. Close the nitrogen supply valves opened in Step No.1: (Sign-off required) l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 Isolation valve Isolation valve 30-0022 30-0023
-l Un it 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l
l Demin Water Tank i' l 30-0017 y L t '. i r r_t
- iC .1'. ' 3 _ .,_
[ ,j___, ,, ,
l EP-231, R2v. 5 Appendix 3
, l. Page 35 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-3 (CONT'D)
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14. 4 ML GAS SAMPLE AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY n
- 39. Close the Demin Water Tank valves opened in Step No. 2: (S ign-off required) l 30-0014 l
l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100 l 40. Close the damper. l 41. Turn the Chiller E-703 OFF.
- 42. Turn all switches (except for HC-723 which is le ft in position
- 4) to their "OFF" position.
~
I l i. O O
'Nf
- 7 #,'"i ,[T"*, '.* * * *[ **P ' * ' T['
- 1'
[ " . * *"*I"^~ * *[e 8* F"f *N ""#"."$*' '""
"4 $7 " '64 i ' T ~7.$s .' 7 s ^[,T" g '~ S
l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 3 l Page 36 of 64 TJY/jmv l APPENDIX EP-231-3 {I . PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE , AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY j l Data Sheet for 14.4 ML Gas Sample L l DESIRED ANALYSIS l l A. l B. , l C. l 1. Sample Source Date Time l4 2. Sample Flow FI-725 (SLPM) w o l 3. Flush Duration (Min.)
;y l 4. Ab. solute Pressure of Vial PI-708 (PSIA)
F g , l S. Final Sample Pressure PI-708 (PSIA) l 6. Sample Temperature TI-724 (F) l 7. Calculated Sample Volume (ML) V= (14.7) (14. 4 ) (T F + 460) (530) (P PSIA) l l 8. Initial Contact Doso Rtte (mR) . l DATA SHEET FOF IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE l E D_EJIRED ANALYSIS l A. p
- B.
l l ESTIMATED SAMPLING TIME l 1. Sample Source Date Time f l 2. Orifice Size 3.0 1pm 4 l 3. Timed Sample Yes or No l 4. Flush Time in Minutes w., z '.i _
, . , _ _ , :< w _ ce ' . ' N. < ,-
.. __1 _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _
l . EP-231, Rav. 5 l Appandix 3 l Ji. l Page 37 of 64 l TJY/jmv l l APPENDIX EP-231-3 l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE AND AN IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE SIMULTANEOUSLY
, l DATA SHEET FOR IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE n l S. Sample Flow FI-725 (not thru cartridge) (slpm) l 6. Temperature TI-724 (F) .
l 7. Pressure PI-726 (PSIG or "Hg) l 8. Pressure PI'727 (PSIG or "Hg) l 9. Pressure PI-726 (PSIG or "Hg) l 10. Pressure PI-727 (PSIG or "Hg) l 11. Flow FI-725 (slpm), (flow thru cartridge) v l 12. Flow Duration seconds 9 l 13. Radiation RI-704 (mR/hr)
~
l 14. Final Radiation RI-704 (mR/hr) ~ l 15. Initial Contact Dose Rate (mR/hr) I
~1 .
e s - Name k o 1 l. e ? . l i h I i
. . . . . . - . ~ . . - - - - - - _ . . . . . . . ~ . _ . . . . . . - - . . . ~ - -
7'y.n m m7~7 7nq 7 7_~m-~7? g ,yg:p; sy:r r.~n.3:y. ; - , ;-~ my33(q~ ; _- 3_ 3' ~3_
W,
~ - -
Z , 4 l 1 l EP-231, Rav. 5
- Appendix 3 '
i'
. l Page 38 of 64 l TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-3 DATA SHEET FOR IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE VERIFICATION OF CRITICAL FLOW' f
For the Upstream Pressure Found on PI-726, verify Critical Flow l through the Iodine Cartridge by having the corresponding valve el ; p greater vacuum on the downstream pressure gage PI-727 as given below. ' L l
- 9. UPSTREAM PRESSURE 10. DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE
< PI-726 PI-727 PSIG or "Hg PSIG OR "Hg
.1 "He 21 "Hg
'.0 "Hg 20 "Hg 9 "Hg 20 "Hg -
8 "Hg 19 "Hg 7 "Hg 19 "Hg 6 "Hg 18 "Hg
. 5 "Hg 18 "Hg 4 "Hg 17 "Hg 3 "Hg 17 "Ho 2 "Hg 16'"Hg 1 "Hg 16 "HQ 0 PSIG 16 "He 1 PSIG 15 "Hg
^ 2 PSIG' 13 "HQ 3 PSIG 12 "Hg
. 4 PSIG 11 "Ho 5 PSIG 10 "He 6 PSIG 9 "Hg 7 PSIG 8 "Hg 8 PSIG 7 "Hg 9 PSIG 6 "Hg 10 PSIG 5 "Hg
- N 11 PSIG 4 "Hg
- - 12 PSIG 3 "Hg 13 PSIG 2 "Hg
., 14 PSIG 1 "Hg l .. 15 PSIG 0 PSIG 16 PSIG 0 PSIG 17 PSIG. 1 PSIG 18 PSIG 1 PSIG 19 PSIG 2 PSIG 20 PSIG 2 PSIG 21 PSIG 3 PSIG 22 PSIG 3 PSIG 23 PSIG 4 PSIG 24 PSIG 4 PSIG 25 PSIG S PSIG 26 PSIG S PSIG 27 PSIG 6 PSIG 28 PSIG 6 PSIG 29 PSIG 7 PSIG l' 30 PSIG 7 PSIG f Critical Flow (Yes/NC) i j NOTE: When critical flow is obtained through the cartridge assembly, a l flow of 3.0 liters per minute + 15% is achieved.
.a., , ...: w essms;;d:: a = e / -
..= . ___ _ _ . _ _ _ . . . - _ = _ _
-- - - - ~
--n 1 l d -
y l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appandix 4 l Page 39 of 64 TJY/jmv NPPENDIX EP-231-4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING LINE), THERE EXISTS THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-42-lF059H TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING BY OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 (20C228) !I AND MAIN CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (2BC802-35) (EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE SAMPLING AN INDICATION OF DECREASING FLOW (FCV627 on FI-664) AND/OR DECREASING PRESSURE (PI661) IS NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST MONI'IORING,OF THESE ANNUNCIATORS.
- 1. Ensure that the nitrogen supply valves are open and that the pressure is set at 100 psig by opening the following valves:
(Sign-off Required) l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023
~
l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *0R* 30-2114 l Demin Water Tank
~
l 30-0017.
- 2. Ensure that the Demineralized Flush Water Tank OOT 945 is full and is pressurized at 100 psig and the following valves are open to the sample station: (Sign-off required) l 30-0014 l Unit 1 Unit 2
! l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100 1 '
If not, open valves 30-0011 and 30-0015, verify that valve 30-
,. 0014 is open, remove the plug on the. Hydro Test Tap by valve 30- ,i 0015, and SLONLY open valve 30-0010. Continue flow until water 1 appears at the test tap. Close valve 30-0010 FIRST, then close i
valves 30-0011 and 30-0015. Replace the Test Tap plug and secure.
- 3. Verify that the damper is open (half-way) to Secondary Containment.
3.uw,w aswyM-m s; - - m ~
n._ .- l EP-231, R2v. 5 Appandix 4 l Page 40 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
- 4. Adjust PCV-627 on the control panel to have a 15 psi reading on the gauge.
- 5. Turn all control panel switches "OFF" (except HC-723, place in position 4
- SPARE") and then TURN the Control Panel Power Selector S'titch HC-600 ,to "A" (Alte rnate "B") .
l 6. Turn the Liquid or Gas Selector Switch to Liquid.
- 7. Turn Flush System Switch BC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6
- and HC-626 to position 1 (Jet Pump) or position 5 (RHR) and observe that approximately 0.3 gym flow per FI-664 is occurring and providing a positive indication that the discharge line to the Suppression Pool is open.
- 8. Af ter being assured that the discharge line to the suppression pool is open, drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning Sw. itch RC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing
, approximately 5 seconds at each position.
l 9. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HC-628-1 to "OFF".
. 10. Load the syringe with 10cc of domineralized water. Place the stopcock on the syringe and load the assembly onto the injection port.
- 11. .R
. emove lead stopper and carrying handle from the small cask by
- unscrewing it and lifting it out. Leave stopper near by. .
USE APPROPRIATE ANTI-C CLOTHING AND GOGGLES IF DIRECTLY INSPECTING THE SAMPLE NEEDLES BELOW THE SAMPLE STATION.
- 12. Make certain the lead shielding drawer is out so that the needles under the sample station enclosure are exposed. Quickly inspect the needles with a mirror and flashlight. Check that i the shaft of the needle is towards the center of the sample L vial.
t
- 13. Put a wide mouth liquid sample bottle with an outer aluminum 4 retainer ring and septum into the small volume. cask. Check that the bottle lifting lever is free to move up and down. The bottle must fit snugly in the holder and be vertically aligned.
. If the bottle does not fit snugly, use a small pad of rubber or felt,, thick enough to hold vial against the upper yoke of the ~r vial holder and/or attach the bottle to the vial holder with Velco tape. -
1 N M M M i[ W o u a - M A_ - M - _- 6 Yh
._ 3, ._ = = ,s l EP-231, Rav. 5 App 3ndix 4
, l Page 41 of 64
.JY/jmv lj -
1 - APPENDIX EP-231-4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 'SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT) L 14. Check that the small volume cask is in the cask positioner, and that both are hanging from the hooks below the sample station. CAUTION: THE LEAD SHIELDING DRAWER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 70 POUNDS.
- 15. Swing the cask into position under the sample station and lock the arms of the cask holder so the cask and bottle will remain in position.
- 16. To check the fit and operation of the sample vial without t bringing a hot sample into the system, turn HC-616-1 SMALL
; VOLUME SAMPLE switch to position 3 (FLUSH LOOP).
- 17. With control panel power on, set Switch BC-700 to the " LIQUID" position and Liquid Sample Selector Switch HC-626 to position 2 (Jet Pump Line) if a jet pump sample is desired or to position 4 (RPV or Suppression Pool) if the Reactor valves were set for a RER sample. Adust PCV-627 so that the flow thru FCV-627 does not exceed 0.3 gym (See FI-664) .
, Also, if a RHR sample is desired, close the normal RER sample lines by placing the respective switch in the following position:
l SAMPLE LOCATION SMITCH NAME POSITION 4 "A" RER RER EX OUTLET NORMAL CLOSE . SAMPL ISLN LOOP A Ev51-199A "B" RER RER EX OUTLET NORMAL CLOSE
- SAMPL ISLN LOOP B i HV51-199B l 18. Raise the sample bottle into position on the needles by moving l the lift rod on the side of the cask.
r r
- 19. Screw the lift rod in to hold the sample bottle in the engaged position. Note: If the vial does not clear the entry hole, l lower the vial and rotate the small volume cask about 1/8" in either direction. If it still does not fit either the liquid vial positioner fixture or liquid tray positioner needs adjustment. Note: The green light for the small volume sample should be on. If the light remains red, unscrew the lift rod, lower the bottle and reposition.
! l 20. Turn BC-616-1 to the OFF position. I h4 * *
? ',,I.'?
y _* '" \ ** *
- hY*
.% . _ _ _ _ _ . - .m.c i
-l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 4 <
. l Page 42 of 64 i TJY/jmv
. 1 APPENDIX EP-231-4 '
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT)
- 21. Turn Liquid Sample Selector Switch HC-626 to position 1 (Jet
{ Pump Line on Bypass) for a sample from the jet pump line or to position 5 (RPV or Sup'n Pool on Bypass) for a sample from. the RER line. Adjust PCV-627 so that the flow thru FCV-627 does not exceed 1 gym. (See FI-664) Continue this flow thru bypass valve CV-626 for a long enough period to be assured that the sample lines are flushed. The minimum time required ' to do this is 10 minutes. Record the flow and flush time on the data shee t.
- 22. Af ter flush is completed, turn Switch BC-626 to position 2 (for jet pump sample) or position 4 (for RER sample) . Note that the flow on Indicator FI-664 is greatly reduced.- Adjust Valve FCV-627 for a flow of 0.3 gpm, using PCV-627 (see FI-664). '
l 23. Record the following on the data sheet: l Flow (FI-664) i
.l Pressure (PI-661) l Tempe rature (TI-660) l l Conductivity (CI-663) l Radiation (RI-665)
- 24. Turn Small Volume Liquid Selector HC-616-1 to "TAKE SAMPLE" position (position 1). Valve CV-616 will rotate and carry the
! sample into alignment with the line to the sample bottle. Wait for valve CV-616 light to come on.
- 25. Open both stopcocks on the syringe and inject 10cc of water into the line. Close the syringe stopcock. Remove the syringe and fill it with air. Reattach the syringe, open the stopcock and inject the air, then close the stopcock and remove the syringe.
l 26. Uns' crew the lift rod and lower the sample bottle.
- 27. Slide the lead shield drawer back into the enclosure to cover the opening for the needles.
1 28. Turn the Switch HC-616-1 (small volume sample sw) to the FLUSH LOOP position (3) . Make sure there is enough flow by adjusting PCV-627 so that it is set to at least 15 psig (see FI-664). I Flush for 5 minutes and/or until RI-665 reaches a minimum.
- 29. When the flush is complete, turn HC-626 (Liquid Sample Source
- Selector Switch) "OFF" FIRST and then HC-616-1 to "OFF" (position 2).
( . l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appandix 4
, l , , Page 43 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT)
- 30. Verify Switch HV51-199A(299A) or HV51I199L (299B) is in the OPEN position.
~
- 31. Unlock the arms of the cask holder and swing the cask out and immediately survey the vial and replace the lead stopper.
- 32. Transport the sample to the Hot Lab by removing both the positioner and cask and transporting together or if only the cask is desired, unscrew the lift rod out and transport only the cask.
- 33. Turn Flush Sytem HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and HC-626 to position 1 and observe that approximately 0.3 gpm flow per FI-664 is occuring. Leave in this position for 5 minutes then turn to OFF.
- 34. Drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position.
l 35. Close FCV-627 to 0 psig.
- 36. Close the nitrogen supply valves opened in Step No.1: (Sign-off required) l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 i Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 .
Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023 l Unit 1 Unit 2 4 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l' l Domin Water Tank [ l 30-0017
- 37. Close the Domin Wate.r Tank valves opened in Step No. 2:
(Sign-off required)
- 1 l- 30-0014 d.
l . l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1100 , *OR* 30-2100 a
]_.........__........-....__.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ . . .
r w- yy :. .
j \ EP-231, R3v. 5 t
- Appandix 4 I l Page 44 of 64
- TJY/jmv
.V. APPENDIX EP-231-4 if PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT) l ; l 38. Close the damper.
- 39. Turn all switches (except for HC-723 which is left in position
- 4) to their "OFF" position.
V N i 4 4 T
,n-1 l
k e
. . _ . . _. . . ,,_ _., y ., . . _ , _ _ _ . _ . . _ . . . . , . _ . . . . . . . . . , . _ _ . _ , . _ . . _ . . . . . _ _ , . _ , . _ , , , , _ . _ _ , _
I t ' . %-J - b. . ,{ ,,b
- 8 g
0 b .,e
{ a_;_.w -- - . - . - ~..-L~-..~-.- -- l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 4 l Page 45 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-4 l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (cot!T) l Data Sheet for Small Volume Liquid Sample l DESIRED ANALYSIS l A.
; l B.
j l C. 1 I l D. l E. a J l 1. Sample Source Date Time I j l 2. Bypass Flow FI-664 (gpm) i l 3. Flush Time Minu te s l 4. ' Sample Flow FI-664 (gpm) .; l S. Pressure PI-661 (psig) l l 6. Temperature TI-660 (F) . l 7. Conductivity Scale CI-663 l 8. Radiation RI-665 (mR/hr)
- l 9. Initial Contact Dose Rate (mR) 1-l i
Name s 1 e i J t 1~
ww - _w - a u.- _ . . _ - - . . ._ l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 5 l Page 46 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) . PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING LINE), THERE EXISTS THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-42-1F059H TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING BY OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 AND MAIN CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE SAMPLING AN INDICATION OF DECREASING FLOW (FCV627 on FI-664) AND/OR DECREASING PRESSURE. (PI661) IS NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST MONITORING OF THESE ANNUNCIATORS. i
; 1. Ensure that the nitrogen supply valves are open and that the pressure is set at 100 psig by opening the following valves:
l l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 l Bottle Valve *0R* Bottle Valve PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023 l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l Domin Water Tank l 30-0017 .
- 2. Ensure that the Domineralized Flush Water Tank OOT 945 is full 3
and is pressurized at 100 psig and the following valves are open { to the sample station (Sign-off required) l 30-0014 l l Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100 If not, open valves 30-0011 and 30-0015, verify that valve 30-
; 0014 is open, remove the plug on the Hydro Test Tap by valve 30-i- 0015, and SLOWLY open valve 30-0010. Continue flow until water appears at the test tap. Close valve 30-0010 FIRST, then close ; valves 30-0011 and 30-0015. Replace the Test Tap plug and . secure.
- 3. Verify that the damper is open (half-way) to Secondary Con ta inment.
l
' l' EP-231, Rav. 5 l Appendix 5 l
] Page 47 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D)
L PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
- 4. Adjust PCV-627 on the control panel to have a 15 psi reading on the gauge.
- 5. Turn all control panel switches "OFF" (except BC-723, place in position 4 " SPARE") and then TURN the Control Panel Power Selector Switch BC-600 to "A" (Alte rnate "B") .
l 6. Turn the Liquid or Gas Selec, tor Switch to Liquid.
- 7. Turn Flush System Switch HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and NC-626 to position 1 (Jet Pump) or position 5 (RHR) and observe that approximately 0.3 gym flow per FI-664 is occuring and providing a positive indication that the discharge line to the Suppression Pool is open.
- 8. Af ter being assured that the discharge line to the suppression pool is open, drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning
, Switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position. l 9. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HC-628-1 to "OFF". l 10. Have a syringe carrying device ready to use.
- 11. Place a radiation monitor to measure the radioactivity of the syring e. ,
- 12. If you desire to obtain a large volume liquid sample, proceed to '
step 13, otherwise skip to step 20. USE APPROPRIATE ANTI-C CLOTHING AND GOGGLES IF DIRECTLY INSPECTING THE SAMPLE NEEDLES BELOW THE SAMPLE STATION. i 1 13. Make certain the lead shield drawer is out so that the needles U under the sample station enclosure are exposed. Quickly inspect q the needles with a mirror and flashlight. Check that the i longest part of the needle is toward the center of the sample j vial. L 14. Remove lead stopper from large volume cask and put a 15 ML d ' sample bottle with an outer aluminum retainer ring and a neoprene cap into the large cask. Note sample bottle must fit snugly in the holder and be vertically aligned. If necessary, place small pad under sample vial and/or attach the vial to the holder with Velco Tape. With cask in fully lowered position,
- q. roll cask into position under the sample station.
e em mm m e ( - -_ _ , ,.
l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 5 l Page 48 of 64 TJY/jmv - APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) PROCEDURE FOR MONI'1VRING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
- 15. Using the hydraulic pump slowly raise the cask, checking for proper alignment. Stop pumping when top cask ring is inside and the large volume cask is iust below the bottom of the sample station.
- 16. To check the fit and operation of the sample vial without bringing a hot sample into the system, turn HC-616-1 SMALL VOLUME SAMPLE switch to position 3 (FLUSH LOOP).
1 { 17. With control panel power on, set Switch HC-700 to the liquid i position, and Liquid Sample Selector Switch BC-626 to position 2 if a jet pump sample is desired or to position 4 if the Reactor valves were set for a RER sample. Adjust PCV-627 so that the flow thru FCV-627 does not exceed 1 gym (see FI-664) .
- 18. Push the plunger down which causes the sample bottle to be
~
raised out of the cask and up onto the two needles. Note that I the. " bottle in" light will change from red to green. If the i cask is not aligned properly, lower bottle and reposition cask.
- 19. Turn HC-616-1 (Small volume Sample Switch) to the "OFF" j position.
- 20. Check that the Control Panel Power is ON. Turn HC-700 to LIQUID if it is not already there.
- 21. Turn the Liquid Sample Source Selector Switch BC-626 to position -
1 for Jet Pump bypass line sample or position 5 for RER sample. a L o 'I N I _
- i i
. e s m e .. . . s... .
-]
]. EP-231, R3v. 5 Appendix 5 l Page 49 of 64 TJY/jav APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D)
PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIOUID SAMPLE
- 22. If RER sample is desired, close the sample line valves to the normal sample station l SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH NAME POSITION "A" RER RER EX OUTLET NORMAL CICSE SAMPL ISLN LOOP A HV51-199A "B" RER RER EX OUTLET NORMAL CLOSE SAMPL ISLN LOOP B HV51-1998 ,
- 23. Adjust PCV-627 so that the flow on FI-664 is less than 1 gym.
J Continue this flow for 10 minutes. Record the flow from FI-664 and flush time on the Data Sheet.
- 24. When flush is completed, turn RC-626 Sample Source Selector Switch to position 2 for a jet pump sample or position 4 if Reactor valves were positioned for a RER sample. Adjust FCV-627 for a flow between 0.05 - 0.15 gym (see FI-664) .
- 25. Leave in these positions for at least 20 minutes. In the interim, proceed to step 26. Do not proceed *to step 28 until j this 20 minutes flushing time is completed.
l l 26. Verify Leak Tight Dissolved Gas Chamber: .
- a. Replace the septum in the gas collection chamber if it has
! been previously used for more than 15 times. 1 l NOTE: When replacing the septum, be sure the washers are in j place.
! b. Turn the Dissolved Gas and Liquid Sample Switch HC-601 to position 1 (START P-701 AND INSERT NEEDLE) . Do no t ~ in se r t -
, needle into the gas collection chamber. Observed that P-( 701 starts and valve CV-622 rotates. i i c. When PI-662 is stable, turn Switch BC-601 to "OFF" or
" RELIEVE PRESSURE /TAKE GAS SAMPLE."
d. Confirm PI-662 does not rise more than 0.05 psia / min for at I. least three minutes. ,
- l. ... .
_m.__ ._ - =_ _ _ .. . l EP-231, R2v. 5 t
. Appendix 5 l Page 50 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT' D)
PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING ' l A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE d NOTE: i) If PI-662 increases more than 0.05 psia / min. , this may indicate high air leak rate into the gas y collection chamber. Tighten the septum first and '; repeat above steps. 1 ii) If tightening the septum still yields high pressure increases, replace the septum and repeat above steps. If 9 replacing the septum still yields high pressure increases, this indicates a leak in valve or fitting. Accuracy cf
. monitoring dissolved gases may be degraded unless repairs are made at this time.
l e. Confirm PI-662 indicate 5.7 psia or lower. NOTE: If Dissolved Gas Collection Chamber can not be t , evaucated to below 5.7 psia, this usually j indicates the vacuum pump P-701 requires rebuild 3 or replacement.
- f. Turn the Dissolved Gas and Liquid Sample Switch HC-601 to position 1 (START P-701 AND INSERT NEEDLE).
a 27. Insert and open end needle through the septum via needle guide 3 into the gas collection chamber. This allows air to purge into ] the gas collection areas.
- 28. Turn Switch HC-601 to position 2. Observe that P-601 starts.
Leave in this position for 20 minutes and record the following , on the data sheet l, Flow (FI-661) l Pressure (PI-661) J l Conducitivity (CI-663) i l Radiation (RI-665) ] 29. Isolate sample by turning HC-601 to position 3 (CIRCULATE AND ~j SEPARATE GAS). Leave in that position for approximately 30 seconds.
- 30. Turn HC-601 to position 4 (REMOVE NEEDLE) . Remove needle and wait until PI-662 is stable and is less than 5.7 psia.
1 31. Turn HC-601 to position 5 (CIRCULATE AND SEPARATE GAS) . Leave j in this position for 3 to 6 seconds. -l l 32. When PI-662 is stable, record value as P1 on the Data Sheet.
. .~ _ . _ __ . _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _m _ _ . . . . . . _ _ - . . _._... -.
l EP-231, Rev. 5 Appendix 5
. -l , Page 51 of 64 :
TJY/jmv i APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) . PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAININC A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIOUID SAMPLE
-33. Begin collection of dissolved gas by turning switch BC-601 to position 6 (COLLECT DISSOVLED GAS) , for 5 seconds and record pressure of PI-662 on the Data Sheet.
- 34. Turn switch BC-601 to position 7 (CIRCULATE AGAIN) for 10 seconds.
- 35. Turn switch BC-601 to position 8 (COLLECT DISSOLVED GAS AGAIN)
- for about 5 seconds. Record the pressure of PI-662 on the Data
, Shee t.
- 36. Repeat steps 34 and 35 concurrently until successive readings of PI-662 dif fer by less than 0.15 psia (normally, this will be done at least 4 times) .
} 37. Turn switch HC-601 to position 9 IRELIEVE PRESSURE /TAKE GAS SAMPLE). l 38. Record final pressure of PI-662 as PF on the Data Sheet. l 39. Record water temperature from TI-660 on the Data Sheet.
- 40. Af ter final dissolved gas pressure measurement is made, a calculation must be done to determine if a grab sample must be taken. For this calculation, the following dissolved gas
- information is required, P0, PF, temperature of Liquid Loop and Vapor Pressure of Water at the temperature of the liquid loop, ,
PV. l 41. Determine the valve of CT in the following equation. l CT = 4.98 (PF - 1.05 PO - PV) (CT is in Scc /KG) . l l PV is calculated from Table 1 in the Data Sheet for l temperature indicated by TI-600, degrees F. Log CT on Item (12) of Data Sheet. Log PV on Item (17) .
- 42. If CT is greater than 40 SCC /Kg, dissolved oxygen may be reported as less than 0.1 PPM and proceed to 46. If CT is less t.
than 40 SCC /KG, a grab sample must be taken and analyzed on the l gas chromatograph for oxygen and hydrogen. l, 43. Dissolved gas sample can be taken by inserting the long needle y of a gas tight syringe through the septum via the needle guide !: into the gas collection chamber. Withdraw a Sec gas sample and p lock syringe. DO NOT WITHDRAW NEEDLE. i - {I i Il
-~. _ , _ _ _ ____m._____.__.._.-.__..._..._.__,.._..-._....~,-._
- - . : -6 af as -
i l EP-231, Rav. 5 Appendix 5 l Page 52 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) b - PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAIN!NC A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE !) ' If PI-662 indicates greater.than 14.7 psia, turn HC-652 to the left to relieve pressure in the gas collection chamber. WARNING: HAND CONTACT WITH SYRINGE WITH GAS SAMPLE IN IT SHOULD NOT EXCEED 30 SECONDS DUE TO POSSIBLE HIGH DOSE RATE. CAUTION: IF RADIATION MONITOR ALARMS AT 1500 REM /HR, INJECT ~ SAMPLE BACK INTO THE GAS COLLECTION CHAMBER. TURN SWITCH HC-652 TO LEFT TO RELIEVE PRESSURE AND THEN REMOVE NEEDLE. DISCARD NEEDLE AND SYRINGE AS HIGH LEVEL RADIATION WASTE. HIGH DOSE l RATE WILL BE DUE TO WATER ACCUMULATED IN SYRINGE. REPEAT ENTIRE l DISSOLVED GAS PROCEDURE. I
- 44. Remove needle and syringe and place in a shielded carrying device for transport to the laboratory.
l 45. Record sample volume on the Data Sheet. i
- 46. If PI-662 indicates greater than 14.7 psia, turn HC-G52 to the -
j left to relieve pressure in the gas collection chamber. i i 47. If a large volume liquid sample is required, turn HC-601 to position 10. Push and hold in CH-629-1 so liquid will be drawn into sample bottle that was positioned earlier under the sample station. Hold pushbutton for at least 10 seconds. l' CAUTION: IF A LIQUID SAMPLE IS NOT REQUIRED, TURN SWITCH HC-601 TO THE OFF POSITION VERY QUICKLY SO THAT THE VALVES CV-620 WILL NOT HAVE A CHANGE TO ROTATE AND ALLOW HOT SOLUTION INTO THE LINE AHEAD OF CV-629. l l 48. Turn HC-601 to OFF. i
; 49. Lower liquid sample bottle into large cask by pulling up on the i plunger handle. NOTE: Do not turn or twist bottle while it is on the needles because the needles will bend.
- 50. Slide the lead shield drawer back into the enclosure to cover opening for the needles.
- 51. Lower the cask on the cart by relieving hydraulic oil pressure l with the small petcock handle on the hydraulic cylinder. '
i h
__ . . . . . ~ - - l EP-231, Rav. 5 l Appendix 5
- 1
.l Page 53 of 64 j
- TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) '
L1 PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIREDi ODTAININC '
.] A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIOUID SAMPLE
- 52. Roll the cask out from under the sample station and immediately survey the liquid vial and record the Initial contact Dose Rate on the Data Sheet. Quickly plug cask. Use RI-665 to determine Gross Activity of the sample.
- 53. Switch HC-626 (Liquid Sample Source Selector Switch) must be in position 2 (jet pump) or 4 (RHR) and BC-700 (Liquid or Gas Selector Switch) must be in the LIQUID position.
y 54. Adjust PCV-627 on the pontrol panel to have a 15 psi reading on is the gauge. 24 . j! 55. Turn the FLUSH SYSTEM SWITCH (HC-628-1) to position.2 (Start 4 Flush) which will close the inlet sample lines and start the E flush with domineralized water from 00T 945. Observe that there is a flow per FI-664. ,
- 56. Af ter RI-665 shows radiation has decreased significantly, or
- i af ter 5 minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 3 (Flush V-610 Loop) to flush the V-610 loop.
Watch RI-665.
;f l 57. After a few minutes, turn Switch BC-628-1 to position 4 (Flush
- i. , P-601 Loop) and flush the P-601 loop. Watch RI-665.
g 4;
- 58. Af ter a few minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 5 (Flush CV-615) and flush Valve CV-615. Watch RI-665.
i
- 59. After a few minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 6 (Flush .
I' Piping Station) and flush the piping station for 3 minutes. i:
, 60. Turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 7 (Flush CV-622 Loop) for a few lli minutes to flush loop CV-622. Watch RI-665.
li 61. If RI-665 did not indicate an acceptable radiation level at any
- L l step of the operation, go back and repeat Steps 53 thru 60.
f! l 62. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HO-628-1 to "OFF".
- 1
!l 63. Turn Flush Sytem HC-628-1 counterclockwise to position 6 and BC- ), 626 to position 1 and observe that approximately 0.3 gym flow
- ! pe r FI_66 4. is occuring . Leave in this position for ji minutes.
41 l 64. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HC-628-1 to "OFF". , j; 65. Drain Collector Tank, Trap and Sump by turning switch HC-715-1 i clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 l- seconds at each position. [ l 66. Close FCV-627 to o psig. h n .
., ~
! EP-231, R2v. 5
. + Appendix 5 Page 54 of 64 APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D)
-. PROCEDURE FOR MONI'IORING ' TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAININC A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) 5ND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE 7 67. C151e the nitrogen supply valves opened in Step No.1: (Sign-f; off required) li I
l N2 Bottle 1 N2 Bottle 2 Bottle Valve *OR* Bottle Valve J : PCV-30-074 PCV-30-073 Isolation Valve Isolation Valve 30-0022 30-0023
- l. Unit 1 Unit 2 l 30-1114 *OR* 30-2114 l Domin Water Tank j l 30-0017
} -)
- 68. Close the Domin Water Tank valves opened in Step No. 2:
off required) (Sign-I i l 30-0014 I l Unit 1 Unit 2 l
! l 30-1100 *OR* 30-2100 l 69. Close the damper. -
- 70. Turn all switches (except for HC-723 which is left in position
- 4) to their "OFF" position.
4 i H g l
..m..... -, . - , _ , . . . _ . , , , _ .
~
l
,. l _
EP-231,.Rav. 5 Appendix 5 l Page 55 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) f PROCEDURE FOR MONI'!ORING TOTAL DIS' SOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE R l DATA MET
'[ l DESIRED ANALYSIS l A.
~l B.
l C. l D. l E. l 1. Sample Source Date Time l 2. Bypass Flow FI-664 gym l 3. Flush Time Minutes l 4. Sample Flow FI-664 gym l 5. Pressure PI-661 psig l 6. Temperature TI-660 l 7. Conductivity Meter Scale CI-663 . 1 l 8. Radiation RI-665 l 9. Initial Pressure PO *PI-662 PSIA 10. L CYCLE 1 CYCLE 2 CYCLE 3 CYCLE 4 CYCLE 5 CYCLE 6 - P1 - PT662 P1 - PT662 P1 - PT662 Pl - PT662 P1 - PT662 P1 - PT662 PSIA PSIA PSIA PSIA l PSIA PSIA
- r. l 11. Final P1 = PF = PSIA f l 12. CT (Initial) Sec/kg (from step 42)
- 13. If sample taken, fraction of sample H2 = (from gas chromatograph) = NH t
j 14. If sample taken,' fraction of sa,mple 02 = (from gas chromatograph = NO t,-. , . -. . .y , w _ _. ._m. w _ . ; , _
. . . _ _ , .. . r - - . ~ . ._..--.'..,,._.;,_;.
w, __
.a a:.
\ EP-231, Rav. 5 i
Appendix 5 l Page 56 of 64 -r - TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF ' DESIRED, OBTAININC 0 . i A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
*~
l 15. Liquid Sample Contact Dose mR 1 l 16. Gas Sample Contact Dose mR k ' l 17. Vapor Pressure of Water = PSIA = PV
- 18. SH = Solubility of H2 at T (Step 6) (Sec/kg - ata)
'(from Table 2) b l 19. SO = Solubility of 02 at T (Step 6) (Sec/kg - ata)
Y
-l 20. CT (Final) = Total Dissolved Gas Concentration
=
b (0.068) (NH) (SH) + (3.8 5) (PF-PV-1.05 PO) + 1 ( (NO) (PF-PV-1. 0 5P0 ) + (0.29 PO)) (50)
!!' l = Sec/kg
- 21. CO2 = Concentration of 02 = ( (NO) (PF) -
LO . 29) (PO) ) CT (PF-1.05PO-PV) l 22. CO2 = Sec/Kg
- 23. CH2 = Concentration of H2 = (NH) x (PF) x (CT)
(PF-1.05PO-PV) l 24. CH2 = Sec/Kg , i O Name
- f I<-,... .-....._.7,, - , - - . . . . . . . -
c :~
- + - . _ _ . '
l EP-231, R3v. 5 Appendix 5
! Page 57 of 64 k ". -
3 ,
"Y APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) 4
, PROCEDURE FOR MONI'IORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, O'BTAINING A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE l TABLE 1 1
$ l WATER VAPOR PRESSURE s Y The following water vapor pressure data is a function of liquid sample temperature and is used in the calculational method.
- n. -
TL (Dec ree s F) PV (ps ia) TL(Degrees F) PV(psia) 7 60 .2561 102 1.008 62 .2749 104 1.070
+ -
64 .2950 106 1.135
- N "
66 .3163 108 1.203
.3389
~
68 110 1.275 70 .3629 112 1.351 72 .3884 114 1.430 t s 74 .4155 116 1.513 76 .4442 118 1.601 g 78 .4746 120 1.693 yy 80 .5068 122 1.789 [ '
' .'. 82 .5409 124 1.890 e
84 .5770 126 1.996 t + 86 .6152 x 128 2.107 88 .6555 130 2.223
- 90. - .
.6981 132 2.345 92 .7432 134 2.472 .
94 .7906 136 2.605
; 96 .8407 138 2.744 98 .8936 140 2.889 100 .9492 s 142 3.041 144 3.200 146 3.365
' 148 3.538-150 3.718 I:
e f k 2 l Source: ASME Steam Tables, 1967 t - l!
\ .
l y - N O s u 3 e-i ' m n- :. - . u . ., ,. - - . . . . - . . . . . . . - - . . . - . . - ..- .-.,.7,... ..x = . . n -. 7, =
__w,__ , ._ _ __ _ __. - . . -_ _ _ ._ _ _ __ _ 2_
< .E ,/^
I
'l EP-231, Rev. 5 l Appendix 5
[ - l Page 58 of 64 TJY/jmv
~
j j 4 APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D) ' t . [ 1 PROCEDURE FOR MONIE RING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAININC t- A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE l TABLE 2 k l SOLUBILITY OF HYDROGEN IN WATER The following solubility data is a function of liquid sample temperature which is used in the calculational method. n 1 TL (Decrees F) SH (Sec/Kg-a tm) TL(Decrees F) SH (Sec/Kg-a tm) 60 18.56 102 16.67 62 18.34 104 16.56 64 18.22 106 16.56 .[a 66 18.11 108 , 16.56 68 18.00 110 16.56
] 70 17.89 112 16.45 j 72 ~
17.67 114 16.45 74 17.56 116 16.45 76 17.56 118 16.45 78 17.45 ' 120 16.45 80 17.34 122 16.45 j 82 17.22 124 16.45 3 84 17.11 126 16.45 86 17.11 128 16.45
~
88 17.00 130 16.45 90 16.89 132 16.45 . 92 16.89 134 16.45 94 16.78 136 16.56 96 16.78 138 16.56 98 16.67 140 16.56 100 16.67 142 16.56
, 144 16.56 I -
146 16.67
! 148 16.67 150 16.67 1
~ . _ _ _ _ , -
, , _ - __ - - - - - - --r- ---.w.,,_. > .. .__,___,1 m.._____m_
- h. -
,l EP-231, Rev. 5 Appendix 5 l Page 59 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 (CONT'D)
PROCEDURE FOR MONITORING TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS (AND, IF DESIRED, OBTAINING
,' A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE) AND/OR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE l TABLE 3 l SOLUBILITY OF OXYGEN IN WATER The following solubility data is a function of liquid sample i temperature which is used in the calculational method. !
I
! TL(Deg rees F) SH (Sec/Ko-a tm) TL (Degrees F) SH (Scc /Kg-a tm) 60 37.04 102 25.80 62 36.27 - 104 25.49 64 35.50 106 25.18 66 34.80 108 24.87 )-
7 68 34.11 110 24.56 70 33.42 112 24.26 72 32.80 114 24.02 74 32.19 116 23.79 76 31.57 118 23.49
} 78 31.03 120 23.25 .) 80 30.49 122 23.02 82 29.95 124 22.79 84 29.45 126 22.64 86 28.95 128 22.41 88 28.49 130 22.25 90 28.11 132 22.02 t 92 27.64 134 21.87 94 27.26 136 21.71 96 26.87 138 21.56 98 26.49 140 21.41 100 26.18 142 21.25 144 21.10 146 20.94 148 20.8'4 d
150 20.71 e-e a *g M -y,_e*, ,t* FM_ ---W " C'P" '* _ w _-
'N,
r r
.l EP-231, Rev. 5 Appendix 6 i
. l Page 60 of 64 '
APPENDIX EP-231-6 W
~~ -
....g :
-- ~
y= r e= .,. _ ,. ..' q4 . .; . . . eq - ec -
- . 4. 4 ; .
g i , .. 1
-gg.g ..
p $ p' M di+h
! E .D @@.d i
e- . + o E. .!j dj! !!zi $-l ti " m b I i'n ' ' g . -
. . W ,f Dhi .
i i e -- l , DM - M$ D
~
{ hd!RA u B a[!~ % s ~, i a t ;
- S- '
o r- M
' ' ~
- ' ~ ' 45
;1sk I!h;t. a.
i e _- - j,9l $r - Nad "A my. l,' in . . . .
' ilt 3.$
x -
.I w *i i. :.
g, -- -
@f 4 m,!
U m
$,, .N .I 'l.,. le.f.1 D. -e
- y J$ I y
- d.
i 3 F r > O u
; e ftpe.
__. =4
. L o
.* ,0k. !'
l o ( - - gr u a.. e e+ ;..#'M; li .!e 4 i .: a x .v .. e ;,
~
EB'
- 1
~
t
'r ~; ff l
-- C.
ni _u ns a' - l i
= <m]. sEE(s k,bD g.J. y y . y..
=
*!s 3g %
1 , I .J,.%I 1 - 21 " q ? p;, Q , .,v s I., 3,- : h "O ,./ ,,.5 ;*' __ ?p .'g'
* ~
e M. . .! I :- j
;g- i@ n -
T y 3 g i ,I
. ,.o , .
8
. ; g .- G S i
.k )%[f-"IU'G, > ; T'N@.~:
11 l '!. -(%g. ..,**.' s di . =.
, i I'
I
- h. f
,' .Q . y , j *: Q~., i jl ,
)k;.1spM "
%;p, HI . ;*d i ..j I p e..-1
- m. pj
-. (t. ),7 . u h g.p3
. E _
p j -l', i [Aj5 V,. .,',a ,! e ng b 7l ? = - o== m 5 ' 4
-y u . .-i 4e j'.lf 4 ,, , -rs==ft
-.__ - l g q .e
,7 4- g.+..
_ t. _ a < Tj . -_. - : ,.. .
'.i1 - -
.l.:: 4 .
.s . .I . q g _.... -. -
,l r i i in I- _c > -'
._;~. y - ._ e ,
i.
.). ,
)j.&
5 _*'s t.l _.e l gili,da p
-m
,N.-
- i
__..l- y (. .
! s '.
n s _ e .- a . i.
.: g _. .
3 I l 1 , l Mill M.., M . i! Mi i l i. T 6.; g.
',I i
,l 'e C. E.dE i
'. j!Dg hiEp 1- I 3!
1 1, g. ~fl' p &p, .- . .. _ 4 . 1 1 s jn f' 9 Jo se W ;;M a
.e--. -,j j wu47@;j,3pg b ung g
d il H 1 N , ~ i } x 1 e -.- .---- . . _ . _ _ N_ Fwm ee. .. t y www-ww.nym ..
.-.,+w
.. ---.-- . ---v-
_ e .-.. _y- - - -#+--, . - . - ~ . . - - l EP-231, Rev. 5
, Appendix 8 l Page 62 of 64 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-8 DIAGRAM OF CONTROL PANEL - RIGHT SIDE e v .
4' 3 Amir At.Agr% Ai.n 84 , h E NT hast Pf m rt pset Pat.an fuss 1 OOO ooo ooo
"*
- ni e Awa as H M w i tu
. K1 So7 RI W5' RI 704
. AR EA l.t a w s cAc 4P C.C . -
MON ITom Mou rros Mou crom
. 6 . 8 4 4 S 8 e
. la
- 3) otraA V,
xio +v/.* -
.* ,s .
LtP8" _. .. 4 l Qwr,- - see}& Sttetnc Cow cuct Aucs . N.
+ . 'm ,*-e+- e m meee ee w s o.- p.g.e . ame e = ...o.,eop . . , .;g., , ,% p. , , ,
w . - - -.N*D "**8*".*"MM NW _ GueM *W ** ==ch -
-e
EP-231, Rnv. 5 Appendix 9 i i Page 63 of 64 j
' TJY/jmv i APPENDIX EP-231-9 CONTROL PANEL SWITCH LAYOUT HC-715-1, SUMP DRAIN . - --
'~
3Y37EN SWITCH - _f .
- 1. OFF
- 2. BLOW COLLECTOR HC-600, POWER -
- 3. ORAIN C00LER TRAP - ' '
- 4. BLOW COLLECTOR SELECTOR SWITCH .
!.d
. . . l a ' -
e
- 5. EVACUATE CQt. LECTOR
- 6. SUMP TO COLLECTOR A 2 3
A. .
~
- 47. :. .f' A - -
- 7. BLOW COLLECTOR u ,
ei . l.1
- 8. GFF - * '
1
' *" IIC-700, LIQUID 02 BAS
Jhh'3E3NER 3b 3 ELECT HC-723, GA3 3 AMP!.E . LIQUID 3 ELECTOR SWITCH 8
. JET PUMP LINE ON ETPA38
.. JET PUMP LINE .
g U 6- 8AS
.$ 1. ORYWELL ATMO3PHERE *
.. OFF- 3 2. SUP'N POOL ATM03PHERI
. RPV QR SUPPRESSION POOL +
. 3. 3ECONDARY , CONT'MT ATF
- . RPV DR SUP'N POOL ON BYPA33
- 4. SPARE .
HC-616-1,' 3 MALL HC-705,10 ML GAS q .. VOL 3 AMPLE SW 'y "* 8 SAMPLE SWITCH
' 1. OFF 1*T
- 1. TAEK SAMPLE O t, c1RCUI. ATE GAS
- 1. OFF
- . 3. FLUSH LOOP
- 3. .' EVACUATE BOTTLE
- a. 4.f.TAKESAMPLE .
MC-601 DI530LVED GAS AND
- 5. FW3H 3YSTEM '-
9.IQUID 3 AMPLE SWITCH -
- n. 0FF * '
- . START P-701 AND FLOW # '
- 1. START P-501 . O . .
- . CIRCULATE AND 3EPARATE GA3 . HC-712 IDDINE CARTRIDG1 i.. INJECT TRACER SAS i.' CIRCULATE TRACER SAS 8 l 3 AMPLE 3 WITCH
' COLLECT DIS 3OLVED BAS 1
;. CIRCULATE AGAIN .
2l0FF CIRCULATE GAS i 1. COLLECT DIS'LVD GAS AEAIN
- 3' GA3 THRU CARTRIDGE L 1. TAKE GAS 3AM-AND/OR RELIEVE 4' EVACUATE CARTRIDGE
.. TAKE LIQUID 5 AMPLE 5 FLU 3H CARTRIDGE HC 632 ,. HC-629-1 - -
gg,7g4 ['
'. _ C' KC-712
- HC-628-1, FW3H
, . , SY37EM SWITCH # .
.(TIMEOSAMPLE) .
3, o7, B - - li :* *
- 2. 3 TART FW3H -
l -
- 3. FW3H V-610 LOOP : - * * ..
- 4. FW3H P-601 LOOP
]- 5. FW3H CV-615 .
- 6. FW3H PIPING '37ATION .
- 7. FW3H CV-622 LOOP ~ * *' '
- 8. OFF -
u ., -, ,, _.- .,- -. .
L m _ . . _____m. __ _ l EP-231, Rev. 5
; Appendix 10 f
Page 64 of 64 ) TJY/jmv l l APPENDIX EP-231-10 SCHEMATIC OF POST ACCIDENT SAMPLE STATION l
. s .
s eu 4 . {y * .
/..)..=
mess he,e
,R.
, g-
.g ie.- 3..
3 W ;' __-~R s--4 9 9_ G- .-
****e O'dB 3
l $ 'T j -
, , , , . . . 5 8*****'
a
...g sy
=: .
@^ S.. ,
lt s : g.*.'
**=~e y . sc.~= ='** ,
-~* l e '~
*lUI [3= '=
1
..sy,- glyg, .
j, ,: .- ,
.~. --
,-- y< ... e i%' f 9 I -
cma s . SECTION TD BE s .. MODIFIED TO . t gg i s een
. . FIG 14 t l U @
- L ,
h '* ** v> " "
, . . se smae {)
q pa 2 sP I e8. 4 ,/ a - %mg' L d'
/.+ -
*. !+ -
tA :::: * * * * * . _ .
. ;..D* ,L &<- ~* *
=
, e 5*
.E bpo'y
- P
. - - _ . . - - . . - - = . - . - . . . - . - - . ~ . ~ . - . ~ -
- . . ~ - . -
t . . i 3843116710 EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 1 of 10 l
- Y mc PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE e
EP-233 RETRIEVING AND CHANGING SAMPLE FILTERS AND CARTRIDGES FROM THE CONTAINMENT LEAK DETECTOR DURING EMERGENCIES p l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS
. 1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader 1 shall obtain necessary information and permission to obtain sample. }' 1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall organize and brief the sampling group and have operations defeat isolations.
n 1.3 HP Technician Ahall provide radiological assessment of the task. 1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group shall obtain the sample. l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE ._ 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 2.1.1 Af te-. discussing the situation with the Emergency Director determine if a filter / cartridge sample from the Containment Leak Detector is required. . gg \ b. 3 }#1 l 2.1.2 Check theanticipated Plant Radiation LeverhStatur Board to forecast radiol,o'ihalsconditions. l s\ p. s . a 2.1.3 Contact the Personne tyi am Leader for the latest developments r.la'ted to~ radiological ,.. conditions, inform him 'what sample (s) are to ba , taken and request Health Physics'. cove,ra,ge.,'J. ' O *-
; , . p.
b
} ~.' : ' ;;.,
3 z ,, - - - -, m, _- _,=,,_:-~---
- 1 1
1 EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 2 of 10
-) TJY/mc CAUTION .
CONTINUOUS COVERAGE BY'A HEALTH PHYSICS I TECHNICIAN MAY SUBSTITUTE FOR THE RADIATION I WORK PERMIT. I q. l 2.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. . 2.1.5 Determine what analyses are required, inform the Chemistry Sampling Analysis Group Leader. If an iodine particulate sample is required, recommend sampling time. l 2.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from , the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this development. CAUTION PLANNED RADIATION EXPOSURES SHOULD BE LIMITED TO THE ADMINISTRTIVE GUIDE LEVELS IN APPENDIX i EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES. l 2.1.7 Direct the Chemistry' Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the filter / cartridge sample. 2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: l 2.2.1 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment to collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. l 2.2.2 Contact the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader (TSC) for an estimated sampling time and record this time on Appendix EP-233-1. {~ r M **':MV?TWW.VY 2W*. " T '*?':*". 2 7 *5*'"*.MLY
" * ~ ~ * ' ~ '
~
EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 3 of 10 l TJY/mc l 2.2.3 Brief the Technician and Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following: A. Communications equipment and channel B. Type of sample (s) to be collected C. Location of sample points D. Suggested routes to be taken E. Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample
. F. Review of. the procedures to be followed for 9
sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis G. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection. H. Proper completion of Data Sheets. l 2.2.4 Contact Shift operations-in the Control Room to request system line up so that the selected
~j sample can be taken from the desired Sample Station and sample point.
If the Containment Leak Detector is isolated, shift operations shall defeat the signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: , DO NOT DEFEAT ISOLATION OF HIGH DRYWELL PRESSURE WHEN DRYWELL PRESSURE IS GREATER THAN 5 PSIG. Panel Relay Contacts Isolation Signal 10C609 B21H-K120C T4-M4 High D/N Pressure ]; - (20C609) or -38" Vessel Level 10C611. B21H-K120B T4-M4 High D/W Pressure ] (20C611) or -38" Vessel Level T l 2.2.5 Appoint Group member (s) to prepare the Hot Lab ll for receiving the sample. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. II L EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling I of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples v - . _ _ n -- - - - -----e - _ - - -- - . _ __-___:_-_:__
EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 4 of 10 l TJY/mc EP- 24 2 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples l 2.2.6 Dispatch the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Members to the OSC for Health Physics support if radiological conditions permit or other appointed location as determined by the Plant Survey Group Leader. l 2.3 The Health Physics Technician shall: l 2.3.1 Determine which route should be used for collecting and transporting the sample. l 2.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and i ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. l 2.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. l- 2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: . A. RWP requirements B. Routes to be used C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions l E. Review of procedure for obtaining and 1 i
- transporting sample to hot lab F. Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA G. Stay times and Abort Criteria O
u' T[_*WL M 3 .W"A_NM d *[." M * *
- m d' YN
_C -M . ** ' * * ' * ' ~
~-~T ~ 'Y'O# ' *"N M -*- 1 V d'C
~
s EP-233 Rev. 4 { Page S.of,10 TJY/mc i l 2.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the sample filter and cartridges from the Containment Leak Detector. CAUTION
! DO NOT USE ELEVATORS y l 2.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location. Upon entering the power block, the surveyors shall note trends in general radiation levels enroute to the Containment Leak Detector. ; If general area dose rates (unanticipated) k exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior
? to arriving at the door leading to Rx.-283',
;! exit immediately and report to Chemistry
. Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. If dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 5 R/hr at the door
~
leading to Rx. 283', leave the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis s Group Leader, who will evaluate the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader. l 2.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask.
~
l 2.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry. Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) . when arriving at the hot lab. l 2.3.9
- Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-242.
l 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: l 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. l 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to
. successfully complete the assigned task.
h y y-= g em. we.y.e= = ump.==v===* -e.e.ao. +=
~-==-____ ---r, ==et_s- + 7 + '
- M *-.* Pat ' ret .
- r *F % - *' .MPT*T"' e .F t F atu:&-A ?
, w w,w EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 6 of 10
) TJY/mc l 2.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample.
PROPERLY' LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS l CAUTION EYE PROTECTION SHOULD 3E WORN BY ALL PERSONNEL WHEN OBTAINING SAMPLES FROM
, THE SAMPLE STATIONS.
i 4 l 2.4.4 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the OSC or other designated location
, for HP coverage. Once briefed by Health j Physics, retrieve and change the sample filters
] and cartridges as follows: i l 2.4.4.1 The H? Technician shall survey the Containment Leak Detector concentrating especially on the particulate filter / iodine cartridge assembly and - sample lines. l 2.4.4.2 Jbtain the sample. The time required to obtain a sample is approximately 10 minutes. l 2.4.4.3 FILTER / CARTRIDGE HOLDER ASSEMBLY CHANGE METHOD . l A. Verify that HS-26-190-1 (Pump 1 switch) is in the ON position and that only pump 1 light ,is lit. Turn switch HS-26-190-2 to OFF (pump 2 switch). l B. Verify Flow Indicator (FI-26-190) indicates flow. l C. Put' switch ESS-26-190 (OPERATE / PURGE) in PURGE position and verify that the purge light is lit.
- l. D. Allow to purge for one minute.
l E. Close valves V-2 and V-3. l F. Remove holder assembly, bag and place aside. ] , THIS ASSEMBLY MAY BE USED LATER. SEE STEP 13. l G. Install a new filter / cartridge assembly back into the line.
-_.-.--n-.-.--n .-
~-
- g. ., yn EP-233 Rev. 4
'- Page 7 of 10 TJY/mc l H. Open valves V-2 and V-3.
l I. Close valve V-8.
.l' J. Put switch HSS-26-190 in OPERATE position and l Verify that the OPERATE light is lit. Record l
~ the time as TIME-1 and flow as FLOW from FI l 190 in Appendix EP-233-1. ' l K. Allow to flow for the desired amount of sample
- collection time and then turn HSS-26-190 to PURGE and record time as TIME-2.
l L. Allow to purge for one minute. l M. Close valves V-2 and V-3. l N. Remove holder assembly and immediately have the Health Physics Technician Survey the sample and
- , record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on Appendix EP-233-1 and bag and place the sample in a shielded transport container.
l 0. Reinstall the holder assembly previously removed . (Step 5) if appropriate, or install a new holder assembly. l P. Open valves V-2, V-3 and V-8. l Q. Put switch HSS-26-190 in OPERATE position and verify that the OPERATE light is lit. . l R. Turn HS-26-190-2 (pump 2 switch) to ON. L L l S. Return to the hot lab with the sample by j i_ retracing one of the previously suggested routes. l 2.4.5 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot L lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. L l 2.4.6 Inform the Group Leader as soon as the sample l reaches the hot lab and inform him that the ( sample collection has been completed and what j the sample status is. 1 - I h - 1- .
-:~
5 - L . . EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 8 of 10 TJY/mc
, l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall:
l 3.1.1 Complete Appendix EP-233-1
,l 3.1.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate and Iodine Cartridges.
l 3.1.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. l 3.1.4 Properly file the data sheets and report back to the Group Leader for reassignment. l 3.1.5 Return all sampling equipment to the CHEMISTRY EMERGENCY CABINET. l 3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader { shall: l 3.2.1 Notify Shift Supervision that a sample has been. taken and the aligned valves may be returned to the " NORMAL" position (i.e., Remove Jumpers). l 3.2.2 Ensure Group member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. l 3.2.3 Inform the Cheadstry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. l l l 3.2.4 Direct group members to refer to EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Particulate and iodine cartridges for guidance for sample preparation and handling. 1 L l 3.2.5 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets, report the L sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. L L l 3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall l l l 3.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and I; the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF) . J U l m , . . ,.
. m., . mm. ,_ _ ._ __m ._ _ _ , , , . _ , _ , . . -
.n., _.,
EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 9 of 10 I TJY/mc f i. l 4.0 APPENDICES c l 4.1 EP-233-1, Data Sheet l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION
~
l 5.1 Purpose This procedure provides guidelines for retrieving and changing particulate filters and charcoal cartridges (or silver zeolite cartridges) located at the Containment Leak j Detector following accident conditions. l- 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure shall be implemented when a Containment Filter / Cartridge sample is to be taken from the Containment Leak Detector during
,; an Emergency. .i l 5.3 Special Equipment l . 5.3.1 Transport container (shielded)
[ ,. l 5.3.2 Combined Filter / Cartridge holder assembly il l 5.3.3 Extra particulate filters l 5.3.4 2-Extra iodine cartridges l 5.3.5 Plastic bags 7 l 5.4 - References 5.4.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Simpling and Analysis Team L Activation l 5.4.2 EP-242 - Sample Preparation and Handling.of Highly Radioactive Particulate and Iodine j, Cartridges l 5.4.3 M-102 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-0" l 5.4.4 M-104 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 269'-0"
& 283'-0" j l 5.4.5 M Sh. 1, Rev. 8; Sh. 2, Rev. 9;'Sh. 3, Proposed Rev. 3; Sh. 4, Proposed Rev. 3 - Plant i }t l Process Radiation Monitoring P&ID
-l 5.4.6 E-519, Sh. 1 of 2; Proposed Rev. 3
)- .. m m _ _ , ~.s. m .,.s , w . -- . - - -
. =_: ;__=__ - . _ :_ ~ - "'
j
* ]
\
) . .
l V \ r EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 10 of 10 ' l TJY/mc APPENDIX EP-233-1
?.
DATA SHEET Containment Leak Detector Particulate / Iodine Grab Sample i s l-i
- 1. ESTIMATED SAMPLING TIME:
l DATE: , i TIME: TIME-1: CFM FLOW: CFM TIME-2: CFM INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE: I i I ANALYSIS REQUIRED: V NAME: e
. N'IEII* *%I ",D_M ,9w d
'T7 M15#."]
_ *'. ,',G **"7**,,*
*e * m Me m. 9 3 N - 3_ e- e ,.q_y. y , .w
~
o Y l N 38'43116720 f l EP-2.34 Rev. 4 Page 1 of 10 { TJ /jjmv h PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY h'y LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE p : EP-234 OBTAINING CONTAINMENT GAS SAMPLES FROM "'HE CONTAINMENT LEAK DETECTOR DURING EMERGENCIES 4 ( l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS f 1.1 Chemistry Sameling and Analysis Team Leader shall obtain necessary information and permission to f[ obtain sample.
!.. 1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall p organize and brief the sampling group and have operations defeat isolations.
1.3 HP Technician shall provide radiological assessment
~
of the task. 1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group shall obtain i the sample. l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE . f ! l 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 1 2.1.1 After d'iscussing the situation with the Emergency Director determine if a gas sample from the
- l containment leak detector is required 2
2.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status 3Boa-rd to. T '2.i . i [ forecast anticipated radiological cdridit.ionsf e 2.1.3 Contact the Personnel Sa q '( t.h eader. \W for the h latest developments re1 Ate tyTeabiological
'd A g- conditions, and inform \h$in.,wflat -sample (s) are to be taken, and request Health Physics'\ ' coverage if: s, required. .] d ' , ,,.e,. l,1' . c d
, , u CONTINUOUS COVERAGE BY A HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN r
MAY SUBSTITUTE FOR THE RADIATION WORK PERMIT. s , \ \ '.Q
- 8 L 2.1.4 Request input from the Cont $rol' Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain the desired sample system l ,
availability.
$k l $7 I . . ' -
~
f +
--S & - --
J 1 I j i l EP-234 Rev. 4 Page 2 of 10 TJY/jmv j 2.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 2.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the
, Emergency Director for Group members (as required) and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this d evelopmen t.
l p 2.1.7 Direct the Chemistry sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the filter / cartridge ( sample. , 2.2 Chemistry Sameline and Analysis Group Leader shall: L h 2.2.1 Assign the appropriate number of group members to b obtain the necessary equipment to collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. 2.2.2 Brief the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following: l 2.2.2.1 Communications equipment and channel
} l 2.2.2.2 Type of sample (s) to be collected L l 2.2.2.3 Location of sample points t
p l 2.2.2.4 Suggested routes to be taken r e CAUTION q DO NOT USE ELEVATOR L i l 2.2.2.5 Sample transport mechanism 2.2.2.6 Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample 2.2.2.7 Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis ,t [ 2.2.2.8 Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection. 2.2.2.9 Proper completion of Data Sheets 2.2.3 contact Shift operations in the Control Rcom to request system line up so that the selected sample can be taken from the desired Sample Station and
- sample point.
v-mnrwmm . nm= .m m-e , ~~ r~ ~~- n we ~ ~r. m - m-~x ~.- ~~~c w -- n . - r -.
.~ c t l
l EP-234 Rev. 4 Page 3 of 10
. TJY/jmv If the Containment Leak Detector is isolated, shift operations shall defeat the signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts:
DO NOT DEFEAT ISOLATION OF HIGH DRYWELL PRESSURE WHEN DRYWELL PRESSURE IS GREATER THAN 5 PSIG. Panel Relay Contacts Isolation Signal 10C609 B21H-K120C T4-M4 High D/W Pressure (20C609) or -38" Vessel Level 10C611 B21H-K120B T4-M4 High D/W Pressure (20C611) or -38" Vessel Level 2.2.4 Appoint group member (s) to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples l 2.2.5 Dispatch the chemistry Sampling and Analysis group - members to the OSC for Health Physics Support if radiological conditions permit or other appointed location as determined by the Plant Surver Group Lead er. l 2.3 Health Physics Technician shall: 2.3.1 Determine which P.oute should be used for collecting and transporting the sample. 2.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 2.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment.
, 2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following:
l 2.3.4.1 RWP requirements , , .1*9"'f d?TM "_ "_'mP af ?.? F'1 *** W#-' '" **fN 'y ****T ***9"'**STFA'd ****81:PW'? "**
- 1 * *72^"* ***
- 77 P y * [7 ?? *> MT,7 *7
- 7 *?_*'.T_*,__
'K "
_., x- { f i i l EP-234 Rev. 4 1 b- Page 4 of 10 i TJY/jmv k W
-l 2.3.4.2 Routes to be used , l 2.3.4.3 Authorized doses c
l 2.3.4.4 Radiological concerns and precautions j 2.3.4.5 ' Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab l 2.3.4.6 Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA l 2.3.4.7 Stay times and abort criteria 2.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the sample from the
) Containment Leak Detector.
2.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location. Upon entering the power block, the
' surveyors will note trends in general radiation levels enroute to the Containment Leak Detector.
If general area dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the door leading to Rx.-283', exit immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group n, l . Leader. If dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 5
-R/hr at the door leading to Rx. 283', leave the g area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling i and Analysis Group Leader, who will evaluate the L -
situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader l 2.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. 2.3.8 Document the sample cask survey r.esults and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab. 2.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation
, and handling as specified in EP-243.
$C 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members I shall: b l 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. 7 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully f l complete the assigned task. f h nqN-yr:-mr.myr w ,'y_de_* m?-*c .-+ u.- _ - m-z"m &~ ""-"~"r
-V <
0- - { c . . l EP-234 Rev. 4 i ' Page 5 of 10 TJY/jmv [ [ 2.4.3 Obtain the ne~cessary equipment to collect the f sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample. I CAUTION EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORN.BY ALL PERSONNEL WHEN OBTAINING SAMPLES FROM THE SAMPLE STATIONS.
, , 2.4.4 Prepare three off gas sample vials by withdrawing from the sample vial (with a syringe) the same volume that is to be injected as a sample.
PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS ^ v 2.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the OSC or other designate' location for Health Physics Coverage. Once briefed by Health Physics, proceed
, to the Containment Leak Detector area and collect a containment gas sample.
ll 2.4.5.1 Proceed to the Containment Leak Detector. 2.4.5.2 Have the H.P. Technician survey the Containment Leak Detector. 2.4.5.3 Obtain the sample. The time required to obtain a sample is approximately 10 minutes. - l 2.4.5.4 Samplino Method A. Verify that HS-26-190-1 (pump 1 switch) is in the ON position and that pump 1 light is lit. Turn switch HS-26-190-2 switch (pump 2 switch) l to OFF. > B. Verify Flow Indicator (FI-26-190) indicates flow. C. Put switch HSS-26-190 (OPERATE / PURGE) in PURGE position and verify that the PURGE light is lit. l D. Allow to purge for one minute. ~ l E. Close valves V-2 and V-3. F. Disconnect the filter holder assembly on the outlet side ~ and install the gas sampling apparatus (similar to the one described in i - 1,- . _ _~_.m._._-. -_--_,,m_...m,m,s _m .m.,, .
l EP-234 Rev. 4 [ Page 6 of 10 [-l TJY/jmv
., l Appendix EP-234-1) remaking sure the sample l ! valve and septum valve are closed.
1[ l G. Open valves V-2 and V-3. l H. Close valve V-8. I. Put switch HSS-26-190 in OPERATE position and verify that the OPERATE light is lit. l l J. Open the sample valve. x l K. Open the septum valve. L. Insert the 1.0 m1 microsyringe through the septtm valve and the sample valve into the samp: e tee. M. Flush the microsyringe by taking a 1.0 mi sample and injecting it back into the sample tee two times. N. Take a 1.0 m1 sample and remove the microsyringe from the sample tee. Inject the 1 sample into a 14.4 al off gas vial. Place the [ l microsyringe in ayplastic bag and secure. O. Have the HP Technician immediately survey the vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate ( in Appendix EP-234-2 and using remote handling tools, place the vial into an appropriate . shielded transport container. i l P. Complete Appendix EP-234-2. [ l Q. Close the sample and septum valves. [ l R. Turn HS-26-190-2 switch (pump 2 switch) to ON. S. Take the sample to the hot lab retracing one of L the previously suggested routes, k 2.4.7 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, h the sample will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. 2.4.8 Inform the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample l statds is. L G.ww w_ - - m =, -- : w; - m e= - :a u z_., m m = =
) /; y - '- Y ' l EP-234 Rev. 4 s Page 7 of 10 g .
.JY/jmv x
T-l 3.0 ACTIO' '-FOLLOW-UP jf l 3.1 Chemistry Samplinq 'and Analysis Group Members
^ ;
shall: kg l 3.1.1 Verify Appendix EP-234-2 is complete. , f 3.1.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-243 p Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas i Samples. A 3.1.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. I L, .3.1. 4 ' Return all sampling equipment to 'the CHEMISTRY L EMERGE: ICY CABINET. 3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall:
- j - 3.2.1 Notify Shift Supervision that a sample has been
~
taken and the aligned valves may-be returned to the "NOR21AL" position (i.e., remove Jumpers). l 3.2.2 Ensure group member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 3.2.3 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab.
, 3.2.4 Direct group members to refer to EP-243 Sample ; Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Gas Samples ~
for guidance for sample preparation and handling. 3.2.5 Obtain and review all Data sheets and report the - sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. 3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall:
; 3.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF).
I f 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-234 Diagram of Gas Sampling Apparatus 4.2 EP-234 Data Sheet
- u. __. =- - --
.: - -----l
- x= - .___. __ _ . _ _ _ _-_ - :_ -
o
-l -
EP-234 Rev. 4' Page 8 of 10 TJY/jmv t . 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose This procedure provides guidelines for obtaining gas samples from the Containment Leak Detector
.l during emergencies.
5.2 Criteria for use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when a gas sample shall be taken from the Containment Leak Detector during an Emergency. l 5.2.2 Planned radiation exposures should b'e limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 5.3 Special Equipment
- 5.3.1 Transport container - (shielded) 5.3.2 Gas Sampling Apparatus 5.3.3 3 off-gas vials with septums -
5.3.4 Appropriate microsyringes [ -i 5.3.5 Plastic bags 5.4 References
- g 5.4.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Activation 5.4.2 EP-243 - Preparation and Handling of Highly l Radioactive Gas Samples
!i 5.4.3 M-102 - General-Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-0" 5.4.4 M-104 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 269'-0" &
283'-0" 5.5.5 M-26 PsID, Sh. 1, Rev. 8; Sh. 2, Rev. 9; Sh. 3, Rev. 4; Sh. 4, Rev. 4 - Plant Process Radiation Monitoring 5.5.6 E-519, Sh. 1 of 2; Rev. 4 G wa a w_ . . nn _, _- - -
-._ ~-v ~ ,-- n m-~.~-,,~._ . --
- - n-, ,,.c...
- 40v 1nj vf/
eoY .1 R 4 3e 9T J s ' r1 E ' - Vj" - e
,['
j ,. [I, L.
' g S [ m' l
8 'n. U
'I n , '
f.- ld .' A [ . = R y a 2 5 y - A ' - P P . 4 l
+ .
1 A } - , 4 G 3 N . 2 P P I
- L
- [ I E M \
gly 5 - A j X S I D S N A E G il l9
, l-w g P . .
g P F .
- . A O M
A - R . . - G . A 7 : I ' - D ~ . 4 e e 1 1r n i .
] :
l1 gI_ v
\
_1 l 7 \ - I I Ih I y[i. m.
. i ,
Y sW1m 1 2 -
" 5 \
. h' wt
- d T !-
~
- i l
- p a
( td . c enI . Hc t i oebs . _ - ~ l f/ lr . - I' ql! .! . . .
I. l l
, ! . EP-234 Rev. 4 Page 10 of 10 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-234-2 DATA SHEET Containment Leak Detector - Gas Grab Sample DATE:
- TIME
[ I lI l VOLUME: LO. ml J INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE: y l ANALYSIS REQUIRED: I NAME ,
- r. .
I f t [ .' l
- ---,,n-,,,,-,-,,w-~--.--.n= _ n-. .. ~-- , , m .i m . -- . - - -
, , = . - .
[ . ..- . p , L '.l
\'
- 3843116730 EP-235 Rev. 4 s
- %v, Page 1 of 11 T Y/mey
,.~'
, w
. PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY /Z[/1[
LIMERICK GENERATING STATION-EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE p' EP-235 OBTAINING REACTOR WATER SAMPLES FROM SAMPLE SINKS FOLLOWING ACCIDENT CONDITIONS l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analvsis Team Leader shall obtain necessary information and
, permissicas to obtain sample.
1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall organize and brief the sampling group and have operations defeat isolations. 1.3 HP Technician shall provide radiological assessment of the task. 1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group shall
! 5tain the sample.
l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader - shall: 2.1.1 After discussing the situation with the l Emergency Director, determine if a reactor water sample is required. 3 2.1.2 Determine preference of sampling points fr'on ..' " l D*10" A Mk\ \s Reactor Water Clean-up Eilher'\Demineralizer .- 1. Inlet \% , .,
- 2. Reactor Water Reci cula#tion Ittlet) <P
-) '*
\
\ . ., I e ep
- 3. Main Steam from Reactor \)'\ 's'
. ..a-Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis l Group Leader of sampling point. preference.
i
. O. N\ N l, .
2.1.3 Check the Plant Radiation Leirel' Status Bcard to l forecast anticipated radiological conditions. W .__,,,,_n.-, ::. =.=:,. . = . _ _
_u . _ , . -. w_. = . - - n._. _:- 2. ..0_ l
' } EP-235 Rev. 4 i Page 2 of 11
. JY/mey
~
- l 2.1.4 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader for latest developments related to radiological
- 'l conditions, inform him what sample (s) are to be taken and that Health Physics' coverage is ,
required. AN ALARA CONCEPT IS MANDATORY. SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBERS' EXPOSURE SHOULD BE LIMITED TO THE ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE LEVELS IN l' EP-230, CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM ACTIVATION, APPENDIX EP-230-1, EMERGENCY l i EXPOSURE GUIDELINES. 2.1.5 Request input from the Control Room (via ii Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample dP , system availability. T', 2.1.6 Determine what analyses are required and inform
.\ the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group.
l Leader. 2.1.7 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group Member's (as
; required) and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this development.
2.1.8 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the reactor water sample from the sample sink
! 2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: ! 2.2.1 Check with shift operations whether a sample can be taken from the desired sample station and sample point.
2.2.2 If the reactor water clean up filter demin inlet sample point is to be used, contact the control room to determine if a Group III isolation signal is present. 2.2.2.1 If the Group III isolation signal is present, request shift operations to defeat the signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: SHIFT APPROVAL IS REQUIRED FOR THIS STEP.
# 9 7.-
l' h <-~ m -
. n ny,p, r -mwe w mm, ---- ----.-- : u-._ : ..:- .r-- -- - -- . . - -
J
. . \
I l EP-235 R3v. 4 Page 3 of 11 : TJY/mev ) l 2.2.2.2 Panel' Relay Contacts IsolationSignal ' 10C622 B21H-K40A T1-M1 SLCS Initiation ' (20C622) 10C623 B21H-K40B T1-M1 SLCS Initiation ' (20C623) 10C623 B21H-K42 T1-M1 Non-Regen EX , (20C623) Outlet High Temp 10C609 B21H-K3A T2-M2 -38" Vessel Level (20C609) 10C609 B21H-K3C T2-M2 -38" Vessel Level (20C609) DO NOT DEFEAT THE ISOLATIONS OF HIGH RWCU DIFFERENTIAL FLOW, HIGH AREA TEMPERATURE OR HIGH DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE ON ROOM VENTILATION AS THIS INDICATES A LEAK IN THE SYSTEM. 2.2.3 If the Reactor Water Recirculation Inlet sample line has been isolated, contact the Control Room , and request shift operations to defeat the isolation signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: SHIFT APPROVAL IS REQUIRED FOR THIS STEP 2.2.3.1 Panel Relay Contacts Isolation Signal IR.T69 C71A-K7E T1-M1 Main Steam Line (20C609) High Radiation 10C611 C71A-K7H T1-M1 Main Steam Line * (20C611) High Radiation 10C609 B21H-K3A T2-M2 -38" vessel level (20C609) 10C611 B21H-K3C T2-M2 -38" Vessel Level (20C609) 2.2.4 If the Main Steam from Reactor sample point has been isolated, contact the Control Room and request Shift Operations to defeat the isolation signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: l SHIFT APPROVAL IS REQUIRED FOR THIS STEP W .: 7 w .. ema -. - = " - ~ ~ - - - ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
o - - - , l ~ EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 4 of 11 TJY/mev ISOLATION l VALVE PANEL RELAY CONTACTS SIGNAL HV-41-lF084 10C622 B21H-K23A T3-M3 -38" Vessel Level y (20C622) High Steam Line Radiation I HV-41-lF085 10C633 B21H-K23D T3-M3 -38" vessel Level (20C633) . High Steam Line Radiation b 2.2.5 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment to collect and - transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. CAUTION EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORN BY ALL l PERSONNEL OBTAINING THE SAMPLE. 2.2.6 Brief the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members on the following: l 2.2.6.1 Communications equipment and channel l 2.2.6.2 Type of sample (s) to be collected l 2.2.6.3 Location of sample points . l 2.2.6.4 Suggested routes to be taken l 2.2.6.5 Sample transport mechanism 2.2.6.6 Projected amount of time required to collect and
- transport the sample 2.2.6.7 Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis 2.2.6.8 Proper completion of Data Sheets 2.2.7 Appoint Group Member (s) to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample.
USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION Of THE HOT LAB. _ =. =va~ w _
,:- e -. - - - - - - - - - - --- -
- ? ,- , =
a l EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 5 of 11 TJY/mev EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples ( EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-2'43 (GAS) Sample Preparation and f Handling of Highly. i Radioactive Gas Samples I 2.2.8 Dispatch the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team members to the OSC for Health Physics [ Support if radiological conditions permit or other appointed location as determined by the Plant Survey Group Leader. l 2.3 Health Physics Technician shall: 2.3.1 Determine which route shall be used to collect and transport the sample. 2.3.2 . Take appropriate radiation survey equipment. Ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 2.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory . equipment. 2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: i 2.3.4.1 RWP requirements 2.3.4.2 Routes to be used 2.3.4.3 Authorized doses 2.3.4.4 Radiological concerns and precautions 2.3.4.5 Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab 2.3.4.6. Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA l 2.3.4.7 Stay times and abort criteria
. - - ,.r----
- .. c :m, _ , _ .:=-_-.-
+
--~#. .$ _
5 - y __
- 4.y g.pg
. . ~ . . ~ . . .
l EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 6 of 11 TJY/mev 2.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the reactor water sample. 2.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location, if upon entering the Power Block, if general area dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr games or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the point specified below, exit immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and l Analysis Group Leader, who will evaluate the 1 situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader. If the general area dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 5 R/hr at the door leading to Rx. 253,
- leave the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader with this information, who will evaluate the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader.
2.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. Document the sample cask survey results and give 2.3.8 them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member)
, when arriving at the hot lab.
2.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241. l 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members . shall: . 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the Administrative Exposure Guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. r 2.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the j- sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample. PROPERL7 MBEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS 2.4.4 Once the Group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled,
, proceed to the OSC or other designated location for EP coverage. Once briefed by Health Physics, collect the reactor water sample as follows:
~.oy ,eg g
- mM
~~
__ 29- A %A %m e= ~ ,_ _
- ^ ~ ' [. ., , , _ Z j.t6 s,'.] ,,- ~-
. . + -
l EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 7 of ll TJY/mev 2.4.4.1- Proceed to the RWCU Sample Station in the p Reactor Building. 2.4.4.2 Request the Health Physics Technician to survey the area, concentrating on the sample sink. l 2.4.4.3 Proceed to the predetermined sample point. CAUTION , DO,NOT USE ELEVATORS 2.4.4.4 Ensure that a flow is present. If not, attempt to initiate flow by opening root valves. If flow is not established, exit and consult Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader ). 2.4.4.5 SAMPLING METHOD Obtain a 2 oz. sample (or less if activity is extreme) in a 4 oz. bottle. Use tongs or other remote handling tools for~ sample collection if required. When required amount of sample is obtained remove bottle from hood, quickly place lid on bottle and transport with tongs, other remote tools, or lead shielded carrying container. 2.4.4.6 Eave the EP Technician survey the vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate in Appendix EP-235-1. 2.4.4.7 Complete the Data Sheet in Appendix EP-235-1. it 2.4.4.8 Take the sample to the hot lab retracing one of the previously suggested routes. 2.4.5 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample will be handled and stored in'a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. l l 2.4.6 Contact the Group Leader as soon as the sample a reaches the hot lab and inform him that the i sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. - l
. 3 ,; r . . - . m ,
. . ~,. -- . . . , , -m. , w_m;w. y . . w. m ~ -- %
~_---,y:_;., _ . ua,y-_ , s.r m e w
~.
,_.m_19 ;< e- g, . _ _
l EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 8 of 11 TJY/mey
~
l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP ' l 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: 3.1.1 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-j 241, Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples. 3.1.1.1 Properly in place and shielded, the sample will be processed remotely (where and when possible). Careful handling of the sample is mandatory in preparation for analysis to minimize radiological conditions. 3.1.2 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 3.1.3 Properly file the data sheets and report back to fi, the Group Leader for re-assignment. [ 3.1.4 Return all sampling equipment to the CHEMISTRY EMERGENCY CABINET. E l 3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: . k [ 3.2.1 Notify Shift Supervision that a sample has been taken and the aligned valves may be returned to the " NORMAL" position (i.e. Remove Jumpers). ] . ) 3.2.2 Ensure Group Member (s) dose is monitored to lt ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 3.2.3 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot I lab. 0 ! 3.2.4 Direct Group Members to refer to EP-241, Sample j Preparation and Handling of Eighly Radioactive
- 1. Liquid Samples for guidance for sample
[ preparation and handling. li I f: l l. r ,-, . . , ., . , . , , .
, -c , _ w - ,-~ m -.m.m m :r.- - - .- - - -
. . ; 9.~ :. .
l EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 9 of 11 TJY/mev 3.2.5 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets, report the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. 3.2.6 Obtain sample station key from Group Member. 1 l 3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 3.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF) . 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose j ' The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for consideration prior to, during
, and after obtaining a reactor water sample following accident conditions with major fuel damage.
5.2 Criteria for Use
. This procedure shall be implemented when a Reactor water sample must be taken from the Reactor Enclosure sample stations during an emergency situation.
5.3 Special Equipment 5.3.1 4 oz. sample bottle with lid 5.3.2 Tongs or remote' tooling for holding the sample bottle during sampling 5.3.3 Eye Protection 5.3.4 Plastic bags 5.3.5 Sample station key 4 9 a
- i -
l .:., _n ,,.,.n= -._n_ -- -- . . - , - . . -
+TR - :; ui _ _ _ . .
i . _ . -'
$ l 0
' EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 10 of 11 TJY/mey 5.4 References
!- 5.4.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team { Activation 5.4.2 M-23 PsID, Sh. 3, Rev. 12 Process Sampling 5.4.3 M-102 General Arrangement Plan at el. 217'-0"
!- 5.4.4 M-103 General Arrangement Plan at al. 239'-0"
] & 253'-0" k 5.4.5 EP-241 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly j Radioactive Liquids I ll
)
i - p i 6 i - i $.l li e p i 1, 1 u - . - ~ . . - - - . . . _ =- - . _ - - - - . . - - - - . .-
p -. - -
.--w... ,.. . i h
l I- l F ~ EP-235 Rev. 4 Page 11 of 11 TJY/mev P c, n i APPENDIX EP-235-1 u L DATA SREET h k . [ Reactor Water Grab Sample h 4 DATE: 5 TIME: l [ SAMPLE LOCATION: p UNIT 1
- , UNIT 2 I SAMPLE POINT
- 1. REACTOR WATER CLEAN UP FILTER DEMIN INLET l 2.- REACTOR WATER RECIRCULATION INLET l 3. MAIN STEAM FROM-REACTOR l
VOLUME: INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE - ANALYZED FOR: NAME: l 1 MW'QWMW*WQ&M _ ?* -- -- #' N q' M.- 1
~
.m. -- . = - - .
u . I
- 3843116740
[ EP-23 6, Rev. 4 { Page 1 of 9 ) jmv p . - m l PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY M/
- LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
{ EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE a f . G ( . EP-236 OBTAINING COOLING TOWER BLOWDOWN LINE WATER SAMPLES a. I FOLLOWING RADIOACTIVE LIQUID RELEASE AFTER ACCIDENT CONDITIONS I l l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS { l.1 Chemistry Sampling and' Analysis Team Leader shall ) ' obtain necessary information and permissions to obtain sample. . { 1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall organize and brief the sampling group and have
- operations defeat isolations.
1.3 HP Techni'cian shall provide radiological assessment of the task. 1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group shall obtain the sample. i y - l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE L l 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: , 2.1.1 After discussing the situation with the Emergency p l Director, determine if a cooling tower blowdown line water sample is required. } 2.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological conditions., a n. . l 2.1.3 ContactthePersonnelSafetyTeamLead(rkfor'tbe latest developments related to. rad'iological 2.J h sm i conditions,andinformq1 taken and request Healtf Pg}ihat ales 'saa'ple;.(M -afe to s \3ss1'} coverage.
. * . S ' '. .
l IF THE PLANT SURVEY TEAM: LEADER,.*TN CONJUNCTION i WITH CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS' TEAM' LEADER,+ . L DETERMINES THAT HEALTH PHYSICS COVERAGI IS NOT :** NECESSARY; THE STEPS PERFORMED BY THF. .HEALTE '
'.4" PHYSICS TECHNICIAN c\ MAY A\ BE OMITTED.O'.. \
2.1.4 Request input from the Control ** Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. i ki: , .mwm .
. ,-- v- m~c= - r~~m- m --
~_+ -
- V P
L l EP-236, Rev. 4 Page 2 of 9 I TJY/jmv i 2.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 2.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authoriz3tions from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this U development. 2.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the cooling tower [ blowdown line water sample. l 2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader'shall: L 2.2.1 Select the appropriate sample point. Four loctions
- exist where the sample may be taken from.
L f 2.2.1.1 Units 1 and 2 Cooling Tower Blowdown Line sample l points (SX-09-104- (20 4 ) ) ; located in the pit between the Cooling Towers. L 2.2.1.2 Effluent to river sample pump discharge grab sample l (68-0061) and composite sample (68-0060); located behind Control Panel OBC 580 in the Holding Pond Enclosure. 2.2.2 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment to collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. 2.2.3 Brief the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following: 2.2.3.1 Communications equipment and channel 2.2.3.2 Type of sample (s) to be collected 2.2.3.3 Location of sample points 2.2.3.4 Suggested routes to be taken 2.2.3.5 Sample transport technique 2.2.3.6 Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample 2.2.3.7 Review the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis 2.2.3.8 Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection 2.2.3.9 Proper completion of data sheets _ , ;;.-,. . . .n .. . - , ,.,,..---..-...-,e...-...r..
e .. . -
;, 7: ,
i !
.. )
l EP-236, Rev. 4 ) Page 3 of 9 l TJY/jmv O. i [ 2.2.4 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Hot Lab for [ receiving the sample. f4 l USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB IF APPLICABLE.
, EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and J Handling of Highly a
Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and j- Handling of Highly i Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine {. Cartridges y f EP-243 (GASL) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 2.2.5 Dispatch the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team e Members to the OSC 'if necessary, or directly to the sample point of radiological conditions permit or 1 other appointed location as determined by the Plant
, Survey Group Leader.
l 2.3 Health Physics Technician if called upon shall: 2.3.1 Determine which route should be used for collecting and transporting the sample. 2.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment. Ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 2.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. m. 2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: 2.3.4.1 RWP requirements } 2.3.4.2 Routes to be used I. 2.3.4.3 Authorized doses J
. 2.3.4.4 Radiological concerns and precautions s
q 2.3.4.5 Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab 2.3.4.6 Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA
. . w. . . , v.v ~~ .. .- _ .= - c, -
-c
7 i EP-236, Rev. 4 Page 4 of 9 TJY/jmv l 2.3.4.7 Stay times and abort criteria p 2.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, V transporting and analyzing the sample, if required. 2.3.6 Document the sample survey results and give them to l the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at W), l the lab. 2.3,7 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP 241, if required. L ' l 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are- approaching the Administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. 2.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample. PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS l 2.4.4 Once the Group has been briefed and the appropriate . equipment has been assembled, proceed to the OSC or other designated location if necessary for HP coverage, or to appropriate sampling location and . retrieve the water sample using the following. A. COOLING TOWER BLOWDOWN LINE GRAB SAMPLE
- 1) Proceed to the desired sample point (SX 104, 204).
- 2) Position a one liter sample bottle under the sample point.
- 3) Open SX-09-104, -204 and fill sample bottle.
- 4) Close SX-09-104, -204.
- 5) Place lid on sample bottle and secure.
- 6) Place in a plastic bag and secure with tape.
c _- =~w/ /w => =_ n .m = .wx w,_r - -
( ' ' ~ .- R EP-236, Rev. 4 Page 5 of 9 TJY/jmv L 7) Return switch opened in step No. 2 to the desired position. , l
. 8) Proceed to step 9.1.4.5.
B. EFFLUENT TO RIVER SAMPLE PUMP DISCHARGE LINE
, GRAB SAMPLE
- 1) Proceed to Control Panel OBC 580.
- 2) Verify that switch ES68-003A (Effluent to g River Sample Pump OAP900) or HS68-00 3B
- b. (Effluent to River Sample Pump OBP900) is 1
on.
- 3) _Open back panel and locate sample point.
, (Valve 68-0060) .
- 4) Ensure that a flow is present. If not, attempt to initiate flow by opening root valves. If flow is not established, contact Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader for alternate sample points.
u
- 5) Obtain a one liter grab sample. ,
- 6) Place lid on sample bottle and secure.
- 7) Place in a plastic bag and secure with tape.
- 8) Return switch opened in step No. 2 to the desired position.
f 9) Have the HP Technician survey the sample } and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on
- Appendix EP-236-1.
- 10) Proceed to step 9.1.4.5.
C. EFFLUENT TO RIVER SAMPLE PUMP DISCHARGE LINE COMPOSITE SAMPLE L 1) Proceed to Control Panel OBC 580.
- 2) Verify that switch HS68-003A (Effluent to River Sample Pump OAP900) or HS68-003B (Effluent to River Sample Pump OBP900) is on.
- 3) Open back panel and locate " composite sampling container. (Valve 68-0060) .
,t ..~..
_ o}~5. s &&. s' A *' f ~, w_ LL'= -& A U m "__ ^ W:-'- -.s *- . - s -+:~ev ++ V--- ~--
m =_ __ <. -
. : -- o k -
EP-236, Rev. 4 j Page 6 of 9 TJY/jmv S': L
- 4) From the composite sampling bottle i
throughly mix the sample and transfer a 1 f liter dip sample to an appropriate sample bottle. i
- 5) Place lid on sample bottle and secure, h
- 6) Place in a plastic bag and secure with tape.
- 7) Return switch opened in step No. 2 to the desired position.
- 8) Have the HP Technician survey the sample and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on i Appendix EP-23 6-1.
L 1 l 2.4.5 Complete the Data Sheet in Appendix EP-236-1. '] 2.4.6 Transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab by
, retracing the ute back from the sample point.
E 2.4.7 Upon introductM of the sample into the Hot Lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. ) 2.4.8 Contact the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the Hot Lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. J l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOWUP 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: l- 3.1.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director Dose Assessment Team Leader and the Health Physics and
- Chemistry Coordinator.(EOF).
3.2 Chemistry Samplino and Analysis Group Leader shall: t 3.2.1 Complete Appendix EP-236-1. 3.2.2 Have the group member (s) dose monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded.
, 3.2.3 Inform the Chemistry sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the Counting Room.
\ 3.2.4 Direct group memeber to refer to EP-241 Sampling Preparation and Handling of radioactive liquid a _c -~
..~ a: . . . -. ::.~:=
g - - _ -_ s . - -
~
- V -
v . . EP-236, Rev. 4 [< Page 7 of 9 ty TJY/jmv 1 g' samples for guidance for sample preparation and l handling. l
-3.2.5 Obtain and review all data sheets and report the sample results to the chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all data sheets to Appendix EP-230-2.
3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 3.3.1 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-241, Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Liquid Samples. 3.3.2 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 3.3.3 Properly file the analysis report and report back to the Group Leader for reassignment. 3.3.4 Rs. turn all sampling equipment to the CHEMISTRY EMERGENCY CABINET.
~
/ l 4.0 Appendices [ l 4.1 EP-23 6-1, Data Sheet ! l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION i l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines to obtain Blowdown Line water samples following radioactive liquid releases after O accident conditions. 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall do implemented when a Cooling Tower Blowdown Line water sample is taken during an emergency situation. 5.2.2 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. l 5.3 Special Equipmeht 5.3.1 1 liter sample bottles with lids 4
-- M. -, ;
1, ' ~ '
EP-236, Rev. 4 Page 8 of 9 TJY/jmv 5.3.2 Plastic bags 5.3.3 Tape 5.3.4 Marker / Pen 5.3.5 Flash light l 5.4 References 5.4.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysia Team Activation 5.4.2 M-09 P&ID, Sh. 1, Rev. 29, Circulating Water 5.4.3 M-68 P&ID, Rev. 4, Plant Waste Water Effluent 5.4.4 EP-241 - Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Liquid Samples 1 i t e i e 99- - *-e- -ee m yt- ** N - , ---w+-**,=%w4%-meem.,w.-_-
7... = ___ n 1! ( . o EP-23 6, Rev. 4
~ Page 9 of 9 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-236-1 i
DATA SHEET DATE: TIME: ', SAMPLE LOCATION: TYPE OF SAMPLE: VOLUME: ANALYSIS REQUIRED: j .'
- o i,
o , l' . I l' F t . h s l p . i f, NAME: i t
]NW __ , WM" ?Ng, 5588*'---
_ _ _ . _ _ ~ _ . _ _
. . s '
l. 384311675O ""-'"" Page 1 of 1. TJY p/jav y PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE 4 EP-237 OBTAINING THE IODINE / PARTICULATE AND/OR GAS SAMPLES
- FROM Tus NORTH vsNT WIDE RANGE GAS MONITOR (WRGM) l-1.0 PARTICIPANTS
- 1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader ,
shall obtain necessary information and permissions to obtain sample. 1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall organize and brief the sampling group and have operations defeat isolations. 1.3 HP Technician shall provide radiological assessment of the task. 1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group shall obtain the sample. l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader , shall: 2.1.1 After discussing the situation with the Emergency Director, determine if a filter / cartridge or gas sample is required from the North Vent WRGM. , ..f; . 2.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Statds Bo r . o forecastanticipatedradiologic5l}condit1ns a 9 . 2.1.3 Contact the Personnel Sif Team ader and J' checkonthelatestde%elo radiological conditions an info'em him what nts related to sample (s) are to be taken and thatLHealth . SI ,' Physics coverage is required. # ' .C ,( ?.d.i' CONTINUOUS COVERAGE BY A HEALTH PHYSICS ;,,.. TECHNICIAN MAY SUBSTITUTE.,FOR'THE:. RADIATION WORK PERMIT. 1. 'l *"
~
L LG9 . . . ,. ~. w f _ _ _ _==hm'- ^ ^
%,-_- -~ea*a,__ ____.**eese s ann, , + +. *-x -: q g m, ;y, q*~_ __
- _, g,__-
. ... . . ~ .
J . .
, l* EP-237, Rev. 4 4
_ Page 2 of 18 TJY/JRR/jav
. 2.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability.
2.1.5 - Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. _ If an Iodine / Particulate sample is to be taken, recommend sampling time. 2.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as , required) and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this development. 2.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the appropriate . samples. 2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: a J 2.2.1 Determine what type (s) of sample (s) are to be taken: l 2.2.1.1 Local Particulate / Iodine Sample l 2.2.1.2 Remote Particulate / Iodine Sample l 2.2.1.3 Gas Grab Sample 2.2.2 Assign.the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment to collect and - transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab.
- 2.2.3 Brief the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following
2.2.3.1 Communications equipment and channel l 2.2.3.2 Type and sampling time of sample (s) to be l collected i 2.2.3.3 Location of sample point 2.2.3.4 Suggested routes to be taken 2.2.3.5 Sample transport technique 2.2.3.6 Projected amount of time required to collect and ]i . transport the sample . e g __ x T 11 _Y ?9 ?_ ? - -- l ' 's.
. __. ._ ; _ ._ _ -~ _ . _ . . _ . - _ _
l ' EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 3 of 18 TJY/JRR/jmv 2.2.3.7 ' Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis
, 2.2.3.8 Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection 2.2.3.9 Proper completion of Data Sheets.
2.2.4 Appoint Group member (s) to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES r FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and
, Handling of Highly Radioactive
{!i, Liquid Sample.1. 3 EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and e Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges. EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas
. Samples.
2.2.5 Dispatch the Chemistgy Sampling and Analysis Group members to the OSC for Health Physics Support if radiological conditions permit or other appointed location as determined by the . Plant Survey Group Leader. o 2.3 The Health Physics Technician shall: 2.3.1 Determine which route should be used to collect and transport the sample. CAUTION DO NOT USE ELEVATORS 2.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 2.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate
. Dosimetry, Protective Clothing and Respiratory Equipment. ,
p I h 7 b Yh N A-1, s
=- _ . . . - .. . . . . . - ..-.'-~* ~"
. _ . . .. .. .a . .. .L . . .
- l. EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 4 of 18 TJY/JRR/jmv EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORK WHEN OBTAINING SAMPLES FROM THE SAMPLE STATIONS.
2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample, to discuss the following: 2.3.4.1 RWP requirements 2.3.4.2 Routes to be used 2.3.4.3 Authorized doses 2.3.4.4 Radiological concerns and precautions ( 2.3.4.5 Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab 2.3.4.6 Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA 2.3.4.7 Stay times and Abort Criteria 2.3.5 Provide constant coverige while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the sample filter / cartridge and/or gas sample from the WRGM. 2.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute to and at the sample location. , e 2.3.6.1 Upon entering the power block, the surveyor j shall note trends in general radiation levels - enroute to the sample point. If general area dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 Rad /hr beta, prior to arriving at the point specified below, immediately report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader, who will evaluate the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader. 2.3.6.2 If the dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 5 R/hr i at the door leading to 217', 332', 352', or 411' T El. exit the area immediately and report to
} Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader 1 with this information. With dose rates less than 5 R/hr., enter the desired elevation through that door. Take careful note of the ;
dose rates. 2.3.6.3 If using the route suggested in procedure step 4 2.2.3, remember the stairs are next to-the North I Vent. If general area dose rate (unanticipated)
', exceeds 10 R/hr. gamma or 10 Rad /hr beta, exit 3
I,
.Qn,,nr:.: r ,, m-- -
, .- v. . - - - -- -
, m- , nw 1
- f. s,e
] , - .._ l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 5 of 18 TJY/JRR/jav the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader, who will evaluate the situation with the Personnel Safety 1 Team Leader. I 2.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. 2.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member)
, when arriving at the hot lab.
2.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-242 or 243. 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab.
- 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelines or do noE have sufficient arposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task.
2.4.3 obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample: 2.4.3.1 Properly label all sample containers. . 2.4.3.2 If a gas sample is to be taken, prepare three evacuated gas sampling vials by withdrawing from the sample vial (with a syringe) the same volume that is to be injected as a sample. 2.4.4 once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the OSC or other designated location for Health Physics coverage. Once briefed by Health Physics perform the appropriate section for the desired sample: 2.4.4.1 Local Particulate / Iodine Sample 2.4.4.2 Remote Particulate / Iodine Sample 2.4.4.3 A Gas Grab Sample 0 W MM*M S.M*.'Ma N "Ja ;*P * - P '* ;? ? y =**"- {
~]-- _; * )) l 9 7+ =- 7 ' %{MN.pTf TT EN K?t* *(.N 9 L9 e y* #?M
, .g; x , ~
- t. .
l EP-237, R0v. 4 Page 6 of 18 TJY/JRR/jav l A. LOCAL PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE
- 1. Proceed to the Control Room. )
1' 2. Locate Control Room Panel Timer / Control l Assembly (RIX-26-076, KIC-26-076-1, KIC l L 076-2). q 3. Verify POWER switch is ON.
- 4. Verify the green LED's on RIX-26-076 (NORTH STACK W.R. ACCIDENT) are lit.
- 5. Press CLEAR.
. 6. Press MON, 1, 3, 6, ITEM and the channel l number will be displayed. Record channel number.
CHANNEL NUMBER RANGE BUTTON 1 LOW RANGE 2 MID RANGE 3 HIGH RANGE
- 7. Push appropriate channel (RANGE) button.
, Record concentration.
- 8. Inform the Team Leader of the Range and Concentration and have him verify that the Estimated Sampling Time and Range Selection are feasible. Record the Range Selection and Sampling Time. ~
- 9. Proceed to the appropriate Section for the desired sample:
SECTION A-1 LOW RANGE . A-2 MID/EIGE RANGE A-1 LOW RANGE
- 10. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM.
- 11. Verify that the isolation valves (26-0026,
; 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029) on either side l
of the quick-disconnects for GRAB SAMPLE 1
; are OP.EN. ,
1
- 12. Locate Sample Conditioning Skid Control Station Electrical Enclosure. Open lid and t
- t s w ;,,, ,;%:;w.:: . ,
l 4 . . l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 7 of 18 TJY/JRR/jav s set HSS-26-076-2, SKID CONTROL switch to i LOCAL.
- 13. Verify the green REMOTE CONTROL DISABLE lamp is lit.
- 14. Verify that the POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH is ON.
- 15. On the Sample Detection Skid, ensure that the PUMP ON LOW green light is lit. If not, place the following switches in the appropriate position:
RANGE SWITCH 140. NAME POSITION LOW HSS-26-076-8 Low Pump ON , HS-26-076-10 Flow Control HAND (Low) j HSS-26-076-6 Flow Control OPEN j (Low)
! 16. Ensure that the PUMP ON LOW green light is lit. If not, exit the area, j 17. Record position (A or B) of HSS-26-076-4, ,
4 FILTER SELECTOR LOW RANGE switch. ~
- 18. Turn BSS-26-076-4 to GRAB 1 position and immediately record the time as TIME-1 and record the flow from FI-26-076-2.
- 19. After the desired time has expired, turn HSS-26-076-4 to position A or B and immediately record the time as TIME-2 and record the position.
- 20. Close the isolation valves (26-0026, 26-0027, 26-0-28, 26-0029).
l
- 21. Release the band on the holder assembly and immediately have the HP Technician survey the sample and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate.
- 22. Remove the cartridge and filter paper and place into an appropriate transport cask.
; 23. Install a new cartridge and filter paper j into the assembly, l
i 24. Reclip the band on the holder assembly. 'i
- 1 t
l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 8 of 18 TJY/JRR/jmv
- 25. Open the isolation valves (26-0026, 26-l 0027, 26-0028, 26-0029).
; 26. Place the following switches in the
-appropriate position: _.
RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION
; LOW ESS-26-076-8 Low Pump ' AUTO , HS-26-076-10 Flow Control AUTO (Low) g HSS-26-076-6 Flow Control OPEN (Low)
- 27. Set'HSS-26-076-2, SKID CONTROL switch to REMOTE. .
- 28. Close Sample Conditioning Skid Control m. .
Station Electrical Enclosure lid and secure. . 29. Transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. -] A-2 MID/EIGH RANGE
- 10. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM.
- 11. Verify that the isolation valves (26-0021, -
26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024) on either side.' . t' ' of the quick-disconnects for GRAB SAMPLE 2 are OPEN. , 12. Locate Sample Conditioning Skid Control Station Electrical Enclosure. Open lid and set HSS-26-076-2, SKID CONTROL switch to LOCAL.
- 13. Verify the green REMOTE CONTROL DISABLE lamp is lit.
- 14. Verify that the POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH is ON.
S h L l i l 4m . _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ . .._ _ _ .= _ .. .m =._
m
-+ --=_ , .. , . . - .
j . . l EP-237, R0v. 4 e Page 9 of 18 / TJY/JRR/jmv
- 15. On the Sample Detection Skid, ensure that -
the PUMP ON MID/EIGH green light is lit. "l, If not, place the following switches in the appropriate position: RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION L MID/ HSS-26-076-7 Mid/High ON
) HIGH Pump -
). ~ HS-26-076-9 Flow Control HAND (Mid/High) ESS-26-076-5 Flow Control OPEN (Mid/High) r 16. Ensure that the PUMP ON MID/EIGH green > light is lit. If not, exit.the area, i: l _,
. 17. Record position (C or D) of HSS-26-076-3, q ,
'. . - ~
FILTER SELECTOR HIGH RANGE switch. x 18. Turn RSS-26-076-3 to GRAB 2 position and immediately record the time-as TIME-1 and record the flow from FI-26-076-1. s
- 19. After the desired time.has expired, turn
,~ HSS-26-076-3 to position C or D and immediately record the time as TIME-2 and record the position.
- 20. Close the isolation valves (26-0021, 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024).
- 21. Open the door to the holder assembly and
- immediately have the H2 Technician survey the holder assembly ar.d record the Initial
- Contact Dose Rate. -
. 22. Release the quick-disconnects on either side of the holder assembly and place the
, holder assembly into an appropriate
,N' ~
transport cask or unlatch the holder assembly and place the cartridge and filter paper into an appropriate transport cask. , I .
- 23. Install a new holder assembly complete with cartridge and filter paper or install only a new cartridge and filter paper as applicable.
. . . 24. Close the door to the holder, assembly.,
- 25. Open the isolation valves (26-0021, 26-
.' 0022, 26-0023, 26-0024).
f b5 ~5 h -- . .fl.h =
) -
m.
~
= -.J .. .
. _ - . a f
m
)
y l EP-237, Rev. 4 f Page 10 of 18 1 - TJY/JRR/jav b
- 26. Place the following switches in the appropriate position:
RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION MID/ HSS-26-076-7 Mid/High AUTO HIGH Pump p HS-26-076-9 Flow Control AUTO (Mid/High) HSS-26-076-5 Flow Control OPEN (Mid/High) .
- 27. Set HSS-26-076-2, SKID CONTROL switch to REMOTE.
- 28. Close Sample Conditioning Skid Control I Station Electrical Enclosure lid and secure.
J
+
- 29. Transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab.
d,, , B. REMOTE PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE
- 1. Proceed to the Control Room.
- 2. Locate Control Room Panel Timer / Control Assembly (RIX-26-076, KIC-26-076-1, KIC ,.
, 076-2).
- 3. Verify POWER switch is ON.
- 4. Verify SKID CONT-REMOTE light is lit.
IF SKID CONT-REMOTE LIGHT IS NOT LIT AND SKID CONT-LOCAL LIGHT IS LIT, THEN THE i SAMPLE CONDITION SKID CONTROL STATION h* ' ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE LID IS OPEN AND/OR THE SKID CONTROL SWITCH (HSS-076-2) IS IN THE LOCAL POSITION. Tell group leader remote sample is impossible and ask for further instructions. + l 5. Verify the green LED's on RIX-26-076 (NORTH STACK W.R. ACCIDENT). 7 a L N ~ .. . _ _ _ . ,,- - - - _ - . _ - - -
l EP-237, Rsv. 4
.. Page 11 of 18 l TJY/JRR/jmv L 6. Press CLEAR.
d ( 7. Press MON, 1, 3, 6, ITEM and the channel t number will be displayed. Record channel number. CHANNEL NUMBER RANGE BUTTON
, 1 LOW RANGE D, 2 MID RANGE 4: 3 HIGH RANGE l
4 8. Push appropriate channel (Range) button. p ; Record concentration. * [ .
- 9. Inform the Team Leader of the Range and G Concentration and have him verify that the
[ z Estimated Sampling time and Range Selection is feasible. Record range selection and sampling time. 4 10. Proceed to the following section for the l appropriate Range: SECTION B-1 LOW RANGE B-2 .MID/EIGH RANGE , B-1 LOW RANGE t -
- 11. Record letter (A or B) of profilter in service (ESS-26-076-10). -
- 12. Set KIC-26-076-2, LOW RANGE GRAB SAMPLE TIMER, to the desired sample time by use of the screwdriver adjustment and record the SAMPLING TIME.
[ 13. Press START TIMER pushbutton (ES-26-076-2) { and verify the timer display is counting. j Record the time as TIME-1. , 14. Press MON, 0, 2, 8, ITEM and the flow will j- be displayed. Record the flow. J 15. When the timer stops counting, grab sample y has been taken. Record time as TIME-2. t jj 16. Press CLEAR. s f I . i -
%,www . :yW4pg W " W^"ZT!'.W. 7 ~' ~ L.
v ' :M ' -
, _;g l( '
l EP-237, RGv. 4 Page 12 of 18 TJY/JRR/jmv i 17. Turn RSS-26-076-10 to the desired profilter 4 8 and record the letter (A or B) or prefilter 4 in service. 3 18. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM. { GROUP MEMBERS AT THE WRGM PERFORM:
' 19. Close the isolation valves (26-0026, 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029) on each side of the quick-disconnects on GRAB SAMPLE 1. > 20. Release the band on the holder assembly and immediately have the EP Technician survey ; the sample and record the Initial Contact I Dose Rate. Remove the cartridge and filter I paper and place into an appropriate ) transport cask.
I
- 21. Install a new cartridge and filter paper into the assembly and reclip the band. -
- 22. Open the isolation valves (26-0026, 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029).
l 23. Transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot i Lab. B-2 MID/HIGH RANGE l 11. Record letter (C or D) of prefilter in j service (HSS-26-076-9).
- h i
- 12. Set KIC-26-076-1, MID HIGE RANGE GRAB
! SAMPLE TIMER, to the desired sample time by use of the screwdriver adjustment and record the SAMPLING TIME.
- 13. Press START TIMER pushbutton (ES-26-076-1) and verify the timer display is counting..
j ' Record the time as TIME-1. g 14. Press MON, 0, 7, 2, ITEM and the flow will ( be displayed. Record the flow.
- 15. When the timer stops counting, grab sample j has been taken. Record time as TIME-2.
; 16. Press CLEAR.
- 17. Turn ESS-26-076-9 to the desired prefilter
)[ f
~
and record the letter (C or D) or profilter in service.
; ;Sh,c7m - "r--~m. w _ SSF , y a; e z_. 2 ,c .- _ _ _ . 1_
y- _? _ , - x_ ,w.. ; e - 3 - l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 13 of 18 TJY/JRR/jav t ~b t 18. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM. f ? GROUP MEMBERS AT THE WRGM PERFORM: I g 19. Close the isolation valves (26-0021, 26-s, 0022, 26-0023, 26-0024) on each side of the j quick-disconnects on GRAB SAMPLE 2.
- 20. Open the door to the holder assembly and immediately have the HP Technician survey the holder assembly and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate.
{ 21. Release the quick-disconnects on either g side of the holder assembly and place the g holder assembly into an appropriate 5 transport cask.
- 22. Install a new holder assembly.
- 23. Open the isolation valves (26-0021, 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024).
'24. Transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot g Lab.
C. GAS GRAB SAMPLE' , g 1. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM. i 2. Verify that the green OPERATE light on the RM80/J BOX assembly is on. , 'I
- 3. Verify that Power Disconnect Switch on Sample Detection Skid assembly is on.
{
- 4. Verify that either PUMP ON LOW or PUMP ON
- l. MID/HIGH or both green lights are lit.
- 5. Verify that either MID/HIGH FLOW or LOW 1 RANGE FLOW switches or both visual flow meters on sample detection skid are J
D indicating flow.
- 6. Locate sample tap valve and verify that it is closed.
- 7. Remove plug and install septum valve and 6 verify valve is closed.
j 8. Open sample tap valve. 1
- 9. Open septum valve.
L 4 n . ., ~ . ~n --,- . n.- .
.. w: , . . x.: : 2- _ , . _ ._
l EP-237, Rev. 4 l Page 14 of 18 l jl . TJY/JRR/jmv 4
- 10. Insert the 1.0 mi microsyringe through the l
[( septum valve and the septum valve into the tee connection.
- 11. Flush the microsyringe by taking a 1.0 ml ,
sample and injecting it back into the 4
- j. sample tee two times.
- 12. Take a 1.0 m1 sample and remove the microsyringe from the sample tee. Inject the sample into an evacuated 14.4 al off gas vial.
- 13. Place the vial into an appropriate container for transportation to the Hot >
Lab. , ( 14. Close the septum valve. ,
- 15. Close the sample tap valve. ,
II 16. Record the sample volume and time in [ Appendix- EP-237-3.
- 17. Have the HP Technician survey the vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate.
- 18. Transport the sample to the hot lab by retracing the route back from the sample station.
2.4.5 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot , lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a manher that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. 2.4.6 Contact the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 3.1.1 Complete Appendix EP-237-1. 3.1.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-242 or EP-243. 3.1.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. s M j '
,, , *,, ,,,g
r
~
s _ _ _ , l EP-237, Rsv. 4 Page 15 of 18
, TJY/JRR/jmv i' -
3.1.4 Properly file the Data Sheets and report back to ! the Group Leader for reassignment. l 3.1.5 Return all sampling equipment to the CHEMISTRY EFERGENCY CABINET. l 3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 3.2.1 Ensure Group member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been
. exceeded.
3.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. 3.2.3 Direct group members to refer to EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Particulate and Iodine Cartridges or EP-243 l Sample Preparation & Handling of Highly 1 Radioactive Gas Samples, for guidance for sample preparation and handling. 3.2.4 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets and report the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. 3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 3.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and
, the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator *
(EOF). 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-237-1 Data Sheet 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose - The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for obtaining paritculate/ iodine and/or gas samples from the North Vent WRGM following accident conditions. 1 a i_' Y k - "' "~
~ '
- s. _
y-
~ '
e l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 16 of 18 TJY/JRR/jmv f+ 5.2 Criteria for Use k 3 5.2.1 ' Prior to entering the plant to obtain the i sample, ensure that the iodine cartridges and
. particulate filter papers are adequate and properly installed by verifying that RT-5-026-
[ 620-0, routine changeout of iodine cartridges and particulate filters from the North Vent Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) is properly completed. 5.2.2 - This procedure shall be implemented when a particulate, iodine or gas sampid shall be taken El g from the North Vent WRGM during an emergency
- b. situation.
5.2.3 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 5.3 Special Equipment I 5.3.1 3-off gas vials with septums 5.3.2 Adjustable wrench 5.3.3 - Channel lock pliers 5.3.4 Extremity dosimetry 5.3.5 Extra filter 5.3.6 Extra cartridge , 5.3.7 Mininert-septum vavle 5.3.8 Transport cask j 54,9 Designated remote handling tools 5.3.10 Plastic bags 5.3.11 Screwdriver
5.4 REFERENCES
[ 5.4.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team { Activation I-5.4.2 M _02 -
. General Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-
0" 5.4.3 M-106 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 352'- 0" C. _m a w m e m_ _-s m _
.- -1 _
~ ~
J
l l
~
l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 17 of 18 l TJY/JRR/jmv 5.4.4 General Arrangement Plan at El. 411'-0" 5.4.5 M-26 P&ID, Sh. 1, Rev. 8, Sh. 3, Rev. 3, Sh. 4, Rev. 3, - Plant Process Radiation Monitoring 5.4.6 EP-2k2- Sample Preparation And Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges 5.4.7 EP-243 - Sample Preparation And Handling Of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples { e g'%[ % 4 ,, N # - - - - *--r-ee*,
[ _ l
, i (F ; l EP-237, Rev. 4 Page 18 of'18 f TJY/JRR/jmv l
APPENDIX EP-237-1 , DATA SHEET Sample: , Analysis: , Est. Sampling Time: A. FOR OBTAINING LOCAL PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE Channel number: (1,2 or 3) Conc. Range Selection (Low or Mid/High) t Sampling Time
't
[ A-1 LOW RANGE lA-2 MID/EIGH RANGE i : Prefilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D) Time-1 Time-1 Flow (FI-26-076-2) Flow (FI-26-076-1) Time-2 Time-2 Profilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D)
~ Initial Contact Dose Rate Initial Contact Dose Rate L B. FOR OBTAINING REMOTE PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE Channel number: (1,2 or 3)
Conc. Range Selection (Low or Mid/High) Sampling Time
- B-1 LOW RANGE l3-2 MID/EIGH RANGE Profilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D)
Sampling Time Sampling Time Time-1 _ Time-1 Flow Flow Time-2 Time-2 i Profilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D) 0 Initial Contact Dose Rate Initial Contact Dose Rate I C. FOR OBTAINING A GAS GRAB SAMPLE h u Time ' ll Vol. . d naME. l
l.- 3843116760 "'-2 8 R o. 4 i- Page 1 of 8
; TJ gd PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY /k/ka LIMERICK GENERATING STATION t EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE
- k. ,
EP-238 OBTAINING LICUID RADWASTE SAMPLES FROM RADWASTE SAMPLE SINK FOLLOWIbG ACCIDENT CONDITIONS,
-1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Chemist.ry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall obtain necessary information and permissions to j l obtain sample.
.l. 1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall a organize and brief the sampling group and have operations defeat isolation. l.3 HP Technician shall provide radiological assessment l of the task. @ 1.4 Chemistry sampling and analysis' group shall obtain the sample. .t 2 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE i ' 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 2.1.1 After discussing the situation with the Emergency Director, determine if a liquid radwaste sample is ( t required. i 2.1.2 Determine preference of the Sampling Point from M-23 h Sheet 1, PEID Process Sampling. 9 ll 2.1.3 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status. Board to forecast anticipated radiological, conditions. [d 2.1.4 s A i -\ Contact the Personnel Safet'y, Team Le'ader 'ind check
.' 'i on the latest development ls'relat.ed'to radiological conditions and inform him.what' sample (s) are to be taken and that Health.'
Phys'ic,s',2 coverage is required. (4; . - i , CONTINOUS COVERAGE BY'A HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN MAY SUBSTITUTE FOR THE RADIATION WORK . PERMIT -(RWP) .
.; ,'; .':D '
1
..'B \ .. h.H
.\
,'j.'Y a- .a_- .
.;-~. ~ .- ._ w , . . ; . _., : . _; 2 = ___ _ . . __ _._ _ ___ _
4 l EP-238 Ruv. 4 l Page 2 of 8
- 9. TJY/mgd 2.1.5 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency" I Director) to ascertain the desired sample system availability.
2.1.6 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what
, analyses are required.
I 2.1.7 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the i Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) l and inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of this g development. ! 2.1.8 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group ( . Leader to collect and analyze the liquid sample from the radwaste sample sink (Radwaste Enclosura 162')
'2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall:
2.2.1 Check with Shift Operations whether a sample can be taken from the desired sample point. (See M-23 J PEID, sheet 1 for reference). r ! Eye protection should be, worn by all personnel [ , obtaining the sample. I 2.2.2 Assign the appropriate number of group members to [ obtain the necessary equipment and collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. 2.2.3 Brief the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following: , r. 2.2.3.1 Communications equipment and channel. 2.2.3.2 Type of sample (s) to be collected. 2.2.3.3 Location of sample points. 2.2.3.4 Suggested routes to be taken. 2.2.3.5 Sample transport technique. 2.2.3.6 Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample. 2.2.3.7 Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis.
- 2.2.3.8 Special tools and equipment required for sample j handling and/or collection.
9
+ 4E
- N". - I- j p , { *l + y 4 4 N, h ') g [Jrs** 4 =
s, y _ , _, j; f,, y, __ .
l EP-238 Rev. 4 Page 3 of 8 TJY/mgd 2.2.3.9 Proper completion of Data Sheets. 2.2.4 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate
, Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive. Gas Samples 2.2.5 Dispatch the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Members to'the OSC for Health Physics Support if radiological conditions permit or other appointed location as determined by the Plant Survey Group-Leader.
2.3 Health Physics Technician shall: 2.3.1 Select the appropriate sample route.' 2.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and h ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 2.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate . dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. CAUTION: EYE PROTECTIONS SHOULD BE WORN BY ALL PERSONNEL OBTAINING THE SAMPLE.
, 2.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry 1
technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: 2.3.4.1 RWP requirements f 2.3.4.2 Routes to be used 2.3.4.3 Authorized doses 2.3.4.4 Radiological concerns and precautions b lW v F W s . 2 ;a:: s G&r M.I)kh3]MS 3 *b ' ? 5 '-
' ~ ' '
. .. - -- s - :, - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3
~ ~
l EP-233 Rev. 4 Page 4 of S TJY/mgd 1 2.3.4.5 Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab l 2.3.4.6 Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA l 2.3.4.7 Stay times and abort criteria 2.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obt'aining, ~~' transporting and analyzing the sample from the Containment Leak Detector. 2.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location. Upon entering the power block, the surveyors will note trends in general radiation . levels enroute to the Containment Leak Detector. If general area dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 10 f R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the point specified below, exit immediately and
, report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group i Leader, who will evaluate the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader.
If the general area dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 5 R/hr at the door leading to Rx. 162', leave the area immediately and report to Chemistry
- c. Sampling and Analysis Group Leader with this information who will evaluate the situation with the
- Personnel Safety Team Leader.
2.3.7 Survey the samole area and sample cask. f
- 2.3.8 Docum'ent the sample cask survey results and give .
them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab. 2.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241. f: D 2.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 2.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry l' lab. f 2.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assign'ed task. l c: xmmnmpa_~ - _z .: _ -
= ~r.a -- _
- - - ~ -
~
l EP-238 Rev. 4 Page 5 of 8 ) [ TJY/mgd 2.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample
- and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the
, sample.
l PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS CAUTION: DO NOT USE ELEVATORS 2.4.4 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the OSC or other designated location for EP support. Once briefed by Health Physics, collect the, sample as follows: 2.4.4.1 Proceed to the Radwaste Sample Sink. 2.4.4.2 Eave the E.P. Technician survey the area, concentrating on the Sample Sink. 2.4.4.3 Proceed to the predetermined Grab Sample Point. 2.4.4.4 Ensure that a flow is present. If not, attempt to initiate flow by opening root valves. If flow is not established, exit and consult Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 2.4.4.5 SAMPLING METHOD Obtain a 2 oz. sample (or less if c activity is extreme) in a 4 oz bottle. Use tongs or other remote handling tools for sample collection if required. When required amount of sample is . , obtained remove bottle and transport with tongs, other remote tools, or lead carrying container. 2.4.4.6 Eave the Health Physics Technician survey the vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate in Appendix EP-235-1, 2.2.4.7 Complete the Data Sheet in Appendix EP-238-1. 2.2.4.8 Take the sample to the Hot Lab. 1-3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP 3.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: 3.1.1 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-241 Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquids. u .T:n , s.- . , ' _ ~-_W ------,e -T _
' ~
~ - -
l EP-238 Rev. 4 Page 6 of 8 .[ TJY/mgd [ 3.1.2 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 3.1.3 Properly file the data sheets and report back to the Group Leader for reassignment. , 3.1.4 Return all sampling equipment to the CHEMISTRY
- EMERGENCY CABINET.
3.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Grcup Leader shall: a 3.2.1 Ensure Group Membor(s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 3.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. ! 3.2.3 Direct Group Members to refer to EP-241 Sample .- Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Liquids for guidance for sample preparation and handling. l 3.2.4 Obtain and review all Data Sheets, report the sample , results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team ( Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP- , 230-2. 3.2.5 Obtain sample station key from Group Member.
; 3.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall:
3.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF). , 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP 238 Data Sheet !i 'I 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for consideration, prior to, during and after obtaining samples from the radwaste sample sink, following accident conditions.
' " ~ T W
_,f [r . ?y
'n~%
- A.
- . . _ , , _ ,y _}
.s c;.c . 4 4
l EP-238 Rev. 4 Page 7 of 8 TJY/mgd 5.2 Criteria For Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when a Liquid Radwaste sample shall be taken from the Radwaste Sample Sink during an emergency situation. 5.2.2 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. , l 5.3 Special Equipment 5.3.1 4 oz sample bottle with lid. 5.3.2 Tongs, remote tooling and/or lead carrying container for holding the sample. 5.3.3 Eye Protection. 5.3.4 Plastic bags.
,. ; 5.3.5 Sample station key.
it 5.4 References 5.4.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation 5.4.2 M-23 P&ID, Sh. 1 Rev. 9 Process Sampling 5.4.3 M-100 General Arrangement Plan at El. 177'-0" . 5.4.4 M-102 General' Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-0" b i - 5.4.5 EP-241 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly l Radioactive Liquids l. l 7 - [' . if .
- 1 II I
-m-LL _
.n _.
__. ? 2._ _ p-
_3 , , 'p ! , w ;',, JA{ W _L.4 .
** h l EP-238 Rev. 4 Page 8 of 8 TJY/cgd APPENDIX EP-238-1 DATA SHEET Liquid Radwaste Grab Samples L
L DATE: Iu TIME: SAMPLE LOCATION: SAMPLE POINT: VOLUME: INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE: ANALYSES REQUIRED: 4
% O NAME:
I i
- i I
h l l i L i I, i t. L __., . - _ . , , . - _ _ . . . , -.. . _ _ -- -- . . .- m ..
c ,: ~c. .
. ~'
2 . g - 1 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPAM ELECTRIC PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT LIMERICK GENERATING STATION' Ii
.I 01/11/85 i ..
FROM: J. Wiley
- TO: G. M. Leitch l
SUBJECT:
CANCELLATION MEMORANDUM FOR EP-240
Reference:
Limerick Administrative Procedure A-21 i I EP-240 should be cancelled because it is no longer necessary to obtain off-gas samples from the air ejector holdup pipe discharge sample station. l
; [J.Wiley 6
FROM: G. M. Leitch 5 TO: Holders of EP Procedures '- This Cancellation Memorandum has been reviewed by PORC and is
- approved. All holders of EP procedures should discard EP-240.
In accordance with Administrative Procedure A-21, procedure number EP-240 will not be re-used. t' e APPROVED: TATION SUPERFNTENDENT DATE: //! 9 4 l' . e
-,s www m __ _ e +J - - " ' -' '
I 3843116780 EP-241, Rav. 5 Page 1 of 8 TJ H/mla PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
, . LIMERICK GENERATING STATION /h/!
- EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE y
L P EP-241 SAMPLE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF HIGHLY RADIOACTIVE LIQUID SAMPLES. i s 1.0 PARTICIPANTS L l 1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader 2 determines the method ar.3 location of sample processing storage and/or disposal as required and ensures that the Administrative Exposure Guidelines are not exceeded. l 1.2 Health Physics Technician provides constant
-)
coverage, monitors the extremity dose during sample
; handling, and monitors laboratory habitability.
l.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members prepare the hot lab post accident sample preparation station, performs sample dilution and analysis. l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE 2.1 Determination of processing procedure. , l 2.1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis _ Group Leader shall
~
t obtain the appropriate EP-Sample Data Sheet and b select one of the following processing procedures based on the radiation levels of the sample. L 2.1.1.1 Send the sample off-site for analysis per EP-244 j Offsite Analysis of Higa Activity Samples.
- 9.
l 2.1.1.2 Place the sample in temporary storage.for, fd%uge: L analysis. D ,},.. g *
] },i. p \J- ( y ,
' h ,ba"
.. v .
IF L- 2.1.1.3 Analyze the sample on-site ', , l 4.[d {lg il h --
- COMPLETE SECTION I OF APPENDIX EP-2fif1},$y.g,3.r 3; h rY $'U d
-;I 2.1.2 The Chemistry Sampling and AnalysistGroup* Lead,ey ar','(\
l shall determine the following sample pgr.amdtEisi lj basedonsampledoseratesan,,pealy%1s4}Tilh""k[L ll requirements. g(\M OD" i ('. , ~- Q -- - . r3_ , gm, , _ _
,% 7-,, ~, , , . ,
l EP-241, Rav. 5 Page 2 of 8 TJY/RGH/mla 2.1.2.1 Analysis to be performed. 2.1.2.2 Order of analysis
$ 2.1.2.3 Number and magnitude of dilutions e
2.1.2.4 Analysis sample volume desired
.., PH DETERMINATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED ON DILUTED SAMPLES.
I CI DETERMINATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED BY IC IF SBLC HAS BEEN INJECTED DUE TO THE INTERFERENCE OF BORON. COMPLETE SECTION II OF APPENDIX EP-241-1. 2.2 Pre-Job Briefing 2.2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader, Health Physics Technician and the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall assemble and review this procedure. The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader j L.; 2.2.2 shall direct group members to perform the necessary steps of this procedure. SECTION 2.3 AND 2.4 SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE. THE SAMPLE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN THE il ' SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION UNTIL THESE SECTIONS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED.
- 2.2.3 The Health Physics Technician shall brief group r
members on: . j; a. RWP requirements
- b. Radiological concerns and precautions (ALARA)
L . p c. Staytimes and exposure limits L l-CAUTION p KEEP EXPOSURE ALARA I i! 2.3 Preparation of sample preparation station for 'j liquid samples. l s ll-- . , m m- w -- z = m ,n. w s.= t ,. - w r.n m ,,nm c_
n. I EP-241, RDv. 5
?
Page 3 of 8 TJY/RGH/mla L 2.3.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall prepare.the dilution vials (with appropriate )l i labels) per appendix EP-241-1 and place the vials in the appropriate dilution vial positions in the sample preparation station. Place lead caps over the vials (liquid position) . l
- g. '
i CAUTION i
)'
l i IF THE NEEDLE AND THE SYRINGES ARE NOT CONNECTED TIGHTLY THEY MAY SEPARATE WHEN WITHDRAWING FROM THE SAMPLE VIAL.' c THE LEAD CAPS MAY BE POSITIONED FOR GAS OR LIQUID . SAMPLES. FOR THE PURPOSE OF THIS PROCEDURE THEY T SHALL BE IN THE LIOUID POSITION. L 2.3.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) H shall ensure that the necessary liquid micro syringes (with needles), sample handling tongs and sample analysis containers are in place and available to fulfill dilution and analysis requirements per appendix EP-241-1. 2.3.3 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall ensure that at least one pair of plastic h gloves and two plastic sample bags are available [ for each gamma analysis to be performed. 2.4 Preparation of analysis instrumentation. 2.4.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) 8 shall insure that the appropriate analysis
;l procedures specified in appendix EP-241-1 are j : available' and have been performed to the point that
= each analysis instrument is. ready to accept the g sample for analysis. k THE FOLLOWING STEPS ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY THE r CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER (S) (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) AND REQUIRE CONSTANT
, HEALTH PHYSICS MONITORING.
LEAD BRICKS IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION HAVE j BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT THE SAMPLE. THE LEAD BRICK i ; LABLED " SAMPLE VIAL A" HAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT L : A GAS OR LIQUID SAMPLE FROM THE PASS. THE LEAD L' BRICK LABELED " SAMPLE VIAL B" HAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT A LIQUID SAMPLE FROM THE REACTOR COOLANT SAMPLE STATION. y . m ~r mm w a, m :..__. - 3 _- "" rs .- a . c.
. , , , ~ , . .
h . . @ l EP-241, Rav. 5 h , Page 4 of 8 g TJY/RGH/mla K 3 2.5 Transport of sample from transport cask to sample d preparation station. . E . T 2.5.1 Remove the lead cap from the lead brick to accept E - the sample. k 2.5.2 Position the. sample transport cask as close to the (( Sample Preparation Station as possible. h 1 2.5.3 As quickly and carefully as is possible, remove the 3 sample from the transport cask and place it in the
? lead brick.
j 2.5.4 Quickly place the lead cap over the sample in the
" liquid" position.
p f 2.5.5 Retreat from the Sample Preparation Station and allow the Health Physics Technician to take dose
.' rate readings.
I THE HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN SHALL INFORM THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER OF THE y SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION DOSE RATES AND STAY TIME. 2.6 Sample Dilution (if dilutions are not to be performed, proceed to step 2.7). I DILUTIONS TO BE MADE ARE DESCRIBED IN APPENDIX T EP-241-1. ALL ACCESSORIES USED IN THE DILUTION PROCESS SHALL BE MAINTAINED BEHIND THE LEAD SHIELD j WALL ONCE THEY HAVE BEEN CONTAMINATED. ENSURE THAT i ' THE SYRINGE AND NEEDLE ARE CONNECTED TIGHTLY OR THEY MAY SEPARATE WHEN WITHDRAWING FROM THE SAMPLE - VIAL. 2.6.1 Insert the syringe thru the sample access hole in fI the lead cap then thru the sample vial septum and into.the sample to be diluted. Withdraw the b predetermined (appendix EP-241-1) aliquot from the 4 sample vial. 2.6.2 Withdraw the syringe from the sample and insert it in the predescribed method into the next sequential dilution vial to accept the sample (Dilution Vial
#1, #2 etc.). Inject the aliquot into the dilution vial.
J 2.6.3 Withdraw the syringe from the sample. Separate the
- z. needle and the syringe and discard them in the shielded waste container.
f
- , .,- 2 ... . --__,~,.m.--,,..- _. - m .-m--
l EP-241, Rav. 5 Page 5 of 8 TJY/RGE/mla 2.6.4 Remove the lead cap over the diluted sample. Grasp the sample vial securely with the sample handling tongs and raise the vial out of.the lead brick (but not above the lead shield wall) . l 2.6.5 Using the tongs, swirl the sample vial enough to ensure adequate mixing, replace the vial. Replace the lead cap (liquid position) . ) 2.6.6 If further dilutions are necessary (per appendix EP-241-1) repeat steps 2.6.1 thru 2.6.5, always beginning with the last dilution vial to accept a sample aliquot. 2.6.7 When desired dilution is reached, the Health Physics Technician shall determine the dose rate of the diluted sample. 2.6.8 If the diluted sample dose rate is unacceptable, repeat steps 2.6.1 thru 2.6.5 until dose rate is acceptable. Indicate additional dilutions on appendix EP-241-1. 2.7 Sample Cup Preparation 2.7.1 For each analysis to be performed (appendix EP-241-1) use the syringe transfer method (step 2.6.1) to sequentially obtain the volume of sample required (Appendix EP-241-1) from the appropriate diluted / undiluted sample source (appendix EP-241-1) . 2.7.2 Inject the appropriate sample aliquot into its analysis cup. . . t DUE TO THE AMOUNT OF SAMPLE BEING REMOVED FROM THE BOTTLE IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO INJECT AN EQUAL AMOUNT OF AIR INTO THE BOTTLE. DUE TO THE SMALL VOLUME OF SAMPLE USED TO PERFORM i PH AND THE EFFECTS CO2 ABSORBTION WILL HAVE ON THE
- ANALYSIS, THE PH SHOULD BE DETERMINED IMMEDIATELY j AFTER THE SAMPLE IS PLACED IN ITS SAMPLE CUP.
4 6 6 L DM L3 ', =. K ; "
~l ?- ,L' ~ ~ ~ ' ' ] ' '
UI - ' W
- , w .
T l i l. EP-241, Rav. 5
% Page 6 of 8 ej TJY/RGH/mla f 3.O ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP ? "
3.1 Perform the predetermined analysis (Appendix EP-241-1) in the predetermined sequence (Appendix EP-241-1) . 4 3.2 Disposal of samples and contaminated materials THE STORAGE AND/OR DISPOSAL OF THE UNUSED PORTION bg OF THE ORIGINAL SAMPLE WILL BE AT THE DISCRETION OF f
. THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUPS LEADER AND THE HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN.
3.2.1 The remaining samples and contaminated sample cups shall be disposed of in the shielded waste container. The sample handling tongs shall be used in the transfers. The samples and sample cups f! should be kept behind the lead shield wall as much f as is possible. 3.2.2 Transfer and disposal of the shielded waste container will be at the-discretion of the Health
' Physics Technician and the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader.
4.0 APPENDICES
, 4.1 .EP-241-1 Data Sheet
$ l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION . l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for sample preparation and handling of highly radioactive liquid samples following accident conditions. l 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when preparing or handling highly radioactive liquid samples during an emergency situation. l 5.2.2 Ventilation in the sample preparation hood is operating. l k e b _ __~ = . - ~ _ -.. - - - . . ~_ x .. -
[ l EP-241, Rev. 5 Page 7 of 8 TJY/RGH/mla i l '5.3~ Special Equipment a 5. 3. l ' Liquid sample vials with septum. 5.3.2 Appropriate liquid microsyringes. 5.3.3 Rubber gloves 5.3.4 Plastic sample bags. 5.3.5 Sample handling tongs. 5.3.6 0.0lN nitric acid solution (500 ml) . lj 5.3.7 Eye protection l 5.4 References 5.4.1 CH-901 Determination of Ions by Ion Chromatograph during Post Accident Conditions. 5.4.2 CH-903 Determination of PH in Low Volume Water Samples during Post Accident Conditions. 5.4.3 Ch-904 Determination of Metals by DCP during Post Accident Conditions. d 5.4.4 CH-905 Determination of Gamma Isotopic Activity during Post Accident Conditions. 5.4.5 Ch-906 Determination of Chloride by Specific Ton during Post Accident Conditions. 5.4.6 CH-907 Determination of Boron at PPM Levels during
- Post Accident Conditions.
5.4.7 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation L 5.4.8 LGS FSAR 11.5.5, Post-Accident Sampling System i i L w . _ _ - - - - . - - . ~ . _ _ . _ . .. _ . . . _ _ - . . -. . .-. ,. -
q <. .._ . a - ,
- - 4 EP-241, R3v. S 'g
90 8 cf 8 -. f -
1 Appendix EP-241-1 f/RGH/blo f Data Sheet I. - Sample Source Processing Procedures Grab Sample Point A. Sent Of fsite for Analysis (l) (X) Initial Sample Volume ( ) D. Placed in Temporary Storage (1) , (2) Initial Contact Dose Rate C. Analyzed on Site ( ) Staple Date/ Time ( )
/
II. (4) (5) (3) Total Analysis Acceptable i Order of Procedure Magnitude Number of a Analysis Analysis Dilution Sample Analysis Number of Dilutions Dilutions Factor Volume Dose Rate 1 2 3 4
-^
5 y 6 y (1) If this method is used sign and date this data sheet and terminate this procedure. (2) The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall determine place of storage. (3) Magnitude of Dilutions (4) If original sample is (5) Analysis Sample Volume
- ) 10
- 1 = 1 m1 sample: 9 al of 0.0IN a small volume diluted
!i Nitric Acid sample, this dilution pH 0.5ml if 100.1 = 1 m1 sample: 9.9 al of 0.01 factor must be C1 (IC) 4 ml ! Nitric Acid considered ; !j 1000.1 = 0.01 al sample: 9.99 al of 0.01 Ni B (DCP) 4 ml (SIE)1 ml i; Nitric Acid
- , Due to the complexity of the dilution l' and analysis process, it is recommended l
'] that the same magnitude of dilution be used for all of the analysis. MDL's for: Doron Chloride ICl_ ppb Reactor Coolant Regions of Interest Activity ' DCP50 ppb Titr. 1 ppm Activity - 1 uC1/cc to 10 Ci/cc ( d SIE 1 ppm Doron - O to 1000 ppm .) 3 Chloride - 0.5 to 20 ppm pH - 1 to 13 Chemistry Group Leader / Chemistry Group Member __ _ / _ I l 9
. .. .L : ._. , ~. L . .a i w . . . + u.. . - .--. .-- .a. . . . . = .
3843116790 EP-242, Rev. 4 Page 1 of 5 TJ H/no x PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC. COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
- - EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-242 SAMPLE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF HIGHLY RADIOACTIVE PARTICULATE FILTERS AND IODINE CARTRIDGES CAUTION Keeo Exposures ALARA 1.0 PARTICIPANTS
^ 1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader: Determine the method and location of sample processing , storage and/or disposal as required.
- Ensures that the Administrative Exposure Guidelines El - are not exceeded.
'N ' Direct Group Member (s) and the assigned Health Physics 9 technician to perform the .necesscry steps of this procedure and to report back the results of the sample analysis as soon as they become available. 1.2 Health Physics technician provides constant coveragc , monitors the extremity dose during sample handling, . and monitors laboratory habitability. 1.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members Prepare ' the hot lab post-accident sample preparation station to accept the sample. Perform sample dilution and analysis as required.
., m.a D 2.O ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE 3 t 't k
D 'i*$
; - t\ ': ... b "'
2.1 Determination of Processing Procedu,re - '" Q '~J -* ^ _ ... 2.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysei. Group Leader shall obtain the appropriate Sample DataiSheet an$ select one of the following processing procedur'es ba, sed ona.
- g. the radiation levels of the sample'.,,, 3 , ' ' , . ; g ,iy -
0 y\\
', },l , ' ' ' '
; n-.
+
w
- s. ,
, , . . . . -m-e--- -*W-y y - +,
$ g,p-e-" q ,w- ""-
_. _ y s. . - - - - . ,
. _; i s I:;
. s_
h[ ' , EP-242, Rev. 4 y Page 2 of 6 TJY/RGH/no y y, '.'- - i 4: - 1 \ 2.1.1.1. ' Send the sample offsite for analyses L per EP-244 Offsite Analysis of High { '
;\ j. Activity Samples.
b 2.1.1.2. Place the sample in temporary storage h zfor future analyses. (
) %
2.1.1.3. Analyze the sample on-site. COMPLETE SECTION I OF APPENDIX EP-242-1. , .. e c [
-w ; _ ' 2.'l.2 The chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall determine the following sample parameters based on gdx_-
i sample dose rates and gamma isotopic analyses O requirements. 4
\
2.1.2.1. Sample to be analyzed (silver {# ' zeolite and/or filter) li q . 2.1.2.2. Order of analyses
~
2.1.2.3. Purge time of sample 2.1.2.4. .' Acceptable dose rate for gamma counting
, COMPLETE SECTION II OF APPENDIX EP-243-1.
p 2.2 ' Pre-Job Briefing 2.2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader, { Health Phi' sics technician and the Chemistry Sampling - g and Analysis Group Members shall assemble and review 3 this procedure. L 2.2.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct group members to perform the necessary steps of this procedure. SECTION 2.3 AND 2.4 SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE. THE SAMPLE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION UNTIL THESE SECTIONS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 6 2.2.3 The Health Physics technician shall brief group members on: 2.2.3.1. RWP requirements 2.2.3.2. Radiological concerns and precautions (ALARA) we ar_ m=i===.q ===* ge en g e iey,e w-__.;*,e- -ww. .w== ,- e ~+w -h*e 7%,,--gn-,+ - - .~~ == = =>ww-- we~*ewey-*==---
w.w - w . . .u ~. a . n ..~ .. . . . . . . - . . . ~ . . . . . . ....;... . . u .- u . ~, . ; e . . , l EP-242, Rev. 4 Page 3 of 6 TJY/RGH/no i 2.2.3.3. Staytimes and exposure limits 7 THE FOLLOWING STEPS ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CHEMIS"'RY j ' SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER (UNLESS OTHERWISE i SPECIFIED). 2.3 Preparation of Sample Station for Iodine and Particulate Samples + 2.3.1 Determine the purge gas to be used (nitrogen or air) . NITROGEN IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR PURGING SAMPLES. DURING ACCIDENT CONDITIONS PLANT AIR MAY BECOME CONTAMINATED AND THEREFORE SHOULD BE USED ONLY IF NITROGEN IS NOT AVAILABLE. 2.3.2 Ensure that the desired purge gas system has adequate supply pressure and is aligned to the sample preparation station. 2.3.3 Place the purge cannister discharge line in the
" discharge position".
2.3.4 If a purge cannister is to be used connect it to the [; quick disconnect fitting and place it behind the lead shield wall. 2.4 Preparation of Analysis Instrumentation 2.4.1 Ensure that the appropriate analysis procedure , specified in Appendix EP-242-1 is available and has been performed to the point that each analysis instrument is ready to accept the sample for analysis, f i ! CAUTION: l CONSTANT HP COVERAGE IS REQUIRED BEFORE PROCEEDING. 2.5 Transport of Sample from Transport Cask to Sample Preparation Station 2.5.1 Position the sample transport cask as close to the Sample Preparation Station as possible. 2.5.2 As quickly and carefully as possible, remove the sample from the transport cask and place it behind the lead shield wall. u - .
- . . . __. u . , w._ _ . . _.._. . w .. , 7
, . _ . . m _ _. m h . . . . . - _ .
EP-242, Rev. 4 Page 4 of 6 TJY/RGH/no a k 2.5.3 If a purge cannister is to be used, place the sample in its appropriate purge cannister and connect the quick disconnect fittings. Establish a purge gas flow in the same direction as was used in the sampling process. 2.5.4 If a purge cannister is not used, connect the quick disconnect fittings (on the sample chamber). ij Establish a purge gas flow in the same direction and < flow rate as was used in the sampling process. 2.5.5 Retreat from the Sample Preparation Station and allow [l ' the sample to purge for the predetermined amount of time (Appendix EP-242-1). 2.5.6 When the desired purge time has elapsed secure the purge gas and disconnect the quick disconnect fittings. Keep the sample shielded behind the lead j .. shield wall. d 2.5.7 The Health Physics technician shall determine the dose rate,of the purged sample.
- 1 j If the purged sample dose rate is unacceptable (per
~
2.5.8
.1 Appendix EP-242-1) repeat steps 2.5.3 through 2.5.7 until the acceptable analysis dose rate is reached or no longer changes.
~
3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP 3.1 Sample Analysis 3.1.1 Perform the gamma isotopic analysis as directed in Appendix EP-242-1. 3.2 Disposal of Samples and Contaminated Materials
- 1
]' 3.2.1 Transfer and disposal of " analyzed samples" will be at the discretion of the Health Physics technician and the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader.
,. _ _ _ m. _ .. . :.. , __
u ,. .~. _ _ - . . . TL ' 1 - -. 7,'
n: . _ EP-242,_Rev. 4 Page 5 of 6 TJY/RGH/no p 4.0 APPENDICES r + 4.1 EP-242-1 Data Sheet 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines . for sample preparation and handling of highly radioactive particulate filters and iodine cartridges , during an emergency situation. 5.2 Criteria For Use , q ? 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when preparing or handling highly radioactive particulate filters and iodine cartridges during an emergency situation. .
~
5.2.2 Ventilation in the sample preparation hood is operating. 5.3 Special Equipment 5.3.1 Purge cannister - 5.3.2 Eye protection 5.3.3 Plastic sample bags 5.3.4 Sample handling tongs 5.4 References 5.4.l' CH-905 Determination of Gamma Isotopic Activity During Post Accident Conditions 5.4.2 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation li e 9 ch-am em9E*s Ng smogn*M w wasne y 6-N M2Wwh.#emm W N4r"-- - N '" N **Wi"N* t "_P~'."**"*"- * = * * * * " " * * * *emm -*
-z-.--. ,.~ua.---...- .~.-;.~...-..-.~~.
i -
~
U h . EP-242, Rev. 4 l Page 6 of 6 g TJY/RGH/no APPENDIX EP-242-1 a k DATA SHEET i - g I. Sample Source Grab Sample Point Initial Sample Volume Initial Contact Dose Rate 8 Sample Date/ Time / I! 1 Processing Procedure: (X)
. (*) A. Sent offsite for analyses ( )
(*) (**) B. Placed in temporary storage ( ) C. Analyzed on-site ( ) T (*) If this method is used, sign and date this data sheet
] and terminate this procedure.
y (**) The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall determine the place of storage. q II. Gamma Isotopic Analysis requirements (***) (****) Order of -Procedure Sample to Purge Acceptable Dose Analysis Number be Analyzed Time Rate for Analysis 1 CH-905 - 2 CH-905 I ( 1 (***) silver zeolite cartridge (s) ,. charcoal cartridges, or filter paper k (****) since all samples are to be purged together, the same 6 purge time should be used. Signature Date Time Chemistry Group Member Health Physics Group Member b Group Leader
,, e i
I I s _ _.
3 c , ~ . 3 84 31 16 8 00 EP-243, Rev. 5
,; . Page 1 of 8 TJY R H/no i
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-243 SMiPLE PREPARATION AND HANDLING CF HIGHLY RADIOACTIVE GAS SAMPLES
+
1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Chemistry Samoling and Analysis Croup Leader 7; determines the method and location of sample processing storage and/or disposal as required, - and ensures that the Administrative Exposure Guidelines are not exceeded. 1.2 Health Physics Technician provides constant coverage, monitors the extremity dose during. sample handling, and monitors laboratory habitability. f 1.3 Chemistry Samplino and Analysis Group Members prepares the hot lab post-accident sample f. preparation station to accept the sample and
) performs the appropriate analysis, as required.
t' I 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE 2.1 Determination of Processing Proceduro 2.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall obtain the appropriate EP-Sample Data Sheet and select one of the following processing ! procedures based on the radiation levels of the sample. 2.1.1.1 Send the sample offsite for anal sis.per;EP-24'4, aingles. '. 1 ! t Offsire Analysis of High Act.iki
\'\\ ' . !d 2.1.1.2 Place the sample in temporgr\% {i.\ Y fdr-y ; storage 3.' future q, analysis. ..,;-.- 7
[ , 2.1.1.3 Analyze the sample on-site. ; . ., 3
'I COMPLETE SECTIO!! I OF APPENDIX EP.-243-1.c .
Q;1} .(jj .'.i!. f. 3 r-l .f Yr .x+- . :-- m e _. ~~ 2 . , -~: - - -
= . ~rm
I . L EP-243, Rev. 5 , Page 2 of 8 '
"TY/RGH/no
. l 2.1.2 The Chenistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall determine the following sample parameters based on sample dose rates and analysis requir(nents.
- 2.1.2.1 Analysis to be performed 2.1.2.2 Order of analysis 2.1.2.3 Number and magnitude of dilutions 2.1.2.4 Analysis sample volume required.
SAMPLES FOR HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN DETERMINATION BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY MUST NOT BE DILUTED. COMPLETE SECTION II OF APPENDIX EP-243-1. 2.2 Pre-Job Briefinq 2.2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader, Health Physics Technician and the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall assemble and review this procedure. 2.2.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct group members to perform the necessary steps of this procedure. SECTION 2.3 AND 2.4 SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS EARLY
, AS POSSIBLE. THE SAMPLE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION UNTIL THESE SECTIONS .
HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 2.2.3 The Health Physics Technician shall brief group members on: b 2.2.3.1 RWP requirements 2.2.3.2 Radiological concerns and precautions (ALARA) l-. 2.2.3.3 Staytimes and exposure limits 2.3 Pr'eparation of Sample Prep:1 ration Station for Gas Samples I + =- . -
a
. - ==
- EP-243, Rev. 5 Page 3 of 8
. TJY/RGH/no 2.3.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall prepare the dilution vials per
~ Appendix EP-243-1 and place the vials in the appropriate dilution vial positions in the Sample Preparation Station. Each dilution vial shall have the predetermined (EP-243-1) aliquot volume > withdrawn from it. Place lead caps over the vials (gas position) . THE LEAD CAPS MAY BE POSITIONED FOR GAS OR LIQUID i .l SAMPLES. ..FOR THE PURPOSE OF THIS PROCEDURE THEY SHALL BE IN THE GAS POSITION. 2.3.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall ensure that the necessary gas . micro syringes (with needles), sample handling tongs and sample analysis containers are in place and available to fulfill dilution and analysis requirements per Appendix EP-243-1. IF THE NEEDLE AND THE SYRINGES ARE NOT CONNECTED TIGHTLY THEY MAY SEPARATE WHEN WITHDRAWING FROM 3 THE SAMPLE VIAL. .. ) 2.3.3 The Chemiscry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall ensure that at least one pair of plastic gloves and two plastic sample bags are available for each gamma analysis to be performed. 2.4 Preparation of Analysis Instrumentation 2.4.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group . Member (s) shall ensure that the appropriate [ analysis procedures specified in Appendix EP-243-1 are available and have been performed to the point a that each analysis instrumen't is ready to accept the sample for analysis. l THE FOLLOWING STEPS ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) AND REQUIRE CONSTANT HEALTH PHYSICS MONITORING. LEAD BRICKS IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION HAVE
, BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT THE SAMPLE. THE LEAD BRICK LABELED " SAMPLE VIAL A" HAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT A GAS OR LIQUID SAMPLE FROM THE PASS!
2.5 Transport of Sample from Transport Cask to Sample Preparation Station 2.5.1 Remove the lead cap from the lead brick to accept the sample.
, _e W_ gse e-g= *g-+=g***=q ,eg*- e ,ge + ey =,eone e -+g ._y, w -w w9 +--.ws--y +_
e-, g., .,>=**,e-en =. -i.=m===O - * -
7 . EP-243, Rev. 5 Page 4 of 8 TJY/RGH/no l 2.5.2 Position the sample transport cask as close to the ' l r Sample Preparation Station as possible. ) 2.5.3 As quickly and carefully as is possible, remove the sample from the transport cask and place it in the lead brick. 2.5.4 Quickly place the lead cap over the sample in the
- " gas position".
2.5.5 Retreat from the Sample Preparation Station and allow the Health Physics Technician to take dose rate readings. THE HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN SHALL INFORM THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBERS OF THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION DOSE RATES AND STAY-TIME. 2.6 ' Sample Dilutions (If dilutions are not to be i performed cr if analysis are to be performed prior
]; to dilution, proceed to 3.1.2). -
DILUTIONS TO BE MADE ARE PRESCRIBED IN APPENDIX EP-243-1. ALL ACCESSORIES USED IN THE DILUTION , PROCESS SHALL BE MAINTAINED BEHIND THE LEAD SHIELD WALL ONCE THEY HAVE BEEN CONTAMINATED. ENSURE THAT THE SYRINGES AND NEEDLE ARE CONNECTED TIGHTLY OR THEY MAY SEPARATE WHEN WITHDRAWING FROM THE SAMPLE VIAL. 2.6.1 Insert the syringe through the sample access hole , in the lead cap, then through the sample vial septum and into the sample to be diluted. 2.6.2 Mix the gas in the sample vial by pumping the syringe in and out. 2.6.3 Set tha syringe to the volume of sample to be transferred per Appendix EP-243-1. 2.6.4 Withdraw the syringe form the sample and insert it in the predescribed method into the next sequential dilution vial to accept the sample. Inject the aliquot into the dilution vial. 2.6.5 Mix the gas in the sample vial by pumping the syringe in and out. u , 2.6.6 Withdraw the syringe from the . sample. Separate i the needic and the syringe and discard them in the shielded wasta container.
- m. -= ---__
s* j EP-243, Rav. 5 l Page 5 of 8 ! L TJY/RGH/no
)
2.6.7 If further dilutions are necessery (per Appendix EP-243-1) repeat steps 2.6.1 through 2.6.6, always. beginning with the last dilution vial to accept.a sample aliquot. [ - i
*2.6.8 When the desired dilution is reached, the Health Phys'ics Tschnician shall determine the dose rate of the dilution sample.
t f" 2.6.9 If the dilution sample dose rate is unacceptable repeat steps 2.6.1 through 2.6.6 until the dose rate is acceptable. Indicate additional c ilutions on Appendix EP-241-1. 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP 3.1 Sample Analysis i 3.1.1 Perform gamma isotopic analysis if directed by i l Appendix EP-243-1. Proceed to step 3.2. 3.1.2 Perform oxygen and hydrogen analysis if directed by Appendix EP-243-1. Proceed back to step 2.6.1 if dilutions are necessary for gamma isotopic analysis per Appendix EP-243-1. i 3.2 Disposal of Samples and contaminated Materials
)
3.2.1 The remaining samples shall be disposed of in the chielded waste container. The sample handling , i tongs shall be used in the transfer. The samples should be kept behind the lead shield wall as much as is possible. 3.2.2 Transfer and disposal of the shielded waste container will be at the discretion of the Health Physics Technician and .the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. I i 4.0 APPENDICES 4.1 EP-243-1 Data Sheet 5-f,
- , _ ~ . -
.y.~,_ .
. ~. .
A EP-243, Ror 5 Page 6 c; 8 TJY/8GE/no 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for sample preparation and handling of , highly r,adioactive gas samples following accident conditions. 1 - 5. 2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when preparing or handling highly radioactive gas sample during an emergency situation. 5.2.2 In all steps of this procedure keep exposures ALARA. IF THE NEEDLE AND THE SYRINGES ARE NOT CONNECTED TIGHTLY THEY MAY SEPARATE WHEN WITHDRAWING FROM THE SAMPLE VIAL. 5.2.3 ventilation in the sample preparation hood is operating. 5.3 Special Equipment, 5.3.1 Gas sample vials 5.3.2 Appropriate gas syringes 5.3.3 Rubber gloves 5.3.4 Plastic sample bags . 5.3.5 Sample handling' tongs 5.3.6 Eye protection 5.4 References i 5.4.1 CH-905 Determination of Gamma Isotopic ! Activity During Post Accident Conditions 5.4.2 CH-902 Determination of Hydrogen and Oxygen Using a Gas Chromatograph During Post Accident Conditions
- q. 5.4.3 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team p Activation wes= Irw- a, e gm 3 e,-+pe,7s;m.* M-* ,.
m . = g ,'= ; f'; } 4;.~.***--- ,* * * - * * *~- * , "*'.7"_ _ ^ ,- *'*f f 7 1. ,4 7 ' * ;"_ ',
=- __
1.3 1 . 1
? '
EP-243, Rev. 5 { Pge 7 of 8 - TJY/RGII/no - tj APPENDIX EP-243-1 1 j- DATA SHEET t I. Sample Source Grab Sample Point j Initial Sample Volume Initial Contact Dose Rate 1 i Sample Date/ Time / l
- j. Processing Procedures (X)
(*) A. Sent of fsite for analyses ( ) l (* ) (** ) B. Placed in temporary storage ( ) i C. Analyzed on-site ( ) l (*) If this method is used, sign and date this data j - sheet and terminate this procedure. 1
, (**) The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall determine the place of storage.
l j II. , 4
*** Total Analysis Acceptable } Order of Procedure Aliquot Magnitude of Dilution Sample Analysis Analysis Analysis Number Size Dilutions Factor Volume Dose Rate 4
1
, _ I _ L_ I _
2 l _l_l_i_ 3
, __I_I_I_
i 4 l _I_I_I_ l) j e
- - - -- . -- - - ~ ~ - -
--- n-. . ._
EP-243, Rav. 5 J , Page 8 of 8 -
;i TJY/RGH/no I
i APPENDIX EP-243-1 DATA SHEET (CONT' D) (***) Due to the complexity of the dilution and analysis process it is recommended that the same magnitude of dilution be used for all of the analyses. To calculate ' the magnitude of dilution use the following tables: l (*****) Recommended sample volumes: GC - 100 micro liters l Aliquot Size 1st dilution 2nd dilution 3rd dilution 4th dilution , i '! I al 14.4 207 2.99 P3 4.30 P4 s j .1 al 144 ?.07 P4 2.99 P6 4.30 P8 Total Dilution Factor = Vs X Magnitude of Dilution , !
, 14.4 (This cecrection factor is to be l
used for activity determinations and is not to be used for hydrogen and oxygen analyses.) - 'j ,
, vs = Volume of original sample (from the appropriate EP Sample Data Sheet) f I
j / Signature Date Time i
. y' f I I
i I s i . .
.- . ; _ . .m _ _ .a. .am a.m_ .
3843116810 EP-244 Rev. 1 [ Page 1 of 3 i /jmv
/
1 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY. PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-244 OFFSITE ANALYSIS OF HIGH ACTIVITY SAMPLES l 1.0, PARTICIPANTS
- 1.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall contact the (Interim) Emergency Director and request off-site sample analysis as required.
1.2 Emergency Director shall determine the need to ship a sample off-site for analysis and request the Site Emergency Coordinator arrange transportation for the sample. 1.3 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall arrange for task loading at tha site. l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 2.1.1 Contact the Emergency Director and request off-site sample' analysis as required. - l 2.2 Emergency Director shall: 2.2.1 Determine that the need to ship a sample off-site for analysis is valid based on the limitations of the on-site analytical capabilities for hot samples or any } ' need to determine core conditions by off-site analysis or both. 2.2.2 Contact the Site Emergency Coor.dinator and request transportation of the sample for offsite.analysisrand an estimated task arrival time w reavDilab'le. ( l .,l
; m QJ e". * *, O * ,
ila % . _. 1
.i
'!L .;
1g
- u. '. - . -
g
.. . .~~ .. -.. - . . .. . .- .. . u. .- - w -.
EP-244 Rev. 1 . Page 2 of 3 l VAW/JMU/jmv i l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: 3.1.1 Assign an individual to load the cask in accordance with all applicable Limerick radwaste shipping procedures including HP-713. UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED, THE CASK WILL BE SHIPPED TO THE BABCOCK AND WILCOX RESEARCH CENTER IN LYNCHBURG, VIRGINI A OR PBAPS. l 4.0 APPENDICES l 4.1 EP-244 Off-site Post Accident Sampling Analysis.
.ij i l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to coordinate the . shipment of high activity samples to off-site laboratories for analysis.
i l 5.2 Criteria For Use 5.2.1 Samples must be sent to specially equipped off-site . laboratories when 1) the activity is judged to be too great for the on-site facilities; and 2) when there is
- a need to determine the condition of the core by off-L site analysis; or 3) on site facilities are not
- available. The samples will be sent as directed by L l the Emergency Director.
L l 5.3 Special Equipment i I l None l u
~
. . _ , _ _ _ , , , __ _ _ _ . , _ - t ,- --e -.... r - - - . - * - - -r.i
. -- : ._ ; = . - -
EP-244 Rev. 1 i Page 3 of 3
! VAW/JMU/jmv l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 HP-713 l l 5.4.2 EP-272 l 5.4.3 EP-284 l 5.4.4 EP-120 - Site Emergency Coordinator i :
5.4.5 Babcock and Wilcox - Project Technical Plan for Post l Accident Sample Analysis Program 1 . U, 4I N 3 If e
+
9 i a l.._._.. . - .. . _. _ _.--. , _ . ,._,,,_,,.--,; - - - ,,-----ny-w _ n. 7 :__
4*iw.- w.k u w.w - .a k a.e.e w h is w -. = m:n.i.es:. <..,,x 2:..e\.u M a. 1, - 3843116820 EP-250, REv. 2 Page 1 of 4 RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs j PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
, fgz [
- EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-250 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM 1.0 PLRTICIPANTS 1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall direct and coordinate the team's activities.
2.0 ACTIONS IMMEDIATE 2.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall:
.; 2.1.1 Contact the Emergency Director and discuss any j radiological considerations.
!' 2.1.2 Prioritize assignment of available personnel from 4
. the Operations support Center (OSC) to the required l Personnel Safety Team Groups to carry out the following procedures, as necessary:
EP-251 Plant Survey Group EP-252 Search and Rescue /First Aid EP-254 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group l EP-255 Vehicle Decontamination L l CAUTION: i PLANNED RADIATION EXPOSURES SHOULD BE l LIMITED TO THE ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE LEVELS IN APPENDIX EP-250-1 EMERGENCY l EXPOSURE GUIDELINES. - f'SIj, ., l d M V \~* t i PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM ACTIVIT' fits SHOULD- BELGIVEN TO l' THE ASSESSMENT OF INPLAlfT RADIOLOGICAL
- CONDITIONS
! AND SUPPORT OF EMERGENCY ENTRIES UNTIL SUCH TIME AS [j THE TSC BAS BEEN A A,ED.* T * ,, @,M N f\.k ,'- E'; ", $ ,,, a e - ,e 2.1.3 Direct the group leaders to report"the st'atus'G l'lj and results of group activities y.ia ' rad 4p's, '*' telephone or plant page a v etQun V ' b 1 1
- , , - . . . . , . , ..a...-. ..--.a .. -. . . - - - : => --
~ .a '
wa~ = - -: w. .x ;:- ..w ea ak.u.LT
- l EP-250, REV. 2 Pcga.2 of 4 RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs .;
l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: L l 3.1.1 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader in the i OSC and assess existing in-plant radiological conditions. l 3.1.2 Based upon this assessment consider the need for implementation of protective actions for f" emergency workers including the need for potassium iodide (KI) in accordance with EP-313, Distribution of Thyroid Blocking Tablets. l 3.1.3 Ensure Personnel . Safety Team members are available at assembly areas (OSC on 269, Ele i. Turbine Enclosure or designated evacuation assembly area). Use EP-277 Personnel Safety Team Phone List to call additional personnel, if necessary. l 3.1.4 Assign additional team members to functional
.. ) groups as necessary.
4 l 3.1.5 Activate the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection Group.in accordance with EP-253, if technical health physics support is needed. l 3.1.6 Designate group -leaders for the functional groups formed. l 3.1.7 Maintain communications via any available means with the groups after they have been sent to - perform their assigned tasks. l 4.0 APPENDICES l 4.1 EP-250-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions required to activate and assemble the Personnel Safety Team.
+
fl 9 'f-',wN- e p,g,e h d
. ,g __
w
~'
EP-250, REV. 2 Taga 3 of 4
-RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs t , l S.2 Criteria for Use p l 5.2.1 This procadure shall be implemented when the i ~ Emergency Director directs the Personne,1 Safety Team to be actaivated.
l .5. 3 Special Equipment b None l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan , l 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. l 5.4.3 EP-251 Plant Survey' Group l 5.4.4 EP-252 Search and Rescue /First Aid l 5.4.5 EP-254 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group l .5.4.6 EP-255 Vehicle Decontamination l 5.4.7 EP-277 Personnel Safety Team Phone Lisi l 5.4.8 EP-253 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection Group
~l 5.4.9 EP-313 Distribution of Thyroid Blocking Tablets 1
l I L l l t _. = = - . ~ - , - - - - - - . - - . - , - = _.-
-wa a -
..w . x. ... . -.. u .a.:..a a. w a :w - - - -
7(_ -
- EP-250, REV. 2 t Pega 4 of 4 f
9 RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-250-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines [ t, . fn . Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized
? Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and j .
Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
Director 2.' Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an j Emergency , 25 rem
- 125 rem Emergency **
t Director i .
- 3. Prote ion of Health .
and sty of the Public 5 ren 25 rem Emergency ** Director i't
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director i
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station l Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide' trative lines Guide-lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis t .
e t l
&+;= = = ._ m meer =: - = = - =* -
p_ .mu _. . :f,=. , ~. .= .. 2c. -s m._;..:.c. s.------ -. .. . - .~ hs21-- a w j . ._ __ _ 3843116830 EP-251 REY. 2 Page 1 of 5 RWD/VAV mia PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
/@/h LIMERICK GENERATING STATION l- EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-251 PLANT SURVEY GROUP 1
l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Plant Survey Group Leader shall direct the Plant Survey Squads. , 1.2 Plant Survey Squads shall conduct surveys and provide health physics coverage. , l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Plant Survey Group leader shall: , l 2.1.1 Report to the Operations Support Center (OSC) . , 2.1.2 Report to the OSC Coordinator and inform him of the proposed course of action. Determine if any entries
- I to affected areas are planned.
2.1.3 Establish communication with the Personnel Safety Team Leader and discuss plant radiological conditions, actual and projected. 2.1.4 Dispatch a HP Technician to the ARM panel in the Auxiliary Equipment room and direct him to establish an open telephcae line with the OSC and TSC and provide ARM readings. 2.1.5 Assign an individual to ma ph$~)t[o{f.,h e 3 i " [auxil'iary l') equipment room and read art-
\ ,
in j g { gs;: gg\, y,,..b." 2.1.6 Determine the type (s) of divey information'needed, the type (s) of surveys to be conducted, andlspecify the instrumentation to be used. 9 ' u.'~., '3 _ .
*. , .. p 2.1.7 Assign a Health Physics Technician ,to. accompany eachj
4 team entering the affected area.' l..', 4 '! '., i p u *
;;,y,G
. . .u c. .. _ .m.m. .
- _ . . . . . - - . .m .
p_- -- 2._ u w.;m, ._ .a m. ca m h. a y w . a. { , . .. . fy - EP-251 REV. 2 Page 2 of 5
) ,; RWD/VAV/ MPG /mla .
l P, 2.1.8 If survey information is necessary, form a Plant Survey Squad composed of at least two Health Physics g Technicians. l 2.1.9 Prepare ERWP per EP-401 and brief the technician / team. ( 2.1.10 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-251-1, j Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 2.1.11 Unless specific needs dictate, in-plant radiation surveys should be conducted in conjunction with er:tries performed for other purposes. ARM readings should be used in lieu of pre-entry surveys whenever I'. ) possible. 2.1.12 Until it is proven otherwise, airborne radioactive i materials are presumed to be present in all affected L l areas of the plant. f ; l 2.2 Plant Survey Squad Members shall: 2.2.1 Check that all squad members are properly clothed and 1}f equipped with appropriate dosimetry and respiratory protection per the Emergency Radiation Work Permit g ) (ERWP) contained in EP-401. u l ' 2.1.2 Question that all squad members know where they are l going, how to get there, and what they are expected to
- l do.
Check that at least one squad member is equipped with 2.2.3 an operating,. calibrated lapel air sampler. i 2.2.4 Check that the squad is equipped with any needed tools or equipment, e.g., shielded container for samples, ] reach rods, etc. . 'l 2.2.5 Check that the maximum allowable exposures are known l and understood by the team members. I 2.2.6 Obtain the survey instruments specified by the Plant Survey Group Leader and check that they are calibrated and operable. L 2.2.7 Estimate exposure accumulation for the job including transit time to and from the work area. DO NOT PROCEED IF ENTRY PLUS EXIT EXPOSURES WOULD EXCEED THE ALLOWABLE EXPOSURE. CONTACT THE PLANT l SURVEY GROUP LEADER FOR INSTRUCTIONS. e
> ~ . , , ,
.. - - . - -~~.-. u . i L.u - ~>:~ - .w + = -u :<--w w n- -
i! w EP-251 REV. 2 / - Page 3 of 5 d.,- ) RWD/VAV/ MPG /mla I l 2.2.8 Make entry and perform continuous dose rate surveys. IF RADIATION LEVELS EXCEED THE RANGE OF THE SURVEY z INSTRUMENT, DO NOT PROCEED. 0 j 2.2.9 Upon arrival at the area of interest, conduct rapid 5 surveys and exposure estimates. Based on estimated { l exposures determine a maximum stay time.
! 2.2.10 Continue to monitor area radiation dose rates during r the conduct of activities with particular interest -in operations that could result in changed conditions, e.g., sample collection.
a l 3.0 . ACTIONS FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Plant Survey Squad members shall, after completing the entries into affected areas: 4 3.1.1 Record the results of all surveys on a Survey Da'ta Sheet. l 3.1.2 Record exposures received by team members. l 3.1.3 Record all observations and conditions. 3.1.4 Report survey results and personnel exposures to the
- Plant Survey Group Leader.
3.1.5 Collect and turn in team dosimetry for processing if -
, directed by the Plant Survey Group Leader.
l 3.1.6 Analyze air sample media in accordance with HP-214. 3.1.7 Provide copies of all survey records to the Plant Survey Group Leader. T l 3.2 Plant Survey Group Leader shall: 3.2.1 Report radiological and personnel exposure status to the Personnel Safety Team Leader. 3.2.2 Provide the plant survey squads and OSC Coordinator with status updates as to changes in plant conditions. 3.2 4 Direct the plant survey squads to other locations as necessary.
= . . .
- a a ... _ w r..-ua - a ~ -.a :.-~. -. .....n. .~ -
i - . . . . . - ... -- . . . - - . , EP-251 REV. 2
. Page 4 of 5 8
RRD/VAV/ MPG /mla 3.2.4 Inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of the need for additional personnel, if necessary. i i i l 4.0 APPENDICES , l 4.1 EP-251-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines ( [ l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION [ l 5.1 Purpose i b The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions of the Plant Survey Group. l 5.2 Critegia For Use
- l 5.2.1 Entry is authorized by the Emergency Director.
5.2.2 Personnel Safety Team Leader directs a specific survey 1 or health physics activity to be performed. !' 5.3 Special Eculament l l Plant Survey Kit l l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of h Radiological Emergency Response Plans in Support of [ Nuclear Power Plants. l l 5.4.3 HP-214 Air Sample Analysis and Evaluation. l 5.4.4 EP-401 Entry for Emergency Repair and Operations. l 5.4.5 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies. l .
.} . ' WA_; 2. - u s -- : ~
.a - _ _,=%; -: .. , .w . x _m._c._;.L 1 m _.c . ._.
e lh i EP-251 REV. 2 i Page 5 of 5
$; RWD/VAV/ MPG /mla APPENDIX EP 251-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines k
lh il r Projected l Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose BJ l 1. Life Saving and Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem Emergency **
l Director
- 4. Other Emergency ^ 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency
.,h Activities limits limits Director a ; i : 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station y Activities Administra- Administra-
, tive Guide- tive Guide-1, .
lines lines N/A
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1 .
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis 4
} . i l 1
3 . _,_
- - l l - -o 3843116840 )
! EP-252 Rev. 3 Page 1 of 11 l
VAW/ MPG /rgs V PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY /d// LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-252 SEARCH AND RESCUE /FIRST AID GROUP ! l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall control the Search and Rescue /First Aid Group's exposure and provide offsite medical support, as necessary. l.2 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader shall direct operations of the group. 1.3 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group members shall perform rencue operations and administer First Aid. l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: [ 2.1.1 Contact the Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader at the Operations Support Center (OSC) and direct him to form Search and Rescue /First Aid L Groups. [ _a C ,ft q PERSONNEL SH $ SEARCH AND-RESCUE OPERATIONS LUNTARY, BASIS. 2.1.2 Inform the Emergency Dire t #earch and Rescue /First Aid Groups hagre en ibemed and of' their intentions to enter en i lant fog set h and i rescue operations. ( ' AmMPTTotecATE
, R &, h e m m NG
{ PLANT PAGING SYSTE,M , . PRIOR TO ACTUALLY
~ , '
,y _ _. . __._w .m A ..~ - . a - l . . i l l .) EP-252 Rev. 3 Page 2 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs 2.1.3 Obtain exposure limits from the Emergency Director. If later search and rescue operations are necessary, the Emergency Director may adjust the radiation exposure limits accordingly. 4 :. CAUTION IF WAITING FOR EMERGENCY DIRECIOR APPROVAL COULD ENDANGER PERSONNEL, THE SEARCH AND RESCUE /FIRST AID GROUP LEADER MAY DECIDE TO REMOVE INJURED PERSON. CAUTION
' PLANNED RADIATION EXPOSURES SHOULD BE LIMITED TO THE ADMINISTRATIVE CJIDE LEVELS IN APPENDIX l
EP-252-1, EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINE 3. 2.1.4 If offsite medical help is necessary, have the ambulance, hospital or physician contacted by using Appendix EP-252-4, Medical Support Groups Phone List. Always state the number of individuals involved, type of injury and if contamination is j involved. - 2.1.4.1 Contact Pottstown Memorial Medica *. Center and Goodwill ambulance as.first choice. . l 2.1.4.2 .If Goodwill is not available contact Trappe ambulance. I ! 2.1.4.3 If evacuation of the EPZ has been declared, contact RMC to arrange for helicopter and Hospital of I University of Pennsylvania use. 2.1.4.4 If medical support is required on site contact one p I of the local physicians. i . ! 2.1.5 Notify security so that the offsite medical i response group's access to the Restricted Area can be expedited, if necessary. 2.1.6 Recall the Search and Rescue /First Aid Groups when search and rescue operations are n'o longer i
! necessary.
V
=j -_. _ -__ .-
, _. n . -. s-.~- 9.~ . w- - = - - - - - - =-- a- - m " - -
e
'l EP-252 Rev. 3 Page 3 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs f
I l 2.2 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader shall: i i ; O 2.2.1 Select volunteers from available personnel to form Search and Rescue /First Aid Groups. r EACH GROUP SHALL CONSIST OF AT LEAST THREE MEMBERS; 1 TWO MUST BE QUALIFIED IN FIRST AID AND ONE MUST BE A HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN. 2.2.2 Ensure that each member has the necessary l respiratory equipment, radsurvey equipment, anti-contamination clothing, and personnel dosimetry if
- time permits. This material can be obtained from emergency survey kits at the OSC or from normal HP stocks.
( 2.2.3 Discuss the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader. The following information should be i obtained prior to performing search and rescue 9 operations: g l A. Number of missing persons. l B. Name of individuals. l C. Last known location of individuals. l D. - The job being worked. E. Any significant plant conditions that may 4 affect the search and any special instructions. .
, 2.2.4 Ensure the group is equipped with a first aid kit, stretcher and blanket, or can get them enroute.
See attached Appendix EP-252-2 for listing of first aid equipment location in the plant. 2.2.5 Coordinate Search and Rescue /First Aid Groups to minimi=e duplication of effort and unnecessary radiation exposure. 2.2.6 Direct the groups to the' last known location of the missing individual. If necessary, expand the search to adjacent areas. Ensure most expeditious r I routes available are taken to minimize team exposure. 2.2.7 Inform the Personnel Safety Team Leader of the actions of the group (s) and whenever the group locates any missing personnel, and the identity of located personnel.
-~1 - w .
m - . _ _ _- ._c_..._w _. ... _ _ ~ - - - m--~ aa -' .
.l, EP-252 Rev. 3 Page 4 of 11
^VAW/ MPG /rgs
, 2.2.8 Have the squad leader determine the extent of the injury and direct administration of first aid. '
m 2.2.9 Report to the Personnel Safety Team Leader the extent of the individual's injuries and recommend supplementary medical actions as necessary (i.e., hospitalization). Complete Appendix EP-252-3 (if possible) and attach to injured person prior to l transporting in ambulance. I 2.2.10 Report to the Phrsonnel Safety Team Leader when the Search and ' Rescue /First Aid Group has finished its task. l 2.3 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Members shall: l~ 2.3.1 ' Locate the missing person (s) . ~ l 2.3.2 Administer first aid, if necessary. IF THE INJURY IS SEVERE, IMMEDIATE MEDICAL TREATMENT IS OF THE HIGHET PRIORITY AND RADIOLOGICAL CONTROLS ARE SECONDARY. 2.3.3 Perform a radiation and contamination survey of the person and subsequently the area. CAUTION RADIATION EXPOSURE AND GROUP MEMBER CONTAMINA-TION SHOULD BE MINIMIZED AS MUCH AS PRACTICAL.I CAUTION
.. IF GROSS EXTERNAL CONTAMINATION IS FOUND, INTERNAL CONTAMINATION SHOULD BE SUSPECTED.
2.3.4 Transport the injured person to a site first aid facility if practicable. 2.3.5 Perform the following if the injured person is contaminated. A. Wear necessary anti-contamination clothing if practicable. B. IF INJURY IS NOT SEVERE, DECONTAMINATION SHALL
- BE ATTEMPTED.
% f s , - ' t 1 -s e, -s+ ewr ,--ar,-w--w4-+ - - , - ww,- - . ..ww w.. - - - , - ~ - - w, , - - - --
w .:. - - - - . . - - - - .. ..- - - - . . = -
---c=~~ a -~- 4 l EP-252 Rev. 3 Page 5 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs C. Prepare the person for transportation by I covering the contaminated area with a
- protective wrap. Avoid excessive wrapping j
to ' prevent dehydration of the person. ^ i IF THE' INJURED PERSON IS GOING TO BE TRANSPORTED TO AN OFFSITE MEDICAL FACILITY, IT MAY NOT BE FEASIBLE TO BRING THE PERSON TO THE FIRST AID FACILITY. INSTEAD, MOVE THE PERSON TO A SAFE PLACE WHICH IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE FOR
) -
THE TRANSFER TO A VEHICLE. D. When trahsporting the victim to an offsite medical facility, a Health Physics Technician shall accompany the victim to assist the medical staff. E. A second HP technician shall also report to the hospital. 2.3.6 Recover any contaminated articles of clothing that ? may have been removed from the person for isotopic analysis. l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP-l 3.1 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group members shall: l- 3.1.1 Report results of their actions to the Personnel p Safety Team Leader. 3.1.2 Follow normal decontamination and disposal procedures when their tasks are complete. l 3.2 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: 3.2.1 verify the victim's arrival at the medical facilities. 3.2.2 Inform the Emergency Director of results of search and rescue /first aid efforts. 3.2.3 Direct the Emergency Director to inform the Emergency Medical Director and Communications Coordinator as to the identity and condition of the victim (.s) . _ _ _ . = _ __
._vw_ .
. . i.i __.. _..-__i..-
. ~ . _ . . - ._. . . - - ..~.
._ - awi-- .
l
\
l l EP-252 Rev. 3 : Page 6 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs 3.2.4 Direct a Health Physics Techn'ician to accompanying
' the victim to the hospital and to call when informed by the hospital that his services are no l longer needed. Direct the technician to return
~, dosimetry to site to be read and leave survey i equipment at hospital. [ 3.2.5 Arrange for inventory and restocking of first aid kits, if necessary.
, l-4.0 APPENDICES l 4.1 EP-252-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines l 4.2 EP-252-2 First Aid Equipment Locations l 4.3 EP-252-3 Injured Personnel Report Form l 4.4 EP-252-4 Medical Support Group Phone List l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Puroose The purpose of this procedure is to define the -
. requirements and the actions of the Search and j Rescue /First Aid Group.
l 5.2 Criteria for-Use This procedure shall be implemented whenever personnel are known to be missing or are injured. l 5.3 Special Equipment l 5.3.1 First Aid Kit l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 5.4.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological. Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness In I Support of Nuclear Power Plants.
_..:- .-. . . -=. -. - - . . . . . .- a - . .w. . um ,; u= l EP-252-1 Rev. 3 l Page 7 of 11 i VAW/ MPG /rgs l APPENDIX EP-252-1 l EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES Projected ? Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and l Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
t Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an L l Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Emergency **
Director 'i
- 3. Protection-Of Health l and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem Emergency **
Director l 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Administra- Adminis-Activities tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A ,
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis 4
_ _ . . .. . . = .-:..~~.. .. a .: : -a - - L i- . . "-u"- '" - l EP-252-2 Rev. 3 L,, Page 8 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs l APPENDIX EP-252-2
- l. 'FIRST AID EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS First Aid
. . . Kits Blankets Stretchers l Unit 1 Reactor Enclosure l 177' Corridor 111 near Core Spray X X X J
l 201' Outside Elevator X X .[ ] 201' Inside Airlock X X l 217' Near Equip Airlock X X l 253' By Elevator X X
'X l '253' By Personnel Airlock X X X e
1 283' Corridor near Elevator (506) X X 283' Near Fuel Pool Cooling room (511) X X l 313' By Elevator X X X [ l 313 ' Airlock to Fan Room (607) X X . l 373' Laydown Area (602) X X l 331' By Stairs X X ( l 352' Change Area X X X L l Unit 1 Turbine Enclosure ! l 200' Near Room 261 X X l 200' Corridor 277 X , X 217' 325A Corridor-aux Equip & Piping X X
-l 302' Equip Exhaust filter (621) .
o l r
.s. _+
. .- . . ~ -- . - = ,
- ' a: t u
>.a..ZT 3
7W . l EP-252-2 Rev. 3 Page 9 of 11 g VAW/ MPG /rgs
-l APPENDIX EP-252-2 ,
l FIRST AID EQUIP!GNT LOCATIONS First Aid c Kits Blankets Stretchers l Control Enclosure l 200' Elevator Area X X l 217' Switchgear Area ' X X l 217' Stairwell . X X X l 239' Stairwell
- X X X
! l 253' Stairwell X X . l.. l 269' Control Room X X X I Control Enclosure l 331' Stairwell -
X X X l Radwaste Enclosure l l 217' Cony. Chem Lab X X . p l 217' Radwaste Control Room X X - Il it '4 il ~, G
- e t tt
( i l
- 1 w -
- - ~ '
..~.~.~..a
. .--,=~.--w--+--.-- = m u a a." -
" ":a " 2~~'=:*:-"~ a" l EP-252-3, Rev. 3 Page 10 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs t
i APPENDIX EP 252-3 INJURED PERSONNEL REPORT FORM los (PREPARE IN DUPLICATE) L Injured Person's Name hl-lc Age-Badge No. Or Social Security No. Male Female . Type and Location of Injury Radioactive Contamination Yes No Level Location Radiation Exposure Estimate Where Did Injury Occur 1 Prepared by First Aid Group Leader SIGNATURE Group Members If practicable forward original, with the person, to the site first aid facility or hospital as appropriate. i i _;- - - - _ _ _w
.n. N- =N- -
W * -^
--. w - - ~ - - .;-.:. a - -
_ . - - -w a. ... - a l EP-252-4 Rev. 3 Page 11 of 11 VAW/ MPG /rgs l l APPENDIX EP-252-4 I MEDICAL SUPPORT GROUP PHONE LIST l
' Local T*ysicians
[ Office Home e/ Dr. Charles W. Delp l q Dr. Arthur Mann j Pc dstown Memorial Medical Center (Contaminated or othe ise) i 1600 E. High St. jottstown , PA 19464 d k* - li' Radiation Manacement Corporation (Serious Contamination /or Exposure
- multiple contaminated personnel)
Dr. Roger E. Linneman Preferred Alternate
, V Ambolance .
t j ( Gcodwill Ambulance Co. h j Trappe Ambulance Co. i f : !
- Serious Contamination / Exposure is:
l Whole Body Exposure greater than 25 REM or skin exposure i greater than 150 REM or extremity exposure greater than 375
' REM or contamination causing body contacted reading of greater than 1 MR/HR or suspected or actual inhalation or ingestion of measurable quantities of radioactive material.
i
* ~
n ,- w: ,v - - *-
- . _ . ~ .~ .
- u. . . + , c= . .+ - ~ ~- -
)
f, - l i { 3843116850 EP-253, RIv. O
- ' Page 1 of 4 FJ mc ' / PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
[ - LIMERICK GENERATING STATION g EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE t
) '
4 EP-253 PERSONNEL DOSIMETRY, BIOASSAY, AND RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
- GROUP 1
i l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group Leader is responsible for 1 coordinating the provision of technical and Health i Physics support. [ l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Personnel Dosimetry, Bicassay, and Respiratory Protection Group Leader shall: l 2.1.1 Report to the TSC and discuss the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader. l 2.1.2 Station personn'el to support plant needs and brief group members on the e'xpected short and long term needs and priorities. l 2.1.3 Direct the group to accomplish necessary tasks including, but not limited to those specified in . the following functional areas. ] l 2.1.3.1 Emergency Dosimetry Issuance , l A. Establish communications with ith group members as assigned Q Office, y Whole Body Count Roon k l B. Direct the group me ecur personnel to performthefollowi@ iks y.
- l. (1) Inventory and inspect th ency t each location. 4 l (2) Issue dosimetry to emer and off-site emerge s
) e personnel rsonnel (i.e. ambulance er re-fighting crews, etc.) in accordance h Health Physics peccedures (HP-610).
d
**= % ^3 ac:. ._ ._fw - - e_= w - , _ = -- - - - - -
_ _ _ . _ m _s.. m -,1. m ;.a._ _ m u ma m .; w u . m ..aau t
- EP-253, RGv. 0 Page 2 of 4 FJM/JFS/mc I
! l (3) Maintain a list of the personnel to whom dosimetric devices are distributed in accordance with Health Physics procedures. l 2.1.3.2 Personnel Bioassay l A. Verify the Wholabody Counter background is acceptable to perform personnel whole body counts. Report to the Group Leader on the status of the Wholabody Counter. l B. If the Wholebody Counter is unavailable, obtain additional bioassay sample containers from storage. Report to the Group Leader whether adequate bioassay sample containers are on hand. l C. Perform Wholabody counts or collect bioassay samples from those individuals identified by the Personnel Safety Team Group Leader or Plant Survey Group Leader. l D. Have all personnel reporting to the Whole Body Count Room perform a thorough frisk prior to entry. If contamination greater than or equal to 100 cpm above background is found, have the person report to the Personnel Decon Area in the TSC and notify the Group Leader. l 2.1.3.3 Respiratory Protection l A. Determine the current demand (usage) levels of respiratory protection equipment by the various l emergency teams (i.e. personnel safety team, fire - and damage team, etc.) as well as near term anticipated needs. l E. Determine current stock levels and locations of the equipment on hand, especially SCBA's. l C. Coordinate the recycling of equipment so far as, possible based on cleaning, decontamination, inspection, and repair capabilities available on-site. l D. Arrange for the necessary qualified personnel to man the high pressure air compressor for recharging SCBA cylinders as well as monitoring the ambient air to ensure that it is acceptable for cylinder recharging (i.e. airborne gaseous and particulate radioactivity is less than 0.25 MPC). Y*W , 8
~7_ i
_s
.A .i 1 1 '_ _ . _ _
,m_~._. m _ . m __ _,.. m .c. ~ w . a. . .. . . _w-; ... - a m . m4 a_.A, = >
J EP-253, R3v. 0
$ . Pago 3 of 4 ) FJM/JFS/mc ?
[ l E. Coordinate and arrange for off-site support I concerning cleaning, restocking, cylinder y recharging, etc. t f . l F. Coordinate and arrange for quantitative fit
- testing, if required.
L h g l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOWUP y l . 3 .1 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory y Protection Group shall: j* . 4 l 3.1.1 For Emergencj Dosimetry Issuance )
! l 3.1.1.1 Establish a dosimetric device collection point for ) on-site Emergency Response Team members leaving the Restricted Area.
I F 3.1.1.2 Arrange to have dosimetric devices processed in j accordance with Health Physics Procedures (EP-611). h l 3.1.2 For Personnel Bioassay r f l 3.1.2.1 Initiate an exposure evaluation in accordance with ( HP-619. 1
' l 3.1.2.2 Transport the bioassay samples to the offsite laboratory for analysis.
l 3.1.3 For Respiratory Protection
~
l l 3.1.3.1 Recover respiratory equipment and process for re-
- use in accordance with Health Physics Procedures.(EP-514, HP-515) e l 4.0 APPENDICES e i mone.
I I f b I I L
$- 3;,._w . &- m *
-. . ,--. x . x w ..:- - .. - w - a n . a - a-- w ' = -
a~= c f_ - [f[ EP-253, R0v. 0 Page 4 of 4 FJM/JFS/mc f q . l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 1 i l 5.1 Purpose 1 j . The purpose of this procedure is to provide > guidelines for the actions of the Personnel l Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection i Gssup. 'l l 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 The Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection Group shall be activated during an emergency by.the Personnel Safety Team Leader. 5.2.2 During emergencies, all routine Realth Physics
. procedures, related to functions of the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection Group shall be followed unless deviations are authorized by the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group Leader.
l 5.3 Speci'al Equipment l None.
- l 5.4 References l~ 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan l 5.4.2 NUREG 0654 Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of Rev. 1 Radiological Emergency Response Plans in
. Support of Nuclear Power Plants. .
l 5.4.3 EP-619 Preparation, Administrative Review and [ Dissemination of Personnel Exposure Records and Reports. l 5.4.4 - EP-514 Cleaning and Decontamination of Respiratory Protection Equipment l 5.4.5 RP-515 Inspection and Maintenance of Respiratory Protection Equipment. l 5.4.6 EP-611 Receipt and Shipment of TLDS. e
*N*] _ ;_ 7 y p. .
='
e '*
(y .
- . - - _ - - - . - . - . . = . a .:- .x .= .-. +- a . .-
1 1 . 3843116860 EP-254 Rev. 2 .)- Page 1 of 6 VAW/ /jmv [. PHILADELPHIA EL5 CTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
#[Y g EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE 5
E t 2 EP-254 VEHICLE AND EVACUEE CONTROL GROUP P l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS , l 1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall coordinate the needs and actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group with needs and actions of other elements of the Personnel Safety Team. l 1.2 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader coordinates the actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group members. l 1.3 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Members perform the duties in this procedure at the designated assembly areas. l 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l 2.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall . l 2.1.1 Verify with the Emergency Direc te Assembly Area is to be u , I 2.1.2 Appoint a vehicle l ader and direct him onnel entry area. l 2.1.3 Brief a he s I (fsite a other pertine rm& tion. l 2.2 veh e cuee control Grou Leade r, .shTk1: V V Cont the Personnel Safe \' Q Q \ l 2.2.1 a [er kin the TSC and e uest that a minim lth Physics e Technicians report to the esonnel entry area U or to the selected offsite assembly area. ] l 2.2.2 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader and 'l request that the Fire and Damage Team Leader provide a vehicle and driver in support of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group, with the driver to report to the T3C, if required. k wy _ , - _ ,
EP-254 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 6 VAW/ MPG /jmv l 2.2.3 Upon arrival of HP Technicians, appoint one of them as the Squad Leader. l 2.2.4 Instruct the team members to implement section 2.3 of this procedure. , l 2.3 vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Members shall: l 2.3.1 Upon the direction of the Group Leader, proceed to
- the designated offsite assembly area.
~
l 2.3.2 Upon arrival at the offsite assembly area, establish communications with the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader in the Te
- l portable radio or available telephone, '
l 2.3.3 Coordinate the set-up of personnel and vehicle contamination monitoring areas with security ( representatives present. l l
)
l 2.3.4 Cbtain an Assembly Area Kit at the offsite assembly area. 't l 2.3.5 Perform an inventory of the equipme its / t by comparing contents with the icy i t1 - contained in the respective ,, g ,.* p - l 2.3.6 Perform battery, cal e ouf, che s on l all instrume tat m , 4 A' V' ' i l 2.3.7 Report a * .j i br Inoperable equipment to the G , . a,n'd uest replacements. 4 L .t PRIORI SHC1 .L{ BE GIVEN TO THE MONITORING OF PERSO , u. ' W:ICLE MONITORING, IF NECESSARY, SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED WHEN PERSONNEL MONITORING HAS BEEN CCMPLETED. l 2.3.8 Perform whole body frisk of each individual in accordance with HP-817, Personnel Contamination Monitoring. l 2.3.9 If individuals are found to be contaminated, decontaminate using the techniques described in HP-818, Personnel Decontamination, and complete the documentation described therein. 2.3.10 If any individual cannot be decontaminated below the release limits specified in HP-818, contact the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader in the TSC for further instructions. Personnel at the offsite assembly area who are identified as being contaminated should not be returned to the site for l decontamination if a release is ongoing or expected to occur. ' l _ _ _ _ . _._li
~
~_ '
~_a
em m .._.. m ..c _...__ m w _ ._ _. _ . . y I . EP-254 Rev. 2 ' Page 3 of 6 VAW/ MPG /jav l 2.3.11 Perform Vehicle surveys in accordance with the following procedure. l 2.3.11.1 Check that the survey instrument is turned on and operating. l 2.3.11.2 Prior to starting the survey, determine the background radiation in the area. If the background greater than 300 cpm as determined with
, an E140N with HP-210/HP-260 probe or equivalent, the vehicle or equipment must be moved to another area where the background is less than 300 cym.
l 2.3.11.3 Hold the instrument probe approximately 1 (one) inch from the surface and move it slowly over the surface with particular attention to horizontal surfaces and areas that would most likely come in contact with contamination, e.g. , tires, door handles, etc. l 2.3.11.4 If there is any increase in response, stop moving' the probe, allow the meter response to stabilize and determine the magnitude and size of the contaminated area. l 2.3.11.5 Survey the accessible interior surfaces of the vehicle or equipment in a similar manner. Again, give special attention to those areas most likely to be contaminated, e.g. , steering wheel, brake pedal, drivers's seat, etc. l_ 2.3.11.6 If contamination levels are less than' 100 cpm above ' background as determined by an E140N equipped with an HP-210 or HP-260 probe or equivalent, release the vehicle or equipment by checking the appropriate block on the Report' and giving a copy to the driver. l 2.3.11.7 If the vehicle is contaminated, record readings on the Vehicle Survey and Decontamination Report (Appendix EP-254-1) and note contaminated areas and levels on the illustration sheet. 2.3.12 Perform vehicle decontamination in accordance with EP-255. DECONTAMINATION OF VEHICLES SHALL BE SECOND IN { PRIORITY TO DECONTAMINATION OF PERSONNEL AND IMPOUNDING OF THE VEHICLES. l 2.3.13 If any vehicle cannot be decontaminated below the release limits, contact the Vehicle and Evacuee control Oroup Leader in the TSC for further instructions.
- -^
. m- - -- _ , . . ,_c ~~.._. ..._u_m__ _ . . . ..
'e i
[ - EP-254 Rev. 2 i Page 4 of 6- ! L VAW/ MPG /jmv , i l 2.3.14 Remain on-station until released by the Group Leader. r l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader shall: o l 3.1.1 When all personnel and vehicles have been monitored, and the team is no longer needed for decontamination, instruct them to monitor themselves, their equipment and vehicle, and return to the TSC, or to the EOF if the TSC is inaccessable. Upon return of the group, collect personnel and l 3.1.2 vehicle survey and decontamination records. l 3.1.3 Transfer personnel survey and decontamination records to the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group Leader for any needed exposure evaluations and record retention. p l 3.2 vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Members shalla l 3.2.1 Upon release, return with you'r equipment to the TSC or other location as directed. l 3.2.2 Return all survey and decontamination records to
- the vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader.
l 4.0 &PPENDICES . l 4.1 EP-254-1 Vehicle Survey and Decontamination Report ~ . r l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 P.urnose The purpose of this procedure is to establish provisions for personnel and vehicle monitoring during a Site Evacuation when contamination may be present.
~
pt E _. . I~ i_ _ _
. _ _ m ._.< _
7 1 a 5 - rg . EP-254 Rev. 2 Page 5 of 6 VAW/ MPG /jmv l 5.2 Criteria for Use l 5.2.1 Emergency has been declared per EP-101 Classification of Emergencies l 5.2.2 An atmospheric release of radioactive material has occurred or is occurring, and a Site Evacuation has been ordered or is underway; OR l 5.2.3 As directed by the Personnel Safety Team Leader l 5.2.4 - Alpha contamination should be considered whenever there is reactor fuel degradation. l 5.3 Special Ecuipment I l 5.3.1 Assembly area Kit l 5.3.2 Portable Radio (1/ Team) l 5.4 References [ l 5.4.1 EP-255 - Vehicle Decontamination [ l 5.4.2 EP-305 - Site Evacuation l-l 5.4.3 HP-817 - Personnel Contamination Monitoring l 5.4.4 HP-818 - Personnel Decontamination l 5.4.5 EP-101 - Classification of Emergencies
- f t
I y , i t' 1
s/ e . EP-254 R2v. 2 PEgo 6 of 6
, VAW/ MPG /jmV p,
EP-254 - VEHICLE SURVEY AND DECONTAMINATION REPORT ummune Se==
', b If .
N=== st o=ner Phone f i f i
' nome biork baage No.
Addrene Of Nu=PECol
. renneer arrese city zeese Z3p - .i NTIAL1stWY fERA.75 P
humanent Usse Dese Thum Swwered by
. unemi se. am MarTE L
7 , g
. ~
eL v,
~
me.m == (. - ( fp QdV Clust. Awehurised for Meissue F#ene Slee _'*- Desessed = Retenes Deded p COMMENTS i
? e
, o k
Osamesentenced Spa Nuno , Does Thue Dessuseninettet Meestadeusade 4 . humanme unee Osse Thee model Nm. SM Prete Type Feilene Aseles Reedses,_Nume Spesiel feliong ($peutfyh Signature
. .. .. ..... .. . s . . ..
RETURN C0KPLETED FORMS TO VIKICLE AND EVACUEE GROUP LEADER . 6
,9 6
,, , _ . . , - e, -, .,+-y. =49 % *~ *~! IY8W***~"*" ~# - - ~ * ~ - ' ' " ' ' ' ~
_ m .-. . _ _ . _ j
, 38431l6870 EP-255 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 5
( VAW/ MPG /rgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY g LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE k f EP-255 VEHICLE DECONTAMINATION 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall coordinate the needs and actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group with needs and actions of other groups of the Personnel Safety Team. 1.2 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader shall + coordinate the actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group members. l 1.3 Veh:,c:.e Decontamination Group Members *shall perform veh.c;.e decontamination. 2.O ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE 2.1
~
l Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader shall 2.1.1 Determine manpower needs and availability based on
- the number of vehicles to be decontaminated nd their location and obtain Personnel S ettf am Leader's concurrence. fe s 2.1.2 Select one or both mination
[ areas: (! , Offsite Assembly Area' or eva (Limerick Airport or Cromby S h' } es l, E Batch Plant for onsite vehi e ; p 2.1.3 contact the Personnel S .eam Leader in the TSC r and request that a Health Physics Technician be dispatched to the TSCr 2.1.4 If the Batch Plant is to be used for vehicle decontamination f
..M,. ..--MW"WM ON
, . . . . .4,, ._6_,c, _ , . , . _ , . , e...,-.m..._.. ..~,___.,,,_-.,,..,_.,,,__m,._,m.,. ,____,m.____,,__ _ _ _ _ _ . . - . . . _ _ , _ . , , _ _ . . . . , _ _ _ -
. -- - .a . .a .. : . .a ..n.a . - - - . - . . -.- a.:.. u. - .~ s e t.
O EP-255 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader and i request that the Fire and Damage Team Leader provide for the dispatch of personnel with vehicle to the TSC. t 2.1.5 Upon arrival of HP Technician (s), appoint a Group Leader. ' 2.1.6 Instruct the group members to implement section 2.2 of this procedure. 2.2
~
p l Vehicle Decontamination Group' shall 2.'2.1 If batch plant is to be used for Vehicle Decontamination, obtain a Vehicle Decontamination l Kit from the TSC Emergency Equipment Storage
. Closet.
If Off-Site Assembly Area is to be used for vehicle 1 decontamination do step 2.2.5 prior to step 2.2.2 - 2.2.4. q 2.2.2 Perform an inventory of the equipment in the kits by comparing contents with the inventory lists contained in the respective kits. 2.2.3 Perform battery calibration and source checks on
, all instrumentation.
2.2.4 Report any missing items or inoperable equipment to the Group Leader. 2.2.5 Upon the direction of the Group Leader, proceed to the designated decontamination area. 2.2.6 Upon arrival at the decontamination area: 2.2.6.1 Set up a holding area for vehicles that cannot be decontaminated af ter several attempts. 2.2.6.2 Set up a designated clean area for checking vehicles once decontamination is completed. CAUTION: DRY METHODS OF DECONTAMINATION SRALL BE THE METHOD OF CHOICE. FIRST PRIORITY OF DECONTAMINATION SHALL BE TO THOSE VEHICLES NEEDED TO SUPPORT THE EMERGENCY RESPONSE FOR , I WHICR DRY METHODS WILL BE EFFECTIVE. I 2.2.7 Decontaminate vehicles using the following techniques: _. y - - -
. . ...__m m. . . _. _ . . _ __:._,._ __u m.m m.
EP-255 Rev. 2 Page 3 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs i 2.2.7.1 Wipe down hard, smooth surfaces with dry masslinn cloth. 2.2.7.2 Vacuum dry, irregular porous surfaces. 2.2.7.3 Wipe down vehicle with damp masslinn cloth. I USE WATER SPARINGLY AND ONLY WITH APPROVAL OF THE i PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM LEADER. 2.2.8 After the initial decontamination, the Health p Physics Technician shall resurvey the vehicle per EP-254 and record post-decontamination survey results on the copy of vehicle Survey and L Decontamination Report (EP-254-1) accompanying the vehicle. 2.2.9 Vehicles meeting the release criteria of EP-254 may be released to the owner, if present. If owner is not present, move vehicle to clean holding area. 2.2.10 If vehicle is still contaminated, return it to the contaminated holding area for further decontamination at a later time. 2.2.11 When decontamination operations are complete, return completed forms to the vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader in the TSC. l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP i 3.1 , vehicle Decontamination Group Members shall:
- 3.1.1- When all vehicles have been decontaminated and the group is no longer needed, monitor the area, themselves, their equipment and vehicle, and post any areas in accordance with HP-215.
3.1.2 Deliver contaminated rags and other materials to the radwaste facilityor other designated area. 3.1.3 Return to the TSC, or to the EOF if the TSC is inaccessable. 3.1.4 Upon return; deliver vehicle Survey and Decontamination Reports to the Group Leader. 3.1.5 Transfer personnel survey and decontaminati,on I records to the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group Leader for any needed exposure evaluations and record maintenance. 1 m.n . . -
. . . .. . ;_. . - ; ._. a . .m . ._ _ .: . . 2.
....._w . 2_._w maw -
e* EP-255 Rav. 2 Page 4 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs 3.2' Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader shall 3.2.1 Using completed vehicle Survey and Decontamination Reports (EP-254-1), contact owners and inform them where and when they may pick up their vehicle. 3.2.2 Retain all survey and decontamination records. 4.0: APPENDICES j None C 5.O SUPPORTING INFORMATIO_N 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to establish provisions for decontamination of vehicles evacuated from the site to offsite assembly areas or vechicles leaving the site in support of the emergency response. 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 Vehicle decontamination activities will not interfere with other emergency activities 5.2.2 Thi's procedure shall be implemented whenever a vehicle has been identified to be contaminated (a
>100 cpm above background as determined with an E- .
140N equipped with an RP-210/RP-260 probe or equivalen t) . 5.2.3 Decontamination of vehicles shall be second in priority to decontamination of personnel and impounding of the vehicles. 5.2.4 Alpha contamination should be considered whenev'er there is reactor fuel degradation. l 5.3 Snecial Ecuipment l 5.3.1 Assembly Area Kit I n l 5.3.2 Vehicle Decontamination Kit 's__
- t. - -- " *^
.. ;. _. -.....-..a
, . ... ;. .a. u, . .,.
.cca. w..awwc w ; = =.:-: o =; ~
3 . l, EP-255 Rev. 2 g ; Page 5 of 5 9.. VAW/ MPG /rgs t. l 5.3.3 Portable Radio (1/ Team) t 4
-5.4 References i
5.4.1 EP-254 - Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group 1 5.4.2 HP-215 - Posting of Radiologically Controlled Areas V e I . t L h4 1 f O e 0 e
~ '
EE
'I~~ _I 5
_ . _ . _ _ . . _ . _ _ _m ..m
+ .
j 3843116880 EP-260 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 4 VA MPG:11 l PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION E!!ERGENCY PLAN 3MPLDtENTING PROCEDURE p EP-260 FIRE AND DAMAGE CONTROL TEAM l 1.0 PARTICIPAN*S 1.1 Fire Fichtino Group Leader shall direct fire fighting I activit:.es 1.2- Fire and Damace Team Leader shall support fire fighting activities, activate the Damage Repair Group, and coordinate the team's activities. .i l l 2.0 ACTIONS-I!DtEDIATE l 2.1 Shift Suoervisor shall - l 2.1.1 Report to scene of fire or as otherwise directed. l 2.1.2 Assume role of Fire Fighting Group Leader. 2.1.3 Direct fire fighting activities in accordance with the LGS Fire Fighting Procedures. . 2.1.4 Periodically inform the Control Room on status of fire. l REPORTS SHOULD BE MADE ABOUT EVERY 15 MINUTES. . 2.1.5 Request additional personnel and or. t a' necessary from the Fire and Da { 2.1.6 Request Health Physica pers essa q"from the Personnel Safety Team Leade < 4 2.1.7 Inform group members on plant status hnilicant radiological problems. l 2.2 Fire and Damage Team Leader shall: N (168 h t 2.2.1 Assist the Fire Fighting Group T dng the fire with ne,cessary personnela and eq ent. 1 J _. _ Q_ _.[ -
-M *'M s '
i EP-260 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 4 VAW/ MPG:ll r. 2.2.2 If Damage Repair Group is needed, notify the Supervisor, Maintenance or designated alternate to
- activate the Damage Repair Group in accordance with L l EP-261.
L 2.2.3 Keep Control Room and Emergency Director informed of Fire and Damage Team status. I 2.2.4 Request additional personnel as necessary using EP-276, Fire and Damage Team Phone List. l 3.0 ACTIO!!S-FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 Fire and Damage Team Leader shall: 3.1.1 Communicate and discuss situation with Emergency Director and with Fire and Damage Team Leader in the Control Room. 3.1.2 Direct the Shif t Supervisor to activate the Fire Fighting Group (if necessary) . j 3.1.3 Activate the Damage Repair Group (if necessary) as j follows: Notify the Supervisor, Maintenance or designated alternate to activate the Damage Repair Group in accordance with EP-261, Damage Repair Group. E!!SURE THAT GROUP LEADERS ARE INFORMED OF MEW TEA!! LEADER AND CO!2tAND LOCATION. 3.1.4 Update Emergency Director on status of team's activities. 3.1.5 Request additional site personnel and equipment from Emergency Director as required. 3.1.6 Requests outside fire assistance from the Emergency Director as required. 3.1.7 Re-assess the situation periodically and make appropriate reports and adjustments. 3.1.8 Have personnel radiation exposures monitored and requent Emergency Exposure authorization from the Emergency Director as necessary.
-- . . . ~ ~ e,
- - - - - . . - -....--..-.,a-.~....a.w.u-..n=~
f. V ' EP-260 Rev. 2 Page 3 of 4 4: VAW/ MPG:11 O 3.1.9 Debrief all involved participants to complete an accurate report when team activities have been l completed. l 4.0 APPENDICES 4 l 4.1 EP-260-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines k l 5.0 SUPPORT INFORMATION l [ l 5.1 Purpose e I The purpose of'this procedure is to provide guidelines I for the actions required to activate and operate the Fire and Damage Team, and the Fire Fighting Group. l 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure shall be implemented when the Emergency Director directs the Fire and Damage Team to be 1 ac tivated . ll l 5.3 Special Eculoment l None l 5.4 References l 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan L l 5.4.2 SE Fire on-site - General Fire Fighting Procedure , i l 5.4.3 EP-261 - Damage Repair Group. l 5.4.4 EP-276 - Fire and Damage Team Phone List i . i t
- - . .--- - - - . . - - . . . . . ~ . . - . . _ . - _ . _ . . . . _ . . . . . . . . _ -
f . EP-260, Rev. 2 Page 4 of 4 VAW/ MPG:ll APPENDIX EP-260-1 Emergency Excosure Guidelines Projected h Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dese Bv
- 1. Life Saving and Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
Director f 2. Operation of Equipment - to !!itigate an Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem Emergency Director L- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency r Activities limits limits Director 1
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative n lines Guide- ,
lines N/A . l
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1 *
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis e
S l l r f .
~
iIh I
EP-261, R;v. 2 l 3843116890 Page 1 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs I -- PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION M4[ [l EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE I EP-261 DAMAGE REPAIR GROUP 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Fire and Damage Team Leader shall activate and
- , coordinate the activities of the Damage Repair Group. -
1.2 Damage Repair Group Leader shall direct the activities of the Damage Repair Group. p r l 1.3 Damage Repair Group Members shall perform emergency u repairs. l r 1.4 Health Physics Technicians shall provide health' [ physics coverage to the group (s). L 2.0 ACTIONS-IMMEDIATE l [- 2.1 Fire and Damage Team Leader shall: 2.1.1 Notify the Supervising Engineer, Maintenance or - designated alternate to activate the Damage Repair Group using EP-276, Fire and Damage Team Phone List. q 2.1.2 Direct and coordinate emergency repair operations as L necessary. 2.1.3 Provide the Damage Repair Group with periodic plant status changes, including significant radi and contamination problems which may affec. tions of the group. < 2.1.4 Periodically update the Eme(ge c '8r t of the status of the repair wo 3 at the i fire / damage status boar $e T'echnicah Support Center (TSC) is updated, s ecessapy .),.) 2.1.5 Provide additional personnel suppdr it necessary e EP-276, Fire and Damage Team Phone'* ist, f<o .'g 6 additional qualified maintenance pe ely T@
. .~. + .
,- - - . . . . .-..._-._.~...n.~. . . . . . . ._w.a. . . :.z .: :..::..:x . a. .=.: x -
*- 4-EP-261, R2v. 2 l Page 2 of 4
[- VAW/ MPG /rgs i )' i 2.2 Damage Repair Group Leader shall: !
) .
e 2.2.1 Report to the maintenance office or as otherwise I directed. [ 2.2.2 Assemble the Damage Repair Group from available b - maintenance personnel. Call in additional members ) using EP-276, Fire and Damage Team Phone List. l Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader for a Pre-Entry l Evaluation and HP coverage. 2.2.3 Brief the group members on the situation and explain the actions that need to be performed. 2.2.4 Direct the distribution of access keys. [
- J
~l 2.2.5 Review applicable maintenance procedures with the group members.
t: 2.2.6 Provide information to the group on equipment and {k supplies. fj l 2.2.7 Request system blocking as needed from the Operations Support Center (OSC) Coordinator. 2.2.8 If necessary, request additional personnel or 5 equipment from the Fire and Damage Team Leader. L l 2.2.9 Periodically update the Fire and Damage Team Leader of p the status of the repair work. 0 [ 2.3 Damage Repair Group Members shall: 2.3.1 Report to the maintenance office or as otherwise !. directed. 2.3.2 Follow the directions of the group leader. [ 2.3.3 Assemble necessary equipment (i.e., tools, parts, etc.. L for the pending operations) from locations on or off-site designated by the Damage Repair Group Leader. 2.3.4 Update the Damage Repair Group Leader of current status of emergency repairs.
, 2.4 Health Physics Technician shall:
l 2.4.1 Obtain the necessary equipment from the OSC. l 2.4.2 Review the Emergency Radiation Work Permit (ERWP) in l- accordance with EP-401, Entry for Emergency Repair and j operations. a .1" ?e d * #4*,". .T.* - - "- . *m -
- I ^ A " * * ' ^ - -
~= .w. a . a .=. x - ~ .. = --- i:- - w ~ L uwuM '"
{ 1; C . EP-261, Rav. 2 l Page 3 of 4 J.4 VAW/ MPG /rgs 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP 3.1 Damage Repair Group Leader shall: 3.1.1 Conduct a debriefing with the group members and
. provide the information to Fire and Damage Team Leader.
5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose . j, The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines f for the actions of the Damage Repair Group. 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 This procedure shall be implemented when the Emergency Director and/or Fire and Damage Team Leader direct the: Damage Repair Group to be activated. r. l 5.3 Special Eauioment None 5.4 References 5.4.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan - 5.4.2 EP-260 - Fire and Damage Team
- k i.
ff t 5.4.3 EP-401 - Entry for Emergency Repair and Operations I 1 5.4.4 EP-276 - Fire and Damage Team Phone List ' L 5.4.5 NUREG 0654 - Criteria for Preparation and f! Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. >I l A _ h _' ' i' #5 m%. I
% - JO. __
n, _-g'
- - -- -- - - . .u .~.._ -..- . .. . , w.c.=w:..u=
EP-261, Rav. 2 Page 4 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs
* /
APPENDIX EP-261-1 EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES a
- h. Projected fj Whole Body Thyroid Authorized j Function Dose Dose By
{ f 1. Life Saving and
~
Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment -
to Mitigate an Emergency ** Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Director-
- 3. Protection of Health and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem Emergency **
Director 3 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency I Activities limits limits Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activities Administra . Adminis-tive Guide- trative
, lines Guide-g' lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis -
b t' l
'4 i
p $_~ .. .M s LQ ?w:s . Wh ~ m- w: ;a : <1- 2:D n 2 i :n =R %_ .
"$v :- : .- . . u . I:L- _ . L. '
---~:-. :-
l 3843116900 EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 1 of 12 [ l VAW /mc e f; PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY Ed j
- , LIMERICK GENERATING STATION .
j EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE !) ( E' EP-272 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY OFFICIALS PEONE LIST l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS i'
? l 1.1 A Communicator shall contact the required Philadelphia l Electric Company officials when directed by the i Emergency Director or the Site Emergency Coordinator.
- I -i l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE - i l 2.1 Cbmmunicator will call the following people as
, I necessary.
- /
l i ( Sr. V. P. Nuclear Ecme Phone Centrex =I i I! V. S. Boyer
, ; Federal / State Government Liaison ?
r; . L V. P. Corporate Communications C. Brenner E Public Information Officer, Or T
' Alternate Federal / State Government Liaison I
I {K Medical Director W. F. E [ Eme
! r' Medica ist$ - , . . v =
s1 7-ae A. J. Cincotta, MD Alternate Emergency Medical n Director j k j v d L i
. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ i _d . _ _ _ -__' , . . - .
b l EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 2 of 12 l VAW/ MPG /mc 5 T Home Phone Centrex
'/Vice President, Elect. Production j
2 S. L. Daltroff 3 Emergency Support Officer
! ~
1
] Manager, Nuclear Production M. J. Cooney Alternate Emergency Support Officer I
Superintendent - Nuclear . Generation Div si:n W. T. Ullrich Site Emergency Coordinator Superintenden: - Nuclear j I Services . I R. E. Logue
, Alternate Site j Emergency Coordinator i i Superintendent - Peach Bottom R. S. Fleischmann II Alternate Site Emergency Coordinator Vice-President -
Engineering & Research Department J. S. Kemper Corporate Spokesman
! Manage.
l Engineering & Research Department i J. W. Gallagher l Alternate Corporate Spokesman I
l EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 3 of 12 l VAW/HPG/mc
/
Home Phone Centrex Senior Engineer - Licensing Section B. L. Clark Technical Advisor Engineer-in-Charge Nuclear Safety Section l
, G. Hunger i Alternate Technical _
2 Advisor
;__ =
~
, Chief Mechanical Engineer l
j E. C. Kistner i Design & Construction Support Officer Chief Electrical Engineer G. N. DeCowsky Alternate Design Construction Support Officer i Engineer-in-Charge Fuel Management Section , L. F. Rubino ] Core Physics Coordinator
! l Engineer l Fuel Management Section i
I H. J. Diamond Alternate Core Physics Coordinator i
! Manager, Corporate l Ccmmunications ! W. R. Taylor ,
I Alternate Publi Information Off
\s _, '
= , , .
l EP-272 Rev. 3 k Page 4 of 12 l VAW/ MPG /mc Home Phone Centrex Assistant Manager - Energy Information and Ed. M. D. McCormick EOF Liason - Corporate Communications l Manager - Public Information R. L. Harper Emergency News Center Coordinator i Senior Representative Public Information l N. J. McDermott Alternate Emergency News Center Cooridinator
! Manager of Claims Security l
J. D. McGoldrick Emergency Security Officer l Director of Security R. J. Deneen Alternate Emergency Security Officer Engineer in Charge Chemistry Section G. E. Assenheimer Supervising Buyer, Fuel Procurement G. F. Daebeler
! Environmenta am
. Coordinator
\
n -- : x -- -
E [ l EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 5 of 12 l VAW/ MPG /mc i i Home Phone Centrer' a [ Senior Engineer, Engineering s and Research Dept. [ A. Marie , 3 F Alternate Environmental l @-- f-mg g Ilffm.J i Coordinator -me __ a- u g,; g 7 f General Superintendent of Maintenance f' ! M. J. McCormick Maintenance Coordinator _ __ Superintenden:, Mechani ca', S ec t io n -i Maintenance Division ,i
- 1 J. M. Madara Alternate Maintenance F Coordinator hi l Manager,
-i Transmission & Distribution E! 'I A. G. Mikalauskas
- T. & D. Support Coordinator n
Assistant to V. P. T&D l H. J. Why Alternate T&D Support Coordinator
~
tt Superintendent Electric E l, Quality Assurance [ ! R. H. Moore QA/QC Coordinator Engineer-In-Charge E&R QA [ ! P. K. Pavlides - I Alternate QA/QC Coordinator
\
!!, N / =
- _ _ - , , , .- h
l EP-272 Rev. 3 , Page 6 of 12 . l VAW/ MPG /mc i i Home Phone Centrex
/
! / Superintendent j Nuclear Training j t i R. W. Bulmer
- Training Coordinator
' \t Limerick Generatin Station ;
i Training Coordinator E. W. Firth
! Alternate Training Coordinator
, Manager Corporate Planning l And Analysis __
- , J. M. Friderichs Administration and Legistics Manager
. I
, Manager Rate Division
, R. C. Williams g Alternate Administration and I i Logistics Manager I
^
. Manacer T&D Servic '
! J. V. Mannion Alternate Administr tion and
- ; Logistics Manager Manager Area Development
- w. C. O'Brien I Support Personnel Accomodations Coordinator I
Supervisor Sales Analysis 3evan (Tech. Services)
@ Alternate Support Personnel J Accomcdations Coordinator '
/
l 2
l EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 7 of 12 [ l VAW/ MPG /mc Home Phone Centrex l I
/ Engineer-In-Charce Licensing l
I W. M. Alden Support Personnel Procurement Coordinator Engineer Licensing R. C. Brown i Alternate Support Personnel j Procurement Coordinator General Superviser R. J. Kline Support Personnel Accom. i Coordinator Schuylkill Division
. a s j Business Services Reoresentathyg {3 .j# p,1 !q
. . , 9. . J J. N. Pettia , ;
i Alternate Suppor otined om i Coordinator Schu-2 11 gg o I Manager Purchasing { l l E. P. Winitsky l Purchasing Coordinator Supervising Buyer ' R. A. Nones Alterc. ate Purchasing Coordinator Manager Insurance Section = W. G. Holberg Insurance Ocordinator l Superviser Insurance Section
~' '
A. L. Saltiel - Alternate Insurance Coordinator i s- -
l EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 8 of 12 l VAW/ MPG /mc 4 Home Phone Centrex [ General Supt. Trans. Division E. L. Dold Transportation Coordinator Supt. Trans. Division
.t. T. Melvin Alternate Transportation Coordinator General Supt. Office Systems hnd Communications B. C. Czarkowski j Communications Equipment i Coordinator Supt. Office Systems and Communications C. W. Aldred Alternate Communications Equipment Coordinator General Supt. Stores Division E. A. Connor f Stores Division Coordinator
- i I
l Supt. Stores Division A. B. Serrill i { Alternate Stores Division Coordinator i Engineer-In-Charge P0wer Plant w Services [ S. J. Kowa'. ski Radwaste Coordinator
I EP-272 Rev. 3 l Page 9 of 12 VAW/ MPG /mc Home Phone Centrer Supr. Engineer Power Plant n Services A. C. Caprara Alternate Radwaste Coordinator Chief Design Engineer A. R. Lewis Engineering Design Coordinator Assistant Chief Cesign Encineer J. M. Bla<e m Alternate Engineering Design Coordinator Enoineer-In-Char:e Civil Enc neerina D. Marano Civil Engineering Coordinator 4 Suev. Engineer Struct. Branch K. W. Vollmer j Alternate Civil Engineering Coordinator Supv. Engineer Power Plant Control Systems Branch < Jt. T. Jones I&C Coordinator "
- ngineer Power Plant Control
'iystems Branch
'4. W. Bowers Alternate :&C Coordinator h- C - __%,_..
kb- '
- ______ _g
l EP-272 Rev. 2 Page 10 of 12 l VAW/ MPG /mc t pr Home Phone Centrex
' ~~'
I Engineer-In-Charge Nuclear and Env. Section . L. B. Pyrih 1 < Licensing Coordinator i Supervising Engineer Nuclear Branch -- R. A. Diederich j Alternate Licensing Coordinator l Engineer-:n-Charge Power Plant Design J. Moskowit: Systems Engineering Coordi.nator - Mechanical Sr. Engineer Power Plant Design i j T. E. Shannon j Alternate Systems Engineering l Coordinator - Mechanical l Engineer-In-Charge Station l Engineering Section a J. Ferencsik Systems Engineering fil Coordinator - Electrical _ ___s l Supervising Engineer Station Engineering Section J. Lees , Alternate Systems Engineering Coordinator - E'.ect r ica l General Supt. Construction t
! J. G. Weisheit 3 Construction Coordinat ,I l ,
. r
~
_ _ . . _ . . - . _ _ . . . . . _ _ _ _ _ . _ . . - _ . -_.---__.1-- -u--- I EP-272 Rev. 3 Page 11 of 12 I VAW/ MPG /mc Home Phone Centrex Asst. General Supt. Construction -
/f T. P. Gotzis Alternate Construction Coordinator Engineer-In-Charge Industrial j Section J. H. Long
, Ventilation Coordinator l \ l Supervising Engineer-Suilding Facilities Branen I, j G. M. Morley l Alternate Ventilation j Coordinator 1 I
. . . . ... . . . . . - . . ., ~ -
..--.i . w .. .. .a . . . . - . w ~ .. -aw s nasa
..u u a.
.i l EP-272 R v. 3 Pcgo 12 cf 12
, l n
VAW/ MPG /mc l 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLOW-UP l 3.1 None Required. i l 4.0 APPENDICES h H i None. l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to supply information to contact Philadelphia Electric Company officials. l 5.2 Criteria for Use
- i I
This procedure may be used when Philadelphia Electric company officials are to be contacted. l 5.3 Special Equipment l None. l 5.4 References l None. I I l 4 i I I i
._m--_--- -- .-
.a .x_ _- . _ ._ _ _aw: _
3843116910 EP-273 Ray. 3 j Page 1 of 3 VAW/ /mla PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
/h [
EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-273 LIMERICK STATION SUPERVISION CALL LIST 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Communicator contacts Station Supervision. . j .. 2.0 ACTIONS - I.v;4rpIA7g 2.1 Cer.:nuni ca to r shall contact people from the Tollowing list as required: -- q r 2.1.1 STATION SUPERINTENDENT: Home_ Work G. M. Leitch -
- l 2.1.2 !
ASSISTANT STATION SUPERINTENDENT: J. F. Franz - 2.1.3 STARTUP DIRECTOR: J. W. Spencer - (until Startup) - 2.1.4 TECHNICAL ENGINEER: P. J. Duca . 2.1.5 ' ' ENGINEER - MAINTENANCE: J. B. Cotton . ; 2.1.6 ENGINEER - OPERATIONS: J. Doering g4 I 2.1.7 SENIOR EEALTH PHY6-w " R. W. Dubi *
.~ s 2.1.8 SENIOR ..
~'
J. S. Wi i ~ o
. a. . b . . .. -
___ . . . - . . - . . . . . - ~ . . - - - - - - - -- - - ~ ~ EP-273 Rev. 3 Page 2 of 3 VAW/ MPG /mla 2.1.9 ADMINISTRATIVE ENGINEER: Home Work J. A. Basilio l 2.1.10 PERFORMANCE ENGINEER: L. A. Hopkins V. J. Cwie tniewics: f I 2.1.11 SECURITY ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT: P. Supplee 2.1.12 INSTRUMENTATICN & CONTROL ENGINEER
^~ ' k Y N 2.1.13 REACTOR ENGINEER:
K. W. Hunt 2.1.14 APPLIE) HEALTH PHYSICIST: R. J. Titolo 2.1.15 HEALTH PHYSICIST - Te : ' Sdl 2.1.16 ' E. N J: 2.1.17 SUPV - CHEMIST: J. Sabados 2.2 SHIFT SUPERIN"ENDENT: 2.2.1 C. Gillespie 2.2.2 R. Hampton _. 2.2.3 J. Monaghan i
\ 2.2.4 W. Truax 2.2.5 W. Barnshaw .
2.2.6 E. Cosgrove
. - . . : . w...un
(- . EP-273 Rev. 3 Page 3 of 3 3 VAW/ MPG /mla 2.3 SHIFT SUPERVISORS: Home Work I 2.3.1 G. Paton i
- 2.3.2 R. Delaney 2.3.3 W. Russell i
i 2.3.4 R. Kennedy 2.3.5 W. Stanley 2.3.6 M. Cory ( \ k 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOWUP None required. 4.0 APPENDICES None. 1 M 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATIQW 5.1 4 1 T pthp3se of this procedure is to provide - information for contacting Station Supervision. 5.2 Criteria for Use F ! This procedure may be used when it is necessary to [ contact members of Station Supervision. 5.3 Soecial Equiement None. 5.4 References
- None.
I h 1 i
' ~
b* - i .- 5.. __i."_____J___,
_-_..._m. - _...._._..m..
-f _. . . . . . .
g 3843116920 EP-27s Rev. 4
, Page 1 of 4 VAW G/mla PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY / /
LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-276 FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM PHONE LIST 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 'd 1.1 Fire and Damace Team Leader calls in group leaders or members. t { l.2 Fire Fichtina Grouc Leaders call in group members. 1.3 Damace Recair Group Leaders call in group members. 2.0 PROCEDURE 2.1 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE 2.1.1 Fire and Damace Team Leader shall call people from the following list until appropriate group leader positions are filled. 2.1.1
-O FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM LEADER:
HOME WORK i * ] ENGINEER - MAINTENANCE l J. B. Cotton ASSISTANT ENGINEER - MAINTENANC C. Wyler MAINTENANCE SHIFT ASSISTANA) ORE.9AN (I i l i Rotating Shift Assignment a'$ m 91 Y 2.1.2 .= _ \ j C act Control Room at
/
+ EP-276 Rev. 4
. Page 2 of 4
- VAW/ MPG /mla l
2.1. 3 - DAMAGE REPAIR GROUP LEADERS: SUPERVISING ENGINEER, MAINTENANCE l R. Costagliola 4
=
[4 + l SUPERVISOR, MAINTENANCE (Alternat - g J. O'Mara . _ . .. / 2.2 Fire Fighting Group Leader shall contact fire-7 ghting group' members as follows: I i ARE FIGHTING GROUP MEMBER t - FIRE BRIGADE h For Fire Fighting Group Members, , , contact Shift Clerk in Control Room 2124 2.3 Damage Repair Group Leader shall contact damage r
- r members from the following list until a suffi i t
[ have been contacted (4 minimum). . l t 2.3.1 DAMAGE REPAI r ( ! G. R. Benson n f J. W. Berger, r. g R. R. Black I K. F. Borton E K. W. Bowerson J. F. Cook [ P. G. DeMauriac [ S. R. Dennett f B. W. Didonato
~ '
T. C. Essex 7 , _ _ , E. F. Giovan, III
)
?
]'
~. . . ,
[- EP-276 Rev. 4 Page 3 of 4 VAW/ MPG /mla f J. J. Graney L. D. Hill i P. J. Klein T. R. Landis D. J. Leperson -
=D -
L. G. Macantee D. C. McCloskey i M-E. F. McCoy - , VAT.
, Nu2l5kl kit %2pNi%%:5&s%Qsib
.. J. McGowan -
- : a_ -=7q:qg D. L.
gggfis**miBBig$ l W. A. s - y J. A. P kins ;
, f T. E. Peters j l
T. G. Potts, Jr p l E i S. N. Rapone
~
j ; G. J. Reed D. P. Roller
" =
R. A. Roller I G. F. Schweiger R. J. Scott, Jr. C. R. Sheak G. K. Shipe ..
! D. E. Smith g i E R. H. Trautz ~
ia E. P. Troy, Jr. W. L. Warpole 1 2
L . i EP-276 Rev. 4 Paga 4 of 4 VAW/ MPG /mla
, 2.3.2 , (L7LE PROTECTION ASSISTANT:
i Mount 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOWUP None Required a . 4.0 APPENDICES None i ? i 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l I i l 5.1 Purcose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in Fire and , Damage Team Members. , ! 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure can be used when the Fire and Damage Team is activated or when additional personnel are needed.
. 5.3 Soecial Eculement l None.
} ,
t . s i l 5.4 References ,
., g l ,
g .. l None. v
?i ,,
l . ..% i l i r h l e s F ~ * ~ ~~ _ . . . * * - - = ~ = - _ _ _ _ ' _ _ , _ _ _ . . _ 0._-__. _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _
3843116930 CP-277 Rev. 5 Page 1 of 4 VAW/' P /j ek PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY { LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE , i EP-277 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM PHONE LIST l i l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader calls in Group l Leaders. ! 1.2 Plant Survey Grouc Leader calls the Health ! Physics (HP) Unit Technical Assistant and the HP l Senior Technicians. " 1.3 Health Physics (HP) Senior Technicians calls the i i HP technicians assigned to their shift. NOTE: THE AREA CODE IS 215 UNLESS 03ERWISE SPECIFIED. l l 2.0 ACTIONS-DMEDI ATE , l 2.1 ersonnel Safety Team Leader: l gme Home Work . R. W. Dubiel l R. Titolo l (1st alternate) T. J. Mscis: (2nd alternate) I 2.1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leaders,d)h , c 1 eop e;
~
i 1 'a l fromthefollowinglistunti,Qpprohrateog leader positions are filled. d \ / I O , l 2.1.N Plant Survey Group Leader Name { . A Pa % (2n. . r t., 3 V "
=_______ - -
- = = _ --
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ . _ - _ _ _ _ . . _ . . ~ . . _ . _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . _ , - . _ _ _ - _ . _ - . -- EP-277 Rev. 5 (' Page 2 of 4 VAW/ MPG /jek i 2.1.3 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory l Protection Group Leader p l
\
[ Name Home Work } f R. Bar ay [ 2.1.4 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader ) 1 [ Name Home Work j , j l C. Smith ' J. Scone (Alternate) ]' [ 2.1.5 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader l ( Name Home Work , ( J. Krais R. Dickenson , j - (Alternate) ' 2.2 Plant Survev Grouc Leader shall call the Health i i Physics Unit Technical Assistant and the Health i l Physics Sr. Technicians: l [ Name Home Work I 1 i S. F. Daker i . i (Unit T.A.) ' l A. Parducci , ; (Sr. Tech) : D. Fay (Sr. Tech) D. Hines ( (Sr. ) l R. Gos . l ( S r . "' R. Sh (Sr. k I h) 3 4 J. C on G . ech) p 2.3 Health Physics Sr. Technicians shall call the individuals on their shift and instruct them to report to the OSC (unless an alternate area is designated by The Personnel Safety Team V ( Leader)as follows: ! $ i 1 ! 3 . > f l l b
- n . . r- -
r r r ---- ~J
} EP-277 Rev. 5 i i
- Page 3 of 4 !
VAW/ MPG /jek l r ] l NOTE l THE FOLLOWING SHIFTS ARE THOSE IN EFFECT ON l 1 ' 10/25/84. AS CHANGES OCCUR, THE SR. TECHNICIANS l SHOULD CALL THOSE PERSONNEL ASSIGNED TO THEIR L ! SHIFT AT THAT TIME. ' i 1 l 2.3.1 A. Parducci ; i Name f ' l l Home Phone Work
!!!!Bli:
l 2.3.2 f D. Fay , I ; l j Name Ecme Phone Work l i ?
, l B. Landis !
E. Golden j J. Chobot i R. Dailey j R. Gidding ; 2.3.3 D. Eines j
, E h hanes <
2.3.4 R. Gosnay I l Name Ecme Work l 2.3.5 R. Shortes W l Naine Hcme Work A. Reyes M. Bilinski j R. Engle l W. Lehmbeck j J. Wiecjorek i
EP-277 Rev. 5 Pago 4 of 4 VAW/ MPG /jek l 2.3.6 J. Creedon l Name Home Work S. Schymanski J. Kanaskie D. Haas M. L. Engle C .TWoodring - l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP i l 3.1 None required l l l 4.0 APPENDICES l None l l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose i The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in Personnel Safety Team Members. ' 1 l 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure can be used when the Personnel Safety Team is activated or when additional people are needed. l 5.3 Special Equipment l None l 5.4 References
3043116940 EP-278, Rev. 3 Page 1 of 5 VAW G/ cgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION . EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-278 SECURITY TEAM PHONE LIST 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1 1.1 Security Team Leader calls in team members. 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE , l 2.1 Security Team Leader shall call people from the 1 l following list until an adequate number are able to erpspond in the appropriate groups.
- 2.2 / Security Team Leader Telechone No.
~~
Peter Supplee
\ Mark Berner (Cap. of '
; the Guards) l (Access Lt.) '
s T, . g .., Security Junior Technical 39 , Assistant . %. bey h ,
..) . i John Dougherty L' l 2.3 Security Team ,ga 2.3.1 Se s Telechb'h'k io.
- l Gil 1- im !
Lep , Carl ' Markley, Earl ' I Plasterer, John Pomponi, Richard
' ~
,g__ _ ad % _
.Q:- e -
.. .s.v.-a...u....->. ..~m. . n . ~
EP-278, Rev. 3
- Page 2 of 5 VAW/ MEG /rg 2.3.2 Security Team Corporals
[ i Gaddy, Kem Long, James Martin, Philip Nunan, Marion Resh, Vicki l Romano, J. Thomas { Weimar, Randolph 2.3.3 Security Team CAS and SAS Aston, Thomas 3renner, Michae Che sney, Gary ~
)
Fleagle, Robert i Gallagher, William - { Kane, Christopher Colon, Angel Scheer, Michael - Steslow, Michael Metz, Linda Dreisbach, Larry Ingram, Samuel - 2.3.4 Wpecby#i m
^
rg.
., Jgp ba , Johann -
Brumm, Marty Carter, Russ Clayton, David Frost, Donald Fick, Arthur Gutshall, David Herbolsheimer, David Karst, Micael Laubert, Steven Lundgren, David Malloy, David McKinney, Albert 3 . .. T -; McGregor, Michael c,3,[j$ McMu11en, Leo F-~ -m#g m_g ', McLaughlin, Cletus [gggggy Nagle, ' .' hert - I hh Plotts, Zdward -
! h gi .f Porte , Glen c d'g" f, Q -
Rutt, Michael
)
. g.f'ls"[j .
S p ason, 5andy ,_i, ;m:-- - , y Sas, Joseph ' W.%- Y 9 **z Sheehan, Fred
- Q9.] 7 4xg2pg - - - - - - - - _ - - _ _ - - - -- l 1
l r EP-278, Rev. 3
- h. / Page 3 of 5
, .. / VAW/ MPG /{gs I .
[ Showers, Paul l Smoyer, Skip
! Taylor, Fred l Watters, James Weiser, Marla Wilkinson, William Williams, Arthur Yeager, Keith White, Howard 2.3.5 Securitv Team Watchmen I Hannum, Debora Gardener, Kevin l'rore, Linda Vinson, Lisa Marable, Jeraldine Hoffman, Todd 4 %
McMahon, Robert Moser, Bobby 4' DiMatteo, P F ' Smith, G1 A'Geh$1 A l Yan Skea Ga O'M y, Fred To. rski, Thomas Va ghn , Don Rosenberg, Karen Iorio, Randall Cameau, Barb Fazio, Michael ggg 3 p-fM. . Wise, John Rupert, Joseph jf Henderson, Robin '
'l-! " -
# M .
Geary, Bruce l I llj - ( - Allen, Warren l l l " ' - Reitenauger, Jeff Gordon, Dan , , j gg - Bentley, Vicki W L Brutts, Robert Peraldo, Eden
.Ed Harman, William Boughter, Steven Smith, Gail - - - -
i Endy, Michael Wadsworth, Don Kehler, Irene Hatfield, Terry Bu ( Af6iman, Ken
. w vu_~_.n .. s.e.. . u ~ :a& n-
EP-278, Rev. 3 Page 4 of 5 l , VAW/MPQ/rgs
/ ,
/' / REber, James Grinnage, Karen
' l Whitenigut, Gail i Evans, Robert i Lowell, Evelyn ! l Schuett, Jonathan Melafferty, Kevin Kolowitz, James ! l Biehl, Brooke Bowman, William Hughes, Larry i Hillebrand, Gus Fisher, Barb ' s Johnson, Charles I 5 hires, Robe-- i Tengowski, Thomas l Cotton, Terri Barrow, Willi ! Sykes, Nan -
' l Zimmerma ,,7 Erlsten , l
! Long, Fran f. ! ! Corum, 011 l Turocy, Dav !
! Rahn, Denise ,
} Ozorowski, Greg i
! Dobbs, !
Schmouder, Barb ' l Conley, Dan i Evans, E. . i 1 Lear, Tisa ' Lamb, David ' i Lloyd, Gary Galarza, Paul i Hoffman, Ken l t Moore, Adam l l Billy, Mark i Pol, Gino ' Lerch, Alfred St. John, Wilma ' Parmelee, Roger ! ! Roberts, Wanda l
. Carr, Doug O'Donnell, John !
l '
! Miller, Terri Et.rrison, Jane j
Bumbaugh, Bruce i Wheeler, Jonathan i Evans, Dan Fackler, David l ! Murray, Robert . Marino, James 3 (__ Chmelewski, Sylvia
.: s w as:.~i. -u; v : : -m >~*m ^
~
" - - x - ~ ~
~
..._....~.......---.~~---",---- :- -~-":- - - = - ' ' - ' - -
EP-278, Rev. 3 Page 5 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs ' i 2.3.6 yatchmen Under Instruction i
/ !
( Depietro, Sandra Testa, Samuel f , Stranick, Jolene l l Waltman, Craig ' Raymond, Linda !' Riley, C. Gertzen,-Brenda Cressman, George ,
# Wynder, Theresa i
Sigorich, Mary Smith, Gloria l Surdette, William DeSpirito, Anthcny Blount, Lynanne Compardo, John Kirk, Dennis O'Neill, William 3.0 ACTION LOW-UP None Required 4.0 APPENDICES 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purcose L The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in the Security Team. 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure can be used when the Security Team ' is to be activated or when people need to be called in. 5.3 Seecial Eculement None 5.4 References ! None y , =. - = --- ,-~ -
-. - - - .=- - - -" -- = - ------ - -
j . EP-279, Rev. 3 3843116950 Pag @ 1 of 3 VAW/ G/rgs 4 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
/l[/Y EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE i
h EP-279 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) GROUP PHONE LIST l 3 1.0 PARTICIPANTS ) 1.1 Communicator calls in group members as needed. 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE I 2.1 Communicator shall call people fecm the following list until appropriate positions are filled. 4 l 2.2 ,
, Site Emercency Coordinator
( l
, W. T. Ullrich ,
! Supt. Nuc. Gen. l Alt. R. H. Logue Supt. Nuc. Serv.
~
Alt. I R. S. Fleishmann II Supt. PBAPS -- p . 2.3 HealtMhMsdrit!'[ dinator W. J. ., Dir. R Sy Alt. J ongheiser Phys. d. Prot. 2.4 Planning and Scheduling Coordina. tori J. W. Spencer Startup Director J. P. Law . TRB Chairman 2t ! j e M Tsv @- I j. o wh i g [*M@. ._ d n*'- ' - * .
. _ _ .-_ . . .. .- - - - - - ~ ~ - - - - - ~ . - ~
i i i i l j EP-279, Rev. 3 i Page 2 of 3 f VAW/ MPG /rgs ! I i i ; s' j 2.5 Procedures Sucoort Coordinator - c W. C. Birely I Sr. Eng. Licensing ! C. R. Endriss l Regulatory Engineer j I l [ g I 2.7 EOF Mechanical Encineering Li ' i J. T. Robb i I
, C. Wei l 2.8 EOF El i -
n ri - iaison l g, - W. C. R i.er . Field Engineer
. Alt. A. W. Jones Field Engineer f'
2.9 EOF Liaison - Corcorate Communications 3 , M. D. McCormick l Asst. Mgr. Energy Education and Informati (; Alt. R. H. Geiger ! Sr. Energy Info. Rep . l F. L. Pinnell ! Energy Info. Rep. l 2.10 Emergency Preo. Coor. R. A. Kankus ! Dir. Em. Prep l. l Alt. K. W. Schlecker i Physicist Emer. Prep Mike Mezias . Analyst - Emer. Prep. ! t i
L
' EP-279, Rev. 3 Page 3 of 3
, VAW/ MPG /rgs 2.11
/
Communicators and Status Board Keepers (5 Minimum) ,' f K. Cenci l W. Lewis l R. Degregorio , ! J. Dixon J. Fitzgerald , ; R. Hawthorne
- J. Hopkins !
M. Horton j R. Kovach i b ' Todd Moore ! l J. Stott I Scott Wagner f S. Weik 2,12 Data Display C eraters f M. McCormick k N. j J J 3.0 ACTIONS - FOL* 0W-UP .' } - 3.1 None Required. t [ 4.0 APPENDICES i None I j 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedur guidelines and inferr *i 1 lo - h . . V 1 5.2 Criteria fo ' I) q l l This procedu can be used when the EOF is j activiated or additional personnel are needed, f I 5.3 Special Eculement None 5.4 References None t.
- , 7 _. u _
3843116960 < I , l , t EP-280 Rev. 4 , 1 - Page 1 pf 5 , VA" PC/rgs ? PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY /k/ LIMERICK GENERATING STATION p EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE F I ! l i-EP-280 TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER PHONE LIST 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 The Emergency Director shall be responsible to have group members notified. C f 1.2 The Communicator shall call in TSC personnel. ' i 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDI A':T i 2.1 The Communicator shall call people from the following i list until appropriate positions are filled. 1 2.1.1 ' [ EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (CNE) ) Y / l / Home Work I Station Superintendent G. M. Leitch i l [ Assistant Station
! ) Superintendent *
,1 J. F. Franz l
[ Technical Engineer j l P.J. Duca 1, 2.1.2 TECHNICAL SUPPORT GROUP PERSONNE !
\
s - L Performance Engineer ,, L. A. Hopkins 1
- V. Cwietniewicz .;.
I&C r G. Ra , y ' g(, e, -
, C' .
t
,/
l i
,1.. .. ~.
L]a. G]M:iWME-.s : AEE- A - - - >
9 l EP-280 Rev. 4 Page 2 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs
^
/ Rome Work A fReactorEngineer K. Hunt
- K. Kemper
, - E. Callan
- J. Armstrong
- M. Gallagher l - R. Alejnikov
- J. Munt:
- R. Cyhan
- B. Mandik 2.1.3 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM LEADER (
l Home Work Sr. Health i Physicist R. W. Dubiel
, Applied Health Physicist R. J. "itolo 2.1.4 FIRE and DAMAGE TEAM LEADER (ONE ti.f e
, 1. l Engineer - Maintenanc ,. J. Cotton i l C. Wyler i 2.1.5 SECURITY T@ Home Work {
, is rative l
Assistant P. Supplee
,: . a .'
~
.M . J . ! . . .J'. * - ' ';:22:2&M . - '
, ':~
l EP-280 Rev. 4 Page 3 of 5 VAW/ MPG / cgs Home Work Site Captain - Operations Security (Protected Area) Mark Berner Access LT. (Later) 2.1. 6 DOSE ACCESSMENT TEAM LEADER (ONE) ome Work
; Health Physicist G. Murphy D. Rc= bold 2.1.{ CHDtISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM LEADER (ONE)
Home Work Sr. Chemist i i J. S. Wiley Supervisory Chemist l J. Sabados i 2.1.8 COMMUNICATORS AND STATUS BOARD KEEPERS (FIVE MINIMUM) Lead Communicators Home .ork
- D. Feaster E. Boscola B. Brown M. Davis ,
J. Dol M. Eyr ^ _2 . . .. G. Hute n Q g i i J. Kanute D. Kelsey m I tl ___' - ---L - '-
I l EP-280 Rev. 4 Page 4 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs
/ ', i I
,. ,, , Rome Work i r L. Marabella l
,I K. Mastrangelo l
T. Moore (Tim) l D. Shane r ) l i l T. Sh ea t J. T/ler K. Walsh R. Weidner S. Weik l 2.1.9 DATA DISPLAY OPERATOR ( ~a'O ) I Home Work E. Kabak (ERFDS) M. McCormick D. Boston 3.0 ACTIONS - A LLOW UP l None 4.0 APPENDICES g +? %' None g h O, . g% .*[ p'rg w e., .
,' , ec
% V w..
. ')
1 f _, * . , - . __ [, (, $ - *gl 4 {
, . ,ev.
F e i
' l EP-260 R3v. 4 Page 5 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs k
5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in Technical Support Center (TSC) personnel. 5.2 Criteria for Use 5.2.1 The Technical Support Center is to be activated. 5.2.2 Additional Technical Support Group people must be
, called in.
.[ 5.3 Special Eauipment None 5.4 References None i j I o h l t I - g . l 9
~ ~
s
'e f a. /O8 9 % _,I'M' a ,I M~
,1 34
Q . U 3843116970 sp_282 Rev. 3 Page 1 of 4 VAW MPG /rgs
, PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY /d[/Y LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-282 GOVERN!!ENT AND DtERGENCY ttANAGEMENT AGENCIES PHONE LIST 1.0 PARTICIPANTS j 1.1 Emergency Director or the Site Emercency Coordinator shall be responsible for the decision to implement this procedure.
1.2 Communicator notifies the required agencies. 2.0 ACTIONS - IrtMEDIATE l 2.1 Communicator shall be directed to contact ]f!. appropriate agencies by the Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinator using the following list. n -p. 3 Address Phone 2.1.1 U. S. Nuclear 631 Park Avenue Regulatory King of Prussia Commission PA 19406 Region I l Office of Inspection I and Enforcement l 2.1.2 Office of Washington, Nuclear Reactor DC 20555 Regulation Harold Denton -M l (Director) g l 2.1.3 , Dept. of Ene rg l , Radi
, \
\ '
l 2.1.4 vit r.'g' e ote tion CurtisBuildink 6th & WAldud\Std
! Agency
' Philadelppl47 PA 19106
_(,,,,',,'__ g _ _.-a- 3--- '4-+-'I*-8* - ~ " - "- * *-#
! EP-282 Rev. 3 Page 2 of 4 VAW/ MPG / cgs Address Phone l 2.1.5 Department of Governors Island l ! Tran spor tation New York, NY ? 3rd U.S. Coast 10004 i Guard District 1 (
! 2.1.6 Department of Dept of
[ Ag r icult u r e Agriculture g Chief, ::visi r 3ureau of Fcod i cf Mils & Chemistry Sanitation 2301 N. Cameron St u,--i PA W. Fouse [; . _.-_m ? { 2.1.7 Department of [ . Energy Rep. E i ! 2.1.8 Pennsylvania Room B-151 r C=ergency Transportation [ Management And Sa fe ty Bldg .
.O. Box 332 H
Duty Officer " r a [ , L $ l 2.1.9 Department of Harrisburg, PA9 Env i ronmen ta l / r _ Resources j g l 2.1.9.1 Office of I % _ ,.. Public et ob Information ' g. t Ellen Sp 1 s rg, PA [ Direc crisburg, PA [ l 2.1.9.2 e 1875 New Hope Norristown, PA h i ? F s u-t r-M M y9 -, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . L' _' - - __- -
EP-282 Rev. 3 Page 3 of 4 [ VAW/ MPG /rgs s
,/ Address Phone l l 2.1.10 aureeu of P.O. Box 2063
[ r Radiation Harrisburg, PA Protection, 17120 Dept. of En v . Resources i I
! 2.1.10.1 Personnel &
[ Home Phones i ,. j T. Gerusky [ . Corn:.fe { M. Eeilley t l l 2.1.11 Pennsylvania- 21. S. Becwn St. ' State Health Lewistown, ?A -
- Center 17044 F e D l 2.1.12 State Police Rt. 422 & -
Barracks Lewis Rd. 5 (Limerick) Limerick, PA l 2.1.13 Delaware Civil State Police & P Defense Agency Civil Defense Emergency = l Management -" i Section = b J ! 2.1.14 New Jersey P.O. Box 706, . Civil Defense West Trenton f Agency N.J. .__--zu jI l 2.1.15 Maryland Civil f" h [ Defense Agen e o . p _-- g e, MD l 2.1.16 Mont 100 Wilson Blvd. , Count Eagleville, PA TEs- " l' of Em Servi s en 19403 gj
! 2.1.17 Chester 14 E. Biddle St.
t County Dept. Nest Chester, PA of Emergency = 19380 l Services
- u -
o EP-282 Rev. 3
! Page 4 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs j l ' t f Address Phone l 2.1.18 Berks County Agricultural Dept. of Center, Emergency RD-1 Services Leesport, PA 19533 3.0 ACTIONS - FOLLCW-UP '
l None 4.0 APPENDICES i i None a o 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION ! 5.1 Purecce. The purpose of this procedure is 4 ly pertinent information to govern mergency , management agencies. g ' 5.2 Criteria for Use 9 ., This procedure may be us Y government or . j emergency management a cy e contacted. 1 5.3 Scocial Ecutement 4 i 5.4 R forences N_ 3 I e_ .. . . - - - _. .
, . 3843116980 J - EP-284 Rev. 3 I Page 1 of 3 h l vat' F G/mc PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-284 COMPANY CONSULTANTS AND CONTRACTORS PHONE LIST l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS l.1 Communicator shall be responsible to contact contractor or consultants as their services are needed, e l 2.0 ACTIONS-TMtEDI ATE i l 2.1 Cemmunicator shall contact the needed contractor or consultant by using the tollowing list. Address Phone l 2.2 Chemistry contractor (Later)
-m l 2.3 p
J Health Physics Contractor (s) (Later)
/ l: f:75 l 2.4 / General Electric Nuclear Energy .r. . . ~'?J.ny' p[ . , ' ' "yy'T < . _ .p' e, ;
Company, Business j 9g. -
#,. p g "' / ,
Emergency Operations Q'". i; W./'.t.. . ; :. .. % , , j Support Program Services Division 175 Curtner Ave. $gA
'K " - t. .
g . G.jj fd l San Jose, CA $,./ %f . . %. -
@j . . -
95125 , N tj .M g; fj ( Working Hours: Manager o .p h k[h - L. . _. n < . . . Produ v ce M h ' ~ . ' b.:' .. 4'-. ..a . ;l-
' ? ?' ; , .~ .~ . l t G '
Ott Ans Y- ?t/ i s, , g U ' a ~(.) # ' ' :, ,-{ *" c[iI. Serv e o *f ' 4; immed t l Yl y - / ' ':i bac . pSjp;. cyy J
.y. : 4, :a p l 2.5 Underwater . .
#," -M ".*'4 Technics, Inc. i 1 $! .E h a p ik & ~
- O*
l- l. l 1 f( Mr. D. R. Stith -
~. t
' 9 ". 2 'f
.: i'ft s ;,
Mr. R. T. Danno s - i,
.c.
. .... ' 2 . ". , .
' m jp J
j.;f$ l
... ., .( k-lj 1 1..___..._ _.._...._h____.__.___-.. -
* + C' "
EP-284 Rev. 3 Page 2 of 3
) VAlf/ MPG /mc
/ l
/ Address Phone f
l 2.6 fRadiation 3508 Market St. [ Management Philadelphia, PA
, Corporation 19104 Suite 400 Science Ctr.
Bldg. 2
- (Dr. Roger E. Linneman) l 2.7 Yoh, Inc. On Site (Security Services) also
- 828 Cak St.
Royersford, PA 19463 also: 1600 starket St. Philadelphia, PA 19103 l 2.8 Institute of 1100 Circle Nuclear Power 75 Parkway Operations suite 1500 (INPO) Atlanta, GA 30339 l 2.9 Babcock and Wilcox Lynchbu.:9 Research Ctc. l 2.10 Bechtel Power
- Cor por a t ion Secuef. .I
(?, f
, h 8
1 t of8* '.*f_'
~
EP-284 Rev. 3 Page 3 of 3 l VAW/ MPG /mc Address Phone 2.11*/Pooled Inventerv Management (PIMS)
/l l .
/
Program Manager Bruce McClintic i, Alternate j Jim G. Hogue I
- off hours i
I Alternate I Milind Korde V l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOWUP l 3.1 None required. l 4.0 APPENDICES l None. D . l 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Pureose , The purpose of this procedure is to provide information to contact PECO consultants and I contractors. l 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure may be used when it is necessary to contact a company consultant or contractor. Requests for consultants or contractors shall be approved by the Site Emergency Coordinator or Emergency Director. l 5.3 Seecial Equiement l None. l 5.4 References l None. t- - . - - _.
. . . - . _ _ . . _ . . . ., , , , , , - ;.- . me---w :m ::7- qpr.- y,-
T 3843116990 EP-287, R::v. 2 Pag 2 1 of 4 i . VAW MPG /rgs PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY #[I LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-287 NEARBY PUBLIC AND INDUSTRIAL USERS OF DOWNSTREAM WATER CAUTION Ensure that the Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources has concurred with notification of downstream water users by PECO. 1.0 PARTICIPANTS 1.1 Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources shall be responsible for the notification of the j downstream domestic water users, unless specifically delegated to PECO. 1.2 Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinator shall direct the implementation of this procedure. 1.3 Communicator, when directed by the Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinator, shall be responsible to contact the downstream users. 2.0 ACTIONS IMMEDIATE ~ 2.1 Communicator shall contact the downstream naer using the list in section 2.2 and inform e f%h'e-infokmation listed below: ~ t '* ' f T. **d :/ *j 2.1.1 There has been a radio ,q hr ease into the river. .: a l 2.1.2 Estimated Transit Time Abj 4 companies only). their in,ta fdy water i '. ,,A ' 3 2.1.3 Suggest that they close their inta e un i ef notice. ESTIMATED TRANQT ANIES 3 CAN sE - vE I *
.\
j z'- n
- e w y.w +=& W m m u e= :~
$ EP-287, Rov. 2 h Page 2 of 4 j , VAW/ MPG /rgs ' / l ./ C .. 2.2 Downstream Users ,N 2.2.1- iz n it Home Water Co. \
\ , 2.2.2 Philadelphia Electric Co. I Station l ,
a
- 2. 2. 3 '- Ph rban Water Co.
Office) fter S pm (Plant) , j 2.2.4
- ixville Water Authority 2.2.5 Lukens Steel Co.
2.2.6 Phoenix Steel Corp. Phoenixville Plant - 2.2.7 Synthane - Taylor Corp. 2.2.8 Nicolet Industries, Inc. 2.2.9 Keystone W t r Co.,,(Norristown District) 2.2.10 Cit f Phi
' iladelchia, Belmo '
2.2.11 , 1 \ 2.2.12 Container Corp. ' I hia i 2.2.13 Connelly Cont c.
; Philade t i
; 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOWUP 3.1 Communicator shall: . -
'% l
[i
- ng:;.4%fr ,is : :w.'3Snu
_ _ -- .- =. .. . . - - - - - . . . - . - - . . - - . . , EP-287, rov. 2 Pcg3 3 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs 3.1.1 When the Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinator and Pennsylvania Department of f Environmental Resources have determined that the l9' concentration of radioactive material in the river is at or below acceptable levels, contact the downstream (. e users and inform them of this information. 4.0 APPENDICES None 4 I ' f 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 Purcose The purpose of this procedure is to provide information to contact downstream users of the
, Schuylkill River.
t
} 5.2 Criteria For Use I
5.2.1 Verify that EP-312, Radioactive Liquid Release has been completed. 5.2.2 Verify that Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources has concurred with the notification of the downstream domestic water users by PECO. . 5.2.3 This procedure can be used when there has been a release to the Schuylkill River.
- i 4
e, Q *>% *y fp . .
$ .k 5,^' * %% ' w O . } 6*
- A 9% * * ' * * ' * '
4 1
g'
- l w
~
l EP-287, R;v. 2 ' l , Pcg3 4 Cf 4 '
. VAW/ MPG /rgs 5
5.3 Special Equipment None s l
5.4 REFERENCES
1 5.4.1 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release. t a 1 - s s J', 5 e R r Rxes,x.w;,Aw;c,4aw-mew & +v - ~ m '- . = - -
1 R 3843117000 EP-291 R v. 4 [ - l Page 1 of 7 p s VAW G/mc h PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION M(([ EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE j., EP-291 STAFFING AUGMENTATION t; h l 1.0 PARTICIPANTS [:5 1.1 n shift Clerk orprocedure. the following other assigned person shall perform M , L u ! l 2.0 ACTIONS - IMMEDIATE * / (* l 2.1 Shift Clerk or other assigned person shall 2.1.1 Ask the Emergency Director if the TSC and EOF or the TSC only is to be activated so this information can L be given to the Dose Assessment Team Leader and Communicators and what groups are to be activated for transmission to Team Leaders. Event Classification , / h l; Facilities to be activated .' B; , TSC
,f, .,
[ TSC & EOF 3 - l Groups to.be r: tiv L , Personnel m 9 Y ',\ b P y
'H N
hd/Searchand Vehicle and Evacuee Control p D. l' Dosimetry, Bloassay & ' l Respiratory Protection . oOD Dose Assessment Team 'S Ob
\Q' W QA e9{. s i
Dose Assessment group L Field Survey h
- e. . . ,.3. a ,:a u .+ , . <
l EP-291 R v. 4 i . l Page 2 of 7 VAW/ MPG /mc Security Access Control Personnel Accountability Fire and Damage I Fire Fighting . f Damage Repair l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis 2.1.2 Contact 2.2. in sequence the personnel listed in Section l 2.1.3 Inform each person contacted of the event classification, that they are to respond to their assigned location and what groups under them are to l be activated. If the person is unable to respond, go to the next person on the list. I 2.1.4 Attempt to contact personnel who have pagers, by that method if they are known to be "on the or the phone is busy or there is no answer. page",
! 2.1.5 Inform Emergenc 1
discrepancies. y Director of results including
) l 2.2 Personnel to be contacted are: .
l 2.2.1 SHIFT I&C TECHNICIAN ( Communicator shall request that the TSC be activated. (Shift I&C Technician ext. '
) I&C Technician Time By ,d
- h
. I'.[:b s
?
1. EP-291, Rev. 4
! l, Page 3 of 7 VAW/ MPG /mc 4
2.2.2 EMERGENCY DIRECTOR l l The Station Superintendent or Assistant Station I Superintendent is contacted by communicator and is one contact. reached. Do not re-contact if he has been successfully l l P
'pime Called Disposition-Busy, No Ans.-Contacted Called By Station Supt.
j G. M. Leitch i Asst. Station Supt. J. F. Franz 't 'i % l 2.2.3 OPERATIONS ENGINEER I f Disposition-Busy,
! s' ' , Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called By f ; Operations Eng. ;
- 7. Doering
, Armstrong l 2.2.4 PERSONN AFETY TEAM LEADER (ONE) i j Communicator shall request that the Team Leader call in
- Group Leaders of groups to be activated and that the Group Leaders call in their groups.
Disposition-Busy, ( Time, Called
- , No Ans.-Contacted Called By
' lSonior Health !
, Physicist R. W. Dubiel i i p,' , de , T.-
! Applied EP .
A f'C R. Titolo , f 4N
/ e 4
,___,,,__vb'- -*--- !"-"-'#' " ' ' ' ' ~ ~
i l ER-291, Rev. 4 l Page 4 of 7 VAW/ MPG /mc n 2.2.5 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM LEADER (ONE) Communicator shall request the Team Leader to call in l team and the Field Survey Group Leader, and to report to l the TSC or EOF as det' ermined by Step 2.1. Disposition-Busy,
-Titne Called No Ans.-Contacted Called By T hnical Support H alth Physicist G Murphy 6
4 l hysicist Rad. Prot.
. Rombold I
i 2.2.6 SE:FT MAINTENANCE SUB-FOREMAN Extension r page. Communicator shall request the Maintenanca S 6-foreman to call three maintenance mechanics, or fitters. preferably, one electrician and two machinists Sub-foreman Time By l 2.2.7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT PERSONNEL (ONE) Communicator Group Members. shall request call in of Technical Support , Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called By
/}
Performance Engineer L. A. Hopkins 4 V. Cwietniewic:: q$ k 4, > I&C Engineer A G. R. Rainey Reactor Engineer '
; K. W. Hunt i
/ 7 ,
k 1 w w ~ .-___ - . - - - - - - - - - -
l - ( $ EP-291, . Rev. 4 I Page i of 7 VAW/ MPG /mc I 2.2.8 COMMUNICATORS (ONE per facility) f Communicator shall request call in of members for the TSC > or EOF as determined by Step 9.1.1.1. Disposition-Bus \ Time Called No Ans.-Contact Called BY {' ' TOchnical Support - - 6 Conter (TSC) i Communicator D. Feaster Alternate i w. Winters i EOF Cccmunicator
, K. CenCi ternate 1
. Lewis I ,
l 2.2.9 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING and ANALYSIS TEAM LEADER (ONE) ! Communicator shall request call in of Chemistry Sampling i and Analysis Team Members by Group Leader. . Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted called Bv - S9 e x - 0,-
.. 4
@s !
4g , ). . , . .) _Z_ . =. D- I '- ~ ~
. 4e 6 .
} --
I ~
. -l EP-291f, Rev. 4 l, Page 6 of 7 VAW/ MPG /mc 2.2.10 FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM LEADER (ONE)
I Communicator shall request the Team Leader to call the
' .Group appropriate Group Leaders and have Group. Leader call in Members.
~- Disposition-Busy, Time Called N_o Ans.-Contacted Called By Engineer Maintenance J. B. Cotton '" '-
$ l C. Wyler ' ~
k l 2.2<11 IEC"R:7Y TEAM *,7.ADER (ONE) ~ . j 'Cc.mmunic'ator shs !.P request the Team Leadet o call j appropriate persennel. r,ronp 7,eaders an'.' have Group Leaders call in Disposition-Busy,
, me CalGd No Ans.-Contacted C111ed By i
i Security sdministrative ' Assistant P. Supplee , ] 1 i Security Ccordinator O. Burwell *
, Site Captain .
II (Protected Aitea') .- 4 R. Therriautt '" .
- i s
A 4,T. {
,:0 '
O l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOW-UP 4.. l 3.1 None Required. g ~ 'i l 4.0 APPENDICES l None. 1 r L.., .
~~-
l. _. EP-291, Rav. 4
; 1 Page 7 of 7 I
vAwfxPof c 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION
-l 5.1 Purpose ) l f The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information necessary to perform staff augmentation.
l- 5.2 Criteria for Use This procedure shall be implemented at an Alert, a Site EmergencyDirection. Emergency or a General Emergency or at the discretion of the l 5.3 Special Equipment . l None. I 5.4 References , l None. ( ) r - O P + ~ 4
r I .- 3843117010 EP-292 Rev. 5 Page 1 of 2 ( ' W mia k PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY / l LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-292 CBDtISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM PHONE LIST l 1.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 1.1 Chemistry Samallne and Analysis Team Leader calls in a group leader. i ) I 1.2 Che=istrv Samolinc and Analysis Grous Leader calls in group members. l 2.0 ACTIONS-n' MEDIATE i 2.1 Chemistrv Samoling and Analysis Team Leader shall call in team leader and group leader as appropriate. j l 2.1.1 Chemistry Sampl'ing and Analysis Team Leader i T J V nc . l 2.1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Lead 4- ! D. Hahnemann , J. Effinger l 2.2 Chemistrh Samoling and Ana s _i _ _
'e _4 shall l call in people from the foll ild sufficient personnel are mum)
] l 2.2.1 CHEMISTR SAMPLING AN UP E j l l Work I
, I R. Ru
! R.
, N.
S. P ! l M. Pr owski . l' l f N. Samec ! m 1 !
. . _ L._ . . _ _ _ _ . . -
_f L
- a. . wm . -
., oo mms m c - -
i' l EP-292 Rev. 5 l Page 2 of 2 VAW/mla l t l Home Work l L. Turner J. Dougherty W. Harrison K. Lally M. E. Paulk R. Ulrich E. W. Frick M. Wyzalek I M. Reller W. Decker T. Williams D. S.'Musselman j K. Gordon l 3.0 ACTIONS-FOLLOWUP l None l 4.0 APPENDICES l None l 5.0 CUPPORTING INFORMATION l 5.1 Purcose '.
'{
The purpo cedure is to provide guidelines , and in notification of the Chemistry Samplin . ysis Team. l 5.2 Criteria Use This procedure can be used when the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team is activated or when additional personnel are needed. I l 5.3 Scecial Eculement l None l 5.4 References l None S: ...y.- l,l ,;95.i - ' .L:5_^7( __ _, yu_.s_. ;3gi ,
3843117020 I EP-294 Rev. 4 Page 1 of 3 l VAW i G/mc PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION DIERGENCY PLAN IMPLDIENTING PROCEDURE EP-294 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM PHONE LIST l l 1.0 2
- PARTICIPANTS I l
l 1.1 Dose Assessment Team Leader shall be responsible to all in team members; and Field S}}